Green Guide 6th Edition (SM)

Guide to Safety
at Sports Grounds
Prepared exclusively for SAERA MUSHTAQ saera.mushtaq@showsec.co.uk Transaction: SGSA-00004017

Guide to Safety
at Sports Grounds
Sixth edition

Published by the
Sports Grounds Safety Authority
© Sports Grounds Safety Authority 2018
All rights reserved
Sixth edition: first published 2018
ISBN: 978-1-9164583-0-7

Fleetbank House
2-6 Salisbury Square
London EC4Y 8JX
020 7930 6693
www.sgsa.org.uk
info@sgsa.org.uk
Editorial working group:

Strategic lead: Ken Scott FRICS
Project lead: Richard Riding MRICS, MIFireE, MBEng, MBA
Geoff Galilee CMIOSH
Mark Smith
Peter Weymes
Editor: Simon Inglis
Design: Thomas & Trotman Design

Illustrator: Kevin White
Printers: Four Corners
Prepared exclusively for SAERA MUSHTAQ saera.mushtaq@showsec.co.uk Transaction: SGSA-00004017 2

Contents
CONTENTS
Contents
Section headings 5
List of figures 15
Foreword 17
Preface 19
1.0 How to use this Guide 21
2.0 Calculating the safe capacity of a sports ground 27
3.0 Management – responsibility and planning for safety 37
4.0 Management – stewarding 63
5.0 Management – structures, installations and components 75
6.0 Circulation – general 85
7.0 Circulation – ingress 95
8.0 Circulation – vertical 103
9.0 Circulation – concourses and vomitories 113
10.0 Circulation – egress 127
11.0 Barriers and separating elements 143
12.0 Spectator accommodation – seating 161
13.0 Spectator accommodation – standing 185
14.0 Spectator accommodation – demountable structures 203
15.0 Fire safety 209
16.0 Communications and control 231
17.0 Mechanical and electrical installations 257
18.0 Medical and first aid provision 265
19.0 Media provision 281
Summary of new guidance 285
Glossary 299
Bibliography and further references 303
Index 307
Annex A Sample indicative questions relating to (P) factors online
Annex B Sample indicative questions relating to (S) factors online
Annex C Guidance on colour vision deficiency (colour blindness) online
Annex D Checklist for demountable structures online
Annex E Checklist for medical room online

Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds
CONTENTS
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Section headings
Section headings
HEADINGS
SECTION
1.0 How to use this Guide 21
1.1 Status 21
1.2 Scope 21
1.3 Objectives – spectator numbers, safety, security and service 22
1.4 Management responsibility 23
1.5 Reasonable aims and flexibility 24
1.6 Achieving a balance 24
1.7 New construction 25
1.8 Deviating from the Guide 25
1.9 Revisions to the Guide 26
2.0 Calculating the safe capacity of a sports ground 27

2.1 The importance of calculating a safe capacity 27
2.2 Applying the capacity calculation 28
2.3 Factors to be considered 28
2.4 The (P) and (S) factors 29
2.5 Carrying out (P) and (S) factor assessments 30
2.6 Seated accommodation – calculating the holding capacity 30
2.7 Standing accommodation – the calculation process 30
2.8 Standing accommodation – calculating the available viewing area 31
2.9 Standing accommodation – calculating the appropriate density 32
2.10 Standing accommodation – calculating the holding capacity 33
2.11 Calculating the final capacity 33
2.12 Grounds where final capacities require further calculation 36
2.13 Factoring numbers of all people into emergency exit widths 36
3.0 Management – responsibility and planning for safety 37

3.1 Management responsibility for safety 37
3.2 Demonstrating that responsibility 37
3.3 Meeting that responsibility 38
3.4 Operations Manual 40
3.5 Spectator Safety or Event Safety Policy 41
3.6 Safety management structure, or chain of command 42
3.7 Appointing a Safety Officer 42
3.8 Requirements of a Safety Officer 43
3.9 Deputising 44
3.10 Staffing and resilience 45
3.11 Staffing – risk assessment 45
3.12 Stewarding Plan 45
3.13 Responsibility for training and competence 46
Contents
3.14 Keeping records for each event 46

3.15 Contingency planning 46
3.16 Suggested headings for contingency plans 47
3.17 Safety and security 49
HEADINGS
SECTION
3.18 Counter Terrorism Plan 49
3.19 Security overlay 50
3.20 Emergency or major incident planning 50
3.21 Training and exercises 50
3.22 Safety audit 51
3.23 Policing 52
3.24 Statement of Intent 52
3.25 Accommodating visiting spectators 52
3.26 Segregation 53
3.27 Crowd Disorder and Anti-Social Behaviour Plan 53
3.28 Safeguarding Plan 54
3.29 Safety in the wider management context 55
3.30 Ticketing Strategy 55
3.31 Sale of refreshments 57
3.32 Alcohol 57
3.33 Commercial or non-sporting activities 58
3.34 Pre-event activities 58
3.35 Test events 58
3.36 Event Management Plan 59
3.37 Other management responsibilities 60
3.38 Health and safety at work legislation 60
3.39 Fire safety legislation 61
3.40 Equality legislation 61
3.41 Safety management and the (S) factor 61
4.0 Management – stewarding 63

4.1 The need for stewards 63
4.2 Agreement on responsibilities 63
4.3 Definition of a steward 64
4.4 Appointment of stewards 64
4.5 Stewards – status, work environment and benefits 64
4.6 Stewards – duties 65
4.7 Stewards – Code of Conduct 66
4.8 Stewards – Safety Handbook 66
4.9 Stewards – checklist 67
4.10 Stewards – training 67
4.11 Stewards – supervisors’ training 69
4.12 Stewarding Plan – roles and numbers 69
Contents
4.13 Stewarding Plan – balancing experience and inexperience 70

4.14 Identification of stewards 70
4.15 Contract or agency stewards 71
4.16 Stewards – briefing 71
HEADINGS
SECTION
4.17 De-briefing 72
4.18 Stewards – records 72
4.19 Stewarding and the (S) factor 73
4.20 Visiting stewards 73
4.21 Security personnel 73
4.22 Control and communication 73
5.0 Management – structures, installations and components 75

5.1 Definitions 75
5.2 Maintenance and the (P) factor 75
5.3 Good housekeeping 76
5.4 Structures 76
5.5 Structural dynamics for permanent structures 77
5.6 Construction work at existing grounds 77
5.7 Anti-vandalism 78
5.8 Inspections and tests – general 78
5.9 Inspections and tests – 48 hours pre event and event day 78
5.10 Inspections – during the event 81
5.11 Inspections – after the event 81
5.12 Inspections – annual 81
5.13 Additional detailed structural appraisals 82
5.14 Keeping records 83
5.15 Plans and specifications 83
6.0 Circulation – general 85

6.1 Planning and management of circulation 85
6.2 Creating a balanced system 85
6.3 Circulation routes – zoning 86
6.4 Circulation routes – design issues 88
6.5 Circulation routes – free movement 89
6.6 Circulation routes – flow rates and crowd densities 89
6.7 Crowd simulation modelling 90
6.8 Circulation routes and accessibility 90
6.9 Planning for emergency vehicles 91
6.10 Zone Ex co-ordination 91
6.11 Zone Ex personnel 92
6.12 Circulation and event related issues 93
6.13 Circulation and overlay 94
Contents
7.0 Circulation – ingress 95

7.1 Planning and management of ingress 95
7.2 The need to count 95
7.3 Monitoring systems and record keeping 96
HEADINGS
SECTION
7.4 Entry capacity – setting a time period 97
7.5 Entry capacity – measuring the rate of entry 97
7.6 Factors affecting the rate of entry 98
7.7 Providing a sufficient number of entry points 98
7.8 Design and management of entry points and ingress routes 98
7.9 Providing clear information 99
7.10 Effects of admission policies 100
7.11 Crowd buildup outside the ground 101
7.12 Searching and security screening 102
8.0 Circulation – vertical 103

8.1 Vertical circulation 103
8.2 Stairways and gangways – definitions 103
8.3 Stairways – design 104
8.4 Stairways – dimensions 105
8.5 Stairways – flights 106
8.6 Radial gangways – design 106
8.7 Radial gangways – management 107
8.8 Barriers and handrails – definitions 107
8.9 Barriers for stairways and ramps 107
8.10 Handrails for stairways and ramps 107
8.11 Controlling the flow at the head of stairways 109
8.12 Discharge from stairways 109
8.13 Passenger lifts 111
8.14 Escalators 111
8.15 Stairways and escalators – run on and run off space 112
8.16 Ramps 112
9.0 Circulation – concourses and vomitories 113

9.1 Concourses and vomitories 113
9.2 Concourses and safety 113
9.3 Concourses – design 114
9.4 Concourses – size, capacity, occupancy and density levels 116
9.5 Concourses – management 117
9.6 Concourses – prevention of overcrowding 121
9.7 Concourses – fire safety 122
9.8 Vomitories 123
9.9 Vomitory widths 125
9.10 Vomitory control measures 125
Contents
10.0 Circulation – egress 127

10.1 Egress and safety 127
10.2 Types of egress 128
HEADINGS
10.3 Exit routes – a definition 129
SECTION
10.4 Exit routes – basic design principles 129
10.5 Exit routes – widths 130
10.6 Exit routes – flow control measures 130
10.7 Exit routes – reservoir areas 130
10.8 Exit routes – additional design and management factors 131
10.9 Flow rates – definition and factors 132
10.10 Flow rates – calculations 133
10.11 Zone 2 travel times – normal 134
10.12 Egress times – emergency 134
10.13 Emergency exit and exceptional egress routes – design 136
10.14 Emergency exit and exceptional egress routes – management 136
10.15 Emergency and exceptional egress – disabled spectators 137
10.16 Use of Zone 1 for emergency and exceptional egress 139
10.17 Provision of gates or openings in a pitch perimeter barrier 139
10.18 Discounting an exit route for calculation purposes 140
10.19 Exit doors and gates 140
10.20 Electronic securing systems 141
11.0 Barriers and separating elements 143

11.1 Definition and categories of barriers and separating elements 143
11.2 Design and loading of barriers and separating elements 148
11.3 Barrier fixings 148
11.4 Support from adjacent construction 148
11.5 Barrier heights 149
11.6 Barriers and sightline considerations 149
11.7 Crush barriers – main design criteria 149
11.8 Crush barriers – factors determining the horizontal imposed load 150
11.9 Crush barriers – continuous crush barrier configuration 151
11.10 Crush barriers – non-continuous crush barrier configuration 152
11.11 Crush barriers – height and positioning 152
11.12 Crush barriers – construction and strengthening 153
11.13 Crush barriers – factors affecting the holding capacity 154
11.14 Barriers in spectator galleries 154
11.15 Pitch or area of activity perimeter barriers 154
11.16 Pitch or area of activity perimeter barriers and standing areas 155
11.17 Barriers and separating elements in concourses and exit routes 155
11.18 Other barriers and separating elements 155
11.19 Barriers and risk assessment 157
Contents
11.20 Barrier tests – personnel and equipment 158

11.21 Barrier tests – records 158
11.22 Barrier tests – methodology 158
11.23 Barrier tests – bedding-in cycle 159
HEADINGS
SECTION
11.24 Barrier tests – proof cycle 159
11.25 Barrier tests – further considerations 160
11.26 Barrier tests resulting in failure 160
12.0 Spectator accommodation – seating 161

12.1 The provision of seated accommodation 161
12.2 Viewing standards 162
12.3 Sightlines 162
12.4 Sightlines for wheelchair users 165
12.5 Restricted viewing 166
12.6 Restricted viewing – management strategies 166
12.7 Provision of cover 167
12.8 Gangways in seated areas – general requirements 168
12.9 Lateral gangways in seated areas 168
12.10 Radial gangways in seated areas 169
12.11 The importance of dimensions 170
12.12 Seating row depths and seat dimensions 170
12.13 Clearways 171
12.14 Useful seat depths 172
12.15 Number of seats in rows 172
12.16 Seat design 172
12.17 Design and location of wheelchair user spaces 174
12.18 Amenity (or easy access) seats 174
12.19 Seats with independent barriers 175
12.20 Seats incorporating barriers 176
12.21 Seats incorporating barriers – design 178
12.22 Seats incorporating barriers – capacity calculations 179
12.23 Seats incorporating barriers – management 180
12.24 Assessment of (P) factors for seated areas 180
12.25 Assessment of (S) factors for seated areas 181
13.0 Spectator accommodation – standing 185

13.1 The provision of standing accommodation 185
13.2 The importance of good design 185
13.3 Viewing standards and conditions 186
13.4 Provision for wheelchair users 186
13.5 Gangways in standing areas – general requirements 187
13.6 Lateral gangways in standing areas 188
13.7 Radial gangways in standing areas 188
Contents
13.8 Crush barriers 189

13.9 Design of terrace steps 189
13.10 Dimensions of terrace steps 190
13.11 Viewing standards 190
HEADINGS
SECTION
13.12 Sightlines 191
13.13 Restricted viewing 192
13.14 Management strategies towards restricted viewing 192
13.15 Provision of cover 193
13.16 Management of large areas of standing accommodation 194
13.17 Allowing free movement of spectators between divisions 195
13.18 Segregation of standing accommodation 195
13.19 Viewing slopes 195
13.20 Level standing accommodation 196
13.21 Combined standing and circulation areas 196
13.22 Spectator galleries 197
13.23 Assessment of (P) factors for standing areas 197
13.24 Assessment of (S) factors for standing areas 198
13.25 Conversion of terraces to seating 200
14.0 Spectator accommodation – demountable structures 203

14.1 Demountable structures – definition and types 203
14.2 Responsibility for safety 204
14.3 Demountable structures – regulations 204
14.4 Demountable structures – need to meet standards 204
14.5 Design checks and inspections 205
14.6 Design performance and suitability 206
14.7 Hospitality units 207
14.8 Tents and marquees 207
14.9 Demountable structures – management 208
14.10 Further guidance 208
15.0 Fire safety 209

15.1 Achieving safety from fire 209
15.2 Scope 209
15.3 Fire safety legislation 210
15.4 Management responsibility for fire safety 211
15.5 Fire strategy 211
15.6 Fire Safety Plan 212
15.7 Conducting a fire risk assessment 213
15.8 Levels of risk 215
15.9 Categorisation of low fire risk 215
15.10 Categorisation of medium fire risk 215
15.11 Categorisation of high fire risk 216
Contents
15.12 Categorisation of mixed risk areas 216

15.13 Managing fire risk 216
15.14 Recording, monitoring and reviewing the fire risk assessment 220
15.15 Staff awareness and training 220
HEADINGS
SECTION
15.16 Restricting fire growth and spread 220
15.17 Measures for fire resistance, protection, separation and suppression 221
15.18 Compensatory measures for existing structures 223
15.19 Limiting external fire spread 223
15.20 Fire detection and alarm systems – general 223
15.21 Fire detection and alarm systems – spectator areas 224
15.22 Fire warning systems 225
15.23 Automatic fire extinguishing systems 225
15.24 Fire fighting facilities and equipment 226
15.25 Fire service access 226
15.26 Evacuation and places of safety 227
15.27 Evacuation – concourses 227
15.28 Evacuation – disabled spectators 228
15.29 Signage 228
15.30 New or refurbished stands, or structural alterations 229
15.31 Other fire safety considerations 229
16.0 Communications and control 231

16.1 Communications plan 231
16.2 Lines of communication 231
16.3 Means of communication 232
16.4 Inter-personal communications and training 232
16.5 Control point – provision 233
16.6 Control point – functions 233
16.7 Control point – location 234
16.8 Control point – design 234
16.9 Control point – command structure 235
16.10 Control point – displayed information 236
16.11 Control point – monitoring spectator numbers 237
16.12 Control point – documentation 237
16.13 Control point – secondary provision 238
16.14 Radio communications 238
16.15 Telephone communications – internal 239
16.16 Telephone communications – external 240
16.17 Telephone communications – mobile 240
16.18 Public address system – guidance and specifications 241
16.19 Public address system – operation 243
16.20 CCTV – provision 244
16.21 CCTV – assessment of need 245
Contents
16.22 CCTV – risk assessment 245

16.23 CCTV – operational requirements and tendering 246
16.24 CCTV – data storage and documentation 247
16.25 CCTV – maintenance 249
HEADINGS
SECTION
16.26 CCTV – human factors 249
16.27 Scoreboards and screens 250
16.28 Signs and ground plans – adopting a strategy 250
16.29 Signs – forms and categories 251
16.30 Signs – design issues 252
16.31 Signs – inclusion issues 253
16.32 Signs – general provision and maintenance 253
16.33 Tickets and programmes 254
16.34 Auxiliary power 254
16.35 Digital infrastructure and resilience 255
17.0 Mechanical and electrical installations 257

17.1 Introduction 257
17.2 The importance of maintenance 257
17.3 Inspections and tests 258
17.4 Event day staffing 258
17.5 Anti-vandalism 258
17.6 Electrical installations 258
17.7 Electrical plans and circuit diagrams 258
17.8 Protection of cables 259
17.9 Lightning protection 260
17.10 Lighting 260
17.11 Emergency lighting 260
17.12 Auxiliary power 261
17.13 Passenger lifts and escalators 262
17.14 Gas fired installations 262
17.15 Boilers and other heating devices 263
17.16 Oil storage and supply 263
17.17 Ventilation, air conditioning and smoke control systems 263
17.18 Water systems 264
18.0 Medical and first aid provision 265

18.2 Medical Co-ordinator 265
18.3 Medical Needs Assessment – consultation 266
18.4 Medical Needs Assessment – factors to consider 266
18.5 Medical Plan – scope and personnel 267
18.6 Medical Plan – details 268
18.7 Provision of Event Doctors and/or Event Practitioners 269
Contents
18.8 First aid room 271

18.9 Medical equipment and storage 272
18.10 First aid room – upkeep and inspection 273
HEADINGS
18.11 First aiders – qualifications and competency 273
SECTION
18.12 First aiders – numbers 274
18.13 First aiders – role 274
18.14 Ambulance provision 275
18.15 Communications 275
18.16 Planning for emergencies and major incidents 277
18.17 Inspections and records 277
18.18 Medical Advisory Group 278
19.0 Media provision 281

19.2 Pre-event planning and briefing 281
19.3 Media installations – design and management 282
19.4 Gantries and platforms for cameras and media personnel 283
19.5 Overhead suspended cameras and UAVs 284
19.6 Roving media personnel 284
19.7 Identification 284
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds List of figures
List of figures
Figure 1 Calculating the capacity of seated accommodation 34
Figure 2 Calculating the capacity of standing accommodation 35
Figure 3 Suggested headings for contingency plans 48
FIGURES
LIST OF
Figure 4 Stewards’ training and assessment process 68
Figure 5 Inspections and tests – 48 hours pre event and event day checklist 80
Figure 6 Zonal planning 87
Figure 7 Table showing sample rates of security screening 102
Figure 8 Barriers and handrails on stairways 108
Figure 9 Approaches to the head of stairways 110
Figure 10 Crowd density levels on concourses 118
Figure 11 Table showing crowd densities for milling or standing areas 119
Figure 12 Vomitory control measures and barrier heights 124
Figure 13 Zone 2 travel times, exit routes and egress times 135
Figure 14 Table showing horizontal imposed loads for barriers 144
Figure 15 Table showing horizontal imposed loads for crush barriers 145
Figure 16 Table showing horizontal imposed loads for barriers in spectator galleries 145
Figure 17 Barrier design loads, heights and positions 147
Figure 18 Barriers for front and rear seating rows 148
Figure 19 Continuous crush barrier configuration 151
Figure 20 Positioning and height of crush barriers 153
Figure 21 Loadings for walls, barriers and separating elements in concourses and exit routes 156
Figure 22 Sightlines for seated spectators 163
Figure 23 Effect on sightlines of spectators standing in seated areas 164
Figure 24 Sightlines for wheelchair users 165
Figure 25 Seating row depths and seat dimensions 173
Figure 26 Seats with independent barriers 175
Figure 27 Seats incorporating barriers 177
Figure 28 Sightlines for standing spectators 191
Figure 29 Conversion of terracing to seated accommodation 201
Figure 30 Fire Risk Assessment – the five steps 214
Figure 31 CCTV resolution levels 248
Figure 32 Table showing CCTV testing and maintenance schedules 249
Figure 33 Table showing ambulance provision according to anticipated attendance 276
Figure 34 Role and responsibilities of Medical Advisory Group 279
Contents
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Foreword
Foreword
Welcome to the 6th edition of the Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds
As Chair of the Sports Grounds Safety Authority, I am delighted and proud to introduce
the 6th edition of the Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds, popularly known as the Green Guide.
I commend and thank the multi-disciplinary members of our Inspectorate who, over a period
of two years, have led an extensive consultation exercise and overseen the drafting of this
latest version.
The safety of all people within a sports ground, wherever it is located, is an imperative for
FOREWORD
governments, security services, governing bodies of sport, venue owners and operators.
The principles embedded in this latest version of the Guide, informed by our significant
knowledge and experience of sports grounds safety in the United Kingdom and around the
world, together with contributions from a wide range of stakeholders, will help to ensure
that this priority is achieved.
I hope that you find this publication to be an invaluable source of reference and a real
practical help in whatever aspect of your work is involved in sports grounds safety.
Alan Coppin
Chair
Contents
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Preface
Preface
As past users of the Guide will notice, this new edition is larger in content and scope than
the fifth edition, published in 2008. This is in response to a number of developments in sports
ground safety management and design over the last decade.
From a management perspective the intervening years have seen continued and growing
emphasis on the use of risk assessment as a means to identify and implement the measures
necessary to ensure the reasonable safety of spectators.
During the same period there has been considerable growth in the use and sophistication of
digital technology, touching on such areas as access control, crowd modelling, CCTV systems
PREFACE
and communications (not least in the ability of sports ground management to address
spectators directly through social media).
As part of this trend our presentation of the Guide has also evolved. In addition to the standard
printed edition, users can now gain access to a digital edition. Moreover, all Annexes and
Worked Examples are now to be found exclusively online, via the SGSA website, along with a
series of explanatory notes that will be regularly updated and supplemented in response both
to new developments and ongoing enquiries from users of the Guide.
A further factor in the expansion of the Guide, inevitably, is our mounting concern for security.
For while there have been no significant safety failures or loss of life at any sports ground in
the United Kingdom since the publication of the fifth edition, experience at home and events
elsewhere remind us all that the potential for serious incidents remains. In particular, terrorist
attacks in Paris in 2015 and at the Manchester Arena in 2017 demonstrate forcefully that
safety concerns must now extend beyond the spectator accommodation to the immediate
environs of the ground.
That said, the single most important recommendation this edition carries remains exactly the
same as in previous editions; that for organisations and individuals tasked with managing and
designing for safety at sports grounds, the greatest threat of all remains that of complacency.
For this reason, we urge all readers and users of the Guide, whatever their specialist roles
or concerns, to read the document in its entirety, and absorb as much the spirit of its
recommendations as its details.
Ken Scott FRICS

Head of Inspectorate
Contents
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 1.0 How to use this Guide
1.0 How to use this Guide
1.1 Status
The Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds is an advisory document for use by competent
persons working in the regulation and licensing, the design and planning, and the
safety management and operation of sports grounds. For a definition of ‘competent’
see the Glossary.
The document is the distillation of many years of research and experience and is updated
HOW TO USE
THIS GUIDE
periodically to take into account emerging issues and trends in the field.
The Guide has no statutory force but many of its recommendations will be made statutory
at individual grounds where safety certificates are in force under either the Safety of Sports
Grounds Act 1975, the Safety of Sports Grounds (Northern Ireland) Order 2006, or the
Fire Safety and Safety of Places of Sport Act 1987. For information on safety certification,
see here.
The advice given in this Guide is without prejudice to, and does not take precedence over
the application of the appropriate and most up-to-date Building Regulations, the Health and
Safety at Work etc. Act 1974, and any other relevant legislation.
Furthermore, the guidance within the document should not be applied selectively. Indeed
users of the Guide may be considered competent only if they have read and understood the
guidance in its entirety.
At the same time it is recognised that the guidance is neither definitive nor applicable in all
circumstances. Should any doubts or queries therefore arise concerning the application of
guidance within this document, or should any deviation from the Guide be proposed, it is
recommended that independent, professional advice be obtained from competent persons.
1.2 Scope
The Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975 defines a sports ground as:
‘A place where sports or other competitive activities take place in the open air, and where
accommodation has been provided for spectators, consisting of artificial structures or of natural
structures artificially modified for the purpose.’
The Guide applies to the safety of all people present at any sports ground that meets the above
definition, whether or not a safety certificate is in force, during the course of an event.
Moreover, it should be understood that the fundamental principles contained in the Guide are
applicable to all events at a sports ground. Clearly, the extent to which those principles are
Contents
adopted will vary, according to the size or type of the event and the audience profile. However
the management of sports grounds should strive at all times to achieve the highest possible
standards highlighted in the Guide.
Note that for the purposes of the Guide, an ‘event’ is any event at a sports ground – whether
it relates to sport, entertainment or any other form of gathering – to which the public
is admitted.
An ‘event’ (or ‘event day’) commences as soon as the first event staff enter the premises and
ends only after the last event staff have departed.
If a safety certificate is in place, however, there may be listed amongst the certificate’s
conditions a time period for an event that differs from the definition above.
For more information concerning the extent of conditioning within a safety certificate, please
refer to the guidance document Safety Certification (available from the SGSA).
Note also that a sports ground with a roof that opens and closes is still considered to fall
within the jurisdiction of the 1975 Act, even when some of the events it hosts are staged
under a closed roof.
Grounds to which the Guide applies are likely to include those which stage the following
sports. This list is not intended to be comprehensive:
HOW TO USE
THIS GUIDE
American football Golf Polo
Association football Greyhound racing Rugby League
Athletics Hockey Rugby Union
Cricket Horse racing Speedway racing
Equestrian events Lacrosse Tennis
Gaelic games Motor racing
1.3 Objectives – spectator numbers, safety, security and service

The primary objective of the Guide is to provide guidance to ground management, technical
specialists such as architects and engineers, event organisers and representatives of all
relevant authorities, in order to assist them in the assessment of how many spectators can
be safely accommodated within a sports ground.
The document also provides guidance on measures intended to improve the levels of safety,
security and service at existing grounds, in terms of their design and safety management,
while taking into account the constraints and difficulties which may exist at these grounds.
In addition, as explained in Section 1.7 below, the Guide offers guidance on how to apply good
practice in respect of safety, security and service levels in the design and management of
new grounds or of newly constructed sections of grounds.
In providing this guidance it is recognised that the terms ‘safety’ and ‘security’ are often
confused, or used interchangeably. At the same time, the terms may even be considered, by
some, to be mutually exclusive. But in practice, ‘safety’ means keeping people safe from injury
or physical harm. As such ‘safety’ includes any concerns for security. Therefore security,
although of paramount importance, is in fact a subset of ‘safety’, and encompasses physical
security, personal security and cyber security.
As such, when considering or implementing any of the safety related recommendations in

the Guide, including the drawing up of any contingency plans, concerns about security should
always form part of those deliberations.
Contents
Concerning service levels, it is important to recognise that these too play an integral part in
the delivery of safe conditions. Accordingly, all parties involved with the staging of an event,
and not only those tasked with safety related roles, should seek to understand, embrace and
promote the concept of a safety culture.
They should be committed to the creation of a welcoming environment, and to understand

how basic matters, such as signage, information management, cleanliness, inclusion
awareness and clear communications, even the nurturing of positive relationships between
the ground management and the local community, all play a key role in enhancing the overall
spectator experience.
In short, a sports ground where a high level and thorough, multi-agency approach to service
provision is in place, and where spectators are able to sense that their wellbeing is a priority,
is more likely to be one that actually is safe, in practical and operational terms.
1.4 Management responsibility

A fundamental principle of the Guide is that responsibility for all people present in
a sports ground lies at all times with the ground management. The management will
normally be either the owner or lessee of the ground, who may not necessarily be the
promoter of the event.
HOW TO USE
THIS GUIDE
In discharging its responsibility, the management needs to recognise that safety should
not be seen as a set of rules or conditions imposed by others, but rather as standards set
from within, and which reflect the safety culture at the sports ground. A positive attitude
demonstrated by the management is therefore crucial in ensuring that safety policies are
carried out effectively and willingly.
As stated in Section 1.3, these policies should take into consideration the safety, security and
service needs of all spectators, whether attending as individuals or in groups (including family
groups), and including all those with ‘protected characteristics’ as defined by the Equality Act
2010 (see Section 3.40).
At the same time it is recognised that representatives of management cannot be reasonably

expected to possess all the technical knowledge and skills required to assess and apply
every recommendation in the Guide. Management should therefore, whenever required, seek
guidance from competent persons who have the relevant qualifications, skills and experience.
Competent representatives of the local authority, together with the emergency services, may
advise management on how to discharge its responsibility, and, in certain circumstances,
may require measures to be taken in order to achieve reasonable safety standards. This does
not, however, exonerate the ground management from its responsibility for the safety of all
people present.
Furthermore, although the guidance in this document does not in general extend to the
risks that spectators may be exposed to by the sport or event itself, management also has
a responsibility to take all necessary precautions to protect spectators from the effects
of accidents occurring on, or arising from the activity on the pitch, track or area of activity
(including any pre or post event activities or entertainments, particularly those involving the
use of flammable fuels or pyrotechnics).
These precautions should include briefing players, athletes and performers on how to avoid
endangering spectators; for example by approaching or entering spectator enclosures or by
using provocative behaviour.
Contents
1.5 Reasonable aims and flexibility

When applying the recommendations in the Guide, it should be remembered that the
objective is ‘to secure reasonable safety at the sports ground when it is in use for the
specified activity’ (as stated in section 2[1] of the Safety of Sports Ground Act 1975).
To achieve this, full account should always be taken of the type, function and layout of
the ground in question. The requirements at racecourses or greyhound tracks, for example,
are in many instances different from those grounds hosting football or rugby.
Whatever the sport for which the ground is primarily designed, it should be recognised that
safety concerns relate directly to:
a. the specific nature of the event being staged (for example a sporting event or an
entertainment; a routine event or a high profile event, such as a semi-final or final;
a local event or a national or international event)
b. the number of spectators attending
c. the timing of the event (for example daytime/evening, summer/winter)
d. the likely profile of spectators attending (for example their loyalties, their age or gender,
and whether they are familiar with the ground and its locality)
HOW TO USE
THIS GUIDE
e. the likely interaction of spectators with the ground (for example, their anticipated patterns
of arrival and departure, or how they might use the ground’s facilities)
f. the likely response of spectators to the event (for example, celebratory or anxious,
partisan or neutral)
g. the prevailing weather conditions.
Above all it should be remembered that the greatest risk to safety is complacency.
1.6 Achieving a balance

Safety at sports grounds is achieved by establishing a balance between good management
and good design.
In this respect, safety cannot be achieved simply by ensuring that individual components
of a ground – such as stairways, gangways, seated areas or terraces – are satisfactory in
themselves. The inter-relation of these and other components, such as concourses and CCTV
systems – is critical. None can be treated in isolation without consideration of the effect its
design and management has upon other components. They should all be compatible and
combine to form a balanced unit.
Furthermore, good management will not necessarily compensate for poor design,
or vice versa.
As such, designers should always seek to involve the people who will manage the sports
ground in order to ensure that the designs will be fit for purpose.
For this reason it is recommended that individuals with responsibility for sports ground
management and design familiarise themselves with all sections of the Guide, including
those which may be considered beyond their personal remit.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 1.0 How to use this guide
1.7 New construction

Although the Guide does not set out to offer definitive or comprehensive guidance on all
design issues, it does provide guidance on how to apply good practice in the design and
management of new grounds, or of newly constructed sections of grounds, framed under
the following heading:
New construction
For the purposes of the Guide, a ‘new construction’ is one that has been submitted for
planning consent after January 1 2019.
Such guidance is intended to promote the highest possible standards of safety and amenity.
In addition, unless the Guide recommends a higher standard, new construction should
conform to the current, appropriate Building Regulations. New construction should also,
whenever possible and wherever specified, take into account current British and European
Standards and the recommendations of other relevant advisory documents; for example, the
series of Sports Grounds and Stadia Guides available from the SGSA. These and other relevant
documents are referred to in the appropriate sections and listed further in the Bibliography.
Although it is also recommended that, wherever possible, the refurbishment of existing
HOW TO USE
THIS GUIDE
structures should seek to meet higher standards, it is recognised that this may not always
be achievable. However, all refurbishment work should at least meet the standards set in
the Guide.
1.8 Deviating from the Guide

The Guide seeks to encourage the meeting of achievable standards, particularly for new
construction, but does not attempt to provide a universal minimum standard for existing
sports grounds.
Similarly, the Guide recognises that it may be possible for both new and existing sports
grounds to deviate from specific guidelines without detracting from that ground’s overall
safety, security and service provision.
It is nevertheless stressed that the recommendations within the Guide are based upon
research and experience. Deviations from the Guide should therefore only be acceptable when
considered to be necessary and reasonable, and supported by evidence.
However, an accumulation of deviations which result in the application of lower standards

in relation to any part of the ground or any aspect of its management, should be regarded
as unacceptable.
It is the responsibility of ground management to ensure that any decision to deviate from
the Guide should be recorded in a List of Deviations, with supporting written evidence, including
the details of a risk assessment (see Section 3.3.d). If the deviation is then approved (by
management and, where a safety certificate is in force, by the local authority), the action
taken should adhere strictly to the contents of the written evidence.
It is further stressed that, unless it can be demonstrated that the alternative measures are
able to achieve an equal or greater degree of safety than those recommended in the Guide,
a capacity lower than the one which would otherwise be permitted will be required. Moreover,
the extent of such a reduction may be severe.
Contents
1.9 Revisions to the Guide

For the convenience of readers and users, a Summary of new guidance added since the fifth
edition of the Guide was published in 2008 appears on pages 285–298.
The following areas of new guidance are, however, of particular importance.
a. In previous editions, the Guide has been concerned primarily with the safety of spectators.
In this new edition, management responsibility extends to all people present at the ground
– including members of the sports ground’s staff, sub-contracted staff, media personnel,
medical providers and so on. It also includes the safety of players, athletes and event
officials in all respects other than injuries sustained as a result of the sporting activity.
This wider concern requires the factoring in of staff and other personnel when calculating
the capacity of emergency exit routes.
b. Chapter Six of the Guide provides new guidance on the co-ordination of circulation
routes and the movement of people in those areas of the public realm that lie beyond
the outer perimeter of the sports ground, but which are integral to the safe management
of spectators and other personnel, both before and after an event. These external areas,
referred to collectively in the Guide as ‘Zone Ex’ (but also often known as ‘the last mile’)
typically include routes linking the sports ground with transport hubs, car parking areas
and local amenities.
HOW TO USE
THIS GUIDE
These areas will generally be outside the scope of a safety certificate, unless they impact
upon the safe arrival of spectators at, or their egress from, the sports ground. In such
instances a re-assessment of the safe capacity of the sports ground may be necessary.
c. This edition of the Guide takes into fuller account the need to understand, monitor and
control crowd densities on circulation routes and concourses. As part of this growing
understanding, the Guide also acknowledges the increasing use of crowd simulation
modelling (also known as dynamic modelling) for the design and management of
circulation routes both inside sports grounds and within Zone Ex.
d. Taking into account the need for a heightened awareness of security, this edition of the
Guide introduces the concept of ‘exceptional’ egress; a category distinct from normal, or
emergency egress and one which includes such contingencies as phased evacuation,
partial or zonal evacuation, directional evacuation and invacuation.
e. The Guide takes into account the greater use of fire engineering in the design process of
sports grounds.
f. The Guide recognises the increased dependence of safety management teams, event
organisers and other agencies on digital technology, and indeed its greater use by
spectators, and by management in its communication with spectators.
g. While it is not possible for print editions of the Guide to be updated regularly, information
on new issues and developments that relate to the guidance in this document can be
found on the SGSA website.
h. New Annexes and Worked Examples, as listed on the Contents page and referred to within
the relevant sections of the Guide, are also now to be found on the SGSA website.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 2.0 Calculating the safe capacity of a sports ground
2.0 Calculating the safe

capacity of a sports
ground
2.1 The importance of calculating a safe capacity

As stated in Chapter 1, the principal objective of the Guide is to provide guidance on
the assessment of how many spectators can be safely accommodated within a sports
ground whilst it is hosting an event, sporting or otherwise.
This assessment is the most important step towards the achievement

of reasonable safety.
The purpose of this chapter is to outline the main factors which must be considered in
making such an assessment, leading to a calculation of the final capacity of each section
of the ground, and/or of the ground as a whole.
Clearly the assessments made will differ according to the individual ground and to the type
CALCULATIONS
of viewing accommodation being assessed; primarily whether it is designed for seated or
CAPACITY
standing spectators. But the factors to be applied in each case are the same for every ground,
regardless of the event being staged.
Figures 1 and 2 summarise the factors to be assessed for seated and standing
accommodation.
To further illustrate the methods of assessment and calculation, Worked Examples are
available online via the SGSA website. However, the details of each step can be fully
understood only by a thorough reading of the whole Guide.
The assessment and calculation process will require plans of the ground, drawn, ideally, to a
scale of 1:50 or 1:100, and no smaller than 1:200. Wherever possible all physical dimensions
should be verified on site. These plans, together with a statement explaining the methodology
used in the calculation process, should be retained for reference.
At the majority of sports grounds, the capacities of each section will be added to establish the
final capacity of the ground as a whole.
However there are certain sports grounds – for example, those staging horse racing or
golfing events – where it may be difficult to calculate the capacity of the whole ground. As
explained in Section 2.12, the final capacities of individual sections at such grounds must still
be calculated and the occupation levels of all other areas monitored so that, where necessary,
numbers are controlled to ensure they do not exceed a safe occupancy level.
Contents
2.2 Applying the capacity calculation

Once the final capacity of a section, or of the whole ground, is determined (as explained in
Section 2.3), in no circumstances should a larger number of spectators be admitted.
If that final capacity is lower than the level management ideally requires, it can only be
raised after the necessary remedial work has been completed, and/or the quality of safety
management improved, and after the area in question has been re-assessed.
Similarly, if part of the ground is required to be closed, this must be done. It must not be
re-opened to spectators for any reason until the necessary remedial work has been
completed to remove the deficiencies which led to its closure, and not before these
measures have been re-assessed and approved by the relevant authority.
2.3 Factors to be considered

The factors common to both seated and standing accommodation are as follows.
a. The entry capacity

The entry capacity is the number of spectators who can pass through all the entry points
or turnstiles serving the ground, or a section of the ground, within a period of one hour
(see Section 7.4).
b. The holding capacity

The holding capacity is the number of spectators that can be safely accommodated
in the ground, or in a section of the ground.
i. In the case of seats, this will be determined by the actual number of seats, less any
that cannot be used safely owing to seriously restricted views (see Section 12.5)
CALCULATIONS
CAPACITY
or their inadequate condition (see Chapter 5), and an assessment of the (P) and (S)
factors.
(P) and (S) factors are explained in Section 2.4.
A reduction might also be necessary where seats are unreserved (see Section 7.10.d).
ii. In the case of a standing area, this will be determined by a number of factors, including
crush barrier strengths and layouts (see Chapter 11), seriously restricted views, and an
assessment of the (P) and (S) factors.
c. The exit capacity

The exit capacity is the number of spectators that can safely exit from the ground, or from
a section of the ground, under normal conditions (see Chapter 10 and Figure 13).
d. The emergency exit capacity

The emergency exit capacity is the number of people (that is, spectators and all other
people present, see Section 2.13) that can safely negotiate the emergency exit routes
and reach a place of safety within a set time. The determination of that set time is based
on an assessment of the levels of fire risk present throughout the emergency exit route
(see Chapter 10 and Figure 13).
e. The final capacity

Having calculated all the above figures, the final capacity of the ground, or section of the
ground, will be determined by whichever is the lowest figure arrived at for steps (a), (b), (c)
or (d) above.
Figures 1 and 2 on pages 34 and 35 summarise the main steps outlined above.
Contents
2.4 The (P) and (S) factors

In order to calculate the holding capacity (as defined in Section 2.3), each part of the
ground’s viewing accommodation should be assessed according to its physical condition.
This assessment is known as the (P) factor.
Similarly, each part of the ground’s viewing accommodation should be assessed according to
the quality of the safety management of that area. This assessment is known as the
(S) factor.
To help in the assessment of (P) and (S) factors, it is recommended that each should be
given a numerical value. This value should be quantified as a factor of between 0.0 and 1.0,
as the following examples indicate.
a. Where the physical condition of the viewing accommodation is of a high standard,

a (P) factor of 1.0 should be applied.
b. Where the physical condition is extremely poor, a factor of 0.0 should be applied
(which, as explained below, would have the effect of imposing a zero capacity on the area).
c. An intermediate assessment might result in, for example, a (P) factor of 0.6, or perhaps
an (S) factor of 0.8.
While recognising that it is difficult to place numerical values on such assessments,

it is nevertheless essential that some form of quantified assessment be made.
Owing to the wide variation of conditions and facilities to be found at sports grounds, the
Guide does not seek to place specific values on any of the elements likely to be considered
when assessing (P) and (S) factors. This is because the assessments should not aim to
create a cumulative scoring system in which values for individual elements are simply
CALCULATIONS
CAPACITY
added together.
Instead, the assessment should reflect a considered and reasonable overall judgement of the
physical condition or safety management of the area in question, taking full account of all
circumstances and the wider guidance in this document.
Sections 12.24 and 12.25 explain the assessment of (P) and (S) factors for seated
accommodation. Sections 13.23 and 13.24 provide similar guidance for the assessment
of standing accommodation.
In addition, Worked Examples of capacity calculations, showing how (P) and (S) factors are
applied, are available via the SGSA website, while online Annexes A and B provide examples of
the type of indicative questions that need to be addressed when assessing (P) and (S) factors.
(P) factors and indicative questions relating to the physical condition of the ground should
be reviewed annually, and also whenever there is any physical alteration to the sports ground
or a change in the nature of the event.
Similarly, (S) factors and the indicative questions relating to the safety management
of the ground should also be reviewed annually, and also whenever there are any changes
in the safety management structure or in its senior personnel, or if there are any changes
in stewarding arrangements.
Where a safety certificate is in force any reassessment should be ratified by the

local authority.
Contents
2.5 Carrying out (P) and (S) factor assessments

It is the responsibility of ground management to ensure that (P) and (S) factors are assessed
by competent persons with knowledge and understanding of the ground concerned, its
operation and the general principles of safety. Where a safety certificate is in force, the
assessments should be ratified by the local authority, and written records of the assessments
held with the safety certificate.
Written records of the assessments should also form part of the management’s Operations
Manual (see Section 3.4).
The assessments should identify any deficiencies found, so that these can be acted upon
by the ground management, thereby leading to a potential increase of the (P) or (S) factors,
which in turn may lead to an increase in the holding capacity.
Similarly, the records of the assessments will enable deficiencies to be monitored, which may
in turn require a reduction of the (P) or (S) factors.
2.6 Seated accommodation – calculating the holding capacity

As stated in Section 2.3 and shown in Steps 1 and 2 of Figure 1, in order to calculate the final
capacity it is first necessary to calculate the holding capacity. The holding capacity will not
automatically correspond with the number of seats provided, for the following reasons.
a. Seats that offer a seriously restricted view (as defined in Section 12.5) should be
discounted from the holding capacity.
b. Seats that exceed the numbers permitted between radial gangways in each row (see
Section 12.15) should be discounted from the holding capacity, unless the design has been
CALCULATIONS
CAPACITY
subject to a risk assessment and appropriate compensatory features are in place.
c. Seats that are damaged, unavailable for use or whose dimensions fall below the specified
minimums for seating row depths, seat widths and/or clearways (see Sections 12.12 and
12.13) should be discounted from the holding capacity.
Having established the number of usable seats, (P) and (S) factors must then be applied
(see Sections 12.24 and 12.25).
Having established values for both the (P) and (S) factors, the holding capacity of the seated
area can thus be calculated as follows:
holding capacity = the number of usable seats

x (P) or (S), whichever is lower
It is stressed that the (P) and (S) factors should not be multiplied by each other, but that the
lower of the two factors should be applied to the calculation.
2.7 Standing accommodation – the calculation process

The calculation of the holding capacity for standing areas is considerably more
complicated than for seated areas. As shown in Figure 2, three steps are involved:
Step 1: calculate the available viewing area – see Section 2.8
Step 2: calculate the appropriate density – see Section 2.9
Step 3: calculate the holding capacity – see Section 2.10
Contents
2.8 Standing accommodation – calculating the available viewing area

The available viewing area is not the entire area available for standing spectators.
Rather, it consists only of the areas immediately behind crush barriers, less those areas
from which only seriously restricted views are possible (see Section 13.13).
The extent of the areas behind crush barriers depends on the strength of those crush barriers,
and how far the crush barriers are spaced apart in relation to the gradient of the terrace steps.
For further guidance on the inter-relation of these factors see Figure 15.
Once the crush barriers have been tested, and the spacings between barriers and the gradient
measured, the available viewing area can then be calculated, as follows.
a. If, as recommended, and illustrated in Figure 19, the crush barriers are provided
continuously between radial gangways, and are designed for the correct loads and
spacings according to Figure 15, all areas behind the crush barriers will be considered as
the available viewing area (see online Worked Example A on the SGSA website).
b. If the crush barriers are not continuous between radial gangways, only the areas behind
individual crush barriers should be counted, according to the strength of each individual
barrier and the radial distance between barriers.
c. Areas immediately behind crush barriers which have failed the testing procedures outlined
in Chapter 11 must also be discounted from the available viewing area.
d. If the crush barriers are not continuous and there are no clearly marked gangways, further
areas must be discounted, calculated on the basis of how much space – measured at
1.2m in width – the required number of gangways would take up, if provided.
e. Standing areas without crush barriers cannot be considered as safe unless the capacity is
CALCULATIONS
CAPACITY
set at such a level that the risks are minimised.
f. If the standing area has no crush barriers, but has a front barrier (be it a barrier, rail, wall
or fence) which meets the horizontal imposed load requirements of a crush barrier, the
available viewing area will be limited to the space immediately behind that front barrier,
depending on the strength of the barrier (see Figure 15).
g. Where there are no crush barriers, and the front barrier (be it a barrier, rail, wall or
fence) does not meet the horizontal imposed load requirements of a crush barrier, it
will be necessary to carry out a risk assessment to determine whether the area should
be considered as suitable for viewing. At most in such circumstances, for calculation
purposes the available viewing area should not exceed a depth of 1.5m behind the front
barrier. In practical terms this is the equivalent of approximately four persons deep.
A similar depth limitation should apply to areas of level standing, regardless of the loading
of any front barrier. This is because the view of spectators standing beyond this depth is
likely to be too seriously restricted.
h. It is recognised that there are standing areas and enclosures at certain sports grounds
– such as the lawns in front of stands at racecourses – which are used for both general
circulation and viewing, and where the recommendations provided in paragraphs (f) and
(g) above may not be appropriate. These areas might not have any crush barriers or even a
front barrier which meets the loading requirement of a crush barrier. However, because the
nature of the sport requires that spectators are able to move freely, it is likely that crowds
will be spread throughout the area, rather than being concentrated behind the front rail.
Contents
In such circumstances – subject to a risk assessment of the front rail itself – the available
viewing area may extend beyond 1.5m behind the front rail, and may cover those parts
of the enclosure from which viewing is possible, provided that, in order to allow for
circulation, a significantly reduced (P) factor is applied (as explained in Section 13.23 and
Worked Example C).
If this approach is taken it must be demonstrated through risk assessment, effective

monitoring and appropriate safety management procedures, that there is no forward
movement or exerted pressure concentrated on the front rails (see Section 11.16). Even if
all these measures are implemented a careful assessment should be made of the (P) and
(S) factors for each area of viewing accommodation.
It is also stressed that the calculation of capacities for such enclosures should be separate
from the calculation of capacities for any seated or standing accommodation adjoining
them. Where there is a free movement of spectators between, for example, a lawn area
and a standing terrace, ground management must ensure that neither area is filled beyond
its capacity.
i. Space allocated for wheelchair users (see Section 13.4) should be deducted from the
calculation of the available viewing area.
It should be noted that in all cases, any areas affected by seriously restricted views must still
be discounted from the available viewing area.
2.9 Standing accommodation – calculating the appropriate density

Having established the available viewing area in square metres, this must then be considered
in conjunction with the appropriate density.
CALCULATIONS
CAPACITY
The appropriate density is expressed in terms of a number of persons per square metre.
For the purposes of calculating the capacity of standing areas at sports grounds, the
maximum density that can be applied is 4.7 persons per square metre, the equivalent of 47
persons per 10 square metres, or 0.21m2 per person.
However experience has shown that at certain types of sports ground and in a variety of
circumstances a lower density, such as 4.0 persons per square metre, or even lower, will be
safer and more appropriate, taking into account prevailing conditions (including conditions
underfoot), or event specific factors. For example in cold weather spectators are likely to
wear bulkier clothes, in which case a density of 4.7 persons per square metre might not be
attainable, while for events at which a higher proportion of children are in attendance, such a
density is unlikely to be appropriate.
For more guidance on crowd densities, see Figures 10 and 11. More on the principle of
‘comfortable capacities’ can be found in the Guide to Safety at Racecourses, published by the
Racecourse Association.
In setting a maximum figure for calculating the appropriate density, management should also
consider how density levels may hamper the ability of spectators to leave an area of standing
accommodation in order to reach nearby amenities, or to find an alternative area for viewing.
Once the management has determined what maximum density figure to apply, this figure will
then be subject to the assessment of the physical condition of the area, the (P) factor, and the
quality of the safety management of the area, the (S) factor.
As stated in Section 2.4 it is recommended that (P) and (S) factors be quantified as a factor of
between 0.0 and 1.0.
Contents
Having assessed both the (P) and (S) factors, the appropriate density of the standing area is
then calculated using the following formula:
appropriate density = (P) or (S) factor (whichever is lower)

x 4.7 (or whatever maximum density figure is determined)
Thus, if the maximum is 4.7 persons per square metre, and both (P) and (S) factors are 1.0,
the appropriate density will be 4.7 persons per square metre.
However if the (P) factor is 0.6 and the (S) factor is 0.9, the appropriate density will be 2.82
persons per square metre; that is, the lower of the two factors (0.6) x 4.7.
Guidance on the assessment of (P) and (S) factors can be found in Sections 13.23 and 13.24.
See also the Worked Examples available online via the SGSA website.
2.10 Standing accommodation – calculating the holding capacity

Having established the available viewing area and the appropriate density, the holding
capacity of the standing area can then be calculated using the following formula:
holding capacity = available viewing area x appropriate density
Where applicable, to this figure should be added the number of spaces allocated to
wheelchair users and their companions located within the standing accommodation
(see Section 13.4).
It should be noted that at grounds staging different types of sport, the holding capacity
may vary for each sport. For example, the free movement of standing spectators between
CALCULATIONS
different areas of viewing accommodation may be permitted at one event but not at
CAPACITY
another, resulting in a different appropriate density being applied to the calculation
(see Section 13.17).
2.11 Calculating the final capacity

As stated in Section 2.3 and shown in Figures 1 and 2, whether for seated or standing
areas, having established the holding capacity of the area, a comparison must then be made
between:
a. the holding capacity
b. the entry capacity
c. the exit capacity
d. the emergency exit capacity
The final capacity of the section or whole ground will be determined by whichever is the
lowest figure of the four criteria.
As stated in Section 2.2, once the final capacity of a section, and thence of the whole ground,
is determined, in no circumstances should a larger number of spectators be admitted without
remedial work and the approval of the relevant authorities.
Contents
Figure 1 Calculating the capacity of seated accommodation
STEP 1 total number of seats

calculate minus
number of
seats with seriously restricted views
usable seats
damaged / inadequate / unavailable seats
Section 2.6
STEP 2 number of usable seats x (P) or (S) whichever is lower

calculate (P) factor (S) factor
holding capacity
physical condition roof covering / crowd behaviour
Section 2.6 sightlines unreserved seats
safety management
Section 12.24 Section 12.25
STEP 3
calculate
entry capacity
CALCULATIONS
Section 7.4
CAPACITY
STEP 4
calculate
exit capacity
Chapter 10
STEP 5
calculate
emergency exit
capacity
Chapter 10
STEP 6
determine
final capacity = lowest values of Steps 2 / 3 / 4 or 5
final capacity
Section 2.11
Contents
Figure 2 Calculating the capacity of standing accommodation
STEP 1 physical area

less gangways / seriously restricted views/ wheelchair user spaces
calculate
available taking account of
viewing area
barrier layout continuous or non-continuous / spacing
Section 2.8 barrier testing / loadings
STEP 2 4.7 persons per sq m o r whatever maximum density is determined

calculate x (P) or (S) factor whichever is lower
appropriate
density (P) factor (S) factor
Section 2.9 physical condition roof cover / size of terrace
sightlines crowd dispersal / behaviour
safety management
Section 13.23 Section 13.24
STEP 3
CALCULATIONS
available viewing area x appropriate density
calculate
CAPACITY
holding capacity plus, if applicable, spaces for wheelchair users and companions
Section 2.10
STEP 4
calculate
entry capacity STEP 5
Section 7.4 calculate

STEP 6
exit capacity
calculate
Chapter 10
emergency exit
capacity
Chapter 10
STEP 7
determine
final capacity = lowest values of Steps 3 / 4 / 5 or 6
final capacity
Section 2.11
Contents
2.12 Grounds where final capacities require further calculation

As stated in Section 2.1, there are certain sports grounds – such as those staging horse racing,
motor racing or golf – where additional calculations may need to be made in order to arrive at a
final capacity.
For example, some grounds contain large areas of open land to which entry by members
of the public is not controlled, and/or where spectators may view the event from areas
not strictly designed as viewing accommodation. Some grounds may also include areas –
such as stables, pits, hospitality villages or media compounds – where large numbers
of support staff, event officials and others may gather, but still have access to areas of viewing
accommodation.
In such cases, the final capacities of individual, enclosed sections of viewing accommodation
must still be calculated, but these calculations should be accompanied by a risk assessment
identifying:
a. whether additional members of the public are able to enter the ground, and/or
b. whether additional people within the ground are able to enter areas of viewing
accommodation, and if so
c. how their numbers may be monitored, and, if necessary
d. how their numbers might be controlled so that the final capacity of any one area
is not exceeded.
Management should therefore determine the expected occupation levels of all areas, including
open land, and then ensure that the physical condition and safety management in place, and
the entry, exit and emergency exit capacities of the ground, are sufficient to accommodate
CALCULATIONS
CAPACITY
safely that number of people.
Failing that, management will need to control the number of spectators admitted so as to
ensure that this does not exceed a safe occupancy level.
It should also be remembered that, as emphasised in Section 1.2, management is responsible

for the safety of all people present in the ground, at all times during an event.
2.13 Factoring numbers of all people into emergency exit widths

Any exits in the ground designated for use in an emergency should be sufficiently wide,
not only for spectators but for all other people present to be able to exit within the specified
emergency egress time (see Chapter 10).
Therefore when calculating the emergency exit capacity of the ground (Step 5 in Figure 1 and
Step 6 in Figure 2) it will be necessary to factor in the numbers of staff, event officials and any
other people present in the ground.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 3.0 Management – responsibility and planning for safety
3.0 Management –
responsibility and
planning for safety
3.1 Management responsibility for safety

A fundamental principle of the Guide is that responsibility for all people present in a sports
ground during an event lies at all times with the ground management (see Section 1.4).
The management will normally be the owner of the ground, a sports ground management
company or a lessee of the ground, who in each case may not necessarily be the promoter
of the event.
While it is most often the case that representatives of the local authority and emergency
services will advise management on how to discharge this responsibility and, in certain
circumstances, may require measures to be taken in order to achieve reasonable standards
of safety, this does not exonerate the ground management from its responsibility for the
safety, security and service of all people present at the ground.
As stated in Section 1.3, the terms ‘safety’ and ‘security’ are often confused or even used
interchangeably. Yet experience demonstrates that security is, in practice, a subset of
safety, and as such should be taken into account by ground management when drawing up
contingency plans.
MANAGEMENT
By demonstrating an awareness of security issues, and by being prepared, the management
and staff at a sports ground can make a positive contribution towards the provision of a
safe experience.
If they do not demonstrate such awareness, however, or prove unable to respond effectively,
this might result in a reduction in the (S) factor, and therefore of the ground capacity.
3.2 Demonstrating that responsibility

Safety should not be seen as a set of rules or conditions imposed by others, but rather as
standards established from within that reflect a safety culture at the ground. A positive
attitude demonstrated by the ground management is therefore crucial in ensuring that safety
policies are carried out effectively and willingly.
Safety, moreover, should be a standing item on the agenda of every board or management
meeting, for while the responsibility for undertaking safety duties may be delegated to others,
the chair and board members (or their equivalent in the organisational hierarchy) still bear
ultimate responsibility for the safety of all people present in the ground.
Contents
3.3 Meeting that responsibility

The management responsibilities described in this chapter, and referred to in later chapters,
fall into the following basic categories, each of which the ground management should
address in establishing a safety management culture.
a. Legislation
Management should be aware of legislation relating to:
i. the safety of sports grounds (see Section 1.1 and Bibliography)
ii. if applicable under safety of sports grounds legislation, the requirements of

the safety certificate
iii. licensable activities authorised under the Licensing Act 2003 (see Section 3.32)
iv. health and safety at work (see Section 3.38)
v. fire safety (see Section 3.39 and Chapter 15)
vi. equalities (see Section 3.40)
vii. civil contingencies (see Bibliography)
viii. children and young people (see Section 3.28)
ix. Building Regulations
x. any other legislation that may have relevant safety implications.
b. Staffing
Management should:
i. draw up a safety management structure – that is, a chain of command

(see Section 3.6)
ii. appoint a competent Safety Officer and deputy (see Sections 3.7–3.9)
MANAGEMENT
iii. draw up, and keep under review a Stewarding Plan (see Section 4.12)
iv. draw up, and keep under review, job descriptions for all posts holding safety duties,
and resource such posts
v. ensure all operational safety related posts are held by appropriately trained and
competent persons
vi. conduct a risk assessment before each event to determine the number, location and
duties of safety staff (see Section 3.11).
c. Planning
Management should:
i. draw up an Operations Manual (see Section 3.4), to include a Spectator Safety Policy,
also known as an Event Safety Policy (see Section 3.5)
ii. provide and equip a room or separate facility within the ground to house a control
point, to serve as the hub of the safety management’s communications network
(see Section 16.5)
iii. draw up contingency plans (see Sections 3.15, 3.16 and Figure 3)
iv. draw up a Counter Terrorism Plan (see Section 3.18)
Contents
v. agree the role, and any actions to be taken, should a situation arise that requires
activation of the emergency plan drafted by the emergency services (see Section 3.20)
vi. agree a Statement of Intent with the relevant police service (see Section 3.24)
vii. draw up a Crowd Disorder and Anti-Social Behaviour Plan (see Section 3.27)
viii. draw up a Safeguarding Plan for children, young persons and adults at risk
(see Section 3.28)
ix. draw up a Ticketing Strategy (see Section 3.30)
x. for each event, draw up an Event Management Plan (see Section 3.36)
xi. agree procedures for accommodating all spectators, including disabled people,
adults at risk, the elderly, families and children and, where appropriate, spectators
unfamiliar with the ground
xii. agree service level agreements with all specialist agencies, such as those providing
personnel for medical support, security and stewarding, specifying minimum staff
numbers, plus their required level of training and competency
xiii. keep the Safety Officer informed in good time of all proposals and material works
taking place at the sports ground, and not make unqualified assumptions about the
likely effect of these works on safety
xiv. develop strategies for business continuity management in accordance with BS 22301.
d. Risk assessment
Throughout the Guide reference is made to the need for management to conduct risk
assessments (see for example Sections 15.7 and 16.22).
This includes the requirement to carry out specific risk assessments for all events,
including any ancillary activities (for example, pre or post event entertainments). A
risk assessment should not impose a burden but should encourage the formulation of
practical, systematic action plans to reduce the level of risk to people present in the ground.
MANAGEMENT
Risk assessments should be undertaken by competent persons with the appropriate
skills and experience. Specialist advice may need to be sought, including from the relevant
authorities, but members of the management’s safety team should contribute their
own experience and knowledge of the ground being assessed, including its operation
during events.
Risk assessment should consist of the following steps, which should be documented:
i. identify hazards to which all people at the ground may be exposed
ii. evaluate the risks and decide whether the existing precautions and control measures
are adequate and, if not, what additional control measures should be put in place
iii. record the findings and implement preventative and/or protective measures
iv. assess and review the adequacy and effectiveness of such measures, and revise them
where necessary.
Experience has shown that hazardous situations may develop on event days that have
not been identified in the pre-event risk assessment. It is therefore recommended that
management be alert to the need to conduct a dynamic, or ongoing risk assessment
throughout the duration of an event, including both its immediate buildup and its
aftermath. Such ongoing risk assessments should be documented.
Contents
Further guidance on risk assessment is available from the Health and Safety Executive,
and from the publication Safety Management, available from the SGSA. For further
information on fire risk assessments, see Section 15.7.
e. Monitoring and records

Management should:
i. record, using standard forms, all incidents and any circumstances which may have
had the potential to cause physical injury or harm, ensure that subsequent remedial
actions are prioritised and monitored, and maintain an audit trail
ii. maintain records, using standard forms, of each event in respect of the event itself, the
stewarding operation, the fabric of the ground and first aid and medical provision
iii. conduct periodic safety audits and reviews, in particular after a major event, and,
if necessary, draw up an action list
iv. ensure that no other management decisions or policies compromise safety.
f. Notifying the local authority

Where a safety certificate is in force the management should ensure that details of all
consultations and plans between them and the police, fire, ambulance services and with
the local health authority, and all training and exercises, are notified to the local authority.
3.4 Operations Manual

Irrespective of whether a sports ground is covered by a safety certificate, ground
management should draw up an Operations Manual which sets out the procedures intended to
ensure the reasonable safety of all people present during regular events held at the ground.
Rather than utilise a generic document, or one prepared for use at another ground, the
Operations Manual should relate to the sports ground in question.
It is recommended that the Operations Manual be presented in clearly defined sections or

modules, so as to be easily updated and amended. For example, the Manual will need to be
amended or supplemented by an event specific management plan (see Section 3.36).
MANAGEMENT
In preparing the Operations Manual, management should also consider avoiding the use
of colour combinations and backgrounds that may lead to any of its contents being
misunderstood by people with colour blindness (see online Appendix C).
The key safety management procedures that should be addressed in the Operations Manual
are as follows:
a. the management’s Spectator Safety, or Event Safety Policy (see Section 3.5)
b. the safety management structure (see Section 3.6)
c. capacity calculations (see Chapter 2)
d. site plans/drawings (see Section 2.1)
e. risk assessments for
i. regular events
ii. pre-event activities (see Section 3.34)
iii. specific events or activities (see Section 3.3.d)
Contents
f. the Stewarding Plan (see Section 3.12)
g. all contingency plans (see Section 3.15)
h. the Counter Terrorism Plan (see Section 3.18)
i. details of training and exercising (see Section 3.21)
j. any segregation policy (see Section 3.26)
k. the Crowd Disorder and Anti-Social Behaviour Plan (see Section 3.27)
l. the Safeguarding Plan (see Section 3.28)
m. the Ticketing Strategy (see Section 3.30)
n. an Event Management Plan template (see Section 3.36)
o. the Traffic Management Plan (see Section 3.36)
p. details of co-ordination plans for Zone Ex (see Section 6.10)
q. the Fire Safety Plan (see Section 15.6)
r. the Communications Plan (see Section 16.1)
s. all planned preventative maintenance/tests/inspections (see Section 17.2)
t. the Medical Plan (see Section 18.5)
u. details of any commercial and non-sporting activities.
Note that this list is not intended to be exhaustive, but seeks to illustrate the range of
procedures expected to form the basis of an Operations Manual. Further guidance on the
contents of an Operations Manual can be found in Safety Management, published by the SGSA.
3.5 Spectator Safety or Event Safety Policy
MANAGEMENT
It is recommended that ground management should have, set out within its Operations Manual,
a written Spectator Safety Policy, also known as an Event Safety Policy. (In effect, this policy will
be an extension of that drawn up in respect of employees under the health and safety at work
legislation referred to in Section 3.38).
Such a policy demonstrates that management has devoted thought and effort towards the
safety and welfare of all those present at the ground during an event. Having to write down the
policy helps concentrate the mind. It also shows whether the policy has been fully thought out
in practical terms.
When drawing up a Spectator Safety Policy, management should consider the following.
a. The policy should explain the management’s philosophy on safety culture and its safety
objectives, thereby demonstrating that from the highest level of management downwards
there is a positive attitude to public safety.
b. The policy’s terms and wording should be agreed by the management.
c. The policy should make clear:
i. the chain of command within the safety management team (see Section 3.6)
ii. with whom lies ultimate responsibility for safety at the ground
Contents
iii. to whom that responsibility is delegated
iv. how the safety policy is to be implemented and communicated
v. how the safety policy is to be audited, by internal or external means, and reviewed.
d. Copies of the policy should be distributed and explained to all members of staff, contract
staff, part-time staff and voluntary workers.
e. The policy should be reviewed by management on an annual basis and revised as

necessary following any incident in which safety might have been compromised.
f. If a safety certificate is in place, when drawing up its Spectator Safety Policy management
should consult with the local authority to ensure that no aspect of the policy conflicts with
any conditions set out within the safety certificate.
Once drawn up and agreed, the Spectator Safety Policy and any subsequent revisions should
be signed and dated by the person identified with ultimate responsibility on behalf of ground
management.
Further advice on how a Spectator Safety Policy should be drawn up is available in Safety
Management, published by the SGSA. A template for a Spectator Safety Policy is also available
from the SGSA website.
3.6 Safety management structure, or chain of command

In order for the Spectator Safety Policy to be implemented effectively it is essential that the
management establishes a safety management structure, or chain of command. This is to
ensure that:
a. those having to implement the policy recognise their role within the chain of command
and have a clear understanding of the decision making process in safety matters
b. management is able to control and supervise the safety management operation
c. safety at the event can be quickly and accurately monitored
MANAGEMENT
d. liaison with other agencies follows agreed procedures
e. follow-up action on structural or safety management issues can be co-ordinated

efficiently.
3.7 Appointing a Safety Officer

Management is responsible for appointing a competent Safety Officer. This person must
be given a detailed job description, clearly identifying the functions of his or her post. It is
essential that a Safety Officer is not given any additional duties on an event day which might
reduce his or her effectiveness in the principal role. Nor should the Safety Officer take on such
duties during an event.
Where a safety certificate is in force, the local authority should be informed of the
appointment.
Contents
3.8 Requirements of a Safety Officer

In order to discharge properly his or her responsibilities, a Safety Officer should meet the
requirements set out below.
a. Status
The Safety Officer should be recognised as being in overall control of operational safety
management issues on an event day. On non-event days, the Safety Officer should be
regarded as a principal adviser to the management on all spectator-related safety issues.
b. Competence and training

The Safety Officer should be a competent person who possesses the appropriate skills and
experience for the post.
For example, the Safety Officer should be able to draft, implement and review the various
pieces of documentation listed in this chapter (concerning safety management, event
planning, risk assessments and so on) and show an understanding of the key requirements
of the Guide generally, such as the determination of a safe capacity for each event (as
detailed in Chapter 2).
Examples of previous learning that may lead to the required level of professional
competency include the completion of:
i. a Level 4 NVQ in safety management (this may be considered as a minimum standard

of qualification needed to demonstrate competency) and/or
ii. courses in spectator management run by the police service for serving members
iii. courses in health and safety management
iv. courses in public safety
v. degrees in risk or event management.
Note that if a candidate does not hold a Level 4 NVQ qualification, the courses he or she has
taken, and the qualifications he or she might hold, should still be mapped against the national
occupational standards for safety set out at Level 4, and those set out in Annex A of the Council
MANAGEMENT
of Europe’s Standing Committee on Safety, Security and Service at Football Matches and other
Sports Events. Any such assessments should be recorded and retained, and provided to the
local authority upon request.
It is further emphasised, however, that qualifications alone should not be the only factor to be
considered by management when assessing a candidate for the post of Safety Officer. Nor
should the lack of a qualification be a factor in the determination of the (S) factor. Rather it
should be recognised that Safety Officers typically enter the profession by a variety of career
paths, and may bring with them knowledge and experience from other fields that are fully
transferable.
Moreover, once an appointment is made, it is equally important that the management

encourages and facilitates continual professional development on the part of the
Safety Officer.
Contents
c. Authority
On event days, a Safety Officer must have the authority to make any safety-related
decisions without having to refer to senior management, board members or event
organisers.
d. Accountability and access to management

A Safety Officer should be directly accountable to the person with ultimate responsibility
for safety, to whom the right of direct access is essential.
e. Identification and communication

On event days it is essential that the Safety Officer is easily identifiable, and can be
contacted immediately at all times. If it is necessary during an event for the Safety Officer
to leave the control point (see Chapter 16), a competent person should be left on duty in
the control point. The Safety Officer should also remain in direct contact with that person,
either by radio or telephone.
f. Dual responsibilities
Where the role of Safety Officer is combined with that of facilities management, care must
be taken to avoid any confusion of roles. On event days there must be a safety management
structure in place to ensure that any issues relating to facilities can be resolved without
impacting upon that individual’s responsibilities or capacities as a Safety Officer.
g. Workload
It is highly unlikely that the work undertaken by a Safety Officer can be done on event
days only. A certain amount of preparation is essential, even at smaller grounds where
the Safety Officer might be employed on a part-time basis. The Safety Officer must
therefore be able, and be permitted, to commit sufficient time to undertake his or her full
responsibilities, in addition to the time spent attending events.
Furthermore, Safety Officers must not be assigned to an event if they have had no input
into the safety management planning for that event.
h. Performance and the (S) factor

If the Safety Officer cannot effectively carry out his or her duties in full, the (S) factor
should be reduced.
MANAGEMENT
3.9 Deputising
Because of the key role played by a Safety Officer, it is essential that he or she has one or
more competent deputies with sufficient training, experience and knowledge to serve in the
Safety Officer’s absence, and to share duties on event days.
Any deputy should be encouraged to have, or to be working towards, a Level 4 NVQ in safety
management, or any of the equivalent courses listed in Section 3.8.b.
In order to be accredited as a deputy, an individual should have worked under the direct
supervision of the Safety Officer for a number of events, and demonstrated the necessary
degree of competence before taking charge in their own right. When in charge, a deputy
should be vested with all the authority normally held by the Safety Officer.
To ensure resilience, deputies should also be appointed for other key supervisory roles in the
chain of command.
Contents
3.10 Staffing and resilience

The resilience of the management’s safety plans can be significantly compromised by the non-
availability of key safety personnel on an event day. For that reason, it is common for safety
certificates to state that, in the absence of a named Safety Officer, the capacity of the ground
will be reduced to zero.
Management should therefore ensure that plans are in place to cover the absence or
non-availability of all key personnel.
The potential non-availability of key personnel should also form an element of management’s
contingency plans (see Section 3.15).
3.11 Staffing – risk assessment

While members of the public are inside the sports ground, it is the responsibility of
management to ensure that sufficient safety staff are on duty.
A detailed risk assessment should be undertaken for each event before determining the final
number, location and duties of all safety staff, including stewards. Those details should then be
set out in the Event Management Plan (see Section 3.36).
The event specific risk assessment should include consideration of the following factors:
a. the spectator profile and behavioural history
b. the type of event
c. the anticipated attendance
d. the safety staff’s level of familiarity with the ground
e. the likelihood of a security threat
f. the duration and timing of the event
g. changes to the sports ground, for example the erection of temporary structures
MANAGEMENT
h. any other perceived increases or decreases in risk.
3.12 Stewarding Plan

Following the risk assessment outlined in Section 3.11, it is the responsibility of management
to draw up a Stewarding Plan. This plan will set out the proposed number of stewards to be
deployed, according to the size and configuration of the ground, the nature of the event and
other relevant factors as listed above. It will also set out the roles each steward will take and
where he or she will be deployed.
The number of stewards deployed should not fall below the minimum number specified
in the Stewarding Plan, or in the ground’s safety certificate.
Further information on stewarding is provided in Chapter 4.
Advice on developing stewarding plans can also be found in Safety Management,

published by the SGSA.
Contents
3.13 Responsibility for training and competence

Ground management has the responsibility for ensuring that all safety personnel, whether
in-house or provided under contract, are competent and, where not already qualified, have
received sufficient training to carry out the duties and responsibilities assigned to them
(see Section 4.10).
3.14 Keeping records for each event

Management is responsible for keeping the following records:
a. details of all pre-event inspections (as listed in Section 5.9)
b. details of the pre-event briefing (see Section 4.16) and, where appropriate, any training
given to stewards
c. the number of spectators admitted to the ground, and, where appropriate, to each section
of the ground (see Chapter 7)
d. details of medical personnel and resources in place (see Chapter 18)
e. incident forms recording any accident or incident which might have led to an accident
(see Section 4.17 and 18.17)
f. details of all first aid or medical treatment provided, while preserving medical
confidentiality regarding the identity of those treated (see Section 18.17)
g. details of all emergency drills or evacuation exercises, plus any incident which tested
the contingency plans
h. details of any unauthorised opening of an exit door or gate
i. details of any assumption of control by the police
j. details of any defects relating to the safety of the ground arising from the event,
plus details of any remedial action taken
MANAGEMENT
k. reports of any significant motion of the structure (see Section 5.5)
l. details of all fires and fire alarm activations
m. details of all emergency systems failures
n. details for any evidence gathering for further action by the authorities
o. completion of any post event reports where applicable.
The above list is for guidance only and is not intended to be comprehensive in
all circumstances.
3.15 Contingency planning

Contingency planning is the process by which the management identifies specific
circumstances or incidents that might prejudice public safety or disrupt normal operations,
and then draws up structured and appropriate plans to deal with those situations.
Contingency plans should not be confused with emergency plans, which are drawn up
by local emergency responders (see Section 3.20).
Contents
A list of circumstances or incidents to be considered when drawing up contingency plans

follows in Section 3.16 and Figure 3.
The following recommendations should also be noted.
a. It is essential that the management, the Safety Officer, his or her deputy and the relevant
stewards have a full working knowledge of all contingency plans.
b. All other staff, including those with no safety related duties, should also be made aware of
the procedures set out within contingency plans.
c. Management should consult with local emergency responders to ensure that in the event
of contingency plans being enacted, there would be no confusion or conflict as to the
respective roles played by each party.
d. All contingency plans should be tested, individually or collectively, on a regular basis

– and at least annually – by carrying out both desktop and live exercises. Where
appropriate, these exercises should be carried out in consultation with the relevant
authorities and emergency responders (see Section 3.21).
e. Contingency plans should be reviewed after any incident, be it significant or a near miss.
A log of all such incidents, and of all tests and exercises, plus any resulting amendments,
should be kept.
f. Following each review, the contingency plans and logs should be presented to the board
of directors (or equivalent body) for ratification.
g. For temporary sports grounds, or venues that host sports events on an irregular basis,
it is strongly recommended that contingency plans are tested prior to the event.
h. Contingency planning should include provision for dealing with disruptive incidents
that may affect business continuity.
Further information on contingency planning can be found in the publication Safety

Management, available from the SGSA.
MANAGEMENT
3.16 Suggested headings for contingency plans
Contingency plans should cover a broad range of foreseeable circumstances and
incidents. Although the range will vary according to the type of sports ground, its location,
an assessment of the hazards associated with the ground, and the nature of activities or
events being staged, Figure 3 provides a list of potential circumstances and incidents
as a guide for contingency planning.
While not intended to be comprehensive, it is based on years of experience and on incidents

that have arisen at sports grounds in recent years.
Concerning major incidents, management should recognise that, in order to prepare for
a situation that escalates and therefore requires a higher level of response – be it terrorist
related or otherwise – the contingency plans should include actions agreed with emergency
responders to declare a major incident (which will in turn lead to the implementation of
appropriate emergency plans, as explained in Section 3.20).
Further guidance on contingency planning in respect of terrorism – often referred to as

counter terrorism – is provided in the following sections.
Contents
Figure 3 Suggested headings for contingency plans
STRUCTURES MAJOR INCIDENTS
structural failure fire

structural corrosion bomb threat
wind damage suspect package
impact gas leak
subsidence chemical incident
WEATHER CONDITIONS LOSS OF SERVICES / UTILITIES
heavy rain/ lightning electricity

flooding emergency backup power
high winds gas
snow water
ice drainage issues
extreme heat
CROWD RELATED INCIDENTS: INTERNAL
EQUIPMENT / SYSTEMS crowd surging /crushing
fire detection / alarm systems overcrowding in concourses
emergency lighting unauthorised incursion onto pitch or area
of activity
CCTV system
persistent standing in seated areas
turnstile counting system
crowd disorder
electronic door release system
medical incident
MANAGEMENT
floodlights
lockdown owing to external factors
lifts /escalators
business continuity CROWD RELATED INCIDENTS: EXTERNAL
COMMUNICATION FAILURES large-scale late arrivals

large-scale ticket forgeries
control point
large-scale ticketless arrivals
public address system
external telecommunications STAFFING
internal telecommunications
absence of key safety personnel
landlines /mobiles
steward shortages
safety radio system
electronic display system
IP/digital infrastructure
Contents
3.17 Safety and security

As emphasised in Sections 1.3 and 3.1, the terms ‘safety’ and ‘security’ are often confused
or even used interchangeably. Yet experience demonstrates that security is indeed a subset
of safety, and as such should be taken into account by ground management when drawing
up contingency plans.
By demonstrating an awareness of security issues, and by being prepared, the management

and staff at a sports grounds can make a positive contribution towards the provision of a safe
experience. If they do not demonstrate such awareness, however, or prove unable to respond
effectively to security threats, this might result in a reduction in the (S) factor (see Section
3.41), and therefore of the ground capacity.
3.18 Counter Terrorism Plan

Threats to security occur in many different forms, for example in the launching of a terrorist
attack on specific buildings or people, in attacks on information or communication systems,
or in the issue of threats or hoaxes. Similarly, there may be a threat to security at a sports
ground arising from threats or incidents taking place elsewhere.
All such threats will require the deployment of additional resources, with potential
implications for spectator safety. As such, they should be considered when drawing up
contingency plans.
Counter Terrorism Plans should provide for responses appropriate to the published
threat level:
threat level assessment management response level

low/moderate normal
substantial/severe heightened
critical exceptional
An example of how a Counter Terrorism Plan might be graduated according to the threat level
MANAGEMENT
is the screening or searching of spectators prior to entry. The higher the level of threat, the
more thorough the screening or searching regime is likely to be. To deal with such situations,
the plans will need to provide for the extra deployment of stewards and for spectators to be
warned in advance.
Detailed guidance on these issues is available from the National Counter Terrorism Security
Office (NaCTSO). In particular NaCTSO’s advice on protective security, updated regularly,
will assist ground management to draw up, enhance and review their policies on counter
terrorism.
Such measures should be integrated, wherever possible, with existing contingency and
emergency plans.
Senior management should also be aware of regular briefings made by NaCTSO on security
related matters, and should ensure that all staff at the sports ground are provided with
security and counter terrorism training on a regular basis, using training material provided
by NaCTSO.
Further advice relating to a particular sports ground can also be sought from regional
Counter Terrorism Security Advisers (CTSA).
Contents
3.19 Security overlay

Measures undertaken to enhance security at a sports ground and its surrounds –
collectively referred to as ‘security overlay’ – must never compromise spectator safety.
For example, the deployment of hostile vehicle mitigation (HVM) measures (such as concrete
barriers) should not impede crowd flows nor emergency vehicle access routes.
At a ground where a safety certificate has been issued, any proposed security overlay
arrangements should be discussed with the certifying authority, prior to installation.
3.20 Emergency or major incident planning

An emergency plan, also known as a major incident plan, is developed and maintained by
Category 1 responders as defined by the Civil Contingencies Act 2004. It is drawn up to
address a range of major incidents – for example, an explosion, toxic release, large fire or
terrorist incident – that might occur either at a specific sports ground or in the area in which
the sports ground is located.
An emergency plan should not be confused with the contingency plans that have been drawn
up by the ground management (see Section 3.15). However, the two sets of plans must be
compatible.
The ground management should reach agreement with the emergency services as to what
the role of the ground safety team will be, should an emergency situation arise within the
sports ground or in its vicinity, and any actions that should be taken.
3.21 Training and exercises

It is not sufficient merely to draw up contingency plans, or to have emergency plans in
place. As required in the Operations Manual (see Section 3.4), staff must also be trained to
understand and perform their roles under those plans, and, once trained, to participate in
exercises. Such training and exercising may also be a requirement of a safety certificate.
MANAGEMENT
Exercises for contingency and emergency plans have three main purposes:
a. to validate the plans
b. to develop staff competencies and awareness, and give them practice in carrying out their
roles in the plans
c. to test well-established procedures.
Exercises should be carried out on a regular basis, and at least annually, to ensure that
procedures laid out in the contingency and emergency plans operate smoothly. Records
should be kept of the duration of the exercise, of the instruction provided and of the personnel
involved. Management should seek to involve emergency responders where appropriate.
Further guidance on conducting training and exercises can be found in the publication
Safety Management, available from the SGSA.
Contents
3.22 Safety audit

In addition to training exercises, the inspections and tests recommended in Chapter 5, and
the routine monitoring of safety performance through inspection and observation, it is the
responsibility of management to ensure that audits are carried out at least once a year.
The intention of an audit is to make a deeper and more critical appraisal of all elements of the
safety management system.
Such audits should be conducted by persons who are, preferably, independent of the
procedures being audited, but who may be from within the organisation.
The findings of the safety audit should be documented and circulated to all concerned for any
follow-up or remedial action to be taken.
The audit should cover the following matters.
a. Allocation of responsibility
Is the ground’s safety management structure, or chain of command, clearly defined?
Is it functioning? Does everyone understand their own roles and responsibilities?
b. Integration
Is an understanding of spectator safety, and of health and safety, ingrained within all
sectors of the organisation, and not only those with specific safety roles?
c. Employee involvement
Is there in place an effective means or forum for all members of the organisation to
contribute to the formulation and application of the management’s Spectator Safety Policy?
d. Risk assessment
Are the results of all risk assessments and any follow-up measures being recorded and
subjected to an annual review?
e. Communication and documentation

Is incoming information relating to safety being documented properly, and communicated
effectively throughout the organisation?
MANAGEMENT
f. Inspections/tests
Have the results of all safety-related inspections and tests been included within the audit?
g. Competency and training

Can it be shown that all staff forming part of the safety management structure, including
contracted staff, are competent and have received the appropriate training, including
participation in training exercises?
The above list is for guidance only and is not intended to be comprehensive in all
circumstances.
Management should also be aware that the quality of a safety audit could be taken into
consideration when it comes to applying the (S) factor used in calculating capacities. Not
least, audits that have been well conducted and rigorous reflect the safety management
culture in place and demonstrate a proactive approach from within the organisation, rather
than one that results only from external statutory monitoring or imposition.
Contents
3.23 Policing
While responsibility for the safety of all people present in the ground lies at all times with the
management, at certain sports grounds and for certain events the presence of the police may
be required, or requested, to maintain public order and prevent the commission of offences.
As such, management should give all possible assistance and provide reasonable facilities for
the police within the control point (see Section 16.5).
Depending on the event taking place, it may also be beneficial to provide additional facilities,
such as an area for briefing.
It is emphasised that management should not plan for, or rely on the presence of police
officers in order to overcome inadequacies in the safety management operation at the
ground. Nor should the presence of the police in itself be a justification for raising a
ground’s capacity.
Whether there is a police presence or not, responsibility for the enforcement of ground
regulations remains with the management.
3.24 Statement of Intent

If there is to be a police presence in or at the sports ground, management should consult
with the police in advance and draw up a Statement of Intent. This statement should set out
the division of responsibilities and functions between the two parties and make clear who
will assume responsibility in particular circumstances.
It is emphasised that the Statement of Intent is a management statement and not a legal
document. It does not constitute a conscious or implied request for special police services.
3.25 Accommodating visiting spectators

At all grounds there is a likelihood that spectators who are unfamiliar with the ground will be
in attendance, particularly at special events. However, at grounds where supporters of visiting
clubs attend, it is recommended that advance planning takes place between the ground
MANAGEMENT
management, the visiting clubs and/or their supporters’ groups, and the police, to ensure that
visiting supporters, including those who are disabled or at risk, are:
a. directed and welcomed to the ground
b. directed to the appropriate entrances
c. accommodated safely
d. always kept clearly informed of any special arrangements made for them inside the
ground and on their departure.
Liaison between the management and police may be necessary to ensure that the likely
number of visiting supporters is known. In consultation with the police, management should
also determine clear policies on the accommodation of visiting supporters and on appropriate
ticketing arrangements. Debriefing meetings should be held to evaluate these arrangements
and, if necessary, formulate changes for future events.
When large numbers of spectators are expected from a non-English speaking country,
management should provide verbal or written information in the language of the
visiting spectator.
Contents
3.26 Segregation
For some team sports there may be a need for ground management to adopt a policy of
segregating (or physically separating) groups of rival supporters inside the ground. In such
instances the arrangements for admitting spectators should be drawn up in consultation with
the local authority and police, and be carefully controlled to ensure that as far as possible the
segregation policy is effective.
Where considered necessary, a neutral or sterile zone may be provided between groups of
spectators. However, in all cases it is recommended that the method of segregation used
should be flexible (see Sections 12.25.i and 13.18).
Management should ensure that each segregated area offers full access to sufficient toilet
and catering facilities. It should not be necessary for spectators in segregated areas to have
to cross barriers or seek special permission to use such facilities, with the exception only of
spectators who require access to a Changing Places toilet facility.
Each segregated area must be self-contained in terms of ingress and egress

(see Chapter 10).
It is further recommended that provision is made for visiting disabled supporters to sit within
areas allocated to visiting supporters (that is, they should not have to sit amongst home
supporters). Moreover, where possible, spaces for visiting supporters who are wheelchair
users, and their companions, should be provided in areas of standing accommodation
allocated to visiting supporters. Also wherever possible, access routes for visiting disabled
supporters should not pass through, or in front of areas reserved for home supporters.
3.27 Crowd Disorder and Anti-Social Behaviour Plan

Crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour have the potential to cause harm or injury at
a sports ground. As such it is recommended that ground management should, following
consultation with the police and a risk assessment, draw up a Crowd Disorder and
Anti-Social Behaviour Plan, setting out clearly defined procedures for reducing,
responding to and dealing with any incidents.
MANAGEMENT
The Crowd Disorder and Anti-Social Behaviour Plan should:
a. identify the types of crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour that are likely to result
in harm or injury to those present at the ground
b. explain the management’s objectives and the means of achieving them – these objectives
could include an ongoing commitment to reduce the likelihood of such incidents occurring,
and identify the ways in which the impact of such incidents will be monitored
c. identify which member of the management has responsibility for dealing with matters
of crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour at the ground
d. identify who will be actioning the management’s plan
e. outline the chain of command in relation to these matters
f. clarify matters of primacy when police are at the ground during an event
g. describe how perpetrators are identified and reported or handed over to the police
h. describe the collection and preservation of evidence and witness identification
Contents
i. describe how and when police are to be contacted for any of these matters when they
are not in attendance at the ground
j. outline responses to particular types of crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour
k. at those sports grounds where individual spectators attend on a regular basis, include a
sliding scale of sanctions (for example, refusal of entry or a long term ban) for dealing with
misdemeanours or poor behaviour
l. set out the management’s policy regarding the treatment, care and support of those aged
under 18 and of adults at risk, including any victims or witnesses
m. set out the management’s policy for ensuring that records are kept of all ejections and
detentions – including details of the name, time, location and reason for the ejection or
detention, and any subsequent actions taken (for example a ban on a specific individual)
– in order to assist the relevant authorities if an offence has been committed
n. ensure that stewards are trained to respond to the needs of disabled spectators in the
event of crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour.
3.28 Safeguarding Plan

Management should be aware of the need to safeguard certain categories of spectators.
These include children, young persons and adults at risk who may be unaccompanied or
attending in large numbers as the result of ticket offers or other promotions.
Management should therefore draw up a Safeguarding Plan, and, if appropriate, an event-

specific Safeguarding Plan, taking into consideration the following:
a. ticketing strategies and their likely effect (see Section 3.30)
b. searching policies and procedures
c. entry policies concerning unaccompanied minors, and spectators bringing infants

to the event
MANAGEMENT
d. the suitability of areas designated for children and adults at risk
e. the need for staff working in such areas to undergo checks by the relevant national
body, such as the Disclosure and Barring Service (DBS) in England and Wales, Disclosure
Scotland, or Disclosures Northern Ireland
f. procedures for dealing with lost and found children and adults at risk
g. toilet provision
h. staffing levels – a higher ratio of stewards to spectators will be necessary
i. children and adults at risk might need more time to respond, particularly to safety
announcements and evacuation procedures
j. policies for dealing with/ejecting minors who breach ground regulations and/or commit
offences.
When drawing up a safeguarding plan, management should also be aware of their

responsibilities under the relevant pieces of legislation, including The Children Act 1989,
The Children Act 2004 (England and Wales), the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act
2006 and the Children and Young People (Scotland) Act 2014.
Contents
3.29 Safety in the wider management context

As stated in Section 3.2, safety should not be seen as a set of rules or conditions imposed
by others, but as standards set from within which reflect a safety culture at the ground.
In addition, the safety management of a ground should not be viewed in isolation.
By a process of consultation therefore, all branches of the ground management and event
day personnel should be made aware of the safety implications arising from their own
actions and policies.
The main areas of policy are outlined in the following sections.
3.30 Ticketing Strategy

A well considered and comprehensive Ticketing Strategy can contribute significantly
towards limiting the management’s exposure to risk, and help significantly towards the safe
management of spectators.
For this reason it is recommended that management review all elements of their Ticketing
Strategy to ensure that it assists, rather than hinders the safety management operation,
and that commercial considerations alone do not compromise the efforts of the safety
management team.
When developing a Ticketing Strategy management should consider the following issues:
a. Overview
i. Are all sections of the ground – that is, all aisles, rows and individual seats
– clearly marked or numbered, as per the ground plan and ticketing information?
ii. Is the Ticketing Strategy appropriate for the event in question?
iii. Is a capacity or near capacity attendance expected?
iv. Should the event be all-ticket?
v. Should tickets be available for sale on the day of the event?
MANAGEMENT
vi. Are general admission tickets to be sold?
vii. Does the management have in place a strategy for dealing with the consequences
of unreserved ticket sales? (see Section 7.10.d)
viii. Could the type of tickets on sale be easily counterfeited?
b. Offers/incentives
Can tickets be used to incentivise spectators to arrive by a certain time or via certain
modes of transport, thereby assisting in pre-event crowd flows?
c. Concessions
What is the management’s policy on the issuing and managing of concessionary
admission rates? (see Section 7.10)
d. Children
i. What is the management’s policy on the admission of accompanied children, including
babes in arms?
ii. Is there a lower age limit for accompanied children?
Contents
iii. What is the lower age limit for unaccompanied children?
iv. What is the management’s policy on the sale of tickets to, and the admission of,
unaccompanied children?
v. What plans are in place to safeguard an unaccompanied child with a ticket who is
denied access to the sports ground, or to a section of the ground, such as an area of
level standing, where children might be at risk?
vi. Where large numbers of children are in attendance, what is the acceptable ratio of
adults to children?
e. Ticket re-distribution/third party sales

i. Are tickets transferable and if so, are the conditions attached to their sale or
redistribution made clear?
ii. Could the sale or redistribution of tickets via third parties create risk, raise safety
management issues, compromise segregation policies or circumvent bans against
individuals?
f. Ticket information and design

i. Are clear, legible ground plans and approach routes printed on the tickets?
ii. If not, is sufficient supplementary information provided with the ticket, either in printed
or digital form, and/or in the form of signs, information boards and displayed maps?
iii. Does that part of the ticket retained by the spectator after passing through an
entry point clearly identify the location of the viewing accommodation for which
it has been issued?
iv. Are there elements of the ticket which rely solely on colour to convey information, such
as the identification of a route, or a stand? If so, accompanying text or symbols should
be added to avoid any misunderstanding by people with colour blindness (see online
Annex C).
g. Description of viewing accommodation

What is the management’s policy on the sale of tickets for:
MANAGEMENT
i. seats with restricted, or severely restricted views? (see Section 12.6)
ii. uncovered areas of viewing accommodation? (see Section 12.7 and 13.15)
h. Access control
i. Is there a need to establish a secure outer cordon at which tickets may be checked
and spectators searched before they arrive at the entrances to the ground?
ii. Are there controls at entry points to vet counterfeit tickets?
iii. Are there controls at entry points to detect duplicate tickets?
iv. Could any aspect of the control system compromise segregation policies?
v. Do the access control measures take into account the ingress of disabled people,
and are staff and stewards trained accordingly?
vi. Do the access control measures account for accredited persons who may not
have a ticket?
Contents
i. Special circumstances
Are there policies in place to deal with:
i. counterfeit tickets
ii. duplicate tickets
iii. the replacement of lost tickets
iv. the resale of returned tickets
v. the consequences of a postponed or cancelled event?
For further details of ticket-related matters, see Sections 7.10 and 12.25.a.
3.31 Sale of refreshments

In general spectator areas no refreshments should be served in containers such as glasses,
bottles or cans that might constitute a danger or be used as missiles.
Hot drinks should be dispensed in suitable containers, preferably with appropriate lids,
so as to minimise the risk of scalding or burns to spectators.
The design of refreshment facilities, including self service outlets, should be such that they
are accessible to disabled spectators, with counter areas positioned to ensure that general
circulation routes are not impeded by any resultant queues.
Counters designed for wheelchair users should not be more than 850mm above floor level,
with a clear space beneath the counter measuring at least 700mm in height above floor level,
and 300mm deep, as recommended by BS8300: Design of an accessible and inclusive built
environment.
For more guidance on servicing, cleaning and litter collection see Section 9.5.d.
3.32 Alcohol
MANAGEMENT
The sale and consumption of alcohol at sports grounds is subject to various pieces of
legislation; for example in England and Wales The Licensing Act 2003 and The Sporting
Events (Control of Alcohol etc) Act 1985, in Scotland the Criminal Law (Consolidation)
(Scotland) Act 1995, and in Northern Ireland the Justice Act (Northern Ireland) 2011,
sections 35–40, section 50 and Schedule 3 of the Act.
Management should therefore be familiar with the licensing regulations that apply to their
particular ground and to the events that take place in them.
Subject to the requirements of the relevant legislation, it is open to ground management to

determine its policy on the sale of alcohol, in consultation with the local authority and the
police, and in light of a risk assessment.
As a generality, where it is known that spectators are likely to consume alcohol, it is often
preferable to serve it inside the ground under controlled conditions. This reduces the risk of
spectators arriving at the last minute in an inebriated condition.
However, management should always be alert to the risk of a deterioration in behaviour as

the event progresses and should be prepared to stop or reduce the sale of alcohol where
necessary.
Contents
3.33 Commercial or non-sporting activities

Management has a direct responsibility to ensure that commercial or non-sporting activities
do not in any way compromise safety at the ground, either by creating any physical
obstructions, hindering the safety operation or endangering spectators.
Areas of concern include:
a. the extent to which an overlay of temporary facilities or infrastructure associated with the
event will impact on operational plans and the free flow of spectators
b. advertising hoardings, loudspeakers, media installations or any other item, permanent

or temporary, whose height, bulk or placement might obstruct sightlines and/or block or
reduce the visual prominence of emergency gates or openings
c. high volume and/or lengthy musical presentations which interrupt normal

communications between safety personnel at key moments
d. firework, lighting effects and other pyrotechnic presentations
e. the excitation of a structure by the activities of spectators (see Section 5.5).
Guidance on the safety implications of media provision is provided in Chapter 19. The use
of grounds for events other than sport is covered in the publication Alternative Uses of Sports
Grounds, available from the SGSA.
3.34 Pre-event activities

All pre-event activities should be the subject of a site specific risk assessment. For example
it is common practice for players in various sports to go onto the field of play to warm up. As
those present may not be watching or paying attention to the activity, consideration should
be given to their protection during this period. The provision of protective netting, or of notices
and/or announcements over the public address system may reduce the possibility of people
being injured by balls during the warm ups.
Consideration should also be given to the avoidance of warm ups in parts of the ground
MANAGEMENT
where disabled spectators are located.
At grounds such as racecourses, where spectators sometimes have access to, or cross the
area of activity, management will need to ensure that they are not doing so at times when
they might be at risk, for example from horses cantering up to the start.
Management should also ensure that the actions and behaviour of mascots do not adversely
affect the safety of spectators.
3.35 Test events

When opening a new sports ground, or section of a ground, or after carrying out any major
alterations or extensions, including any significant increase to the ground’s capacity,
management should stage test events.
Such events need to demonstrate that the new infrastructure can accommodate all
spectators safely, and that the safety management team has been prepared and briefed
adequately.
Contents
Where applicable, the test event will also need to meet the requirements of the certifying
authority. In particular, agreement should be reached in advance as to what percentage of the
final capacity of the ground, or of the new or altered section, should be occupied during the
test event, and whether additional test events with increased percentages will be necessary,
before a final safety certificate can be issued.
Alternatively, an interim safety certificate may be issued with a reduced capacity for
test events.
During test events it is important for representatives of the certifying authority and, if
possible, other members of the Safety Advisory Group (see Glossary), to assess all the new
safety systems in place, and to observe how spectators interact with their new surroundings.
This should include the monitoring of:
a. flow rates through turnstiles or entry points
b. crowd flows through stairs, gangways and vomitories
c. the operation of all new safety systems (such as CCTV cameras, PA systems,
communication systems and emergency lighting)
d. the stewarding operation
e. amenities, such as screens, catering outlets and toilets
f. the operation of lifts and escalators
g. the medical provision
h. crowd flows when spectators depart from or return to the viewing accommodation
i. crowd flows when spectators enter into exit routes
j. feedback from spectators
k. feedback from members of the safety management team.
A full debrief of the test event should then take place prior to the issuing of a final
MANAGEMENT
safety certificate.
3.36 Event Management Plan

As stated in Section 3.4, one element of the management’s Operations Manual should be the
drawing up of an Event Management Plan template that can be used as the basis for event
specific documents, setting out in detail all the operational procedures required for the safe
management of the event.
These details, which should be determined following the carrying out of an event-specific risk
assessment, should make clear such information as:
a. the number of spectators expected (if appropriate, including visiting supporters)
b. the Ticketing Strategy (see Section 3.30)
c. the event timings, including when entry points will be opened and closed
d. the Stewarding Plan, including the number and locations of stewards (see Chapter 4)
Contents
e. the Fire Safety Plan, including pre-event checklists (see Section 15.6)
f. the identity of personnel required to be in post in the control point (see Chapter 16)
g. the Communication Plan, including radio channels and emergency codes (see Chapter 16)
h. the Medical Plan, including the numbers and roles of medical personnel (see Chapter 18)
i. the Crowd Disorder and Anti-Social Behaviour Plan (see Section 3.27)
j. if appropriate, a Traffic Management Plan for the event.
Other areas of responsibility as outlined in this chapter might also need to be set out in
the Event Management Plan, depending, for example, on the expected spectator profile, the
prevailing weather conditions, the current terrorism threat level assessment, and any other
event related specifics.
For further details of what to consider in drawing up an Event Management Plan see the
publication Safety Management, available from the SGSA.
3.37 Other management responsibilities

In addition to the responsibilities for safety outlined in this and the following two chapters on
management, the attention of ground management is also drawn to the following:
a. the need to be aware of relevant legislation (see Sections 1.1–1.2, and 3.38–3.40)
b. the specific requirements and criteria of particular national and international sporting
bodies and tournament organisers – note, however, that the advice in the Guide should
take precedence over such requirements and criteria.
3.38 Health and safety at work legislation

The safety management of a sports ground and its spectators should not be viewed in
isolation, but as part of a total, integrated system for managing health and safety within the
organisation as a whole.
MANAGEMENT
Management should be aware of its responsibilities under Section Three of the Health and
Safety at Work etc. Act 1974, which states that, ‘It shall be the duty of every employer to
conduct his undertaking in such a way as to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that
persons not in his employment who may be affected thereby are not thereby exposed to risks
to their health or safety’.
More specifically:
a. Written statement of policy

Organisations with five or more employees must prepare a written statement of their
general policy, organisation and arrangements for health and safety at work. While the
legislation and its accompanying guidance concentrate on employees, there is an added
clause requiring provision for ‘other persons resorting to the premises’. This may include
contracted staff and media personnel (see Chapters 4, 18 and 19).
b. Risk assessment
All employers are required to assess the risk to workers and any others who may
be affected by their undertakings. In carrying out such a risk assessment ground
management may find it helpful to utilise the recommendations of this Guide.
For a list of the relevant health and safety legislation, see Bibliography.
Contents
3.39 Fire safety legislation

Management must be aware of the requirements of the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety)
Order 2005. In particular, it must plan, organise, control, monitor and review the necessary
preventive and protective measures and record these arrangements in writing.
The Fire (Scotland) Act 2005, as amended, and the Fire Safety (Scotland) Regulations 2006,
introduced similar requirements in Scotland. In Northern Ireland the relevant legislation is the
Fire Safety Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2010.
In carrying out fire risk assessments, ground management should refer to Chapter 15 and
to the publication Fire Safety Risk Assessment – Large Places of Assembly, issued by the
Department for Communities and Local Government.
For guidance in respect of fire safety at sports grounds in Scotland, reference should be
made to the Scottish Government publication Practical Fire Safety Guidance in Places of
Entertainment and Assembly.
3.40 Equality legislation

Management should be familiar with the Equality Act 2010. The Act covers issues in the
workplace and in wider society – such as discrimination arising from gender, age, disability,
religion and race, plus the provision of goods, facilities and services – setting out the different
ways in which it is unlawful to treat someone. The Act also strengthens protection in some
situations, and in general makes the law easier to understand.
Guidance in respect to the Equality Act 2010 is available from www.gov.uk and from the
publications Accessible Stadia and Supplementary Guidance, both available from the SGSA.
3.41 Safety management and the (S) factor

As explained in Section 2.4, the assessment of a ground’s capacity should take into account
the quality of safety management – that is the (S) factor. An important indicator to be used
when determining the (S) factor is the standard to which the safety management structure,
MANAGEMENT
as outlined in this chapter, is implemented.
For example, it is not enough to have a written Spectator Safety Policy. That policy must be
fully implemented and understood by all staff. Similarly, a Safety Officer may have a detailed
job description, but may fail to meet its requirements on event days. Contingency plans may
have been drawn up, but never tested or exercised.
If all the management’s safety related responsibilities are fully met, and the stewarding is of a
high standard (see Chapter 4), an (S) factor of 1.0 should be applied.
Where there are deficiencies in any aspect of the safety management, the (S) factor should be
reduced accordingly. If appropriate, the (S) factor could be set as low as 0.0, and therefore the
capacity of the area in question will be zero.
Management should therefore be aware that its own performance in safety related matters
will have a direct effect on the calculation of the sports ground’s capacity.
Contents
MANAGEMENT
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 4.0 Management – stewarding
4.0 Management –
stewarding
4.1 The need for stewards

Safety at sports grounds relies to a great extent upon the deployment of an appropriate
number of well trained and suitably equipped individuals whose role is to provide a safe,
secure and welcoming environment. Collectively, this role is known as stewarding.
Stewards – known at some sports grounds as marshals – provide a direct and ongoing
interaction between the ground management and spectators.
The main duties of most stewards, detailed further in Section 4.6, are:
a. to assist with the circulation of spectators
b. to prevent overcrowding
c. to reduce the likelihood and incidence of disorder
d. to provide the means to investigate, report and take early action in an incident.
As such, the individual efforts and attitudes of stewards can have a strong bearing on
achieving safe conditions.
MANAGEMENT
In carrying out their duties stewards should also, always, be aware of, and ensure the care,
comfort and wellbeing of all categories of spectators.
Indeed, in many instances it should be remembered that stewards may be the only service
personnel representing the management with whom spectators have any contact during
the course of an event.
4.2 Agreement on responsibilities

Where an event requires the presence of police officers, the duties and responsibilities of
stewards should be agreed between the ground management and the police. This agreement
should form part of the written Statement of Intent (see Section 3.24).
Contents
4.3 Definition of a steward

Typically stewards deployed at a sports ground will include staff employed directly by the
ground management or by a facilities management company, staff supplied by the event
organiser, or staff provided under contract by an agency, or a combination of some or all of
these categories.
But whichever category each individual fits into, for the purposes of the Guide, a steward is
defined as a person:
a. who has met the training requirements set out in Section 4.10, or
b. who is undergoing training and assessment towards the meeting of such requirements
and
c. who is employed or contracted by management to act in accordance with the general

recommendations of the Guide, and, where appropriate, the specific requirements of the
ground’s safety certificate, and
d. who is appropriately attired, equipped and briefed.
Provided that they meet the criteria listed above, stewards can be volunteers or be paid.
Stewarding duties may also be undertaken by other members of staff – such as car park
attendants or turnstile operators – provided that they meet the criteria listed above and also,
crucially, that their other duties are confined to specific time slots during an event.
However individuals such as ground staff, security guards or hospitality staff, who may
be required to attend to their duties at any time during an event, should not, regardless of
their qualifications, be considered as stewards within the event day Stewarding Plan, in any
circumstances.
Further information on the training of stewards follows in Section 4.10.
4.4 Appointment of stewards
MANAGEMENT
Stewards should be fit and active with the maturity, character and temperament to carry out
the duties required of them. They should be able to understand and communicate verbal and
written instructions in English.
Applicants should be interviewed and, where necessary, assessed before appointment to

ascertain that they meet these requirements.
4.5 Stewards – status, work environment and benefits

Stewards’ responsibilities are considerable, and at times onerous. As such, they form
an integral part of the safety management team, a status that should be recognised by
management, communicated to them by management, and reinforced by management in
positive terms.
Experience shows, furthermore, that the quality of stewarding at a sports ground is likely
to be linked to the quality of the stewards’ work environment, the benefits on offer and the
opportunities available for individuals to progress. In return for providing a positive working
environment, management can expect from their stewards not only a higher calibre of
applicant but also a greater level of commitment, both on event days and when it comes to
their willingness to attend training sessions.
Contents
4.6 Stewards – duties

While these may vary, depending on the size and configuration of the ground and the nature
and timing of the event, the basic duties of stewards (whether in-house, hired or contracted),
as outlined in Section 4.1, are to assist with the circulation of spectators, to prevent
overcrowding, to reduce the likelihood and incidence of disorder and to provide the means
to investigate, report and take early action in an incident.
These basic duties can be expanded and summarised as follows:
a. to assist with, and be aware of the safety, security and service needs of all spectators
b. to ensure compliance with the conditions of entry as set out in the ground regulations and,
where a safety certificate is in place, any other conditions that may apply
c. to control or direct spectators who are entering or leaving the ground, to help achieve a
safe, even flow of people in, to and from the viewing areas
d. to monitor crowd movements and density within viewing areas, so as to prevent

overcrowding
e. to staff entrances, exits and other strategic points (for example, the pitch or area of
activity), and any exit doors or gates that are not continuously secured in the open position
while the ground is in use
f. to identify and report any potential hazards; for example trip hazards, defective services
or fire hazards
g. to respond to conflict and, where appropriate, to alert the Safety Officer
h. to respond to incidents (such as the early stages of a fire, a medical incident, or structural
defect); to communicate to event control and to take the necessary immediate action
i. to undertake specific duties in an emergency or as directed by the Safety Officer or the

appropriate emergency service officer
j. to assist the emergency services as required
MANAGEMENT
k. to have the ability and resources to describe accurately and record incidents that they
have witnessed or experienced, for future reference
l. to be confident and competent in the use of technology and aids supplied by the
management, such as radios, tablets and megaphones.
This list, it is emphasised, is for guidance only and is not intended to serve as the content for
a programme of training or as the basis for a detailed curriculum.
Contents
4.7 Stewards – Code of Conduct

As emphasised in Section 4.1, stewards are representatives of the management, and may
be the only point of contact between the management and the public during an event. It is
therefore recommended that management draws up a stewards’ Code of Conduct, to include
the following matters.
a. Stewards should at all times be polite, courteous and helpful to all spectators, regardless
of their affiliations.
b. Stewards should at all times be clean, tidy and smartly dressed.
c. Stewards are not employed, hired or contracted to watch the event but should at all times
concentrate on their duties and responsibilities.
d. Stewards should never:
i. wear clothing that may appear partisan or cause offence while on duty
ii. celebrate or show extreme reaction to the event
iii. use obscene, offensive, discriminatory or intimidatory language or gestures
iv. eat, drink or smoke in view of the public
v. consume alcohol or illegal substances before or during the event
vi. use a mobile phone for private phone calls whilst on duty.
4.8 Stewards – Safety Handbook

Every steward should be fully appraised, in writing, of his or her duties and responsibilities.
This can be achieved by the issue of a Safety Handbook, either in printed or in digital form.
Suggested headings are as follows:
a. introduction to the sports ground, its layout and management
MANAGEMENT
b. general duties of stewards (see Section 4.6)
c. Code of Conduct (see Section 4.7)
d. customer service
e. communication and radio call signs (see Chapter 16)
f. conditions of entry and/or ground regulations
g. security arrangements
h. duties before event
i. duties during event
j. duties after event
k. specific responsibilities (according to role or duties)
l. emergency procedures
m. contingency plans (see Section 3.15)
Contents
n. training (see Section 4.10)
o. fire precautions and fire fighting (see Chapter 15)
p. plans of ground, including exit routes
q. positioning of key point telephones and fire safety points
r. notes
4.9 Stewards – checklist

The duties and responsibilities of a steward may also be summarised on a simple checklist
or aide-memoire card, for all stewards to carry during the event. The contents of this checklist
should follow a standard format, as established in the stewards’ Safety Handbook.
All such stewards documentation should be available for inspection by authorised persons.
4.10 Stewards – training

A steward is a person who has successfully completed a training programme that has been
mapped against the relevant National Occupational Standards, and whose occupational
competency has been successfully assessed under those standards, or, a person who is
undergoing training and assessment towards the meeting of such standards.
The standards are those set down in the relevant National Occupational Standards, which set
out the skills, knowledge and experience needed to work in spectator safety.
The learner’s training and occupational competence should be verified externally, for example
by obtaining a qualification. This will typically be a Level 2 qualification on the relevant
framework, or an acceptable alternative which meets the requirements above. (Details of
what may be considered an acceptable alternative are on the SGSA website.)
The training of stewards must be delivered, whether online or via classroom-based learning,
using resources and materials prepared by occupationally competent persons. Similarly,
MANAGEMENT
during and following the period of training, the learner should be assessed for occupational
competence by competent assessors.
It is recognised that, at any given time, some stewards deployed during an event will not have
had the opportunity to complete their training or assessments (see Section 4.13).
Nevertheless, stewards should not be deployed unaccompanied at a sports ground until they
have satisfied all the following criteria (summarised also in Figure 4).
a. They have undertaken familiarisation and induction training specific to the venue and type
of event.
b. They have undertaken training to provide the underpinning knowledge for the core units in
the relevant National Occupational Standards (for details see the SGSA website).
c. They have attended four events at a sports ground partnered by a qualified, experienced
steward. These events will form part of their training and learning programme.
It is expected that stewards should complete their training and assessment, and have
obtained external qualification or certification, within 12 months dating from the start of their
first induction training.
Contents
Figure 4 Stewards’ training and assessment process
STAGE ONE
u
ndertake induction and familiarisation training
u
ndertake training and underpinning knowledge for the relevant
National Occupational Standards
a
ttend a minimum of four events partnered by a qualified and
experienced steward
b
egin work as an unaccompanied steward for a period of
no more than 12 months, dating from the start of induction training
STAGE TWO
c
ontinue and complete training for remaining units of the relevant
National Occupational Standards
undergo assessment for occupational competence
u
ndergo assessment for suitability for specialist duties, for example in
safeguarding, disability or fire safety
STAGE THREE
o
btain external verification of competence, for example by successfully
completing a qualification
MANAGEMENT
STAGE FOUR
undertake ongoing training in such areas as:
customer service
communication techniques
disability awareness
security/counter terrorism awareness training
Contents
It is the responsibility of management to ensure that all stewards, whether employed in-
house or under contract, are trained and competent to undertake both their duties under
normal conditions and their duties under the management’s contingency plans, and under
emergency plans.
A steward’s training should also cover issues relating to safeguarding, equality and diversity.
Furthermore, all stewards should undertake ongoing training in areas such as customer
service, communication techniques, disability awareness and security/counter terrorism
awareness.
All training and assessment records must be kept complete and updated to ensure that they
can be verified by the regulated awarding organisation and, where a safety certificate is in
force, by the local authority.
Further details of the qualifications that fulfil the requirements set out above, and what may
be considered as acceptable alternatives, are available on the SGSA website.
4.11 Stewards – supervisors’ training

Stewards’ supervisors should receive additional training that develops their skills and
competencies, especially when responding to unplanned incidents. It is recommended
that supervisors hold, or are working towards a Level 3 relevant safety qualification on the
regulated qualification framework.
Furthermore, all supervisors should undertake ongoing training in such areas as customer
service, communication techniques (including the delivery of cascaded safety briefings),
disability awareness and security/counter terrorism awareness.
4.12 Stewarding Plan – roles and numbers

As stated in Section 3.12, it is the responsibility of management to draw up a Stewarding
Plan. This plan will set out the proposed number of stewards to be deployed, according to the
size and configuration of the ground, the nature of the event and other relevant factors (see
Section 3.11). It will also set out the roles that each steward will undertake and where he or
MANAGEMENT
she will be deployed.
The number of stewards deployed should not fall below the minimum number specified
in the Stewarding Plan, or in the ground’s safety certificate.
Experience shows that management should meet the stewarding needs of most sports
grounds or events by ensuring the availability of staff in the following categories.
a. Supervisory staff: for example the deputy Safety Officer, Chief Steward(s)
and supervisors.
b. Static stewarding posts: located, for example, at crowd monitoring points, exits,
pitch or area of activity perimeter gates, escalators and other strategic points or areas.
c. Mobile stewarding posts: typically a ratio of one steward per 250 of the anticipated
attendance.
This ratio should be increased where the event specific risk assessment (see Section 3.11)
has identified the need for an increased level of safety management; for example, when
large numbers of children are expected to attend, or where there is a likelihood that large
numbers of spectators will not comply with safety instructions.
Contents
In such circumstances the Safety Officer should consider a higher ratio of staffing overall, of
one steward per 100 spectators, or even higher in specific locations. (Where there is a risk
of unauthorised encroachment onto the pitch or area of activity, however, the higher ratio
need apply only to the appropriate areas.)
d. Specialist stewards: for example fire stewards, stewards trained in conflict resolution, and
stewards deployed in areas used by children or disabled people. Note that where RADAR
locks are fitted to accessible toilets, stewards should be provided with the keys.
e. Additional stewards: if needed for deployment in particular circumstances or for

particular events.
4.13 Stewarding Plan – balancing experience and inexperience

When drawing up a Stewarding Plan management should take into account the possibility
that not all stewards will be fully trained or experienced. At the same time it is recognised
that stewarding numbers, and the required balance between experienced and inexperienced
stewards, and between trained and untrained stewards, may be varied according to the specific
nature of the event.
It is therefore recommended that the Stewarding Plan sets out the minimum numbers of
stewards to serve in the following roles.
a. Supervisory roles
These roles should be filled only by experienced, qualified and competent stewards (see
Section 4.11).
b. Safety critical static locations

These locations should be staffed only by experienced, qualified and competent stewards.
c. Safety critical roles

These roles, which may be mobile, should be filled only by experienced, qualified and
competent stewards
Once these supervisory and critical locations and roles have been identified and allocated, the
MANAGEMENT
Stewarding Plan should also set out those other static locations and roles which may be staffed
by stewards who are less experienced or have yet to successfully complete their training and
assessment.
It should also be noted that, as stated in Section 4.10.c, a steward should not be deployed to
work alone until he or she has attended at least four events at a sports ground.
The Stewarding Plan for each event should be retained as part of the event record.
4.14 Identification of stewards

Experience shows that spectators react more favourably towards stewards who are readily
identifiable. It is equally important that stewards are easily identifiable by fellow stewards and
other safety personnel. All stewards should therefore be provided with high-visibility, weather-
proof jackets or tabards which meet current safety standards, or other clearly visible means of
identification. Armbands alone are not acceptable.
Each jacket or tabard should clearly indicate the duty performed by the steward; for example,
‘Chief Steward’, ‘supervisor’, ‘steward’ or ‘car park steward’.
Each jacket or tabard should also carry a unique number, by which each individual can
be identified.
Contents
4.15 Contract or agency stewards

Management should ensure that any contract or service level agreement for the supply of
stewards from an agency or external body specifies:
a. the stewards’ duties and responsibilities
b. their required training and qualifications or certification
c. the number who must be fully qualified and the number who may still be undergoing
training and assessment
d. the records to be maintained and supplied to management by the agency or external body.
e. It is further essential that contract or agency stewards who do not work regularly at the
ground where they are deployed undergo a familiarisation session. This session should
provide the following information:
i. the ground regulations and any legal requirements specific to the ground
ii. the ground’s layout, showing all points of entry and exit, circulation routes and
first aid points
iii. any call signs used at the ground
iv. signage
v. any factors outside the ground that may adversely affect the safety of those
attending the event
vi. contingency plans
vii. evacuation/invacuation arrangements
viii. communications equipment and how to use it
ix. policies concerning discriminatory behaviour
MANAGEMENT
x. arrangements for monitoring spectators
xi. other requirements specific to the ground and/or the event.
4.16 Stewards – briefing

It is the management’s responsibility to ensure that all personnel involved in the safety
management of an event are briefed.
Briefing should not be restricted to in-house stewards but should also include contract and
agency stewards, visiting stewards, the medical team, turnstile operators, car park staff and
hospitality staff.
Briefing, it should be emphasised, is not a substitute for proper training. Rather, it is intended
to provide safety personnel with whatever specific information and instructions they might
require in order to perform their functions at the particular event.
Arrangements for briefings will vary according to the number of individuals involved. If the
total does not exceed 50, it should be possible for all personnel to be briefed together, by the
Safety Officer or Chief Steward. Where more than 50 individuals are deployed, experience
shows it is beneficial to organise cascaded briefings, where the Safety Officer or Chief
Steward briefs individual supervisors, who then brief their individual sections.
Contents
It is recommended that these cascaded briefings should be scripted, in order to:
a. maintain consistency in all sections of the ground
b. to provide a record which will form part of the event’s record and audit
(see Sections 3.3.e and 3.22).
As a further measure of quality control, senior members of the safety management team
should attend cascaded briefings on an occasional basis.
Further information on the briefing of stewards can be found in the SGSA publication
Safety Management.
4.17 De-briefing
A de-brief is also necessary as this enables the Safety Officer to assess the effectiveness of
the safety management operation and to respond to any incidents or issues which may have
been identified during the course of the event.
As with briefing, the arrangements for the de-briefing will vary according to the number of
stewards involved, and should consist of the following elements:
a. a de-brief of all stewards, in one group or by sector
combined with:
b. incident reports completed during the event
c. the event log itself
d. questionnaires filled in by staff
e. feedback from the public
f. feedback from, or meetings with other agencies
g. other relevant reports.
MANAGEMENT
4.18 Stewards – records
It is important to maintain a record or profile form for each steward. The information to be
recorded should include:
a. name, age, address, and contact numbers
b. relevant professional or vocational qualifications (for example, fire-fighter or first aider)
c. training sessions attended, including continued professional development
d. events attended
e. duties or position in the ground for each event
f. briefing and de-briefing sessions attended
g. assessment of progress.
Such records should be readily available for inspection by authorised persons.
Contents
4.19 Stewarding and the (S) factor

As explained in Sections 2.4, the assessment of a sports ground’s capacity must take into
account the quality of safety management; that is, the (S) factor. An important indicator to be
used when determining the (S) factor is the standard of stewarding.
It is the responsibility of management to assess the stewarding, and, where a safety

certificate is in force, agree that assessment with the local authority. The assessment should
be based on the requirements outlined in this chapter.
Where the safety management structure meets the requirements set out in Chapter 3, and
the stewarding is of a high standard, an (S) factor of 1.0 should be applied.
Where the stewarding is poor – for example, if not enough stewards are deployed or if
stewards are not attending to their duties – the (S) factor should be reduced.
Records should be carefully kept so that:
a. deficiencies which have been identified and recorded can be acted upon and the
stewarding operation improved, thereby increasing the (S) factor
b. further deficiencies can be identified and monitored, thereby possibly entailing a reduction
in the (S) factor.
4.20 Visiting stewards

There are certain events where it may be beneficial to invite suitably trained and qualified
stewards from visiting clubs or organisations. Such stewards must arrive before the sports
ground is open to spectators and in time to be fully briefed as to the layout of the ground, the
safety arrangements in place, and the duties allocated to them during the event.
It is also important that any visiting stewards who may be unfamiliar with the ground undergo
a familiarisation session.
4.21 Security personnel
MANAGEMENT
Personnel undertaking licensable activity, as defined in the Private Security Industry Act 2001,
require a licence from the Security Industry Authority (SIA).
However the Violent Crime Reduction Act 2006 does make provision that allows directly
employed staff at a sports ground where a safety certificate has been issued by a local
authority to undertake licensable activity without the requirement of a licence from the SIA.
Further detailed guidance on these matters is available from the SIA (see Bibliography) and
the SGSA website.
4.22 Control and communication

The stewarding operation should be co-ordinated from the ground’s control point, which
should maintain an efficient means of communication with the stewards and/or their
supervisors (see Chapter 16).
Contents
MANAGEMENT
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 5.0 Management – structures, installations and components
5.0 Management –
structures, installations
and components
5.1 Definitions
For the purpose of this Guide the term ‘structures’ includes seated and standing
accommodation, concourses, roofs, floodlight pylons, stairways, barriers, boundary walls
and fences, whether permanent or temporary.
Examples of ‘installations’ include mechanical and electrical systems, public address

systems and fire detection systems.
Examples of ‘components’ include seats, signs, fixtures and fittings.
5.2 Maintenance and the (P) factor

As stated in Chapter 2, it is the responsibility of management to assess the (P) factor for each
section of the sports ground. An important indicator to be used when determining the (P)
factor is the standard of maintenance (see Sections 2.4 and 2.5).
If all structures, installations and safety-related components at the ground are maintained
in good condition and working order, a (P) factor of 1.0 should be applied. Where there are
deficiencies, the (P) factor should be reduced accordingly.
MANAGEMENT
If appropriate, the (P) factor could be set as low as 0.0, and therefore the capacity of the area
in question will be zero.
It is imperative therefore that maintenance procedures for both new and existing structures,
and demountable structures, are properly understood. It is further recommended that a
system of planned maintenance be adopted. Where necessary, professional advice on this
matter should be sought from competent persons.
It is also essential that maintenance is carried out in accordance with the written instructions
provided by the designer or manufacturer.
Should there take place any deviations from those written instructions or from any equivalent
standard, as stated in Section 1.8 it is the responsibility of the ground management to draw
up a List of Deviations, detailing both the deviations and any mitigating measures taken to
reduce the residual risks to which people might be exposed as a result.
This List of Deviations should form part of the management’s annual review of the (P) factor at
the ground (see Section 2.4).
Contents
New construction
The provision of operating and maintenance manuals detailing the expected life cycles
of components should be a necessary part of the completion of any new project. This is
notwithstanding any separate tests or inspection periods which may be recommended below
or form part of the annual inspection.
The maintenance of new structures may be equally, or even more onerous than that of existing
structures. Management should be aware that the provision of a new structure does not
reduce its responsibility for the maintenance of a safe structure.
Where new construction deviates from the standards of this guidance the management
should be provided with a List of Deviations. Management should also maintain and review this
List and ensure that mitigating measures are applied throughout the life of the structure or
component.
A planned preventative maintenance schedule and its implementation demonstrate that

the management is taking its responsibilities for maintenance seriously. They may also be
relevant when assessing the overall (S) factor.
5.3 Good housekeeping

In addition to maintenance, several of the recommendations listed in this chapter might
otherwise be described as elements of ‘good housekeeping’.
Good housekeeping is a fundamental part of fostering and maintaining a safety culture at

the sports ground (see Section 3.2). Management should therefore demonstrate a positive
attitude in this respect, and in doing so, encourage a conscientious, co-operative and vigilant
attitude amongst all members of staff.
In particular, all staff must identify and report to management at an early stage any issue
relating to the ground’s structures, its installations or components, whether permanent or
temporary, that might compromise safety.
Their efforts and, if appropriate, suggestions, should always be acknowledged, and they
should be informed of any resultant remedial action.
MANAGEMENT
5.4 Structures
All new structures should be designed by a competent person, who should provide evidence
of his or her competence.
The Principal Designer, as defined in the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
2015, should be identified and agreed with the sports ground management.
All structures at sports grounds should be safe, serviceable and durable at all times
during their use, and where necessary, fire-resistant. They should comply with statutory
requirements, including those for health and safety at work.
In order to be safe, a structure should be capable of resisting all loads in service (including
sporting and non-sporting use) with an adequate reserve of strength and without motion that
would cause alarm to people on or in the structure.
Specialist advice from a Chartered Engineer with the appropriate skills and experience should
be sought to assess the adequacy of all load-bearing elements in a sports ground.
Contents
Designers should pay particular attention both to minimising the risk of progressive or
disproportionate collapse from unforeseen incidents, and to the dynamic response of
structures (see also Sections 5.5 and 14.6). In doing so, designers should:
a. systematically assess conceivable hazards to structures and design the structures

to be stable and robust in the light of a risk assessment
b. adopt structural forms which minimise the effects of the hazards identified
c. provide ground management with manuals which define the key elements and
components of the structure requiring regular inspection and maintenance.
5.5 Structural dynamics for permanent structures

In addition to the ability to resist static loading, structures at sports grounds may also
need to resist dynamic loading. Permanent structures particularly sensitive to dynamic
loading include those with long spanning or cantilevered seating decks. In such cases,
specialist advice from a Chartered Engineer with the appropriate skills and experience
should be sought to assess the dynamic behaviour of the structure.
Dynamic load effects may be caused by:
a. excitation by wind
b. excitation by the activities of spectators, which, if rhythmic in nature, can be severe.
For further detailed guidance, see Dynamic Performance Requirements for Permanent
Grandstands Subject to Crowd Action – Interim Guidance on Assessment and Design, published
by the Institution of Structural Engineers (ISE).
For guidance on structural dynamics see Temporary Demountable Structures

– Guidance on Procurement, Design and Use, also published by the ISE.
5.6 Construction work at existing grounds
MANAGEMENT
It is the responsibility of management to ensure that any construction work taking place at a
ground does not prejudice the safety of spectators occupying any part of the ground during
an event.
Management should also ensure that any partly constructed structure, if brought into use
before completion, complies with the recommendations of the Guide.
Where work is in progress that could affect the safety of spectators, management should
ensure that the contractor has completed that part of the work in sufficient time prior to the
admission of spectators, and has confirmed in writing that the construction area is safe, tidy
and that spectators may safely be admitted.
An inspection should be undertaken in sufficient time to confirm that the arrangements

are acceptable. In the event that the arrangements are not acceptable, the affected part
of the ground must not be used. The inspection records should be maintained during the
construction period and should be available for inspection. This is particularly important
where ongoing work may have impacted on emergency exit routes.
Further detailed guidance is available from three publications: Guide to Safety at Sports
Grounds During Construction, published by the LDSA; Fire Safety on Construction Sites,
published by the Health & Safety Executive, and Fire Prevention on Construction Sites, published
by the Fire Protection Association.
Contents
5.7 Anti-vandalism
Precautions should be taken to prevent people from climbing on to roofs, pylons,
hoardings and other structures. Where possible such structures should be fitted with
unclimbable devices; for example, stout barriers or close-boarded enclosures.
Where fitted, anti-vandal devices should preferably be at least 2.4m from the base
of the structure.
Ground management should consult with the local planning authority and police on
permissible security and anti-vandal solutions.
5.8 Inspections and tests – general

Regular and detailed inspections and tests are a necessary and important function
of safety management. Where applicable, they are also an essential part of the safety
certification process.
Inspections and tests should seek to eliminate or minimise the potential risks to
spectators and staff, and to ensure that all structures, installations, components and
items of equipment are safe, performing to a sufficient standard and fit for the purpose
for which they were intended.
As outlined in this chapter, it is the responsibility of management to:
a. ensure that proper maintenance is carried out
b. encourage attitudes and establish procedures which lead to good housekeeping
c. draw up and adhere to a programme of inspections and tests
d. ensure that such inspections and tests are carried out by suitably qualified persons
e. record the details of inspections, tests and any remedial work carried out, including the
dates of completion
MANAGEMENT
f. allocate adequate resources to carry out these tasks.
Where asbestos is present, reference should be made to the Control of Asbestos Regulations
2012 and the Approved Code of Practice (ACOP), available from the Health and Safety
Executive.
It should also be noted that further guidance on inspections and tests concerning such
matters as barriers and medical provision is provided in the relevant chapters.
5.9 Inspections and tests – 48 hours pre event and event day
It is the responsibility of management to devise, implement and record a series of inspections
and tests during the 48 hour period leading up to the event day, and on the event day itself. A
sample checklist of which structures, installations and components should be inspected and
tested appears in Figure 5, although it is emphasised that this checklist is not exhaustive and
will vary from ground to ground.
In determining which inspections are to be carried out, and when, management should always
work to a timescale that will enable remedial action to be taken before members of the public
are admitted to the ground.
Contents
If any of the structures, installations or components are not operating properly and if the
faults cannot be rectified before the event, contingency plans should provide for the use
of acceptable substitute measures. Failing this the (P) and possibly (S) factors should be
recalculated and agreed, thereby leading to a reduction in the capacity or, if necessary, the
closure of the affected areas of spectator accommodation.
In the event of serious or multiple systems breakdown or equipment failure 24 hours before
an event, the management’s contingency plans should allow for the postponement or
cancellation of the event.
In the event of an increased security threat level to ‘critical’ it is recommended that any
guidance circulated by NaCTSO is carefully considered. This may include a requirement
for heightened pre-event inspections of vulnerable points or areas, and for the enhanced
screening of staff. Where implemented, these additional measures must be recorded.
Pre-event and event day inspections and tests should take place in the following categories:
a. Structures
Each structure in the ground, whether permanent, demountable or temporary, should be
free from any damage, corrosion or deformation that might create a potential danger to
the public.
b. Circulation routes (see also Chapters 6–10)

i. All ingress, egress and general circulation routes and gangways should be clear of
obstruction, clean, and free from trip or slip hazards.
ii. All entrances, doors and gates that need to be unlocked or open should be checked
accordingly.
iii. All areas to which public access is prohibited should be locked or sealed off.
c. Installations/systems
All safety related installations and systems should be tested according to the
manufacturers’ recommendations and, where appropriate, the requirement of the safety
certificate.
MANAGEMENT
d. Materials (see also Chapter 15)
i. There should be no accumulations of combustible waste or litter, particularly in voids
and other areas vulnerable to fire.
ii. Containers used to store combustible waste or litter should be secure.
iii. Hazardous materials should have been removed or safely stored, away from public
areas.
iv. Items which could be used as missiles should be stored securely.
e. Components
i. All seats should be in place, securely fixed, clean and in good order.
ii. All other fixtures and fittings (such as kiosks and temporary barriers) should be in
place and in good order.
iii. All signs (whether permanent or temporary) should be in place, securely fitted, in good
order and, where appropriate, illuminated.
iv. The means should be in place to instantly remove or breach any fence, advertising
material or any obstruction that might impede the exit of spectators onto the pitch or
area of activity in an emergency.
Contents
Figure 5
Inspections and tests – 48 hours pre event and event day checklist
As stated in Section 5.9, management should ensure that structures, installations and
components are inspected and tested by competent persons and that the inspection
and test results are recorded, signed and dated.
In some cases it will be necessary to carry out inspections and tests both during the
48 hour period before the event day and on the event day itself. But in all instances, the
inspection and testing schedule should take into account the need to allow sufficient
time for remedial action to be taken before members of the public are admitted.
A checklist should be drawn up for each structure or stand and for each event, with a
box where it can be confirmed that each element has been checked, and with space for
comments. For a sample checklist, see the SGSA publication Safety Management.
This checklist is not intended to be exhaustive and will vary from ground to ground.
STRUCTURES / COMPONENTS INSTALLATIONS / EQUIPMENT
floors turnstile/counting system

ceilings PA system
entrance gates CCTV system
turnstiles radios – safety management
circulation routes radios – stewarding
radios – emergency services
seats
telephones – internal
terraces
telephones – emergency
disabled areas
screens/information displays
concourses
toilets lighting – circulation areas
catering areas lighting – spectator accommodation
stairways lighting – toilets
lifts/escalators lighting – external
lighting – emergency
MANAGEMENT
exit gates lighting – area of activity
fire doors
panic bolts auxiliary power
padlocks digital network
signage fire alarm system
fire fighting equipment
carbon monoxide detectors
EXTERNAL FACILITIES / methane detectors
INSTALLATIONS
plant rooms
pedestrian routes service ducts
car parks storage areas
vehicle routes areas clear of refuse
emergency rendezvous points
temporary structures first aid room
mobile units first aid equipment
broadcast installations
overlay related installations stewards’ clothing/equipment
signage loud hailers
Contents
f. Temporary installations and components

i. These should be tested as soon as they are in place and available.
ii. Any temporary equipment that has to be installed on the event day should be tested
before the event commences.
g. External areas/routes/Zone Ex
i. Areas or roads that are to be utilised for emergency vehicle and emergency
rendezvous point (RVP) access should be checked to ensure that they are clear of
obstruction and remain viable.
ii. No structures or installations should impede access or emergency exit routes.
For further guidance on pre event and event day inspections and tests, see Annex 5 in the
SGSA publication Safety Management.
5.10 Inspections – during the event

During an event, management should ensure that:
a. litter and waste is not allowed to accumulate, and is removed to secure containers
whenever possible
b. materials are not allowed to accumulate or be stored in routes used for circulation, exit or
emergency exit
c. all gangways, exits, emergency exits and escape routes are kept clear.
5.11 Inspections – after the event

Following each event, management should ensure that:
a. a general visual inspection of the ground identifies any signs of damage or deformation
which might create a potential danger to the public, with particular attention to the
condition of seats, terraces, viewing slopes, barriers and stairways
MANAGEMENT
b. combustible waste and litter is cleared – particularly from voids – and either removed
or stored in secure containers
c. any outstanding matters of concern are recorded and arrangements made for remedial
action before the next event.
5.12 Inspections – annual

It is the responsibility of management to commission detailed, annual inspections of all
structures, installations and components.
These inspections should be carried out by competent persons with the appropriate
qualifications and experience, and should:
a. ensure that all standing surfaces, seats, stairs, ramps, doors, gates, boundary walls, fences
and claddings are fit for their intended purpose
b. ensure that load-bearing elements are capable of withstanding the loads to which they
are likely to be subjected and that they perform properly their required functions
c. assess which barriers should be tested in accordance with the guidance found in
Chapter 11
Contents
d. ensure that all mechanical and electrical installations, including backup systems, are in
good order, and, if required, serviced and tested (see Chapter 17)
e. confirm that water storage and air conditioning systems have been subject to scheduled
legionella testing (see Section 17.18)
f. set out a programme of maintenance and repair.
Other periodic tests, other than annual ones, may also be required; for example, under
the terms of the designer’s or manufacturer’s written instructions, or as specified by the
local authority.
Concerning the inspection of structural elements (see points a, b and c above), where a
certificate is in place, to assist with clarity and to avoid duplication, the inspection report
should be sent to the certifying authority before the authority carries out its own annual
inspection.
For further information on inspection and tests see the SGSA’s Guidance on Safety Certification
(available on the SGSA website).
5.13 Additional detailed structural appraisals

The extent to which a detailed structural appraisal is necessary for existing structures cannot
be prescribed. Much will depend upon the type of structure, its size, condition, location, the
materials used in its construction and the standard of maintenance.
The Standing Committee on Structural Safety advises that an interval between detailed
structural appraisals of 6–10 years is likely to be appropriate for most large structures at
sports grounds.
Risk assessment should form an integral part of the detailed appraisal process, with
structures being categorised according to complexity and risk. The risk assessment
should be used to supplement the criteria for the annual inspection (see Section 5.12)
where appropriate.
More complex structures should be subjected to independent checking.
MANAGEMENT
Criteria for detailed structural appraisal should take account of:
a. load factors used in the original design
b. the degree of redundancy present
c. the risk of disproportionate collapse
d. the consequence of failure
e. the requirements of the certifying authority, where appropriate.
The acceptability of the current condition of the structure should be determined on the
basis of inspection (and testing where necessary) and analysis. If the condition is found to
be unacceptable, that part of the sports ground should be taken out of use. Work to remedy
the situation should be specified and undertaken and then inspected before the affected
structure or part of the sports ground is brought back into use.
The appraisal methods described in Appraisal of Existing Structures, available from the
Institution of Structural Engineers are to be recommended.
The appraisal should be carried out by a competent Chartered Engineer.
Contents
5.14 Keeping records

Responsibility for the keeping of comprehensive and accurate records lies with management.
The quality of these records may also be regarded as a good indicator of the overall quality of
safety management.
Records should be kept in a specified place at the ground or in the management’s office,
for a period of six years, and should indicate:
a. the level of competence required of those carrying out inspections, measurements

and tests
b. the qualifications and status of the persons responsible for carrying out inspections,
measurements and tests
c. the results of inspections, measurements and tests, and any remedial action taken.
The documentation should be available for inspection by the relevant authority.
It is good practice to store a backup copy of these records securely off site.
5.15 Plans and specifications

Management is advised to retain clear, up-to-date plans and specifications. Any symbols
used should be shown in a key.
These plans should be reviewed and updated annually and used to determine any changes
to ground operations.
Plans and specifications may include the following:
a. a general plan of the sports ground
b. a general plan of approach roads and car parks
c. the general arrangements of each stand, by floor level
MANAGEMENT
d. the principal means of ingress and egress
e. the names of each stand, terrace or section, its capacity and any relevant information
regarding categories of spectators
f. the location of:
i. the central control point
ii. key point telephones
iii. stewards’ posts
iv. fire points
v. public address speakers and zoning
vi. emergency exits and escape routes
vii. first aid room
viii. places of reasonable safety and places of safety (see Section 15.26)
ix. high risk areas (such as plant or boiler rooms, or fuel stores)
Contents
x. rendezvous and access points for the emergency services
xi. fire warning panel and any repeater panels
xii. gas shut off and other isolating devices
g. general constructional specifications.
Management should also retain, or have accessible, plans and specifications relating to all
recent constructions.
Where a safety certificate is in force, the plans and specifications should include any other
details required by the local authority.
For security purposes, careful consideration should also be given to how plans are stored and
recorded, and how their distribution, or access to them, might be controlled.
MANAGEMENT
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 6.0 Circulation – general
6.0 Circulation – general
6.1 Planning and management of circulation

Circulation routes provide the means for all people present on an event day to move in and
out, and around the ground, under both normal and emergency conditions.
As a necessary function of a sports ground, circulation routes must be planned and managed
to be safe and secure.
Safe and secure circulation is achieved by:
a. physical means
primarily good design and construction, supplemented by clear signposting, lighting,
surface indicators and the placement of appropriate barriers, bollards and railings (see
Section 6.4)
b. human resources
good stewarding, supplemented by clear communications and good housekeeping
c. technological aids
such as closed circuit television (see Sections 16.20–16.26), public address systems
(Sections 16.18–16.19) and the use of crowd simulation modelling (see Section 6.7).
It should be recognised that, in addition to their safety, security and service, the comfort and
enjoyment of spectators during an event will be influenced by their experience of passing
through circulation routes, and of accessing any of the amenities located along them (see
Sections 6.2 and 6.11). CIRCULATION
Consideration should also be given to the arrival and departure patterns of spectators, and
the impact that external constraints – beyond the perimeter of the sports ground – might
have on their ingress and egress, and on circulation routes in general. Advice on co-ordinating
these issues follows in Sections 6.10 and 6.11.
6.2 Creating a balanced system

Circulation both in and around sports grounds should be planned and managed to ensure that
individual elements, such as entry points, stairways, gangways, vomitories, concourses and
exits, combine to form a balanced circulation system overall.
This includes allowance for the fact that during an event there will be periods, such as those
between playing sessions or races, or at half-time, when movement patterns differ from those
generally found during ingress and egress (typically involving a greater cross movement of
spectators).
Contents
Similarly, it is often the case that certain parts of a ground’s circulation system, particularly
concourses, serve different uses at different times during an event. At the start and end
of events, they may be used for ingress and egress. At other times during the event they
will serve as places for spectators to gather and circulate. This multi-functionality needs
to be monitored and managed at all times so that essential circulation routes are not
compromised.
If not designed or managed properly, or if too small, such multi-functional circulation areas
can become congested at key times. If this occurs, the aim of management should be,
wherever possible, to channel spectators into other areas; for example, by encouraging them
to use alternative stairways, catering outlets or toilets.
When designing and managing circulation routes, the aim should always be to create the
conditions in which a free flow of people is possible.
However it is also recognised that during an event there may be periods of congestion that
need to be managed effectively (see Chapter 10). As such, there may need to be elements
within the circulation system that are designed specifically to manage flow rates, such as
at the approaches to the entrance of a vomitory (see Figure 12), or at the head of stairs (see
Figure 9).
Finally, a balanced circulation system within the ground must be complemented by a safely
managed circulation system outside the ground, as explained in Section 6.10.
6.3 Circulation routes – zoning

Experience has shown that it is helpful for management at sports grounds to consider all
circulation routes in terms of a series of concentric zones, as illustrated in Figure 6.
Clearly the number and extent of these zones will differ considerably from ground to ground.
But all grounds will at least have the equivalent of Zones 1, 2 and 3, and of the external
‘Zone Ex’.
New construction
Wherever possible, new grounds should be planned so that there are continuous circulation
routes around the spectator accommodation, linked to both ingress and egress routes.
Figure 6 illustrates the basis for such planning.
CIRCULATION
Contents
Figure 6 Zonal planning

In the planning, design and management of sports grounds it may be helpful to consider the
circulation areas in terms of zones. Clearly the number and extent of these zones will differ
from ground to ground, as shown here. But all grounds (as shown in the smaller example)
will at least have the equivalent of Zones 1, 2 and 3 and of the external ‘Zone Ex’.
3
4
EX
EX
Zone 1: the pitch or area of activity. This may be considered a place of reasonable safety*
to which spectators can be evacuated before using other emergency exits (but see Section
10.16). Zone 1 should be accessible to spectators in Zone 2 via gates or openings in the
pitch or area of activity perimeter barriers.
Zone 2: the viewing accommodation, including gangways.
Zone 3: internal concourses, vomitories and hospitality areas. If any of these areas need to
be evacuated, it should preferably be to Zone 4.
CIRCULATION
Zone 4: the outer circulation area. In planning terms, Zone 4 can serve as a vital access area
for emergency and service vehicles, without disrupting circulation in Zones 2 and 3.
Note that Zones 3 and 4 will, in most situations, be considered places of reasonable safety*,
which spectators can reach before exiting to Zone 5. Note also that at smaller grounds Zone
3 or Zone 4 may serve as the equivalent of Zone 5 in larger grounds.
Zone 5: a buffer zone outside the sports ground perimeter, used for the public to gather
before entry and for links to car parks and public transport. The public should be able to
circumnavigate the perimeter in this zone, in order to find an appropriate point of entry.
Zone 5 should be the designated place of safety* in the event of an emergency.
Zone Ex: the external zone. This zone, sometimes referred to as ‘the last mile’, is in the
public realm and is likely to encompass the main pedestrian and vehicle routes leading from
Zone 5 to public car parks, local train stations, bus stops and so on.
* for more information on places of reasonable safety and places of safety, see Section 15.26
Contents
6.4 Circulation routes – design issues

Detailed guidance on specific aspects of circulation follows in Chapters 7–10. However, it is
stressed that the following requirements apply to all circulation routes. Where deficiencies
exist, the (P) and/or (S) factors should be reduced accordingly.
a. Design
Circulation routes should be clearly defined, and designed to be free from obstructions.
b. Maintaining safe and secure conditions

Circulation routes should be kept free from obstructions or trip hazards, and have
slip-resistant floor surfaces. Detailed guidance on slip resistance can be found in the
CIRIA publication, Safer Surfaces to Walk On.
c. Widths
Existing construction: circulation routes (including stairways and gangways) should be not
less than a minimum width of 1.1m.
(Where handrails are fitted, see Sections 8.8 – 8.10 and Figure 8.)
New construction
Circulation routes (including stairways and gangways) should be not less than the
recommended minimum width of 1.2m.
d. Headroom
New construction
A minimum headroom of 2.3m is recommended for all rooms and horizontal circulation routes
to which the public have access, and for areas of viewing accommodation, particularly at
the rear of covered stands. Stairs and ramps to which the public have access should have a
minimum headroom of 2.0m measured from the pitch line.
e. Signs
Circulation routes should be identified by clear signs, illuminated where necessary.
Consideration should also be given to the avoidance of colours and/or colour combinations
on signs and their backgrounds that might be difficult for people
with colour blindness to read or interpret (see online Annex C). CIRCULATION
f. Lighting
Circulation routes should be well lit, by natural and/or artificial light, under both normal
and emergency conditions (see Sections 17.10 and 17.11).
g. Fire risk
All fire risks affecting circulation routes should be identified and managed
(see Chapter 15).
Contents
6.5 Circulation routes – free movement

In order to achieve a free, unimpeded flow of people within the boundary of the sports ground,
management should ensure that circulation routes are kept as clear as possible of all non-
essential items and personnel. This will require:
a. the regular clearance of waste, litter and spillages
b. the monitoring of all circulation areas by stewards and/or CCTV
c. preventing non-essential personnel (such as off-duty staff) from gathering around key
areas, such as stairways, gangways, vomitories and exit gates.
Where there is a free movement of spectators between different viewing areas, further
management controls may also be necessary, as detailed in Sections 13.17 and 13.21.
6.6 Circulation routes – flow rates and crowd densities

As stated in Section 6.1, the comfort and enjoyment of spectators will, to a large extent,
be determined by their experience of passing through circulation routes.
In order to achieve and maintain such levels of comfort and free flow it is essential for
designers and management to understand flow rates (also known as rates of passage) and
crowd densities. For more details of flow rates, see Section 10.10.
Clearly flow rates, and therefore the resultant densities, will vary according to whether people
are walking on:
a. level surfaces
b. ramps
c. stepped surfaces moving up
d. stepped surfaces moving down.
Other factors include whether people are:
e. entering the ground
f. exiting the ground, under normal or emergency conditions, or
g. whether they are milling or standing, for example on a concourse or a terrace. CIRCULATION
Additional factors affecting flow rates and crowd densities include the prevailing weather
conditions (for example, in cold conditions people will wear bulkier clothing), the timing of
an event (for example spectators may be more likely to exit hurriedly if the event ends in
the late evening), and whether large numbers of children are present.
Flow rates for ingress are determined by a number of factors, as detailed in

Sections 7.4 – 7.6. Flow rates for egress are also determined by a number of factors, as
detailed in Sections 10.9 – 10.12.
Existing construction: flow rates and crowd densities can be measured by observation, for
example by head counting or reviewing CCTV footage, and by analysis, for example using
crowd simulation modelling.
Contents
New construction
In order to achieve a free, unimpeded flow of people at all times during an event at a new
sports ground, management and designers are recommended to base their designs for
circulation routes upon all the recommended design parameters set down in this chapter and
Chapters 7 – 10, and by using the calculations relating to ingress set out in Sections 7.4 – 7.6
and for egress in Sections 10.9 – 10.12.
These calculations should then be tested against a demand forecast – that is, a forecast of
the number of people expected, their predicted arrival and departure patterns, and the likely
number of people circulating at any one point and time within the circulation system, taking
into account also their objectives or movement patterns (for example, if they are entering or
exiting).
The demand forecast should also take into consideration all the other possible uses of the new
sports ground (for example if it is to stage different types of sports, or concerts or gatherings)
and the profiles of the audiences expected to those events (for example if more children are
likely to be in attendance).
By testing the recommended flow rates along with all the other known operational design
parameters and management requirements against the demand forecast – and if appropriate,
by using crowd simulation modelling (see below) to test and investigate these calculations
further – free flowing circulation routes and comfortable levels of crowd density should result.
6.7 Crowd simulation modelling

Crowd simulation modelling is a tool that offers an insight into how well an existing sports
ground’s infrastructure, or a proposed sports ground design, copes with the numbers
determined by static capacity calculations (that is, as outlined in Chapter Two, calculations
worked out on paper, or on spreadsheets). Such modelling can also help management
and designers decide whether any improvements need to be made to the layout and/or
management of the ground.
If considering the use of crowd simulation modelling, management should ensure that the
relevant building control and certifying authorities are involved in the process from an early
stage, that any simulations are carried out by competent modellers, and that the resulting
data is subject to detailed analysis by competent persons.
For example, when measuring flow rates during ingress or egress, crowd simulation
modelling can typically result in a differential of between +/– 10-20 per cent compared to
static calculations. In such situations, the response of management should always be to
consider why these differences have emerged, what lessons can be learnt from the data and
CIRCULATION
what, if any, mitigating measures might be necessary.
6.8 Circulation routes and accessibility

The location of viewing accommodation for disabled spectators around the ground,
and particularly on the upper levels of stands, has considerable implications for the safe
management of circulation areas, and for the design and management of exit and
emergency exit routes.
Wherever possible, and in all cases of new construction, management and designers should
take account of BS8300-1: Design of an accessible and inclusive built environment. External
environment. Code of practice. This standard provides guidance on suitable stairs, ramps and
refuges (see also Section 10.15).
Contents
Where, because of constraints posed by existing buildings, it is not possible or practicable

to apply the British Standards fully, alternative ways of meeting their objectives should
be sought.
Although entry points for wheelchair users may need to be kept separate (see Section 7.8.e),
and vertical circulation routes, such as passenger lifts or ramps, should be clearly defined,
horizontal circulation routes should be designed so that they can be shared safely by
all people.
Where appropriate, corridors and passageways need to be wide enough to allow wheelchair
users to manoeuvre and, where necessary, to turn through 180 degrees and to allow other
wheelchair users to pass. For further guidance, reference should be made to Accessible Stadia
and Supplementary Guidance, both available from the SGSA.
The publication Fire Safety Risk Assessment – Means of Escape for Disabled People, published
by the Department for Housing, Communities and Local Government, provides additional
information on accessibility and means of escape for disabled people.
6.9 Planning for emergency vehicles

In addition to managing and monitoring the circulation of people, management should ensure
that there are sufficient, adequate routes for emergency vehicles leading to and from all
buildings and areas within the sports ground. These routes should be agreed in consultation
with the relevant emergency services and should form part of the management’s contingency
planning (see Section 3.15) and of the emergency plan (see Section 3.20).
Where it is anticipated that the routes taken by emergency vehicles might conflict with the
movement of people, consideration should be given to the provision of on-site parking areas
for emergency vehicles.
6.10 Zone Ex co-ordination

For most spectators travelling to, or exiting from, a sports ground – in order to connect with a
public transport hub, a car park or local amenities – their journey will involve passing through
routes or areas that lie beyond the outer perimeter of the sports ground.
For the purposes of the Guide and for management planning, this external zone, which may
consist of a network of routes and areas, or in some locations a single expanse of land, is
referred to as Zone Ex (see Figure 6). Some users of the Guide may also have seen this zone
referred to as ‘the last mile’.
CIRCULATION
Although the routes or areas that make up Zone Ex do not, in most locations, fall within
the jurisdiction of the ground management – they will either be part of the public realm or
under private ownership – clearly they are key to the safe and secure arrival and departure of
spectators.
It is therefore vital that planning for the movement of people through Zone Ex involves the
input of all relevant external organisations, such as the police, local authorities, highway
agencies and, where applicable, the owners of private property.
Within such a multi-agency approach it is important to establish which organisation or

agency has the lead responsibility for co-ordinating the management of Zone Ex on an event
day, and for this role to be recorded in the Operations Manual (see Section 3.4) and in the
ground’s safety management structure (see Section 3.6).
Contents
At major events this may be a role allocated to an individual representing one of the relevant
agencies, although in some circumstances the task may be assigned to a member of the
ground’s safety management team.
The purpose of Zone Ex co-ordination is to:
a. define the extent of Zone Ex
b. identify the relevant agencies within Zone Ex
c. agree the level of resource each agency will commit to the safety management plan,
plus any associated command and control protocols
d. allow scrutiny of the various agency plans to identify any potential conflicts and to achieve
a shared understanding of each other’s priorities, key activities and threats
e. provide real time transport information to the Safety Officer
f. jointly consider crowd movement patterns, flows and timings, for arrival and departure
g. jointly consider the location and access to drop-off/pick-up points for disabled people
h. develop and test contingencies relating to crowd numbers, movements, dynamics and
behaviour within Zone Ex
i. develop and test contingencies for the failure or suspension of key elements of the
pedestrian or vehicular routes and/or public transport systems.
It should be emphasised that factors within Zone Ex can have a considerable impact upon the
circulation of people outside the ground, during both ingress and egress, and potentially upon
the safety of people inside the ground.
As such, if it can be demonstrated that areas or issues within Zone Ex give rise to safety
concerns (which could impact upon the safe ingress or egress of spectators), a reduction of
the ground’s capacity may be required, by the application of reduced (P) or (S) factors.
6.11 Zone Ex personnel

Personnel deployed within Zone Ex are often the first and last points of contact for those
attending an event. Such individuals should therefore be skilled in the area of customer
service and be able to give clear, concise information, particularly when assisting people
who may be unfamiliar with the ground or its surroundings.
Whilst it is recognised that such personnel, whether employed or voluntary, may have
CIRCULATION
limited powers, it is nevertheless important that their roles are clearly defined and agreed
with all stakeholders, and that they are properly trained.
It is, furthermore, the responsibility of the employers of the personnel within Zone Ex –
whether that is the ground management or external agencies – to conduct the relevant
risk assessments.
The roles of personnel deployed in Zone Ex might include:
a. providing customer service and wayfinding information
b. preparing spectators for entry procedures, and if appropriate, for searching
c. undertaking soft ticket checks; that is, ensuring ticket holders have the correct ticket
Contents
d. monitoring and controlling the arrival of spectators at the ground’s points of entry,
to prevent excessive crowd buildup
e. providing early notification to the ground’s safety control point of any external issues
that may impact upon the event
f. at the end of an event, providing wayfinding advice to spectators as they exit.
Considering the last point, it should be remembered that whilst before an event spectators
tend to arrive at the ground over an extended period of time, at the end of an event the
majority seek to leave simultaneously, resulting in the need to ensure that circulation routes
leading to transport hubs, car parks and so on, remain unobstructed and free flowing.
6.12 Circulation and event related issues

Management should be aware that certain event-related operational policies and practices
– implemented, for example, when the sports ground hosts a high profile event or concert –
can affect the efficiency of circulation systems.
Such policies and practices, some or all of which might differ from those in place at events
routinely staged at the ground, might include:
a. special arrangements for ticketing and entry (see Section 7.9)
b. the positioning of vendors
c. the positioning of television monitors, scoreboards and other points of interest
d. the positioning of commercial or media-related activities which involve placing vehicles,

temporary structures, cables or extra personnel in key areas (see Chapter 19)
e. the positioning of commercial activities, including the placing of any signage which
encourages spectators to gather in strategic areas, or involves the distribution of handouts
or refreshments
f. the opening and closing times of catering or commercial outlets before, during or after
an event
g. segregation arrangements which necessitate extra barriers, divided concourses,

sealed-off areas or dead ends.
Additional factors to consider when planning and managing circulation areas for use during
specific events are:
CIRCULATION
h. the composition of the anticipated audience (its gender ratio, age range and likely
familiarity with the surroundings)
i. the event’s start and finish time, and its length.
Similarly, if the ground is subject to an event-specific overlay, as described in the following

section, management must also ensure that circulation routes are not compromised.
Contents
6.13 Circulation and overlay

Overlay is the term used to describe the use of temporary installations (such as ‘fan zones’,
seating decks, tents, kiosks, bridges and generators) for specific events. It can also include
the provision of new roads or routes. Some of these installations may be built to the same
specifications as permanent installations and may even, in time, become permanent.
But whether temporary or permanent, it is important that management should consider the
effects of overlay on existing circulation routes, and therefore also on operational plans and
even on the safe capacity of the ground.
Examples of where overlay may impact upon circulation routes include the provision of:
a. spectator accommodation in areas not normally used by spectators, for example on the
pitch or area of activity
b. additional access routes for the delivery of equipment, such as staging, sound systems
and media installations
c. additional facilities required to accommodate a greater number of spectators, or

spectators of a different profile, or for events of a longer duration than the norm; such
facilities to include temporary turnstiles, portable toilets, food and drink outlets, hospitality
tents, information points and first aid facilities
d. additional facilities required to support commercial activities, such as merchandising

outlets and stadium dressing
e. additional security and counter terrorism measures (see Section 3.19).
In all cases, the overlay should not compromise any means of ingress, egress, accessibility or
general circulation, or result in adverse changes to the known and usual speed or direction of
crowd flows. Where this cannot be achieved and appropriate mitigation measures cannot be
put in place, the capacity for the event is likely to be reduced.
It is therefore essential that from an early stage of planning, the ground’s safety management
team works closely with those designing the overlay to ensure that any potential safety
issues are identified and resolved.
The design of any overlay should be circulated to all parties for agreement in advance.
CIRCULATION
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 7.0 Circulation – ingress
7.0 Circulation – ingress
7.1 Planning and management of ingress

Taking into consideration the factors outlined in Section 6.1 for the planning and
management of circulation routes in general, combined with the all-important need
to monitor the number of people entering the ground (as emphasised in Chapter Two),
safe and secure ingress is achieved by provision of the following.
a. A sufficient number of controlled entry points – in the form of turnstiles, gates or doors,
staffed or automated (see Section 7.7) – evenly distributed and serving each section
of the ground, appropriate in number to process the holding capacity of that section
(see Sections 2.6–2.7), and the desired entry capacity (see Section 7.4–7.5).
b. An accurate counting system at each entry point (see Section 7.2).
c. Entry points designed and operated to allow for the ingress of spectators at a rate
that does not lead to congestion or delays outside the ground, yet also does not
compromise the safety of spectators immediately after they have entered the ground
(see Sections 7.5–7.6).
d. Adequate stewarding and signage.
e. Adequate maintenance and the reliability of the entry control systems.
f. Entry systems that are appropriate in design for the security needs of the ground.
It should be recognised by management that if there are deficiencies in any of the elements
that combine to form the ingress system – for example if there are too few entry points –
CIRCULATION
the entry capacity will have to be lowered. This, potentially, could result in a reduction
of the overall capacity. Similarly, should there be any deficiencies in the management of the
ingress system – for example if congestion occurs on a regular basis – there may also follow
a reduction in the (S) factor. This too could lead to a further reduction in the overall capacity
(see Chapter 2).
7.2 The need to count

Counting spectators accurately as they enter a sports ground is crucial for three reasons:
a. to prevent overcrowding
b. to enable the management to monitor the ingress process and react when necessary
c. to enable the management to calculate the ground’s all-important entry capacity, as

explained in Section 2.3 and 7.4.
Contents
All spectators entering all sections of the ground, including VIPs, should therefore be counted
at their point of entry, and the numbers recorded. This applies whatever is the means of entry,
be it by cash payment, ticket, electronic card, security pass or badge.
It also applies whatever form the point of entry takes. For example, at certain sports grounds
or hospitality areas, less structured entry points, such as gateways or check points, may be
in place. Similarly, at some grounds spectators may enter in vehicles and not be subject to
further entry checks. Regardless of how they enter, each individual must still be counted,
and the numbers recorded.
As such, every entry point should be served by a metered turnstile or by an alternative means
of counting, in order that the management is able to maintain an ongoing record of the
number of spectators admitted to that section. Where one section of a ground is served by
multiple entry points – such as a bank of turnstiles – the counting system should be capable
of recording a combined total for those entry points.
It is also vital that, throughout the ingress period, management is kept informed of the
ongoing totals, and especially at key, pre-determined stages; for example, when 90 per cent of
the total capacity has been reached. This is important for two reasons.
d. Management will need to assess how long it will take for the remaining people outside
the ground (if any) to be admitted before the start of the event. If the number queuing
is greater than can be admitted at the prevailing rate of admission, wherever possible
extra entry points should be opened to cope with the demand. If this is not possible,
consideration should be given to delaying the start of the event.
e. When entry is other than by ticket or entry card for reserved seats, management will need
to know when the section is near capacity so that:
i. the entry points can be closed before the capacity is exceeded
ii. people queuing or approaching the entry points can be warned, and where appropriate,
re-directed to entrances serving other sections of the ground.
As stated in Sections 3.15 and 3.16, contingency plans to cater for the above situations
should be prepared.
For further guidance on counting spectators on entry, see Section 16.11.
7.3 Monitoring systems and record keeping

In order for the ground management to have instant access to the figures being counted at
CIRCULATION
each entry point, and for the rates of admission to be accurately assessed, it is recommended
that a computerised monitoring system should be installed wherever practicable.
When installing and operating such a system, the following points should be considered:
a. the main display monitor should be sited in the ground’s control point, where it can be
viewed by the Safety Officer and, if present, the police commander
b. contingency plans should cover the failure of the computerised system (see Sections 3.15
and 3.16)
c. a backup monitor should be available.
Contents
In the absence of a computerised counting system, an efficient system of communication

must be established between all entry points and the control point, using runners, landlines,
mobile phones or radios.
Whichever counting system is in place, computerised or otherwise, the following should

apply:
d. clear, written records of the total number of spectators inside the ground should be kept at
regular intervals during the ingress period, using wipe boards and/or pro-formas
e. all computer read-outs or written records should indicate the section of the ground, the
number of spectators occupying that section and the time of the count
f. all computer read-outs or written records need to be immediately available to the Safety
Officer and, if present, the police ground commander.
7.4 Entry capacity – setting a time period

As stated in Sections 2.3 and 7.2, one of the calculations required to determine the final
capacity of a ground, or one section of the ground, is the entry capacity.
Once again, the entry capacity is the number of people who can pass through all the entry
points serving either the whole ground or one section, generally within a period of one hour.
Based on years of experience, this time period is considered a reasonable basis for
establishing the entry capacity at grounds where most spectators choose to enter the ground
close to the start of the event.
However, at grounds where spectators typically arrive over an extended period prior to the
start of an event, it may be reasonable to base the entry capacity calculation on a time period
of greater than one hour.
7.5 Entry capacity – measuring the rate of entry

The rate at which people can pass through each entry point in one hour (or whatever other
time period is appropriate to the ground or the nature of the event) will vary according to a
number of factors.
However, for the purposes of calculating the entry capacity, an upper limit of 660 persons per
entry point per hour should be applied. This is because a higher rate of entry is likely to cause
crowd pressure to build up within the areas immediately inside the ground.
CIRCULATION
Therefore if the recorded rate of entry proves to be greater than 660 persons per entry
point per hour – as may well be possible where electronic card entry systems are in place
– the upper limit of 660 should still apply when calculating the entry capacity.
Where the recorded rate of entry proves to be lower than 660 persons per entry point per hour
for reasons other than low demand, that lower figure is the figure that should be used for the
purposes of calculating the entry capacity.
If the entry capacity is lower than the holding capacity of the section, the final capacity of
that section should be reduced accordingly, as explained in Chapter 2.
All rates of entry should be measured at least once a year and recorded.
Contents
7.6 Factors affecting the rate of entry

The main factors affecting the rate of entry are:
a. the number and dispersal of operational entry points (see Section 7.7)
b. the adequacy of directional information and communications
c. admission policies concerning:
i. the means of entry; for example by cash, ticket, entry card or voucher
ii. the categories for entry; for example, adults, concessions, children, disabled people
or groups (see Sections 3.30 and 7.10)
d. the design and condition of the entry points
e. where employed, the capabilities of entry point personnel (such as turnstile operators)
f. where electronic card entry systems are in use, the efficiency and reliability of the system,
and the ability of spectators to use the system (see Section 7.10.g)
g. the level and types of security screening in place (see Section 7.12).
Management should be aware that the failure of any one element within the ingress system
can reduce rates of entry considerably, and they should therefore have contingency plans in
place to allow for such failures.
7.7 Providing a sufficient number of entry points

Although the entry capacity is determined by the number of spectators who can be
admitted within a time period of one hour (or more if extended by agreement, see Section 7.4),
in practice many grounds admit spectators more than one hour in advance of the start of
a sporting event. Equally, at some events a large number of spectators typically arrive only
shortly before the starting time.
These variations should be recognised when determining the number of entry points to be
provided on particular event days.
For example, providing the exact number of turnstiles to serve one section of a ground purely
on the basis that each one will theoretically admit 660 persons per hour may still not be
enough to avoid queues building up outside the ground, if large numbers of latecomers arrive
shortly before the start.
CIRCULATION
It is also inevitable that some entry points will operate more slowly than others; for example,
those admitting large numbers of children.
For all spectators to be admitted in time for the start, therefore, a larger number of entry
points may be required than might otherwise be the case if the number were based purely on
the rate of entry of 660 persons per hour per entry point.
7.8 Design and management of entry points and ingress routes

The design and management of entry points and ingress routes should take into
consideration the following:
a. Entry points should be evenly distributed around the perimeter of the sports ground
wherever possible, in order to prevent localised areas of crowd pressure.
Contents
b. Where a free flowing circulation area leads to a bank of entry points, consideration should
be given to the division of the approaches into channels (or queue pre-selection routes)
using moveable barriers. These channels should be clearly signposted in advance and,
where appropriate, divided by barriers that are at least 1.1m in height. Where possible a
clear pathway measuring at least 600mm should be provided between each channel, for
the use of stewards and any person who wishes to leave the queue.
Stewards should also be positioned in advance of the channels to direct people to the
appropriate channel.
c. The installation of CCTV should be considered in order to assist in the monitoring of crowd
densities outside the ground and throughout the ingress/egress routes (see Sections
16.20–16.26).
d. Where controlled by an operator, entry points should be designed so that the operator is
able to see and communicate clearly with entrants.
e. Turnstiles are not suitable entry points for wheelchair users, for people who are blind or
partially sighted and/or accompanied by assistance dogs. For those individuals, the most
practical design solution is to provide level access via a staffed gate or door – fitted with
an appropriate vision panel – which provides access into a control lobby. At each such
entry point, arrangements to count each individual as they enter should be in place.
f. Entrances should be sited so that the forward flow of people towards the spectator
accommodation is, as far as possible, evenly distributed. Where this distribution is
uneven and gives rise to congestion, consideration should be given to changing the entry
point arrangements and, if possible, to directing more people to under-used entrances.
Additional measures might include improved signposting and increased stewarding, both
inside and outside the ground.
g. Entry routes should not be obstructed. For example, amenities such as refreshment kiosks
or toilets, where queues are likely to form, should be located away from the immediate
area of the entry routes.
h. All perimeter walls, fences and gates should be designed in such a way that they do not
have any holes or gaps, or handholds or footholds that might be used for climbing. They
should also be regularly inspected.
i. Ingress and egress routes are often common to each other. Where that applies ingress
routes will therefore be subject to the same design and management considerations set
out for egress in Chapter 10. CIRCULATION
7.9 Providing clear information

Spectators should be provided with clear, consistent information on all aspects of the ingress
system. Wherever practical, the following measures should be considered:
a. All entrances and entry routes should be clearly signposted and, if used in non-daylight
hours, adequately lit (see Sections 17.10–17.11).
b. All entry points should be lettered, numbered or named. These letters, numbers or names
should be recorded in all documentation relating to the ground, including ground plans and
contingency plans.
c. Clear ground plans showing all entrance points should be displayed at strategic points
outside the ground, ideally so that people approaching the ground can decide, as early as
possible, which entrance to use.
Contents
d. Consideration should be given to using distinctive colours to identify different parts of the
ground. Replicating these colours on tickets and signs will help spectators to locate their
places. It will also avoid spectators, stewards and the emergency services being confused
when the name of a particular section of the ground is changed (for example, when a
different sponsor is in place).
When selecting colours and background colours, reference should be made to the needs of
people with colour blindness (see online Annex C).
e. Tickets or entry cards, where issued, should satisfy the following requirements:
i. They should clearly identify the location of the accommodation for which they have
been issued (including any colour coding, as in d. above).
ii. They should have a ground plan reproduced on the back of that part of the ticket
retained by the spectator, or provided separately with the electronic entry card. Due
to the amount of key information necessary and the likely reduction in the size of the
typeface used, the information on the back of tickets should be supplemented with
clear wayfinding signage and information outside the ground.
iii. Information on the ticket and/or provided separately with the entry card should
correlate exactly with the information provided both inside and outside the ground.
For more on ticketing and admission policies, see Sections 3.30 and 7.10.
f. Event programmes or race cards, where issued, should include a clearly labelled plan of
the ground, indicating the entry and exit routes to and from different parts of the ground,
and details of evacuation procedures (see Section 16.33).
g. Spectators should be made aware of ground regulations and in particular of any articles
that are prohibited. This can be achieved by the use of posters, and by repeating the
information on ground plans and tickets, and in event programmes.
For further guidance on the communication of information, see Chapter 16.
7.10 Effects of admission policies

Policies adopted by the management can have a direct effect on the rates of entry and the
management of entry points. Specific points to consider include:
a. Cash sales
To ensure a steady flow of spectators into the ground when entry is by cash, the
CIRCULATION
admission price should ideally be set at a round figure which avoids the need for large
amounts of small change to be handled. Where necessary, entry point operators should be
provided with sufficient change, topped up if necessary by staff assisting the operators.
b. Ticket or entry card only sales

The advantages of confining entry to tickets or entry cards are that the rate of admission
should be higher than for cash sales, and the system allows different categories of
spectator (for example, parent and child) to purchase adjacent seats and enter the
ground together.
If tickets or entry cards are sold on the day of the event, wherever possible separate sales
outlets should be provided. These outlets should be clearly signposted, and positioned, so
that queues do not conflict with queues for other entry points.
Contents
c. Reserved (or numbered) seat ticket or entry card sales

Selling tickets or entry cards for specific numbered seats has the advantage that the
seats are more likely to be sold in blocks. This policy helps to avoid random gaps and
ensures that in the key period preceding the start of the event there will be less need for
stewards to have to direct latecomers to the remaining seats, or move spectators who
have already settled.
Another advantage of this policy is that it makes it possible for management to sell the
total seated capacity of the ground, or section of the ground, as opposed to a policy of
unreserved seat sales, as explained below.
d. Unreserved seat sales

Selling unreserved seats, by cash or ticket, is easier to administer. However, spectators
are prone to occupy seats in a random pattern, and, as stated above, it can be hard to fill
unoccupied seats in the key period before the start of the event.
For this reason, when unreserved seats are sold, a reduction in the number of seats made
available for sale is likely to be necessary. This reduction may be in the region of 10 per
cent of the total capacity of the section, according to local circumstances.
e. No ticket or cash entry on the event day

If all tickets have sold out in advance, or if the management decides not to sell tickets or
allow cash entry on the day of the event, every effort should be made to publicise this fact
in the local press and media. In addition, signs advising the public of the situation should
be placed along all approaches to the ground, in order to avoid an unnecessary buildup of
crowds outside the ground and its entrances.
f. Ticket design
The design of tickets can have a direct effect on the rate of admission. For example, clear,
easy-to-read information will speed the ability of the entry point operator to process the
ticket. Similarly, if anti-counterfeiting features are incorporated (as is recommended),
simple procedures should be in place for the operator to check each ticket’s validity.
g. Electronic entry card design

In case of card systems, where no operator is immediately present, it is essential that the
card user has clear instructions both with the card and on the card reader, at the point of
entry, on how to:
i. present the card for validation
ii. seek assistance should the reader fail to recognise the card as valid and therefore
prevent entry.
CIRCULATION
Should the electronic system fail in part or in whole, management should have in place
contingency plans to ensure that card holders are still able to enter safely.
For more on ticketing see Sections 3.30, 7.9, 12.25.a and 16.33.
7.11 Crowd buildup outside the ground

Dangerous overcrowding can be caused if spectators are able to force their way into a ground
already full or nearly full, for example by scaling or breaking through boundary walls, fences,
gates or turnstiles.
To avoid this danger boundary walls, fences and gates should be of the appropriate height
and strength, should not provide the opportunity for climbing, and should, where possible,
be monitored by CCTV.
Contents
Areas around entry points should be stewarded where there is a potential threat of forced
entry.
Contingency plans should be drawn up in order to deal with situations where unduly large
crowds gather outside. Local knowledge of the ground and arrival patterns should be taken
into account in drawing up such contingency plans.
It is further stressed that the opening of additional or under-used entrances could lead to both
uncontrolled movement and crushing. If contingency plans dealing with large crowds outside
include the opening of additional entrances, the plan must also contain measures to prevent
the uncontrolled movement of crowds. It should also ensure that spectators who enter in
such situations can still be accurately counted, and that stewarding arrangements are in
place for their dispersal once inside the ground.
Under no circumstances should there be uncontrolled admission into the ground.
7.12 Searching and security screening

As stated in Section 3.18 one response to a security threat might be the need to search
and/or screen spectators before they enter the sports ground.
Figure 7 illustrates how many persons are likely to be processed per hour according to the
level of threat and to the form of searching or screening taking place. In all instances, it will be
noted, these checks will result in a rate lower than that of 660 persons per hour.
In order therefore that subsequent rates of entry to the ground are not reduced by the
searching or screening process, it is vital for management to plan accordingly; for example
by opening entry points and encouraging spectators to arrive earlier than usual, by opening
more entry points, or by deploying more stewards.
Figure 7 Table showing sample rates of security screening

These figures are based upon current samplings and are given for illustration only, to
demonstrate the potential impact that screening spectators might have upon subsequent
rates of entry. In practice the screening rates will vary according to local factors; for
example the number of search lanes provided, the skills and experience of those carrying
out the checks, and the ratio of males to females carrying out the checks compared with the
ratio of males to females in the queues.
Clearly it is important for management to ensure that whatever the screening rates, the
CIRCULATION
subsequent rates of entry to the ground do not fall below 660 persons per hour, or whatever
rate is considered appropriate, as detailed in Section 7.5.
TYPE OF SCREENING LEVEL OF RISK PERSONS PER HOUR
manual ‘pat down’ low 600

high 300
metal detectors + low 500

bag checking high 240
x ray low 350

high 230
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 8.0 Circulation – vertical
8.0 Circulation – vertical
8.1 Vertical circulation

Designers and the management of sports grounds should consider all aspects of the
design, planning and management of vertical circulation routes – that is, the ground’s
stairways, radial gangways, ramps, lifts and escalators – in order to provide for the smooth,
unimpeded circulation of all people present during an event, under both normal and
emergency conditions.
This chapter should be read in conjunction with Chapters 6, 7, 9 and 10 on circulation

and Chapters 12–14 on spectator accommodation.
8.2 Stairways and gangways – definitions

It is emphasised that for the purposes of design and assessment, the criteria applying to
stairways at sports grounds are, in part, different to those pertaining to radial gangways.
The following definitions should therefore be noted:
a. Stairway
A stairway is that part of a structure which is not a radial gangway but which comprises
of at least one flight of stairs, including the landings at the head and foot of the stairway,
and any landings in between flights.
b. Radial gangway
A radial gangway is a stepped or sloping channel provided for circulation through an area
of viewing accommodation (Zone 2, as shown in Figure 6), running between seat rows or
CIRCULATION
terrace steps.
c. Lateral gangway
A lateral gangway is a level channel provided for circulation through an area of viewing
accommodation (Zone 2), running parallel with seat rows or terrace steps.
Further guidance on the provision and design of gangways can be found in

Sections 12.8–12.10 (for seated accommodation) and Sections 13.5–13.7
(for standing accommodation).
Contents
8.3 Stairways – design

Movement on stairways, especially downward movement, poses a considerable risk to crowds,
both in normal conditions, such as at the end of an event, or in an emergency.
The effects of stumbling, pushing, jostling and congestion can be particularly dangerous if, as a
result, the crowd suddenly surges forward or if, for any reason, any individuals suddenly change
direction.
The specific needs of sports grounds require that stairways should meet the following basic
specifications:
a. The stairway width should be uniform.
b. All goings (or stair treads) and risers on each stairway should be uniform between floors
and landings.
c. Open risers should not be used.
d. Tapered goings should not be used.
e. Wherever possible any flank walls or barriers defining the route should be perpendicular
– that is, at right angles – to the goings.
f. All goings should be slip-resistant, have durable edgings, and, where appropriate, have
adequate drainage. Detailed guidance on slip resistance can be found in the CIRIA
publication Safer Surfaces to Walk On.
g. All nosings should be clearly marked by means of a permanently contrasting paint or

materials, fixed to both the going and the riser. These markings or materials should be a
minimum width of 55mm and should not in themselves constitute a trip hazard.
h. On the top and bottom treads of external stairways, tactile paving (also known as corduroy)
should be provided for the benefit of people who are blind or partially sighted.
i. Adequate separation should be provided between channels (see Section 8.9.b and
Figure 8) on stairways so that there is no overspill from one channel to another.
j. Stairways should always be adequately illuminated by a power source (see Sections 17.10
and 17.11), but wherever possible should be positioned to take advantage of natural light
and ventilation.
Further guidance on the above requirements (including specific dimensional criteria) and
on flights of stairways, can be found in the following sections.
CIRCULATION
New construction
Stairways should comply with all the relevant requirements of the current Building Regulations.
Contents
8.4 Stairways – dimensions

Stairways and stairway channels should comply with the following dimensions:
a. Widths
Existing construction:
Minimum width: 1.1m Maximum width: 1.8m
Existing stairways and stairway channels of between 1.8m and 2.2m wide should,
wherever possible, be narrowed to no more than 1.8m by the installation or relocation
of suitable barriers.
Existing stairways and stairway channels wider than 2.2m should be divided into channels
in order to meet the width requirements above.
New construction
Minimum width: 1.2m Maximum width: 1.8m
b. Goings (stair treads)

Minimum depth: 280mm Preferred depth: 305mm
c. Risers
Minimum height: 150mm (this is also the preferred height)
Maximum height: 190mm
New construction
Minimum height: 150mm (this is also the preferred height)
Maximum height: 170mm, or 180mm where the stairway is a secondary stairway for escape
only (sometimes referred to as a utility stairway)
d. Landing
The goings of each landing, at the head and foot of stairways, and between flights,
should be not less than the width of the channel of the flight.
CIRCULATION
e. Headroom
New construction
Stairs or ramps to which the public have access should have a minimum headroom
of 2.0m measured from the pitch line.
Contents
8.5 Stairways – flights

In order to reduce the risk of crowd pressures or surges, flights of stairways should be
designed with a limited number of risers per flight, as follows:
a. Number of risers
Individual flights should consist of no more than 16 risers.
New construction
Individual flights should consist of no more than 12 risers. However, where the stairway is a
secondary stairway for escape only this may be increased to 16 risers.
b. Change of direction
If there are more than 36 risers in consecutive flights, the path of the stairway should
change direction of travel by at least 30 degrees.
This provision may be varied in cases where:
i. an intermediate landing between the two flights of stairs is provided which has a
minimum depth of 2 x the width of the channel feeding the landing, and
ii. the landing area is capable of accommodating the number of people that the channel
is designed to accommodate.
8.6 Radial gangways – design

All radial gangways should be a minimum width of 1.1m for existing construction and
1.2m for new construction.
They should also meet the design requirements listed for stairways in Section 8.3.a-g, but
with the following exception.
Although, in most instances at sports grounds, the goings (or stair treads) and risers on each
radial gangway should be uniform (as is also the case with stairways), it is recognised that
owing to the parabolic profile of many large stands, differences in the dimensions of goings
and risers may be unavoidable.
This should not be a safety concern if the differences occur between lengths of radial
CIRCULATION
gangways separated by lateral gangways. If, however, the differences occur within a single,
unbroken length of a radial gangway, consideration should be given to the placing of
structural elements, such as handholds or grab rails, on either side of the radial gangway,
in order to provide additional support for spectators when ascending or descending (see
Section 12.10).
It is further recommended that a radial gangway with a gradient that exceeds 25 degrees,
should:
a. consist of no more than 40 seat rows
b. be provided either with handholds or grab rails, placed on either side of the gangway, or a
central handrail, with intermittent gaps that permit spectator crossover.
Contents
8.7 Radial gangways – management

It is essential that radial gangways, and lateral gangways, are kept clear at all times during
an event. This is not only to facilitate the free movement of spectators but also to afford safe
and unrestricted passage for stewards and emergency services.
8.8 Barriers and handrails – definitions

For the purpose of the Guide, a barrier is any element, permanent or temporary, intended to
prevent people from falling, and to retain, stop or guide people (see Section 11.1), whereas a
handrail is a rail normally grasped by hand for guidance or support (see Section 8.10).
It is emphasised that in terms of their dimensions and design loadings, barriers are not
handrails, even though in certain situations – see Section 8.9.b – in practice they might
be used as handrails.
Further guidance on barriers is provided in Chapter 11. Further guidance on handrails in

gangways can be found in Section 12.10.b.
8.9 Barriers for stairways and ramps

As illustrated in Figure 8, barriers are used for two different purposes on stairways.
a. Barriers to stop people falling

Where stairways are situated next to, or in the middle of, open wells, or open spaces,
barriers designed to prevent people from falling should be provided on the open side or
sides. These barriers should be not less than 1.1m high.
Where children are likely to be in attendance, additional guarding – which is non-climbable

and has no openings through which a 100mm sphere can pass – should be provided.
b. Barriers to divide stairways into channels

Stairways separated into channels must be divided by the provision of barriers. Such
barriers may be designed to a height of between 0.9–1.0m, in which case they can also
function as a handrail, as shown in Figure 8. The barrier heights should be measured from
the pitch line, or from the surface of the landing. The barriers should also be designed to
resist a horizontal imposed load as specified in Figure 8.
8.10 Handrails for stairways and ramps CIRCULATION
As stated in Section 8.8, a handrail is provided for people to grasp, for guidance or support.
If the handrails are to serve only as handrails for stairways or ramps – that is, they are not
barriers as described in Section 8.9.b – the design should meet the following requirements:
a. Heights
Handrails of the same height should be provided on both sides of stairways, landings
and ramps.
Existing construction: handrails should be a minimum height of 840mm, and a maximum

height of 1.0m, measured vertically from the pitch line or from the surface of the landing.
New construction
Handrails should be a minimum height of 900mm, and a maximum height of 1.0m, measured
vertically from the pitch line or from the surface of the landing.
Contents
Figure 8 Barriers and handrails on stairways
This diagram illustrates a stairway with a wall on one side and an

open space (or well) on the other.
300
mm
1.1m
0.9 – 1.0m 0.9 – 1.0m
1.1m
0.9 – 1.0m
0.9 – 1.0m
300
mm
A barrier is installed to prevent people falling over the open side. Because this
barrier has to have a height of 1.1m, a handrail is attached at a lower level for
guidance or support. The handrail’s height should be between 0.9m and 1.0m
measured from the pitch line or from the surface of the landing. Note that each end
of the handrail bends around the ends of the barrier and extends 300mm beyond
the top and bottom stair risers. CIRCULATION
Another handrail is fixed to the wall. This too is fixed at a height of between 0.9m
and 1.0m above the pitch line or from the surface of the landing, and extends
300mm beyond the top and bottom stair risers. Care should be taken when fixing
such a handrail, in order to prevent it pulling away from the wall.
The central handrail, which divides the stairway into channels, is classed as
a barrier for the purposes of loading, and should be able to resist a single
concentrated load of 0.89kN, applied in any direction at any point along the top.
As stated in Section 8.9.b, a barrier in this location may be designed to a height of
0.9–1.0m, thus enabling it to be used also as a handrail.
Note that the handrails on either side of any stairway channel should be the same
height, and that if children are likely to use the stairway, additional guarding should
be provided on the open side (see Section 8.9.a).
Contents
b. Other dimensions
Wherever possible, handrails should project no more than 100mm into the width of the
stairway or ramp. If the projection is greater than 100mm the usable width of the stairway
should be measured between the handrails, and should be at least 1.1m (and 1.2m for new
construction).
Handrails should extend by at least 300mm beyond the top and bottom of any stairway,
measured from the vertical of the first and last risers, or from the start and finish of the
ramp.
c. Fitting and finishes

Handrails should be robust, securely fixed, and their fixings designed to be fit for purpose.
The surfaces of handrails should be smooth, with no sharp projections or edges.
The colour or finish of handrails should contrast with the walls or surfaces on which they
are mounted.
8.11 Controlling the flow at the head of stairways

In order to ensure a free flow of people and to limit the buildup of forward pressure, the head
of each stairway should be designed so that flow onto the stairway is uniform across its
width. Similarly, where a stairway is divided into channels, the approach should be designed
to ensure a uniform flow down each channel.
The design of approaches to the head of a stairway should meet the following requirements:
a. The approach should be level.
b. The approach should be designed so that people can approach the stairway only by
walking towards the direction of the stairs, and/or from its sides, but not diagonally.
c. In areas of viewing accommodation, any approach from directly behind a stairway (that
is, from higher up the seating deck or standing area) should be controlled using the same
methods as recommended for vomitories; by the routing of gangways or, in standing areas
with no gangways, by the positioning of barriers around the entrance (see Section 9.8).
d. No part of the approach should be less than 1.1m for existing construction and 1.2m for
new construction.
e. Where the approach to the head of a stairway is greater than 3m in width, the flow
of spectators should be strictly controlled by barriers, as illustrated in Figure 9.
CIRCULATION
However, some form of control may also be necessary where the approach is less
than 3m but where there is a potential for forward pressures to build up around the
head of the stairway.
8.12 Discharge from stairways

The flow of spectators as they move away from the foot of a stairway should be
controlled so that the egress routes discharge either:
a. at exit level, leading directly to a place of safety, or
b. onto walkways or concourses of adequate dimensions at any level, provided

these also lead directly to a place of safety.
A place of safety is a place where a person is no longer in danger from the effects
of fire or other threats (see Section 15.26).
Contents
Figure 9 Approaches to the head of stairways
As stated in Section 8.11, in order to control the flow of spectators as they approach the
head of a stairway, it is necessary to position barriers as shown above. The barriers should
be designed on the following basis:
The minimum width of A or B should be 1.1m (1.2m for new construction), but the aggregate
CIRCULATION
width of A + B on one side of the stairway should be not more than 3m.
2C C
2 (A + B) = or (A + B) =
3 3
From this calculation, it can be seen that stairways wider than 9m would require the
addition of more barriers at the head of the stairway.
To achieve visibility in crowded conditions, adding vertical elements that rise above head
height to the outer ends of barriers (as indicated above in red dotted lines) should also be
considered.
For more on the flow rates to be applied to stairways, see Sections 10.9 and 10.10.
Contents
8.13 Passenger lifts

Passenger lifts are the most suitable means of vertical access for people with limited mobility
and should be provided wherever possible, taking into account the following considerations:
a. Wheelchair users and spectators with limited mobility need sufficient time and space to
manoeuvre into the lift, and should be able to reach both the lift controls on the landing,
and those inside the lift itself.
b. Sufficient space should be provided in front of lifts so that people waiting for them will not
obstruct crowd flows.
c. A lift provided for passenger use in the normal operation of the sports ground may only be
used for evacuation if it meets the requirements of an evacuation lift, as specified in the
relevant British Standards (see Section 10.15.d).
d. Consideration should be given to the size of lifts where the Medical Plan (see Section 18.4)
provides for their use to transport injured spectators on stretchers.
e. In addition to passenger lifts, internal stairs should always be provided as an alternative

means of vertical circulation.
f. For the use of people who are blind or partially sighted, information signs and lift controls
should be supplemented with tactile text and/or Braille, at the appropriate height and in
colours that contrast with the background.
8.14 Escalators
Where escalators are installed at sports grounds the following design and management
issues should be considered:
a. Escalators should conform to the relevant British Standard.
b. Although escalators may form an integral part of the ingress and egress systems, they
should not be used for the purposes of calculating the emergency exit capacity of the
sports ground.
c. Because people with impaired mobility may prefer not to use escalators, passenger
lifts should be provided in addition, with clear signposting at the foot and head of each
escalator pointing to the location of the nearest lifts.
d. Escalators should discharge into a run off space sufficiently large and clear to avoid
people being unable to step off the escalator in congested situations (see Section 8.15).
CIRCULATION
e. The management’s contingency plans should take into consideration the consequences
of an escalator breakdown.
Further guidance on the emergency use of lifts or escalators for evacuation and fire and
rescue is available from the Department for Housing, Communities and Local Government.
Contents
8.15 Stairways and escalators – run on and run off space

At the head and foot of stairways and escalators, sufficient clear space should be provided to
enable individuals to make a decision on where they wish to proceed next, without impeding
the movement of people behind them. This run on, or run off space, should be in addition to
any area used for circulation.
The run on and run off space requirements will vary according to the layout and should be
determined by competent designers with the relevant experience.
8.16 Ramps
In certain locations – for example at large, multi-tiered sports grounds with extensive space
for circulation – designers may prefer to provide either straight or circular ramps rather than
stairs. The advantages are that if spectators stumble or fall on a ramp the consequences may
be less serious than on a stair, and that service and emergency vehicles may use ramps to
access upper levels.
Experience shows also that on a circular ramp spectators have the choice of selecting either
a steeper, quicker route near the centre, or a less steep, easier route near the perimeter,
thereby creating a smoother, unimpeded flow, particularly during egress.
Where provided, ramps should meet the following requirements:
a. Gradients
The maximum gradient should not exceed 1 in 10.
These gradients should preferably be constant and not be broken by steps.
New construction
The maximum gradient of a ramp should not exceed:
for a going not more than 2m: 1 in 12
for a going up to 5m: 1 in 15
for a going of up to 10m: 1 in 20
b. Other design considerations

CIRCULATION
i. A sufficient number of intermediate, level landings will be required for wheelchair users
and their companions. For further reference see BS 8300-1: Design of an accessible and
inclusive built environment. External environment. Code of practice.
ii. The ramp surface should be uniform and slip-resistant.
iii. Handrails should be provided using the same criteria as those applying to stairways
(see Section 8.10).
iv. Wherever possible, passenger lifts should be provided in addition to ramps.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 9.0 Circulation – concourses and vomitories
9.0 Circulation – concourses

and vomitories
9.1 Concourses and vomitories

This chapter provides guidance on circulation in those areas of a sports ground that do
not exactly fit into categories outlined elsewhere in the Guide, but which may also serve as
integral elements of the ground’s ingress and egress systems.
The chapter should therefore be read in conjunction with Chapters 6, 7, 8 and 10 on

circulation, Chapters 12, 13 and 14 on spectator accommodation, and Chapter 15 on fire
safety.
Further guidance on the design and safety management of new and existing concourses can
be found in the SGSA publication, Concourses.
For the purpose of the Guide a concourse is defined as an area, covered or uncovered, that:
a. provides direct access to and from viewing accommodation (Zone 2 in Figure 6), via
stairways, ramps, vomitories, or level passageways, and
b. serves as a milling area for spectators for the purposes of refreshment and entertainment,
and/or provides access to toilet facilities, and
c. may also form part of the ingress and egress systems of the ground.
A hospitality area that does not form part of the ingress or egress systems of the ground –
for example a self-contained lounge to which entry is restricted – should not be considered
a concourse.
A vomitory is an access route built into the gradient of a stand or terrace which directly links
CIRCULATION
the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to concourses, and/or routes for ingress and egress in
Zones 3 and 4 (see Figure 6).
Passage through a vomitory can be level, ramped or via stairways.
9.2 Concourses and safety

In addition to offering space for milling, concourses form an integral part of the circulation
system of sports grounds, and often provide access to amenities provided for the comfort
and enjoyment of spectators.
As such, it is important for management to monitor and manage concourses at all times
throughout an event, and to have in place strategies to address the varying levels of crowd
density that might occur, especially at times of peak usage.
Contents
This is a particular concern at grounds where concourses, originally designed for general
circulation only, have been retro-fitted with amenities that add considerably to the
concourses’ usage during peak times.
Key safety considerations are:
a. The definition and protection of routes between the concourse and the viewing
accommodation (Zone 2), and between the concourse and ingress and egress routes
(see Section 9.3).
b. The size of the concourse and its ability to accommodate crowds during periods of
peak usage (see Section 9.4).
c. The impact of spectators queuing or milling in proximity to amenities (see Section 9.6).
d. The risks arising from amenities located within the concourse, for example their fire
loading (see Section 9.7).
9.3 Concourses – design

The design of concourse areas is determined by a number of factors. However, in the context
of circulation, safety and amenity, the following concerns should be considered:
a. Clear passage
Ingress and egress routes through concourse areas should be clearly defined and free
from obstruction. In general, these routes should be as direct as possible.
b. Wayfinding and signage

Ingress and egress routes should be clearly identified, with signs facing both lateral and
transverse directions, so that people entering the concourse from any ingress point or
vomitory are able to make quick decisions as to which direction to take, in order to reach
their intended destination.
Signs, including those indicating toilets, catering and other amenities, should be located
at such a height and in positions that enable all people passing through the concourse to
read them during periods of peak usage.
Wherever possible and appropriate, consideration should also be given to the provision of
signs that use pictograms alongside, or in place of words (see Section 16.30) and to the
avoidance of colours and/or colour combinations on signs and their backgrounds that
might be difficult for people with colour blindness to read or interpret (see online Annex C). CIRCULATION
c. Amenities
Because amenities such as catering and commercial outlets, and toilets, often attract
queues that may impede free movement along the concourse, careful consideration
should be given to their design, location, distribution and number. In particular:
i. they should be distributed evenly throughout the concourse
ii. wherever possible they should not be positioned immediately next to turnstiles or
entry points, or next to the foot of vomitories or stairways leading from viewing
accommodation.
Contents
Note that any tables or shelving provided for refreshments should not be sited in such a
way as to impede passage through circulation routes.
When planning concourse amenities, designers and ground management should be aware
of the needs of spectators with disabilities, for example when designing counter heights
at catering outlets. For further guidance, reference may be made to the SGSA publications,
Accessible Stadia and Supplementary Guidance.
Attention should also be given to the positioning of toilets for disabled spectators, so that
access to them is not impeded by queues for other facilities within the concourse.
For guidance on the numbers of toilets required at sports grounds, see BS 6465: Sanitary
installations. Code of practice for the provision of public toilets – Tables 7/8.
d. Fire safety
Where concourses form part of an emergency exit route they should be designed as
areas of low fire risk (see Section 15.9), having fire protection equal to, or greater than, the
anticipated spectator travel time from the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to a place
of safety (see Section 15.26). In no instances should this fire resistance be less than 30
minutes (see Section 15.17).
Consideration should also be given to the provision of smoke containment and/or

extraction measures.
e. Natural lighting
Wherever possible in the concourse, natural lighting should be maximised in order to
assist in the flow of people towards exits, and to create a more comfortable environment.
For further guidance on lighting levels, see Sections 17.10 and 17.11.
f. Flooring
Concourse flooring should be slip-resistant, particularly in areas where spillage is likely
(for example, around catering outlets), and in areas where rainwater can be tracked in
from vomitories and external areas.
g. Wall and barrier loadings

Walls and barriers within a concourse that form part of an exit route, or that are
subject to crowd loading – such as segregation barriers or walls, doorways, corridor walls,
or barriers constraining a space – should be designed to withstand the loadings set
out in Figures 14 and 21.
Designers should also consider how the loading of walls or barriers might be affected by
any additional loads, for example screens or banners, or by wind.
CIRCULATION
h. Segregation
At grounds where areas of viewing accommodation are segregated, and where
concourses are also segregated, sufficient amenities should be provided to service each
part of the concourse.
Contents
9.4 Concourses – size, capacity, occupancy and density levels

Clearly at most sports grounds it is neither practicable nor possible to provide concourse
areas large enough to safely accommodate every spectator. At the same time, the number
of spectators using or passing through a concourse at any one time will vary considerably
during an event. As emphasised in Section 9.2, it is therefore important that management
monitors concourses at all times throughout the event, and is able to respond to the varying
levels of crowd density that are likely to occur during an event, especially at times of peak
usage. In order to do this effectively it will be necessary for the management to develop an
understanding of how crowd density levels can vary in different circumstances, as outlined
in Figure 11.
By close monitoring and observation of the concourse during an event it should also be
possible to establish what levels of crowd density might be safe and appropriate for the type
of event in question, and for the profile of spectators in attendance.
As a guide to how large concourses need to be in order to be safe and comfortable, whilst
also facilitating clear circulation for all people present – that is, including stewards and staff
– management should take steps to gather the following information:
a. What is the total available floor area of the concourse for milling, queuing and circulation,
excluding vomitories and entrances to vomitories, landings and stairs, toilets and any
fixtures, kiosks or temporary installations?
b. What is the capacity of the area or areas of viewing accommodation that the concourse
most directly serves?
c. What is the occupancy (expressed as a total, or as a percentage of the capacity) of that

concourse during peak times? This occupancy level will be influenced by:
i. the type of sport or event being staged, and specifically the duration and frequency
of breaks during that event
ii. the number and quality of facilities available on the concourse (and their distance
from other concourses)
iii. the extent of shelter offered by the concourse in adverse weather conditions.
Having gathered this information, management can then assess the varying levels of crowd
density that occur on the concourse during an event and, if necessary, take steps to reduce
those levels (as recommended in Section 9.6). An understanding of crowd density levels is
also useful when it comes to planning new concourses.
CIRCULATION
New construction
It is recommended that the available floor space of the concourse should be able to
accommodate 50 per cent of the capacity of the viewing area that the concourse serves, at
any one time, at a density level of no more than 2 persons per square metre (0.5m2 per person)
as illustrated in Figure 10.
This is because experience shows that a comfortable density in a general concourse area
is 2 persons per square metre.
As shown in Figure 11, this falls half way between a lesser density of approximately 1.4
persons per square metre (0.7m2 per person) as more commonly desired in hospitality areas,
and a greater density of approximately 4 persons per square metre (0.25m2 per person), which
occurs more commonly in areas immediately in front of refreshment areas or bars, at times of
peak usage.
Contents
Existing construction: congestion levels will either need to be managed within the space
available, as outlined in the following sections, or the concourse itself will need to be
redesigned. In doing so, management might wish to consider the use of crowd simulation
modelling (see Section 6.7) to assess existing patterns of usage and, if necessary, in order to
ease overcrowding and congestion, to help in the redesign of the concourse.
At the same time, as emphasised in Section 9.2, management should also recognise the risk
of adding facilities to concourses that were originally designed for general circulation only. In
such cases, a full risk assessment should be conducted before undertaking any additions, to
ensure that the available floor space is sufficient to cope with the expected increase in usage,
and that ingress and egress routes will not be impeded.
9.5 Concourses – management

As emphasised throughout the Guide, good design alone cannot ensure the safety and
comfort of spectators. A high standard of safety management is also required.
In the context of concourses, firstly it is essential for management to allocate sufficient

resources to the management of concourses. Secondly, these resources and staffing levels
should be set out clearly within the management’s Operations Manual (see Section 3.4).
It may also be necessary for management to carry out site specific risk assessments for
concourse areas. As for all such assessments, management should identify any potential
risks within the concourse (such as overcrowding, congestion on ingress, egress or
emergency exit routes, or fire risk) and draw up plans to eliminate or mitigate those risks. Any
risk assessments should be reviewed periodically and whenever any significant changes have
taken place on the concourse.
More detail on the problem of overcrowding follows in Section 9.6. Other concourse safety
management issues to consider are:
a. Stewarding
In addition to ensuring that sufficient stewards are deployed on concourses, it is
recommended that stewards are trained specifically to recognise and deal with the range
of problems most likely to occur on concourses; for example, managing queues and
avoiding congestion in key areas, such as around vomitories and stairways.
b. CCTV coverage
Closed circuit television cameras, particularly if positioned at high level, provide a
useful overview of concourses, and enable the management to direct stewards on
the ground to any incidents.
CIRCULATION
i. Where possible, cameras on concourses should overlook entry and exit points,
areas around bars and refreshment outlets, and any points where there is likely
to be a hazard.
ii. The cameras should be able to identify all relevant signage, seating block and
vomitory numbers and exit routes, in order to allow the operator to identify the area
being viewed.
iii. The CCTV system should be able to operate effectively in a range of lighting
conditions, in daylight, at night and under emergency lighting, but it should also be
recognised that poor lighting will reduce image quality.
iv. The cameras should be positioned high enough to be out of the reach of spectators.
For further information on the design and use of CCTV systems see Chapter 16.
Contents
Figure 10 Crowd density levels on concourses

An understanding of crowd density levels is vital for the safe management
of concourses and circulation routes.
As stated in Section 9.4, for new

construction it is recommended
that the available floor space of
the concourse should be able to
accommodate 50 per cent of the
capacity of the viewing area that
the concourse serves, at any one
time, at an average density level
of no more than 2 persons per
square metre (0.5m2 per person)
– or, as illustrated on the right,
20 persons per 10 square metres.
This level of density is generally
considered as comfortable,
allowing individuals the space
to eat and drink or use mobile
devices without impinging upon
the space of other people.
However, it should be recognised
that in areas around bars and
food counters, where queues
form, there may be pockets
where a higher average density
of around 4 persons per square
metre (0.25m2 per person) – or, as
illustrated on the right, 40 persons
per 10 square metres – may be
acceptable for short periods.
For further information on crowd
density levels, see Figure 11
opposite.
CIRCULATION
Contents
Figure 11
Table showing crowd densities for milling or standing areas
DENSITY DENSITY SPACE PER OBSERVATIONS

PER SQ M PER 10 SQ M PERSON *
4.7 persons 47 persons 0.21 m2 maximum density permissible for

standing spectators (see Section 2.9)
4.0 persons 40 persons 0.25 m2 preferred maximum density for standing

spectators, and people queuing at bars/
counters/toilets (see Figure 10)
3.3 persons 33 persons 0.30 m2 comfortable density for standing

spectators/concourse refreshment areas
2.0 persons 20 persons 0.50 m2 optimum density for general concourse

areas (as recommended for new
construction, see Section 9.4) and for
standing spectators on level areas at
concerts (see Figure 10)
1.4 persons 14 persons 0.71 m2 more comfortable density for concourse/

hospitality areas
0.7 persons 7 persons 1.43 m2 optimum density for club style

hospitality areas
Note that these figures are for illustration only, to help designers and management
develop a better understanding of the density levels that might be encountered in
different locations and at different times during an event. In each case account
needs to be taken of whether the crowds are milling (as on a concourse), queuing
(at a counter), standing on a terrace with crush barriers or standing on a level
surface.
As such, any data drawn up or recorded by designers or the management will
need to be interpreted carefully, and if appropriate, checked by the use of crowd
modelling simulations.
CIRCULATION
* Note – these figures are based on an average adult male occupying 600mm x 450mm;
that is, 0.14 square metres. Accordingly these figures need to be adjusted if, for example,
spectators are wearing bulkier clothes in cold conditions or if numerous children are present.
Contents
c. Monitors and screens

Generally the provision of screens relaying broadcast or other media content will result in a
rise in the number of spectators using the concourse, and also an increase in the length of
time that spectators remain on the concourse.
Designers and the ground management should therefore undertake a risk assessment
to ensure that the concourse in question is sufficiently large to accommodate those
additional numbers (see Section 9.4). They should also ensure that the screens – plus
any other forms of entertainment or activities that attract spectators – are located and
managed in such a way that overcrowding does not occur, and that circulation and access
routes are not obstructed.
Furthermore, it should be possible for the management to control the screens’ output,
both sound and vision, from a central control point.
If the concourse is not large enough, or if stewards are unable to prevent overcrowding or
congestion, the screens should be switched off, and if necessary, removed or repositioned.
If the concourse is large enough, and if the presence of screens does not lead to
congestion, management may wish to consider the following additional strategies:
i. The provision of screens can be an effective means of encouraging spectators to

arrive earlier for an event than might otherwise be the case, and to remain longer after
the conclusion of the event, thereby reducing pressure on ingress and egress routes.
ii. Similarly, if live coverage of the event is relayed on concourse screens, spectators are
more likely to use the amenities at times other than during breaks (such as at half time
or between playing sessions or races), thereby relieving pressure during peak times.
iii. Using both sound and vision, screens can also assist the management to
communicate with spectators.
d. Servicing, cleaning and litter collection

The design and planning of concourses, whether new or for refurbishment, should take
into account the service needs of all amenities, and the location and design of litter bins.
i. The delivery of any supplies or services to catering or commercial outlets, or toilets,

should take place before the entry of spectators. During longer events, any necessary
restocking or servicing should take place at times when usage of the concourse is
likely to be at a low level.
ii. Litter bins and other waste receptacles should be securely anchored so that they
cannot be moved, and designed in such a way that their contents cannot spill out
CIRCULATION
and block circulation routes. If litter bins are unsecured, a risk assessment should be
carried out to determine whether control measures are needed (see also Section 3.31).
iii. Before an event, management should ensure that no litter bins, kiosks or any other
temporary installations are sited in such a way as to impede passage through ingress
and egress routes.
iv. Waste, litter and spillages should be collected and removed at regular intervals.
Spillages are regarded as a contaminant and will adversely affect the slip resistance
of floor surfaces. Detailed guidance on slip resistance can be found in the CIRIA
publication, Safer Surfaces to Walk On.
v. Management should take into account any risks specific to the servicing of
commercial and catering outlets; for example the handling or transfer of cash
from the concourse to other parts of the ground.
Contents
e. Safety stations
Management should consider the provision of a safety station on each concourse.
A safety station is an area containing emergency equipment such as fire extinguishers,
a fire blanket and a loud hailer, along with an emergency or key point telephone, and
contact details for the first aid or medical room.
A safety station can provide an effective communication point between the ground control
point and stewards on the concourse. It can also serve as a reporting point for staff in the
event of an emergency.
It is not suggested that a safety station should be staffed at all times. However, stewards
should all be aware of its location.
f. Smoking
Management should draw up a clear policy on smoking and e-smoking, and if appropriate,
create an area either within, or beyond the concourse, where smokers may gather (making
sure that entry to, and exit from this area, is, if necessary, controlled or stewarded). Further
guidance on policies concerning smoking can be found in the Health Act 2006.
g. Use of external areas as concourses

At some sports grounds it is the practice to accommodate smokers, or to provide
additional amenities, in external areas (that is, beyond the concourse or even outside the
perimeter of the ground). In such instances management should ensure that ingress and
egress to these areas is strictly controlled, to prevent spectators from other parts of the
sports ground from entering a different area of spectator accommodation, and to prevent
members of the public gaining unauthorised entry.
h. Pyrotechnics
As emphasised in Section 15.13.c, management should take all steps to prevent
spectators bringing pyrotechnics into the sports ground. At the same time management
should also draw up contingency plans to deal with the consequences of a flare or
firework being discharged within an enclosed concourse.
For further information, see the document Pyrotechnics (Flares, Smoke Bombs and
Fireworks), available from the SGSA website.
9.6 Concourses – prevention of overcrowding

It is recognised that spectators will rarely be distributed evenly throughout a concourse.
There may be greater concentrations immediately adjacent to catering or merchandising
outlets, where people gather to watch screens, and around the entrances to toilets.
CIRCULATION
However, where the overall crowd density level on a concourse is likely to rise above 2 people
per square metre (see Figures 10 and 11), management should assess whether it needs to
put in place strategies to control the numbers.
As stated in Section 9.5, management should therefore have in place the means to monitor
such overcrowding through the use of stewards and CCTV, and have in place a range of
contingency plans in order to mitigate any congestion.
These plans might include:
a. Holding spectators back from entering the concourse.
b. Directing spectators to other facilities, wherever possible.
c. Opening up a controlled overflow area outside the concourse.
Contents
If congestion persists, further contingency plans might include:
d. Undertaking a full review of crowd movements in the concourse – by observation, for

example by head counting or reviewing CCTV footage – and by analysis, for example
using crowd simulation modelling – to ascertain how the existing facilities might be better
managed (for example, by turning off screens at certain times to reduce congestion in one
or more parts of the concourse), or positioned.
e. Changing queuing procedures, by the use of stewarding and barriers.
f. Speeding up transactions at catering outlets (for example by simplifying choices, rounding

up prices, introducing card payments or encouraging pre-orders).
g. Extending the opening times of commercial and catering outlets, and/or the use of
screens to relay broadcast or media content, to encourage spectators to arrive earlier or
leave later, thereby easing congestion at peak times, or closing commercial and catering
outlets, and switching off screens before the end of an event in order to discourage
spectators from gathering in concourses.
h. Providing extra or mobile refreshment services within the other spectator areas or within
the viewing accommodation (such as the provision of ‘at seat’ service).
i. Creating additional facilities beyond the concourse.
j. Extending the available floor space of the concourse.
If these or other strategies fail to mitigate congestion on the concourse, the (S) factor
for the viewing accommodation served by the concourse should be reduced (see Section 2.4).
9.7 Concourses – fire safety

The presence of commercial and catering facilities in concourses – particularly where these
have been added to existing structures – has major implications for fire safety.
For this reason, under no circumstances should any significant modifications be carried out,
nor any commercial or catering outlets be installed, nor any changes to wall or floor surfaces
be effected (including the hanging of banners, flags and drapes), without updating the fire risk
assessment and without prior consultation with the authority responsible for enforcing fire
safety legislation.
Where a safety certificate is in place, consultation should also be held with the local authority.
All consultations should be recorded in written form.
CIRCULATION
Where a concourse forms part of an emergency exit route, that concourse, and any unit, kiosk
or amenity within it, should be designed to minimise the level of fire risk, and in all instances
should have a level of fire resistance equal to, or greater than, the anticipated spectator travel
time from the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to a place of safety. In no instances should
this fire resistance be less than 30 minutes (see Sections 15.9 and 15.17).
Protection from a fire from within an amenity on a concourse should be sufficient to maintain
corresponding levels of integrity, stability and insulation, and should prevent the emission of
smoke into the concourse.
Contents
Consideration may also need to be given to the provision of smoke containment and/or
extraction measures.
For further details of evacuation through concourses, see Sections 10.13 and 15.27. For
guidance on evacuation in the event of a fire, and on places of safety, see Section 15.26.
9.8 Vomitories
Vomitories are a common means of facilitating ingress and egress to and from areas of
viewing accommodation (Zone 2). They are also an aid to safety management, allowing
stewards and other personnel to gain direct and easy access to particular areas.
Vomitory designs and layouts can take several different forms but in general, the following
requirements should be met:
a. If passage through the vomitory is by steps, the design, dimensions, barriers and handrails
should meet the requirement for stairways (see Chapter 8 and Figure 12).
b. Whether passage through the vomitory is by steps or by level passage, and whether it
serves an area of viewing accommodation that is for seated or for standing spectators,
its approaches should be managed, as should be the case for any stairway at a sports
ground; that is, people should be able to approach the vomitory only from the front and/or
from its sides.
The approach to the vomitory may only be from behind if it is controlled by the routing of
gangways (see Figure 12).
c. If, on a terrace for standing spectators, this is not practical, barriers should be positioned
at each side of the vomitory’s entrance. This is to ensure that spectators approaching from
behind have to pass around the ends of the barriers and therefore approach the vomitory
entrance from the sides. These barriers should be protected (by infill or screening), to
prevent spectators climbing through and approaching from behind.
d. In all areas of viewing accommodation, where appropriate, consideration should be

given to providing protection against objects being accidentally knocked onto spectators
passing through the vomitory.
e. Management should ensure that no spectators or non-essential staff are allowed to stand
in vomitories during an event.
Similarly, during ingress and egress, stewards should position themselves to ensure the
unimpeded passage of spectators. This is essential towards the end of an event (or a
CIRCULATION
significant part of an event) in order to prevent overcrowding and to avoid impeding those
spectators who wish to leave.
f. It is recommended that vomitories are clearly identified, both internally and externally, by
plainly visible numbers or letters, and on all site plans, so that resources can be quickly
directed to that section of the viewing accommodation whenever required.
Contents
Figure 12 Vomitory control measures and barrier heights

In order to prevent the buildup of crowd pressures on exit routes, stairways and
around exit gates, it is vital to control the flow of spectators as they leave the viewing
accommodation (Zone 2) and enter a vomitory.
In this example of a typical vomitory, leading down from the upper part of the seating
tier is a gangway which measures the recommended width of 1.2m, and is then split, or
bifurcated, into two gangways, each measuring a minimum of 800mm, on either side of
the vomitory.
barrier barrier height

height min 800mm
barrier height
1.1m
min 800mm barrier
height
1.1m
barrier
height
1.1m
min
m
800m
barrier
height
1.1m
1.2m
Although numerous forms of vomitory design can be used in sports grounds, for new
CIRCULATION
construction barrier heights in all instances should conform to those seen here – that
is, all barriers around the vomitory should measure 1.1m from the datum, and conform
with the loadings set out in Figure 14.
As stated in Section 11.6, although this height of barrier might result in some views
being obstructed, before considering any deviation from this recommendation, all risks
to safety should be thoroughly assessed, particularly where there is a risk of spectators
falling from a height.
The exceptions in this design are the two barriers at the rear of the vomitory (referred to
in Figures 14 and 17 as Type 7 barriers). These barriers, being located within 530mm of
the front of the seats, should be a minimum height of 800mm.
For details of how to calculate the width of the vomitory, see Section 9.9.
Contents
9.9 Vomitory widths

The minimum width of a vomitory is 1.2m and should be calculated as follows.
a. Determine the number of spectators likely to use that vomitory for the purposes
of ingress and egress. This figure will normally be determined by dividing the capacity of
the seating tier or terrace, or any section of that tier or terrace if it is sub-divided, by the
number of vomitories available.
b. Determine the emergency egress time for that section of the ground (see Section 10.12).
c. Finally, apply the following formula:
number of spectators
= vomitory width in metres
emergency egress time in minutes x 66
Note that 66 persons per metre per minute is the flow rate for stepped surfaces used
for the calculation of egress times (as explained in Section 10.10).
For example, if the emergency egress time is 2.5 minutes and the number of spectators
expected to use the vomitory is 297, this would require a minimum vomitory width of 1.8m.
9.10 Vomitory control measures

In order to prevent the buildup of crowd pressures on exit routes, stairways and around exit
gates, it is vital to control the flow of spectators as they leave their viewing accommodation
and enter the vomitory.
Various control measures may be introduced (see Section 10.6), but the most important of
these are the width of the gangways leading to the vomitory, and of the vomitory itself, as
illustrated in Figure 12.
CIRCULATION
Contents
CIRCULATION
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 10.0 Circulation – egress
10.0 Circulation – egress
10.1 Egress and safety

It is widely recognised that spectators are particularly vulnerable to risk during egress – that
is, as they exit the sports ground – and that even under normal conditions congestion can
build and accidents occur, and that individuals react and respond in diverse ways, for example
according to their mood after the event, their travel plans and their perceptions of risk.
It is important therefore for management to provide egress systems that are designed and
managed to offer a safe, free flowing passage from the viewing accommodation (Zone 2 in
Figure 6) to Zone 5, within an acceptable period of time and without encountering congestion.
In order to achieve this, it is vital to ensure that the pressures which can occur during egress
are contained and controlled by close attention to the detailed design of those elements that
form the egress system, such as stairways and ramps (see Chapter 8), vomitories (Chapter 9)
and barriers (Chapter 11).
This chapter, it should be noted, offers guidance on the design and management of egress
systems under both normal and emergency conditions, together with advice on a third
category, referred to in the Guide as ‘exceptional egress’, explained further in Section 10.2.
Overall, in order to achieve safe egress in all conditions, designers and management
should ensure the following:
a. There are sufficient exit routes and exits, distributed proportionately around the ground.
b. Spectators do not have to travel excessive distances in order to leave the viewing
accommodation (Zone 2) and enter into a free flowing exit route.
CIRCULATION
c. The exit routes and exits are wide enough to allow the capacity of the viewing
accommodation which they serve to exit within an appropriate time (see Section 10.4).
d. Provision is made to control the flow of spectators as they enter an exit route
(see Section 10.6).
e. Exit routes should not narrow at any point along their length (see Section 10.5) unless
mitigating measures are in place (see Section 10.7).
f. All exits routes and exits are clearly identifiable in both normal and emergency conditions
(see Section 10.8).
Note that if deviations from the recommendations in the Guide create potential risks in any
part of an exit route, that part should be closed and the final capacity of that section of the
ground reduced accordingly.
Contents
10.2 Types of egress

As stated above, management should provide, and plan for spectators to exit under three
different sets of conditions.
a. Normal egress
Normal egress is defined as egress from the sports ground at the end of an event using
normal circulation and exit routes, under normal conditions.
b. Emergency egress
Emergency egress is defined as egress from the sports ground at an unscheduled time,
as the result of an incident – such as a fire – occurring most likely, but not exclusively,
within the sports ground.
Emergency egress will typically involve the evacuation of all spectators at the same time,
using not only normal circulation and exit routes, but also additional exit routes, doors or
gates intended for use only in the case of an emergency.
Emergency egress may include the pitch or area of activity (Zone 1, as in Figure 6) as
part of the route leading to a place of safety, provided that such a measure forms part of
the management’s contingency planning. (For more information on places of safety, see
Section 15.26.)
c. Exceptional egress
Exceptional egress is defined as egress from, or movement within a sports ground which,
in response to exceptional circumstances – such as a terrorist threat or attack, occurring
either inside or outside the ground – may require procedures other than those put in place
for normal or emergency egress.
As with the two other forms of egress, these procedures will need to be set out in a
contingency plan (see Section 3.15), and may include the use of the pitch or area of
activity (Zone 1) as a holding area.
Exceptional egress could involve one or more of the following:
i. a full evacuation of the ground
ii. a phased evacuation
iii. a partial or zonal evacuation
iv. a directional evacuation
v. an invacuation*
CIRCULATION
vi. a partial invacuation*
*invacuation refers to the process of moving people within a sports ground in response to
an external threat
Clearly the decision as to which course of action to take will need to be based upon the best
interests of all people present within the ground. Moreover, in exceptional circumstances it
may be appropriate not to take any of the actions listed above but to invoke a lockdown of the
ground, in order to prevent movement either inwards or outwards.
Note also that in all of the above examples of exceptional egress, the time constraints relative
to both other forms of egress (normal or emergency) may reasonably be set aside.
For further advice on egress in response to a terrorist attack or threat, please refer to the
SGSA website for up to date guidance.
Contents
10.3 Exit routes – a definition

For the purposes of design and management an ‘exit route’ is deemed to start at
the point at which the spectator leaves the viewing accommodation (Zone 2 as
indicated in Figures 6 and 13).
An ‘exit route’ does not commence at any point within the viewing accommodation; for
example at the point where spectators leave their seat or place on a terrace, or when they
step into a gangway or aisle.
Rather, the start of the exit route will typically be the point at which spectators enter
a vomitory, concourse, stairway or a corridor.
10.4 Exit routes – basic design principles

A key requirement of all exit routes is that they should be designed and managed to be places
of reasonable safety, and that they should lead ultimately to a place of safety, as shown in
Figure 13 and explained in Section 15.26.
Exit routes should be free flowing throughout their length; that is, there should be no elements
within an exit route that have the potential to cause congestion or lead to any stoppages,
unless these elements are designed specifically to manage flow rates, such as at the head of
stairs (see Figure 9).
With these fundamental principles in mind, four factors must be taken into account when
considering the design of exit routes.
As explained in Chapter 2, these factors will also, crucially, form an integral part of the
calculations used to determine the final capacity of the ground, or of sections of the ground.
These factors are:
a. The widths of each element forming part of the exit route or emergency exit route (see
Section 10.5).
b. The flow rate of people passing through the route – for the purposes of calculation, this is
a pre-determined figure, as explained in Sections 10.9 and 10.10.
c. The emergency egress time – for the purposes of calculation this can range between two
and a half minutes and eight minutes, based on a number of factors, such as the level of
fire risk, as explained in Section 10.12.
d. Headroom – as stated in Section 6.4.d, ceiling heights in horizontal circulation routes

CIRCULATION
in all areas to which the public have access should have a minimum headroom of 2.3m,
while the headroom on stairs and ramps should be a minimum of 2.0m measured from
the pitch line.
Contents
10.5 Exit routes – widths

Exit routes should meet the following width requirements:
Existing construction: the minimum width of any element within an exit route should be 1.1m.
A door that forms part of the exit system – for example one leading from a hospitality area
– should be not less than 750mm in width.
New construction
The recommended minimum width of any element within an exit route is 1.2m.
If a door forms part of the exit system – for example one leading from a hospitality area
– it should be not less than 800mm.
10.6 Exit routes – flow control measures

In order to prevent too many spectators entering an exit route, thereby risking congestion,
it may be necessary to control the flow from the viewing accommodation; that is, before
spectators enter the exit route (see Section 10.3).
Such control measures might include the addition or reconfiguration of barriers, the
re-routing of gangways, the use of stewarding or, in the case of vomitories, the splitting,
or bifurcating, of the gangway into two narrower gangways on either side of the vomitory,
as illustrated in Figure 12.
10.7 Exit routes – reservoir areas

As stated in Section 10.1.e, exit routes should not narrow at any point along their length.
However, a narrowing in an exit route may be acceptable if the narrowing is preceded by

an open space or ‘reservoir’ area (which may be a concourse).
In such instances entry to the reservoir should be controlled, using the measures
described in Section 10.6, so that the density of spectators within the reservoir does not
exceed 4 persons per square metre of the available floor area (see Figures 10 and 11).
It is the responsibility of management to ensure that this density is not exceeded

during egress.
Management should conduct a risk assessment to ensure that there are no potential
CIRCULATION
hazards to people passing through a reservoir area. For example, reservoir areas are
not acceptable within, or in close proximity to, any combustible structure, such as a
timber stand, unless a detailed risk assessment has been carried out and the
appropriate mitigation measures put in place, and recorded within a fire
safety audit.
Contents
10.8 Exit routes – additional design and management factors

In addition to the provision of a free flowing exit route – incorporating appropriate widths,
control measures and, where necessary, reservoir areas – the design and management of exit
routes should take into account the following additional factors:
a. Alternative exits
In the event of an incident which renders the usual exit route unusable, spectators should
be able to use an alternative exit route, or routes.
b. Direct exit routes

Where there is a simple exit route – that is, a direct passage from the viewing
accommodation to the exit gate from the ground – every part of that route should be able
to accommodate the flow from the viewing accommodation.
c. Complex exit systems or networks

For a more complex exit system which combines a number of exit routes and/or offers
a choice of alternative routes, the system should be analysed in the form of a network.
This is to check that the capacity of the exit route from the viewing accommodation is
sufficient to ensure a free flow of spectators to the various exits from the ground. Where
a branching of routes offers a choice of paths, the proportion of the crowd likely to use
each path should be assessed; for example, the exit closest to a railway or bus station may
attract a higher proportion of spectators.
The management at grounds with complex exit systems should draw up clear, illustrative
plans of the network serving each section of the ground, identifying the capacity of all
routes within the network. These plans should be kept with the drawings of the section of
the ground to which they relate. Any changes to the ground which affect either the entry or
exit routes should be identified on the network plan.
When drawing up such network plans consideration should be given to the avoidance
of colours and/or colour combinations, and their backgrounds, that might be difficult for
any member of the safety management team with colour blindness to read or interpret
(see online Annex C).
Example of network plans are available from the SGSA website.
d. Number and disposition of exits

As stated in Section 10.1.a, in order to ensure free flow through an exit system, there
should be a sufficient number of easily accessible exit routes and exit points, distributed
proportionately around the sports ground (although no simple calculation of the number
can be given that would apply to all situations).
CIRCULATION
e. Keeping exit routes clear inside the ground

Exit routes should be kept clear of obstructions. Catering, sales or toilet facilities should be
located in such a way that neither they, nor any queue or milling that they attract, obstruct
an exit route. Where exit routes pass through car parks or other areas affected by vehicular
movements, consideration should be given to suitable methods of traffic control.
Contents
f. Keeping exit routes clear outside the ground

Management should monitor the numbers of people milling around or moving across
those areas of Zone 5 or Zone Ex (see Figure 6) that lie immediately beyond the ground’s
exit gates. This monitoring is especially important should an evacuation be necessary
before the start of the event, at a time when spectators may still be arriving.
Managing these areas is also important if the ground is full to capacity yet large
numbers of people are still milling outside the exit gates. In such circumstances it is
important that management has the resources available to disperse these crowds
and keep clear the areas outside the exit gates.
g. Signposting
All elements of the exit system should be clearly signposted in accordance with the
requirements of the Health and Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations 1996
(see Sections 16.28 and 16.29). Where necessary, directional signs should be provided
to encourage crowds to flow in one direction when leaving the ground. Wherever
practicable, these signs should also provide information on the destination of the exit
route (for example, ‘Station’, ‘Town Centre’ or ‘Visitors’ Coach Park’).
Signs should be mounted against a strongly contrasting background colour to make them
clearly legible in all conditions.
Once again it is emphasised that, as stated in Section 10.1, if any deviations from
the recommendations in the Guide create potential risks in any part of the exit route,
that section of the route should be closed and the final capacity of that section of the
ground reduced accordingly.
10.9 Flow rates – definition and factors

The flow rate, also known as the rate of passage, is the number of people who can pass
through a particular point in a given time, and forms a fundamental part of the calculation
of the capacity of the exit system. Recommended flow rates follow in Section 10.10.
It is emphasised that any flow rate used for the purposes of calculation should be considered
as a maximum, and that in practice, such a figure is unlikely to be sustained for more than
a limited period, even under normal conditions.
Factors affecting the flow rates may include the following:
a. The audience profile; for example if it includes a significant number of children, elderly
people or disabled spectators.
CIRCULATION
b. The location and levels of use of any commercial or catering outlets, television screens,
toilets or other amenities situated along the exit route.
c. The design and physical condition of the exit routes; for example, the number of stairways,
the design and projection of handrails, the quality of directional signs, lighting levels and
underfoot conditions.
d. Event specific factors such as weather conditions, the availability of alcohol, the timing
of the event’s end, and the outcome of the event.
Contents
10.10 Flow rates – calculations

For the purposes of calculation, flow rates are expressed in terms of persons per metre
width per minute.
For an exit route the maximum flow rates used for calculation should be:
a. On a stepped surface, 66 persons per metre width per minute

Thus with an exit route measuring 1.2m in width, 79 persons should be able to exit
reasonably in one minute.
b. On a level surface, 82 persons per metre width per minute

Thus with an exit route measuring 1.2m in width, 98 persons should be able to exit
reasonably in one minute.
It is emphasised, however, that basing the design of a level circulation route on a flow
rate calculation of fewer than 82 persons per metre width per minute will achieve more
comfortable circulation.
Note also that flow rates may be affected by changes of direction along the exit routes, and,
in the case of stairways, may be reduced if the movement is upwards.
Where it is apparent that, despite using the recommended flow rates, spectators in Zone 2
cannot, under normal conditions, reach a place of reasonable safety within eight minutes (see
Section 10.11), or where, under emergency conditions, all people present cannot evacuate to
a place of reasonable safety or place of safety within the appropriate emergency egress time
(see Section 10.12), the design and management of the circulations routes in question will
need to be reassessed.
It is stressed that raising the flow rates used for calculation in order to meet exit or
emergency exit times is not acceptable.
Whilst the flow rates cited above provide an essential basis for understanding crowd flow
– and should always be used as the basis for calculating the exit capacity – the use of
crowd simulation modelling can, as stated in Sections 6.6 and 6.7, offer a useful evaluation
of movement patterns and help to identify any issues that might affect the calculation of
the exit capacity.
Such modelling is also useful to highlight sections of the exit route where design features or
obstructions may be slowing down flow rates, and to demonstrate where an absence of flow
control measures (see Section 10.6), may result in flow rates that are too high for the exit
system as a whole to accommodate safely.
CIRCULATION
For further advice on flow rates, refer to the informative annex of BS EN 13200-1:
Spectator facilities. General characteristics for spectator viewing area.
Examples of how to apply flow rates can be found in the online Worked Examples
available on the SGSA website.
Contents
10.11 Zone 2 travel times – normal

It is emphasised that, for the purpose of calculation, different times are applied for egress
under normal conditions, and for egress under emergency conditions.
In addition, as stated in Section 10.3, it should be noted that an ‘exit route’ starts at the point
(normally in Zone 3), at which the spectators leave the viewing accommodation (Zone 2, as
indicated in Figure 6 and Figure 13 opposite).
Equally important to note is the time it takes for spectators to proceed from their seat or place
within the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) and reach the start of that exit route. This time
may be referred to as the ‘Zone 2 travel time’.
Under normal conditions, for the purposes of calculation, the Zone 2 travel time should not
be more than eight minutes.
It is recognised that in practice some spectators take longer than eight minutes to leave Zone
2; for example, to watch screens, listen to post event announcements or simply to wait for the
crowds to disperse. This tendency should not affect the determination of the Zone 2 travel
time for calculation purposes, but it does require management to monitor and record actual
Zone 2 travel times on a regular basis. If such monitoring shows that all spectators cannot
reach the start of an exit route within eight minutes – for example because there are not
enough vomitories – a reduction of the final capacity will be required (see Chapter 2).
Example A in Figure 13 shows how, for calculation purposes, the Zone 2 travel time is distinct
from what is often described as the ‘normal egress time’ – that is, the time it takes to egress
from Zone 3 under normal conditions.
10.12 Egress times – emergency

The ‘emergency egress time’ is a determination which, together with the flow rate and the
widths of emergency exits, is used to calculate the capacity of the emergency exit routes
leading from the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to a place of reasonable safety (which will
normally be Zone 3), or to a place of safety (normally Zone 5), in the event of an emergency.
Note that, as stated in Section 2.13, the emergency exit capacity must include all people
present at the ground.
The maximum emergency egress time used for calculation purposes at sports grounds
varies between two and half minutes and eight minutes, depending largely upon the level of
fire risk present.
CIRCULATION
a. Low fire risk: where there is a low fire risk throughout the emergency exit route (see Section
15.9), for the purpose of calculation the Zone 2 travel time of 8 minutes will apply. The
timescale for emergency egress from the start of Zone 3 to a place of reasonable safety, or
to a place of safety, will then be determined by the fire resistance of the building and/or the
fire engineering solutions in place throughout the exit (see Example B in Figure 13).
b. Medium fire risk: where there is a medium fire risk at any point along the emergency exit
route (see Section 15.10), for the purpose of calculation the emergency egress time, from
the spectator’s seat or place within Zone 2 to a place or reasonable safety, or to a place of
safety, should be no more than six minutes (see Example C in Figure 13).
c. High fire risk: where there is a high fire risk at any point along the emergency exit route
(see Section 15.11), for the purpose of calculation the emergency egress time, from the
spectator’s seat or place within Zone 2 to a place or reasonable safety, or to a place of
safety, should be no more than two and a half minutes (see Example C in Figure 13).
Contents
Figure 13 Zone 2 travel times, exit routes and egress times

These examples should be considered in conjunction with Figure 6 and Sections 10.11–12, and 15.9–11.
For more on places of reasonable safety and places of safety, see Section 15.26.
Example A: Zone 2 travel time and egress time under normal conditions
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 and 4 Zone 5 Zone Ex

travel time
place
8 minutes place of reasonable safety of safety
exit route
seat vomitory/start of free
or place flowing exit route
Under normal conditions, for calculation purposes the maximum time spectators should take to travel
from their seat or place in the viewing accommodation (Zone 2), and enter a free flowing exit route,
for example by entering a vomitory, is eight minutes. This is known as the Zone 2 travel time. Note
that the time it then takes for spectators to proceed from the start of Zone 3 to a place of safety is not
critical, because there is no emergency.
Example B: Zone 2 travel time and emergency egress time, where the fire risk is low
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 and 4 Zone 5 Zone Ex

travel time
place
8 minutes place of reasonable safety of safety
emergency exit route

Under emergency conditions, the Zone 2 travel time of eight minutes will still apply, provided that the
level of fire risk at any point along the emergency exit route is low (see Section 15.9) and Zones 3 and
4 are considered to be places of reasonable safety. For calculation purposes the time it then takes for
spectators to evacuate from the start of Zone 3 to a place of safety – that is, the emergency egress
time – will be determined by the fire resistance of the building and/or the fire engineering solutions in
place throughout the emergency exit route.
Example C: Emergency egress time where the fire risk is medium or high
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zones 3 and 4 Zone 5 Zone Ex

not a place of reasonable safety place
CIRCULATION
2.5 – 6 minutes of safety
emergency exit route

In this example, there are no places of reasonable safety within Zones 3 and 4 and therefore for
calculation purposes the emergency egress time is the time it takes spectators to proceed from
their seat or place within the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) and then negotiate the entire length
of the emergency exit route before reaching a place of safety (Zone 5). The determination of this
emergency egress time will be based on the level of risk present at any stage along the emergency
exit route. If the level of risk at any stage is high (see Section 15.11), the emergency egress time will
be 2.5 minutes. If the level of risk is medium (see Section 15.10), the emergency egress time will be
no more than 6 minutes.
Note that if within Zones 3 or 4 there is a protected exit route, the emergency egress time will be
measured from the seat or place within the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to that protected exit.
Contents
For further guidance on places of safety, and reasonable safety, see Section 15.26.
Where the risks are medium or high, as emphasised in Chapter 15, rather than relying solely
on a shorter emergency egress time, the aim of the management should always be to
introduce measures which will minimise the outbreak and spread of fire.
At grounds where, as part of contingency planning, spectators may evacuate onto the pitch
or area of activity (Zone 1) in an emergency, provision should be made for the safe onward
movement from the area.
New construction
For the purposes of compliance, and for calculating the emergency egress time, the use of the
pitch or activity area should not form part of the calculation.
10.13 Emergency exit and exceptional egress routes – design

Exit routes for use in emergencies may need to be provided in addition to normal exits.
In all cases, the following points should be considered:
a. There should preferably be more than one emergency exit route from any area of spectator
accommodation.
b. The system should be designed in such a way that the loss of one emergency exit route
does not prevent access to an alternative.
c. Where a stairway or any other circulation route passes up, down or through any enclosed
area used by spectators – for example, through an enclosed concourse – it should be in
an enclosure separated from the remainder of the building by materials and/or structures
having a fire resistance equal to, or greater than the anticipated spectator travel time from
the viewing accommodation to a place of safety, which in no circumstances should be less
than 30 minutes (see also Sections 9.3 and 15.17).
d. Emergency exit routes should discharge into a place of safety (for example, Zone 5)
and preferably in the open air.
If the capacity of the exit route is considered insufficient for emergency egress purposes
the final capacity of the section served may have to be reduced.
Where appropriate, the design of emergency exit routes should also take into account the
needs of spectators with disabilities (see Section 10.15).
CIRCULATION
10.14 Emergency exit and exceptional egress routes – management

The management of emergency exit routes, and other routes likely to be use for exceptional
egress, should take into account the following considerations.
a. Planning for emergency egress should, as stated in Sections 3.15 and 3.16, form part of
the management’s contingency plans, and should provide for the safe egress of all people
present at the ground from all areas of the ground to a place of safety.
b. Management is responsible for ensuring that all exit routes are capable of being safely and
effectively used at all times when the ground is occupied. This requires such routes to be
free from any blockages, temporary fittings or stored equipment.
Contents
c. All exit and emergency exit routes, and exceptional egress routes should be:
i. clearly designated on the contingency plans
ii. clearly signposted with pictograms (see Section 16.28)
d. Wherever possible management should also monitor all exit and emergency exit routes
with CCTV (see Section 16.20).
10.15 Emergency and exceptional egress – disabled spectators

Disabled spectators must be accommodated without prejudicing their safety or the safety of
others. At the same time, safety measures and contingency plans for their emergency egress
should not be drawn up in such a way as to place undue restrictions on disabled spectators.
Ideally, separate emergency exit routes should be provided for disabled spectators,
thereby allowing for all spectators to be evacuated or moved at the same time.
If, for practical reasons, separate emergency exit routes for disabled spectators cannot be
provided, contingency plans (see Section 3.15) need to consider how else disabled spectators
might be evacuated or moved in an emergency, and whether those plans might affect the
egress of other spectators.
In all instances, designated egress routes for disabled spectators should be clearly
signposted and should lead to a place of safety, or to a refuge (see below).
Management should pay particular regard to the following matters.
a. Information and warning systems

Information and warning systems are required to help all spectators, in particular those
who are blind or partially sighted, colour blind, or deaf or hard of hearing, find their way in
an unfamiliar environment. Those with restricted mobility should have a choice of more
than one means of ingress and egress. For guidance on how warning systems should be
designed to accommodate the needs of disabled spectators see Section 15.22.
b. Refuges
A refuge is an area where, in the event of an evacuation, disabled spectators can be
accommodated temporarily before their subsequent onward movement by means of
suitable lifts (see Section 10.15.d) or by other forms of assistance via protected stairs,
or by external escape routes, to a place of safety.
If refuges form part of the management’s contingency plans for emergency egress
CIRCULATION
the proposed procedures must be agreed with the local authority and fire services. For
example, an emergency egress procedure, as agreed with the local authority and fire
services, might allow for stewards to begin moving disabled spectators to refuges from
which they can be subsequently moved, either by evacuation lifts or by manual assistance,
to a place of safety.
A refuge for use under emergency conditions should:
i. be protected from the effects of fire and smoke for a period of time equal to the period
of fire resistance of the building and in no case less than 30 minutes
ii. be large enough to accommodate the maximum number of disabled people and their
companions likely to be in need of the refuge
iii. be linked to exit routes that are themselves large enough and suitable for the onward
egress of those temporarily accommodated in the refuge
Contents
iv. have a communication link with the ground’s control room
v. be clearly signposted.
c. Stairways
The preferred method of escape by most wheelchair users is:
i. if horizontally, to another fire compartment or to outside the building, or
ii. if vertically, by the use of an evacuation or fire-fighting lift.
If those options are not available or not in operation, it may be necessary to carry a person
up or down an escape stair.
Detailed guidance on the carry down process, including training, is available from the
Department for Housing, Communities and Local Government.
d. Evacuation lifts
A lift provided for passenger use in the normal operation of the sports ground may only be
used for emergency egress if it meets the requirements of an evacuation lift, as specified
in the relevant British Standard.
While there is no requirement to provide evacuation lifts in sports grounds, such lifts
reduce the need to evacuate disabled spectators down staircases. Also, evacuation lifts
should be able to continue to operate with a reasonable degree of safety when there is a
fire in the building.
Where the evacuation of wheelchair users is via a lift, the Fire Safety Plan (see Section
15.26), should consider the loading and return times of lifts.
However a lift can still fail. It is crucial, therefore, that having reached a refuge serving an
evacuation lift, a disabled person can gain access to an adjacent suitable stairway should
the conditions in the refuge become unacceptable. Contingency plans should therefore
also allow for the careful carrying of disabled spectators down stairs without their
wheelchairs, should the wheelchair be too large or heavy.
The location of evacuation lifts should be clearly indicated with signs on every floor level.
e. Fire-fighting lifts
A fire-fighting lift is essentially an evacuation lift that is provided principally for the use of
the fire service and which meets the requirements of the current, relevant British Standard.
Such a lift may, however, be used for the evacuation of disabled people.
Liaison with the relevant fire authority to co-ordinate procedures for the use of a
CIRCULATION
firefighting lift for evacuation purposes is essential.
f. Wheelchair stairlifts
Wheelchair stairlifts should not be used for emergency egress. Nor should any part of
a stairlift or its mechanism reduce the width of any stairway or escape route below the
required minimum.
g. Ramps
Where ramps are necessary for the evacuation of wheelchair users they should preferably
be no steeper than 1 in 20 (see Section 8.16) and have signs identifying changes of level.
Further guidance is provided in BS 8300-1: Design of an accessible and inclusive built

environment. External environment. Code of practice; in the publications Accessible Stadia
and Supplementary Guidance, available from the SGSA, and in Fire Safety Risk Assessment
– Means of Escape for Disabled People, published by The Stationery Office.
Contents
10.16 Use of Zone 1 for emergency and exceptional egress

In certain cases, forward movement onto the pitch or area of activity (Zone 1) may form
part of the emergency exit or exceptional egress route, provided that it leads directly to exits
that lead to a place or places of safety.
The following requirements should also be taken into account:
a. Whether or not the egress of spectators onto the pitch or area of activity forms part of
the agreed evacuation plan, wherever there is a pitch perimeter barrier or free-standing
advertising material in front of viewing accommodation, it must be fitted with a sufficient
number of suitably designed gates or openings (see Section 10.17) unless a risk
assessment has determined otherwise.
b. Where the playing surface is made of synthetic materials, advice should be sought from
the authority responsible for enforcing fire safety legislation to establish whether it can be
properly considered as an emergency exit route. This is because some forms of artificial
turf might constitute a hazard in the event of fire.
c. If the pitch or area of activity is wholly surrounded by covered viewing accommodation,

with no breaks in the roofing (see Section 15.17), it may not be a suitable route for
emergency egress in the event of fire. In such cases advice should be sought from the
authority responsible for enforcing fire safety legislation.
As stated in Section 10.12, for new construction, the use of the pitch or area of activity (Zone
1) for egress should not form part of the capacity calculation.
10.17 Provision of gates or openings in a pitch perimeter barrier

As stated above, where a perimeter barrier or free-standing advertising material is in place
in front of viewing accommodation, it must be fitted with gates or openings allowing access
onto the pitch or area of activity, unless a risk assessment has determined otherwise.
If a viewing area is divided by structural means, each division must have sufficient gates or
openings to evacuate all the spectators in that division within the emergency egress time set
for that part of the ground.
Such gates or openings should:
a. be a minimum width of 1.1m (1.2m recommended for new construction)
b. preferably align with radial gangways (where provided) and measure not less than the
CIRCULATION
width of those gangways
c. be appropriately stewarded.
Where gates are fitted, they should:
d. open away from spectators
e. be kept unlocked
f. only be fitted with bolts or latches that can be released from both sides
g. be clearly marked and painted in a strongly contrasting colour from the rest of the pitch
perimeter barrier
h. be subject to a risk assessment to determine whether the gates and their fittings are
subject to crowd loading (see Figure 14).
Contents
10.18 Discounting an exit route for calculation purposes

There are no hard and fast rules as to whether or not an exit route should be discounted
when calculating the emergency exit capacity of a sports ground or section of a ground.
Each case needs to be determined in the light of local circumstances, taking into account the
importance of a particular exit from an area of spectator accommodation and an assessment
of the level of fire risk present.
If the fire risk assessment determines that there is a need to discount an exit, the exit to be
discounted should be the widest one serving the area.
If the fire risk is low and all elements of the exit system are suitably protected from the effects
of fire, it may be unreasonable to discount an exit. (For guidance on fire risk assessments,
see Section 15.7).
In the case of exceptional egress from a sports ground it is recommended that contingency
plans recognise and provide mitigation for the potential unavailability of one or more exit
routes from the sports ground.
10.19 Exit doors and gates

Exit doors and gates should meet the following requirements:
a. All final exit doors and gates serving spectator accommodation, unless secured in an open
position, should be staffed at all times while the ground is in use by the public.
b. No door or gate forming part of an exit route should be locked or fastened in such a
way that it cannot easily and immediately be opened by those using that route in an
emergency.
c. All final exit doors on a normal exit route should be secured in the fully open position
before the end of the event. When open, no exit door should obstruct any gangway,
passage, stairway or landing.
d. All exit doors and gates on an exit route should always be capable of opening outwards
so that crowds can escape in an emergency without obstruction. In situations where the
opening of the exit doors or gates would cause an obstruction on a public highway, they
should be recessed within the exit route they serve.
e. Where practicable exit doors and gates should be sited adjacent to entrances.
f. There should be no obstructions and no changes in level at exit doors.

CIRCULATION
g. Sliding or roller-shutter gates should not be used because they are incapable of
being opened when pressure is exerted in the direction of crowd flow, and they have
mechanisms or runways which are vulnerable to jamming.
h. Reversible turnstiles or, preferably, pass doors, should be provided in order to allow anyone
to leave the ground at any time (including those ejected for breaching ground regulations).
Such openings should be limited to allow the passage of only one person at a time.
i. Reversible turnstiles are not acceptable as a means of escape and should not form any
part of the emergency exit system.
Contents
j. Each exit door and gate should be clearly marked on both the inside and the outside
with its identifying number, so that resources can be quickly directed to wherever they
may be required.
k. The Safety Officer should check or be informed when all the final exit doors and gates
have been secured in the open position.
l. All exit doors and gates should ideally be monitored by CCTV.
10.20 Electronic securing systems

Where they are in place, electronic securing systems on exit doors and gates should meet the
following requirements.
a. As stated in Section 10.19, no exit door or gate forming part of an exit route should be
locked or fastened in such a way that it cannot easily and immediately be opened by those
using that route in an emergency. This applies equally to exit doors and gates that are
electronically secured.
b. Electronically secured exit doors and gates should be staffed by stewards at all times
when spectators are in the ground.
c. Exit doors or gates should be capable of being de-energised individually by the steward.
d. Stewards should be specifically authorised to open their gates without further instructions
in the event of a sudden local emergency.
e. Emergency telephones should be provided for instant communication, directly between

the stewards staffing the exit doors or gates and the operator of the control panel (see
below). All such telephones should be instantly accessible to the stewards without the use
of a key.
f. New systems should comply with BS EN 13637 (see below) in respect of delayed egress
controls; that is, any unauthorised attempt to open the doors or gates should result in an
alarm sounding in the ground’s control point, followed by a programmed 15 second delay
in the opening until security checks can be made.
g. The operation of each exit door or gate should be tested both electronically and manually
immediately before each event and the result of each test recorded. The record should
include all tests, any faults found, and any opening of any exit door or gate while
spectators are present in the ground. CIRCULATION
h. The control panel for the system should be located in the ground’s control point and
should be staffed continuously by a suitably trained and authorised person, who should
have no other duties.
i. The base emergency telephone in the control point should be positioned so that the panel
operator can answer it without having to leave his or her post.
j. Each gate should be clearly marked on both the inside and the outside with its identifying
number. This identification should correspond to the identification of the switch on the
control which releases it.
Contents
k. The exit doors or gates should be designed so that, in the event of a power failure, they are
automatically de-energised and capable of being opened manually.
Before approving an electronic securing system, ground management or, where a safety
certificate is in force, the local authority, should consider carefully and take full account
of the hazards associated with such a system. In particular, it should consider carefully what
would happen if there was a major emergency and spectators had to force the exit doors open
themselves.
As cited above, reference should also be made to BS EN 13637: Building hardware.

Electrically controlled exit systems for use on escape routes. Requirements and test methods.
CIRCULATION
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 11.0 Barriers and separating elements
11.0 Barriers and

separating elements
11.1 Definition and categories of barriers and separating elements

A barrier or a separating element (also referred to as a ‘guard’ or ‘guard rail’ in the Building
Regulations) is any element of a sports ground, permanent or temporary, intended to prevent
people from falling, and to retain, stop or guide people.
This chapter is concerned with barriers and separating elements in the following situations:
a. barriers used in areas of seated and standing accommodation, and on stairways and
ramps (see Sections 11.2–11.5 and Figures 14, 17 and 18)
b. barriers used in areas of standing accommodation, known as crush barriers

(see Sections 11.6–11.12 and Figures 14, 15, 19 and 20)
c. barriers used in spectator galleries (see Section 11.14 and Figure 16)
d. barriers used to separate the viewing accommodation from the field of play or area of
activity (see Sections 11.15–11.16)
e. barriers and separating elements such as boundary walls, internal walls, fences or gates
used to enclose the sports ground or individual sections of the ground, internally or
externally (see Sections 11.17 and 11.18).
When applying the recommendations in this chapter, the distinction between a barrier and
a handrail, as outlined in Section 8.8, should be noted.
Sections 11.19 – 11.26 provide guidance on the risk assessment and testing of barriers
and walls.
For guidance on barriers that form part of seats incorporating barriers, see Sections
12.19–12.20.
Further detailed guidance may be found in BS EN 13200-3: Spectator Facilities: Separating

Elements. Guidance on stage barriers and other temporary barriers, and in the publication
Temporary Demountable Structures – Guidance on procurement, design and use, issued by the
BARRIERS
Institute of Structural Engineers (ISE).
Barriers at sports grounds should be designed to resist safely the horizontal imposed loads
specified in the tables shown on the following pages in Figures 14, 15 and 16.
Contents
Figure 14 Table showing horizontal imposed loads for barriers
TYPE OF BARRIER HORIZONTAL

IMPOSED LOAD
1. Crush barriers for standing accommodation see Figure 15
2. Barriers for spectator galleries see Figure 16
3. Barriers for gangways of seating decks aligned at 3.0 kN/m length

right angles to the direction of spectator movement
4. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, parallel 2.0 kN/m length

to the direction of spectator movement, including
barriers used for segregation
5. Barriers for seating decks, adjacent to the end row 1.0 kN/m length
of seats and protecting spectators from falling
sideways
6. Barriers for seating decks, behind a rear row of seats 1.0 kN/m length
and protecting spectators from falling backwards
7. Barriers positioned within 530mm in front of seats 1.5 kN/m length
8. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps aligned 3.0 kN/m length
at right angles to the direction of movement of
spectators
9. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned 2.0 kN/m length
with the direction of movement of spectators
10. Barriers for gangways in standing areas, aligned at 5.0 kN/m length
right angles to the direction of spectator movement
11. Independent barriers in front of seats 1.5 kN/m length

(see Section 12.19 and Figure 26)
12. Barriers of seats incorporating barriers 2.0 kN/m length

(see Sections 12.20 – 12.23 and Figure 27)
13. Separating elements, such as walls and barriers 2.0–3.0 kN/m length
in spectator areas, boundary walls, fences, doors at a designed height
and gates, including perimeter gates, that may be of 1.1m
subject to crowd loading (see Sections 10.17,
or 1.0 kN/m length
11.17, 11.18 and Figure 21)
at a designed height
of 2.5m
BARRIERS
For illustrations of barrier types 3-9 cited above, see Figures 17 and 18.
Contents
Figure 15 Table showing horizontal imposed loads for crush barriers
GRADIENT OF HORIZONTAL DISTANCE BETWEEN CRUSH BARRIERS

TERRACE OR
VIEWING SLOPE
5° 5.0m 4.0m 3.3m 3.0m 2.0m
10° 4.3m 3.4m 2.9m 2.6m 1.7m
15° 3.8m 3.0m 2.6m 2.3m 1.5m
20° 3.4m 2.7m 2.3m 2.0m 1.3m
25° 3.1m 2.5m 2.1m 1.8m 1.2m
horizontal 5.0 4.0 3.4 3.0 2.0

imposed load kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m
length length length length length
Figure 16 Table showing horizontal imposed loads for barriers in

spectator galleries
depth of gallery measured

perpendicular to barrier 3.4m 2.3m 1.7m
horizontal imposed load 3.0 kN/m 2.0 kN/m 1.5 kN/m

length length length
General notes to Figures 14, 15 and 16
zz All barriers should be capable of resisting proof loads equivalent to 1.2 times the
horizontal imposed loads listed in the tables.
zz Barrier testing methods and the criteria to be met are given in Sections 11.20–26.
zz Barrier foundations, baseplates and fastenings should be designed to resist the
overturning moments and sliding forces induced by the horizontal imposed loads
with a factor of safety of 2.
zz Loads specified in these tables should be treated as unfactored or characteristic loads
for design purposes.
BARRIERS
zz It is recommended that the minimum uniformly distributed load on the surface of any
infill panel shall be 0.8 kN/m2 (see also Section 8.9.a).
zz However, if infill panels are provided to prevent the risk of spectators falling, the minimum
uniformly distributed load on the surface of the infill panel shall be 2.0 kN/m2.
Further notes specific to each of the tables follow overleaf
Contents
Notes to Figure 14
zz All references to seats are to fixed seats (that is, any seat, tip-up or otherwise),
attached to the main structure.
zz It is recommended that escalators should satisfy the same loadings as stairways.
zz Reference should also be made to the BS EN 13200-3: Spectator Facilities: Separating
Elements.
zz At grounds where children are likely to be in attendance, barriers situated next to, or in
the middle of open wells or open spaces should be non-climbable and designed so that
there are no openings large enough for a 100mm sphere to pass through. If the barrier
itself cannot be redesigned, the gaps should be covered by infilling.
Notes to Figure 15
zz Interpolation may be made between these figures.

zz Gradients in excess of 25 degrees are potentially hazardous and should be avoided.
Where they exist they should be subject to a risk assessment.
zz The maximum horizontal imposed load on a crush barrier should not be greater than
5 kN/m. This is because a transient load greater than 5 kN/m on the spectators
immediately behind a crush barrier risks physical injury.
zz The horizontal distances specified are the maximum recommended according to the
barrier strength and angle of gradient, and should not be exceeded in new construction.
If the distances at existing constructions exceed the maximum, the available viewing
area (which forms part of the capacity calculation) should be limited to the area behind
the barrier which falls within the maximum distance. The remaining space behind
should be discounted, even though in practice spectators may stand in those areas.
Notes to Figure 16
zz Interpolation may be made between these figures.

zz The required horizontal imposed load should be calculated according to the distance
between the barrier and the gallery’s rear wall, or any other restraint.
zz If the spectator gallery also forms part of an escape route, the barrier’s horizontal
imposed load should be no less than 2 kN/m length.
BARRIERS
Contents
Figure 17 Barrier design loads, heights and positions

This diagram illustrates the different types of barriers used in seating decks, stairways
and gangways, as listed in Figure 14. Note, the diagram is for illustrative purposes only
and is not intended to form the basis of an actual design. Note also that where appropriate
barriers should be designed or infilled to prevent children climbing through the gaps
(see Notes to Figure 14).
Type 6 barrier Type 4 barrier

behind rear row of seats for seat gangways, parallel
height: 1.1m to direction of movement
Type 8 barrier above level of seat height: 1.1m
on a stairway, aligned at design load: 1.0 kN/m design load: 2.0 kN/m
right angles to direction
of movement
height: 1.1m
design load: 3.0 kN/m
Type 8 barrier
Type 3 barrier
at foot of gangway
height: 1.1m
Type 9 barrier
at side of stairway, Type 7 barrier
aligned with direction within 530mm of
Type 5 barrier
of movement front row of seats
adjacent to end row of seats
height: 1.1m height: 800mm
height: 1.1m
design load: 2.0 kN/m design load: 1.5 kN/m
BARRIERS
Contents
Figure 18 Barriers for front and rear seating rows

Type 7 barriers positioned within 530mm of the front of a row of
seats should be a minimum height of 800mm above the datum and
a recommended minimum of 200mm wide. 1.1m
Where appropriate, the top surfaces of such barriers should be
designed to prevent their use as shelves for items which might
fall and endanger spectators.
Where the rear of the stand is open, Type 6 barriers
behind the rear row of seats should be a minimum
height of 1.1m, measured from the seat level.
530
mm
800
mm
11.2 Design and loading of barriers and separating elements

Barriers at sports grounds should be designed to resist safely the horizontal imposed loads
specified in Figure 14, 15 and 16. However it is the responsibility of a competent engineer to
use his or her professional judgement to ensure that the loading for each barrier is sufficient
for the barrier’s intended purpose.
Regardless of the height of the barrier (see Section 11.5), the horizontal imposed load should
be considered to act at a height of 1.1m above the datum, when applied as a static load at
right angles to the longitudinal axis of the barrier. A component of the same load parallel to
the longitudinal axis should also be considered. For example a 10 degree off-perpendicular
component creates significant in-plane loading.
When using limit state design, the partial factors for loads and materials should be those
recommended by the relevant British Standard for the relevant material.
11.3 Barrier fixings

The strength of all fixings and joints should be adequate for the loading to which the barrier
will be subjected. The design should avoid reliance wholly on the pull-out strength of a single
fixing. It is also essential that fixing design takes account of the material into which the fixing
is placed, the spacing between fixings, the edge distance and, where appropriate, the position
of reinforcement in the concrete. The fixings should not create a trip hazard for spectators (see
BARRIERS
also Section 11.19).
11.4 Support from adjacent construction

Designers should ensure that any construction or structure acting as a support for barriers is
of adequate strength and stability to resist safely all applied loads, without excessive stress,
deflection or distortion.
Contents
11.5 Barrier heights

Barriers used in areas of seated accommodation and on stairways and ramps should be
designed to a height of not less than 1.1m, measured from the datum, unless they fall into
one of the following three categories:
a. Barriers within 530mm in front of fixed or tip-up seating should be a height of 800mm
above the datum (see Figure 18). Note that this reduced barrier height is for seated
spectators. If for any reason spectators persistently stand in this location consideration
should be given to taking this row, and possibly others behind, out of use (see Section
12.25.e).
b. Barriers immediately behind a row of seats should be a minimum height of 1.1m above
the datum, which in this case is the level of the seat (see Figure 18).
c. Barriers designed to separate stairways into channels should be between 0.9 – 1.0m
height above the datum (see Section 8.9.b).
In all cases, as stated in Section 11.2, regardless of the height, the horizontal imposed load
should still be considered to act at a height of 1.1m above the datum.
Further guidance on the height of crush barriers can be found in Section 11.11.
Guidance on the heights of handrails for stairways and ramps is in Section 8.10 and Figure 8.
11.6 Barriers and sightline considerations

All spectators in seated areas should have a clear, unobstructed view of the whole field
of play or area of activity (see Section 12.2).
It is nevertheless recognised that barriers meeting the height requirements listed in Section
11.5 might obstruct sightlines.
Careful consideration should therefore be given to the design and construction of any barrier
forming part of a seating deck. This applies particularly to barriers placed within 530mm
of fixed seating.
Barriers around vomitories should be 1.1m high. Even if this results in views being obstructed,
safety should take priority before considering deviating from this recommendation,
particularly where there is a risk of spectators falling from a height.
11.7 Crush barriers – main design criteria

This section and the following sections on crush barriers should be read in conjunction with
Chapter 13, concerning the design and management of standing areas. Reference should
also be made to Figure 15.
At sports grounds where standing accommodation is provided, many of the hazards arising
from crowd pressure on terraces and viewing slopes can be eliminated by the provision of
BARRIERS
crush barriers that are appropriately designed and constructed.
The main considerations concerning the design and construction of crush barriers can be
summarised as follows:
a. the gradient of the terrace or viewing slope, which in turn will determine the appropriate
spacing of the crush barriers and the required horizontal imposed load for each crush
barrier (see Section 11.8)
Contents
b. the configuration of the crush barriers in relation to gangways (see Sections 11.8 and 11.9)
c. the height and positioning of the crush barriers in relation to the treads or surfaces of the
standing area (see Section 11.11)
d. the construction and condition of the crush barriers (see Section 11.12).
Section 11.13 summarises the consequences of any deficiencies or deviations from the
requirements outlined in Sections 11.7–11.11.
11.8 Crush barriers – factors determining the horizontal imposed load

As shown in Figure 15, the required horizontal imposed load for crush barriers is determined by
the gradient of the terrace or viewing slope, in relation to the horizontal distance between the
crush barriers. The steeper the gradient and the greater the horizontal distance between crush
barriers, the greater the horizontal imposed load required for those crush barriers.
a. Gradient
The gradient is the first factor to be considered when determining the required horizontal
imposed load for crush barriers.
Existing construction: the gradient will be pre-determined. However, it is strongly

recommended that the gradient of any standing area should not exceed 25 degrees.
New construction
The gradient for newly constructed areas of standing accommodation should be designed
according to the calculations for sightlines (see Section 13.12). Although for seated areas the
gradient can be as steep as 35 degrees, for standing areas it should not exceed 25 degrees.
b. Horizontal distance between crush barriers

Having established the angle of the gradient, the spacing between crush barriers should
then be considered.
Existing construction: the horizontal spacing between crush barriers will be pre-determined,
in which case the horizontal imposed load of the crush barriers must be in accordance with
the requirements specified in Figure 15. If the spacing proves to be excessive, the available
viewing area should be reduced to those areas immediately
behind each crush barrier, measured to a depth appropriate to the crush barrier’s strength
New construction
Designers should use the data in Figure 15 to determine the appropriate crush barrier loadings
and spacings according to the desired gradient.
BARRIERS
Any crush barrier which fails to meet the horizontal imposed load requirements specified in
Figure 15 should be removed and replaced, or strengthened and then re-tested.
Contents
Figure 19 Continuous crush barrier configuration

maximum spacing
min width 1.1m
24m
lateral gangway
radial gangway
radial gangway
lateral gangway
pitch or area of activity
Note that all spectators should be within 12m of a gangway or exit, hence the spacing of
gangways 24m apart. Note also that for new construction the recommended minimum width for
gangways is 1.2m.
At sports grounds where pitch perimeter barriers are positioned in front of standing areas, gates
or openings should be provided to allow spectators to escape onto the pitch or area of activity in
the event of an incident. Where gates are fitted, as illustrated, these should open away from the
viewing accommodation.
Wherever practicable in standing areas, as stated in Section 11.16 and shown above, there
should be a lateral gangway dividing the front row of crush barriers from the pitch perimeter
barrier. However, where a continuous crush barrier configuration is provided, a front lateral
gangway may not always be necessary, depending on local conditions.
11.9 Crush barriers – continuous crush barrier configuration

The configuration of crush barriers – that is, their layout in relationship to each other and to
gangways – has a crucial influence on the safe management of spectators in standing areas.
Experience indicates that the safest configuration is to provide crush barriers along the
full width of a terrace or viewing slope, with gaps only at radial gangways, as illustrated in
Figure 19. Because this configuration is considered the safest for guiding and controlling
the movements of spectators, it is also the principal method by which management can
aim to achieve the highest permissible capacity levels for a standing area.
Existing construction: consideration should be given to the conversion of all standing areas
BARRIERS
to incorporate a continuous crush barrier configuration.
As stated in Section 2.8, provided that the strengths of the continuous crush barriers are
appropriate for the angle of gradient and the spacings between the crush barriers, and the
standing area is both in good condition and well stewarded, there should be no reduction in
the calculation of its available viewing area, nor of its (P) and (S) factors, nor of its appropriate
density, which should be the maximum of 47 persons per 10 square metres (although, as
explained in Section 2.9, a lower density might be more appropriate).
Contents
New construction
At new grounds where standing areas are to form part of the viewing accommodation, or
at grounds where new standing areas are to be constructed, a continuous crush barrier
configuration should be provided between radial gangways.
It is acknowledged that at sports grounds where the spectators are ambulatory, for example
horse racing, front loading terraces may load and empty quicker if there are staggered
barriers. Such a layout will, however, result in a lower capacity and must be supported by a risk
assessment and by effective monitoring, to ensure that the safe capacities are not exceeded.
11.10 Crush barriers – non-continuous crush barrier configuration

Where non-continuous crush barriers are in place, the alignment of gaps in successive rows
of barriers should form an angle of less than 60 degrees to the barriers.
There should be no more than two consecutive gaps in any line. These gaps should be at
least 1.1m, and not more than 1.4m, in width.
11.11 Crush barriers – height and positioning

Research has shown that in order to locate the top rail of a crush barrier against that part of
the body most able to tolerate pressure, and to accommodate a typical range of spectators,
a reasonable height for the top rail is 1.1m.
Note, however, the need to evolve a management strategy for the safe accommodation
of children, for whom the recommended barrier height might actually constitute a hazard
(see Section 13.24.h).
Crush barriers installed prior to 1997: a range of heights between 1.02m and 1.12m,
measured from the step to the centre line of the top rail, should still be regarded as
acceptable. However, any crush barrier lower than 1.02m or higher than 1.12m should
be removed and replaced, or modified.
If the positioning of existing crush barriers leaves insufficient room for standing on the same
step, as illustrated in Figure 20, the height should be measured from the step immediately
behind and the area of the step should not be included when calculating the available
viewing area.
New construction
As illustrated in Figure 20, to allow spectators sufficient room to stand safely and comfortably
behind a crush barrier, new crush barriers should be positioned immediately in front of a
terrace step’s riser, or, if not, at the front of a step. In both cases, the 1.1m is measured from
the step on which the spectator stands to the top of the crush barrier’s rail.
BARRIERS
Contents
Figure 20 Positioning and height of crush barriers
1.1m 1.1m 1.1m
sufficient insufficient
room for standing room for standing
In the examples above left and centre, the barriers are positioned, as recommended, at the
front of the step. The recommended height of 1.1m is measured from the surface of the
step to the top of the rail.
For existing situations, the measurement can be taken from the step to the centre of the rail,
and be between 1.02m and 1.12m.
In the example above right the barrier is positioned in such a way as to make it difficult for
a spectator to stand on the same step. For this reason the height should be taken from the
step behind. Note, this barrier positioning is not recommended for new construction.
If there is insufficient space to stand on a step to which the barrier is fitted, this area should
not be included when calculating the available viewing area.
11.12 Crush barriers – construction and strengthening

Crush barriers should be constructed or strengthened taking into account the following
requirements:
a. There should be no sharp projections or edges.
b. For safety and comfort, the crush barrier’s top rail should be flat facing, measure 100mm
in vertical depth, and be designed to prevent it from being used as a shelf
c. As stated in Section 11.8, any crush barrier which fails to meet the horizontal imposed
load specified in Figure 15 should be removed and replaced. If this is not possible and
BARRIERS
therefore strengthening measures are to be considered, care must be taken to avoid

simply transferring the problem to another part of the crush barrier or its foundations.
All newly strengthened barriers must be tested before use.
For further guidance on barrier fixings see Sections 11.3 and 11.19.
Contents
11.13 Crush barriers – factors affecting the holding capacity

In addition to the reduction of the available viewing area resulting from the provision of
a non-continuous crush barrier configuration (see Section 11.10), further deficiencies or
deviations from the recommendations in the Guide may require a reduction of the holding
capacity of the standing area (see Chapter 2).
A summary of the main concerns follows. Note that this list is not intended to be
comprehensive, nor applicable in all circumstances.
A reduction in the holding capacity of a standing area may be necessary if:
a. the gradient is above 25 degrees, thereby requiring a reduction of the (P) or (S) factors
b. the crush barrier spacing is too great in relation to the gradient, thereby requiring a
reduction of the available viewing area, and a possible reduction in the (S) factor
c. after testing, the barrier fails completely (see Section 11.26) and is removed but not
replaced, thereby requiring a reduction in the available viewing area, and a possible
reduction in the (S) factor.
It should be noted that there may be other aspects of the standing area which also require a
reduction in the holding capacity. These might include the physical condition of the standing
area, its safety management, partial cover, or the inadequacy of sightlines.
11.14 Barriers in spectator galleries

Viewing galleries for standing spectators generally form part of hospitality areas at grounds
staging sports such as horse or motor racing. Although the number of spectators who have
access to such galleries is normally limited by the capacity of the hospitality area, the front
barrier must still be designed to withstand crowd loading.
Figure 16 specifies the required horizontal imposed loads, which vary according to the
horizontal distance between the barrier and either the rear wall of the spectator gallery
or any other restraint.
11.15 Pitch or area of activity perimeter barriers

A perimeter barrier is a barrier installed to separate spectators from the pitch or area
of activity. Such barriers can take the form of crush barriers, walls or rails.
The type, height and horizontal imposed load of a perimeter barrier will vary according to its
location and required function.
If spectators can lean on, or gather immediately behind, the perimeter barrier, it should be
categorised as a crush barrier and therefore meet the horizontal imposed load and height
requirements as specified in Sections 11.7 – 11.13.
Even if a perimeter barrier does not need to meet the horizontal imposed load requirements
BARRIERS
of a crush barrier, its height should ideally not exceed 1.1m. Furthermore, whatever the
perimeter barrier height, gates or openings should be provided to allow emergency access
onto the pitch or area of activity.
Advertising hoardings placed alongside the pitch or area of activity are not considered
as perimeter barriers and should not impair the function of any such barrier, nor obscure
spectators’ views.
Contents
11.16 Pitch or area of activity perimeter barriers and standing areas

Wherever practicable, pitch and area of activity perimeter barriers should be separated
from an area of standing accommodation by a lateral gangway, in order to assist circulation
(see Figure 19).
An exception to this recommendation might be a standing area which has a continuous crush
barrier configuration. In such cases an assessment of the need for a lateral gangway should
be made, based on local conditions.
Wherever the standing area descends directly to the perimeter barrier, however, that barrier
should meet the height and horizontal imposed load requirements of a crush barrier.
At certain sports grounds – for example those staging horse or greyhound racing –
it is customary to allow spectators to view the event from level or near level standing
areas commonly known as the ‘lawns’ (see Section 13.20). Where such areas do not
have front perimeter barriers which meet the loading requirement of a crush barrier, it
must be demonstrated through risk assessment, effective monitoring and appropriate
safety management procedures, that there is no risk of forward movement or exerted
pressure concentrated on the front rails (see Section 2.8.h). Even if all these measures are
implemented, a careful assessment should be made of the (P) and (S) factors for each
section or separate area of viewing accommodation.
11.17 Barriers and separating elements in concourses and exit routes

Barriers and separating elements within concourses, corridors, doorways and exit routes
that are subject to crowd loading – including walls, gates, doors and fences – should be
designed to withstand the loadings as specified for Type 13 barriers in Figure 14.
Where the designer can be satisfied that the concourse walls are not required to satisfy
the requirements of Figure 14, the loadings can be taken from BS EN 1991-1-1: Actions
on structures. General actions. Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings.
Table 6.2 of BS EN 1991, for example, gives minimum horizontal imposed loads for stairs
and balconies, and Table 6.12 for walls and partitions.
Walls, barriers and rails around bar and catering facilities may also be subject to
crowd pressures and should therefore also be designed in accordance with the loadings
for Type 13 barriers, as specified in Figure 14 and illustrated in Figure 21 and BS EN 1991.
11.18 Other barriers and separating elements

In addition to the barrier types already covered in this chapter, other barriers and separating
elements subject to crowd loading at sports grounds may include walls (including boundary
walls), fences and gates. If required to withstand crowd pressures, all such barriers and
separating elements should be designed, constructed and maintained to withstand those
pressures safely.
BARRIERS
Consideration should also be given to the following:
a. Allowance should be made for forces simultaneously and independently induced by other
factors, for example, wind forces or attached installations.
Contents
Figure 21 Loadings for walls, barriers and separating elements

in concourses and exit routes
This diagram illustrates a typical concourse that also serves as part of an exit route.
Note, the diagram is for illustrative purposes only and is not intended to form the
basis of an actual design.
Shown here are loadings for Type 13 separating elements, as listed in Figure 14;
that is, walls and barriers that may be subject to crowd loading.
In all situations professional judgement should ensure that the loadings are
sufficient for the intended purpose. For example, where crowd density levels are
both acceptable and effectively stewarded, the walls may not need to satisfy the
loadings shown here but can instead be designed according to the loadings given
in BS EN 1991.
exit stairs
CONCOURSE
exit stairs
vomitory
queuing
area
for
counter
toilets
walls/counters to withstand loadings according to BS EN 1991

BARRIERS
walls to withstand 3.0 kN/m length at a height of 1.1m
walls to withstand 2.0 kN/m length at a height of 1.1m
Contents
b. To minimise the risk of individuals climbing over or breaking through external perimeter
barriers, such barriers should be of an appropriate height and strength, and be designed so
as to not provide any hand or footholds which might assist climbing.
c. External perimeter barriers should be designed to minimise the risk of individuals passing
unauthorised, unlawful or prohibited objects – such as flares, bottles or used tickets – into
or out of the sports ground.
d. If the infill of an external perimeter barrier provides protection from falling, the uniformly
distributed load on the surface of infill should be 2 kN/m2.
e. Where external walls are adjacent to neighbouring properties, consideration should be

given to the Party Wall Act 1996.
11.19 Barriers and risk assessment

All barriers, including crush barriers and support structures, should be subject to an annual
visual inspection and risk assessment, to determine the schedule for testing.
Any barrier identified by the risk assessment as a potential risk should be tested
immediately.
The risk assessment (which, in practice, will be carried out in a similar fashion to an annual
inspection) should be conducted and recorded by a Chartered Engineer, architect or surveyor
of the appropriate skill and experience.
It should take into account all relevant recommendations in this Guide, combined with a
detailed appraisal of each of the following specific considerations:
a. any available recorded information concerning the barrier’s design
b. the barrier’s construction and its fixings
c. the age of the barrier
d. any visual evidence of weakening or general deterioration of the barrier, including signs of
corrosion, cracks, holes, misalignment, undue distortion, missing bolts or fittings
e. the barrier’s exposure to moisture, particularly the possibility of water or moisture ingress
into hollow steel sections
f. the barrier’s location within the sports ground.
Those barriers which need to be tested immediately should include those whose strength is
not recorded, those which have suffered visible decay, and those where there is potential for
undetected deterioration.
Responsibility for appointing a competent person to undertake and record the results of a risk
assessment of barriers lies with the management of the sports ground.
BARRIERS
Contents
11.20 Barrier tests – personnel and equipment

Having conducted the risk assessment and determined which barriers, if any, require testing,
it is then the responsibility of management to ensure that the tests are carried out prior to
spectators being admitted to that section of the ground.
The management is further responsible for ensuring that the testing is carried out by, or under
the supervision of, a competent person of the appropriate skill and experience.
The competent person will then be responsible for ensuring that the tests are properly carried
out and that all results are accurately recorded (see Section 11.21).
The competent person must be satisfied that the equipment used for the testing is fit for
purpose and used in the correct manner.
11.21 Barrier tests – records

Detailed written records should be made and kept of all observations, loadings and
deflection/recovery readings in respect of each barrier tested. The documentation
should include a standard record sheet setting out the following information:
a. the identity of each barrier tested
b. its location, including a cross-reference to the ground plan
c. the date of inspection
d. all relevant results and comments arising from the test
e. a clear statement as to whether the barrier has passed or failed.
11.22 Barrier tests – methodology

The test method for barriers should be in two parts:
a. the ‘bedding-in’ cycle
b. the proof cycle.
Barriers that do not fulfil the requirements of both parts shall be deemed to have
failed the test.
The deflection measuring equipment should be unaffected by any movement of the

barriers, their supports, or the movements of personnel performing the test.
The deflections in the horizontal plane should be measured at relevant locations;

for example, at the centre of a barrier rail or the top of an upright.
The loading procedure adopted shall result in each component part of any barrier
being subject to levels of stress at least equal to the stresses that would occur were the
BARRIERS
structure subjected to the relevant uniformly distributed load at a design level of 1.1m.
Contents
11.23 Barrier tests – bedding-in cycle

In order to allow for bedding-in, the barrier should be loaded up to its horizontal imposed
load as defined in either Figure 14 or 15.
The bedding-in load should be applied in at least five equal increments and then removed.
Deflections should be monitored at each increment of the load cycle and upon removal
of the load.
The barrier may be considered to have satisfactorily completed this part of the test if, on
removal of the load, the recovery is at least 75 per cent of the maximum deflection, as
measured from the original position prior to loading, or if the permanent deflection is less
than 2mm.
If the barrier fails to achieve this level of recovery it shall be considered to have failed the
test unless there is a satisfactory explanation for the results.
11.24 Barrier tests – proof cycle

The proof cycle is to consist of two consecutive applications of the proof load. The interval
between each application shall be such as to enable complete unloading.
For crush barriers the proof load is equal to 1.2 x the horizontal imposed load specified
in Figure 15.
For other barriers the proof force is equal to 1.2 x the horizontal imposed load specified
in either Figure 14 or 16.
The application of the proof load should consist of five equal increments.
The full proof load shall be maintained for five minutes and then removed.
A record shall be kept of:
a. the deflection at each load increment
b. the deflection after the five-minute application of the full proof load
c. the residual deflection after removal of the load.
The procedure is then repeated.
If, on removal of the load after the second application, the recovery is at least 95 per cent in
any measured deflection (as measured from the barrier position at the start of the proof cycle
– that is, after the bedding-in cycle), the barrier should be considered to have satisfied the
proof cycle loading requirement.
BARRIERS
Contents
11.25 Barrier tests – further considerations

Comparison should be made with the records available from previous testings of the barrier.
Comparison should also be made with the performance of other barriers of a similar type
subjected to the same or similar tests. This is to establish whether there are indications
of a reduction in overall performance, perhaps indicative of a developing weakness that
necessitates either remedial action or more regular testing or inspection.
If the barrier satisfies the requirements of the testing procedure, but during that procedure
doubt arises as to its suitability, for any reason (including such matters as corrosion,
distortion of connections and fittings, or cracking in the vicinity of supports), a further detailed
investigation should be carried out.
Unless the results of this detailed investigation remove the doubt, the barrier should be
deemed to have failed.
11.26 Barrier tests resulting in failure

A barrier failing the test procedure should be removed and replaced, or strengthened
and then retested.
As stated in Section 11.13, if a crush barrier fails, until it is replaced or strengthened the
available viewing area of the standing area should be reduced, which in turn may lead to
a reduction of the area’s holding capacity.
The removal of a crush barrier – particularly one placed where a high density of spectators
may congregate – is likely to lead to uncontrolled movements and increased crowd pressure.
In such situations, the reduction of the area’s holding capacity should be much greater than
if it were related to the non-replacement of an individual crush barrier elsewhere.
The non-replacement of a crush barrier will also require a management strategy to prevent
overcrowding in the affected area.
Replacement, or repair, of the failed barrier should therefore always be the preferred option.
BARRIERS
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 12.0 Spectator accommodation – seating
12.0 Spectator
accommodation –
seating
12.1 The provision of seated accommodation

At sports grounds where spectators are essentially non-ambulatory during the event
– such as grounds staging football, rugby, cricket, athletics, tennis, hockey and motor
racing – the provision of seated accommodation for all spectators is, wherever possible,
recommended. When considering new construction at such grounds, management
should take this into consideration as part of its strategy for overall safety management.
It is recognised, however, that where spectators may be ambulatory during the event
– such as at grounds staging golf, horse racing or greyhound racing – a combination of
seated and standing accommodation is a fundamental design requirement.
As stated in Section 2.6, the holding capacity of a seated area does not automatically
correspond to the number of actual seats. For example, seats that offer a seriously restricted
view or that are damaged, should be discounted, as should those that exceed the maximum
number between radial gangways (unless the design has been subject to a risk assessment
and appropriate compensatory features put in place). The holding capacity will, of course,
also be subject to an assessment of (P) and (S) factors (see Sections 12.24 and 12.25).
Newly constructed seated accommodation should conform to any applicable Building

Regulations, and to the appropriate requirements of the Guide, such as the design
of circulation routes, barrier and handrail provision and fire safety. In addition, the
service, comfort and amenities of spectators, and their access to amenities, should be
considered. It is therefore recommended that, in all matters relating to the design of seated
accommodation, management seek professional advice from competent persons of the
appropriate skill and experience.
For further guidance reference should be made the British and European Standard BS EN
13200–1: Spectator Facilities: General characteristics for spectator viewing area.
New and existing seated areas will need to provide accessible viewing areas for disabled
spectators, including ambulant disabled spectators. These areas must be located around
the ground in adequate numbers and must be of appropriate viewing quality, to give all
spectators a suitable range of viewing options. Provision and standards should be reviewed
by management, in consultation with disabled supporters and local disability groups, on
a regular basis. Further reference may be made to the publications Accessible Stadia and
Supplementary Guidance, both available from the SGSA.
Prefabricated or demountable stands need to satisfy the same criteria for numbers, dispersal
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
and viewing quality for disabled spectators as those required in a conventional construction
(see also Chapter 14).
Contents
Management should also consider the provision of amenity, or easy-access seats for
spectators with particular requirements (see Section 12.18).
It is emphasised that the provision of seats is not, in itself, a guarantee of safe conditions.
Good design and safety management are essential, and are of particular importance in areas
where spectators persistently stand to watch the event. In such locations, management will
need to consider how to discourage spectators from standing, based on the guidance in this
chapter, or whether, as outlined in Sections 12.19 – 12.23, where prevailing legislation and
competition rules allow, to install additional barriers, or seats incorporating barriers, designed
to mitigate the risks arising from persistent standing.
12.2 Viewing standards

The provision of adequate viewing standards is a key factor in ensuring that seated
accommodation is safe, and serves its intended purpose. All seated spectators should
have a clear, unrestricted view of the whole of the pitch or area of activity.
(The only exceptions to this requirement are grounds staging such events as horse racing or
motor racing where, clearly, a view of the whole area of activity is difficult to achieve from any
static viewing position.)
Designs should ensure that spectators are encouraged to remain seated and do not have to
stretch or strain to view the event.
Viewing standards depend largely on three inter-related factors:
a. the quality of sightlines (see Sections 12.3, 12.4 and Figure 22)
b. the existence of any restrictions (see Sections 12.5 and 12.6)
c. the viewing distance (see Section 12.25.g).
12.3 Sightlines
The term ‘sightline’ refers to the ability of a spectator to see a predetermined focal point (on
the pitch or area of activity) over the top of the heads of the spectators immediately in front.
The better the quality of the sightline, the more likely it is that spectators will remain seated
during the event. Ensuring adequate sightlines is therefore an important part of providing safe
seated accommodation.
The quality of a sightline is often expressed as a ‘C’ value. Figure 22 shows how ‘C’ values
are calculated. The recommended ‘C’ value for spectators varies according to the sport, as
does the choice of focal point. For example, it is important for spectators at football or rugby
matches to be able to see the nearest touchline, so this should form the focal point. However,
for viewing cricket a focal point further infield may be acceptable.
It should also be recognised that sightlines are likely to be compromised if spectators stand
in an area of seated accommodation, as illustrated in Figure 23.
Because of the complex nature of sightline calculations it is recommended that management

seeks professional advice from competent persons of the appropriate skill, and with
experience of designing viewing accommodation for the sport (or sports) to be staged.
Advice on the calculation of sightlines for different sports is included in BS EN 13200–1:

ACCOMMODATION
Spectator Facilities: General characteristics for spectator viewing area.

SPECTATOR
Contents
Figure 22 Sightlines for seated spectators

This diagram should be considered in conjunction with Figure 25 Seating row depths and seat dimensions
Key:
C = the ‘C’ value
D = the horizontal distance from the eye to the point of focus
N = the riser height
R = the vertical height to the point of focus
T = the seating row depth
To calculate the appropriate

‘C’ value for the sport to be
viewed, the following
formula applies:
D (N + R)
point of focus – typically C= –R
D+T
the nearest touchline,
or outside lane of running
track, or boundary of
area of activity
C
Note that the ‘C’ value should, in most situations, range between 90–120 mm. Where values
outside of this range are proposed, the designer will need to demonstrate that the viewing
standards of the spectators affected have not been compromised.
Further guidance and an alternative method for calculating ‘C’ values can be found in
ACCOMMODATION
BS EN 13200–1: Spectator Facilities: General characteristics for spectator viewing area.

SPECTATOR
Contents
Figure 23 Effect on sightlines of spectators standing in seated areas
Key to diagram:
D1 = horizontal distance from eye to point of focus for seated spectators
R1 = vertical height to point of focus for seated spectators
D2 = horizontal distance from eye to point of focus for standing spectators
R2 = vertical height to point of focus for standing spectators
D2
D1
R2 R1
point of focus typically the nearest

touchline, or outside lane of running
track, or boundary of area of activity
Where spectators stand in an area designed specifically for seating, the sightlines of all
those in the affected area, whether sitting or standing, are likely to be compromised. Those
who remain seated will have their views obstructed. Those who are smaller in stature will
have their views obstructed, even if they stand. Furthermore, as illustrated, for all those who
stand the focal point will move further away, leading to spectators stretching, straining,
pushing, jostling and standing on tiptoes (and sometimes, unacceptably, on the seats) in
order to get a better view.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
Figure 24 Sightlines for wheelchair users
Note: for reasons

of clarity, all barriers
‘C’ value and handrails have
been omitted from the
diagram
Designers should
Increased consider potential
height riser problems for other
spectators when
or ‘super riser’
viewing from the sides
and at high levels
12.4 Sightlines for wheelchair users

Wherever practicable, disabled people should be offered the same opportunity as other
spectators to view an event from any tier, or level of an area of seated accommodation.
Indeed, disabled access to all levels of a newly constructed, non-domestic building is a
requirement of the relevant British Standard and Building Regulations.
Because wheelchair users are not always able to stand up, the spaces allocated to them
and their companions must be located and designed in such a way that if spectators or
other personnel stand up or walk in front of them, their sightlines will not be obstructed.
The recommended method for achieving this is the construction of a riser of an increased
height, or ‘super riser’, as illustrated in Figure 24.
The construction of a ‘super riser’ might also be necessary for wheelchair user spaces in
areas of seated accommodation that are located behind areas of standing accommodation.
Where a ‘super riser’ is not in place, for example at pitch level, it is equally important that
sightlines for wheelchair users are not obstructed by advertising hoardings, and that all
movements of personnel in front of this area are kept to a minimum. This applies also to
spaces allocated to wheelchair users positioned immediately behind lateral gangways.
It should be further recognised that some wheelchair users are unable to turn their heads,
or to lean forwards or sideways, and that therefore their preferred location within a sports
ground will be an elevated, corner position.
Finally, it is equally important that the sightlines of other spectators behind, and to the side
of the spaces allocated to wheelchair users, are considered in the design process, to ensure
ACCOMMODATION
that their sightlines are not unduly affected.

SPECTATOR
Contents
12.5 Restricted viewing

As stated previously, all spectators should have a clear, unrestricted view of the whole pitch
or area of activity. Although there are exceptions to this requirement (see Section 12.2),
the causes of potential restrictions should be considered at all sports grounds. These may
include:
a. inadequate sightlines
b. roof supports or roof structures
c. the flanking walls, screens or overhanging upper tiers of stands
d. barriers serving gangways
e. segregation barriers or fences
f. structures such as floodlights, scoreboards or camera platforms
g. advertising hoardings
h. the passage of other spectators or ground personnel in front of seats or in lateral

gangways
i. the positioning of media personnel (such as photographers and camera operators),

stewards and any other personnel (such as promotional staff, bookmakers and
their umbrellas)
j. sports equipment, goal netting, protective netting and support devices.
Note that the provision of pitch perimeter fences (see Glossary) in front of seated areas
is not recommended unless specifically required for the protection of spectators from
the activity taking place (as, for example, in hockey). As stated in Section 12.4, nor should
perimeter fences or advertising boards restrict the view of wheelchair users positioned
at pitch level.
Management is responsible for assessing the impact of restricted viewing from every seat
to which spectators have access, and for taking the appropriate action where necessary. This
might include a reduction in the capacity (see Section 12.6).
In carrying out this assessment, it is recommended that the following criteria are applied:
Partial restriction
This applies to seats from which the view may be restricted, for example by a roof support,
but not to the extent that spectators have to strain or are encouraged to stand in order to gain
an improved view.
Serious restriction
This applies to seats from which the view is sufficiently restricted, for example by inadequate
sightlines or advertising hoardings, to encourage spectators to stand.
12.6 Restricted viewing – management strategies

Where views are partially restricted and the restrictions cannot be removed, consideration
should be given to marking tickets for the affected seats with the words ‘Restricted View’.
ACCOMMODATION
Management should ensure that people are advised of this before they purchase such
SPECTATOR
tickets. Where a safety certificate is in force, this course of action may be required by the
local authority on safety grounds.
Contents
Where views are seriously restricted and the restrictions cannot be removed, the affected
seats should not be made available to spectators and should be excluded from the holding
capacity (see Chapter 2).
If, despite carrying out the measures recommended above, it is observed that spectators
in certain seats continue to stand for extended periods during an event, there should be a
reduction in the (S) factor, thus leading to a possible reduction of the final capacity of the
stand (see Section 12.25).
Where prevailing legislation and competition rules allow, consideration may be given to
the installation of additional barriers or seats designed to mitigate the risks arising from
persistent standing (see Sections 12.19 – 12.23).
New construction
Newly constructed stands should not contain seats offering views with serious restrictions.
Every effort should also be made to ensure that partially restricted views are eliminated.
Furthermore, it is the responsibility of both the management and designers to ensure that
the viewing standards provided are adequate and appropriate for the sports or events to be
staged. For this reason, management may wish to request that designers provide written
assurance to that effect.
12.7 Provision of cover

Although at grounds staging certain sports it is recommended that all seated
accommodation be covered, it is recognised that full protection from the elements is hard to
achieve in all situations and in all weather conditions; for example, owing to the height of the
roof or the direction of prevailing winds.
Where the protection provided is only partial, or there is no cover at all, the following
strategies should be considered:
a. Partial cover
Experience shows that where partial cover only is provided and spectators are able to
migrate from an uncovered section to a covered section, congestion can occur. In such
situations management might consider the following options:
i. to extend the roof (taking into account the risk that additional roof supports
might lead to more seats with restricted views)
ii. to provide a new roof covering the whole area
iii. to install appropriate barriers, to prevent or control migration, and/or
iv. to adopt appropriate stewarding strategies to control the migration.
If none of the above options are implemented, or if either options iii. or iv. are implemented
but the problems of migration and overcrowding continue, consideration should be given
to limiting the final capacity of the affected section to those seats under cover.
b. Cover for wheelchair user spaces

For the amenity and safety of disabled spectators it is essential that areas designated for
wheelchair users are adequately sheltered. If the designated area is separate from other
areas of viewing accommodation and has its own roof, the design of this roof should not
ACCOMMODATION
restrict the views of other spectators, but should still be of a sufficient height to allow
SPECTATOR
companions, stewards and other personnel to enter, and move around freely inside.
Contents
c. No cover
At sports grounds where uncovered seats are provided, management should ensure that
spectators seeking shelter do not overcrowd other areas of the ground, such as covered
stands and concourses.
d. Ticketing
As a general principle, tickets for seats which are not covered should be marked with the
words ‘Uncovered Seat’. Management should ensure that people are advised of this before
they purchase such tickets. Where a safety certificate is in force, this course of action may
be required by the local authority, on safety grounds.
e. Slip hazards
Management should be aware of the potential slip hazards caused by rainwater and other
sources of contamination arising from the provision of partial cover, or from having no
cover. Further guidance on the management of slip hazards can be found on the SGSA
website.
12.8 Gangways in seated areas – general requirements

As stated in Section 12.1, the provision of seats alone is not, in itself, a guarantee of safe
conditions. It is also necessary that seated areas are designed and managed to be safe.
Although it is recognised that, compared to standing spectators, people in seated areas are
generally less hurried and more orderly in terms of their circulation – largely owing to the
layout of seating rows – careful consideration must still be given to the design and provision
of ingress and egress routes, including both radial and lateral gangways.
In general, gangways in seated areas should meet the following requirements:
a. They should be designed and configured to allow for the Zone 2 travel time – that is,
measured from the spectator’s seat to the start of a free flowing exit system (in Zone 3) –
of no more than eight minutes under normal conditions (see Section 10.11 and Figure 13).
b. As for all areas of viewing accommodation, gangways in seated areas should be a

minimum of 1.1m wide (1.2m recommended for new construction).
c. They should be even and free from trip hazards, and their surfaces should be slip-resistant
Further guidance on lateral and radial gangways in seated areas can be found in the following
sections.
12.9 Lateral gangways in seated areas

The design and management of lateral gangways in seated areas requires particular
attention.
a. Front lateral gangways

Spectators seated in the front rows of stands which have front lateral gangways at
the same level as the first row of seats, may have their views restricted by the passage
of people along the gangway.
Where such a situation exists, the management should make every effort to limit the
movement of people along the gangway. If the restriction of views cannot be managed
effectively, a reduction in the (S) factor may have to be considered, or access to the
ACCOMMODATION
affected seats prohibited (see Section 12.25).

SPECTATOR
Contents
b. Mid-level lateral gangways

Where spectators in seats immediately behind mid-level lateral gangways have their views
restricted by the passage of people along the gangway, the same considerations as above
should be applied.
In addition, designers should recognise that when incorporating mid-level lateral

gangways, the geometry of the design should ensure that sightlines for spectators in the
rows behind such gangways are not adversely affected.
12.10 Radial gangways in seated areas

As stated in Section 8.2, for the purpose of design and assessment, the criteria applying to
radial gangways are, in part, different to those pertaining to stairways. The main difference
is that the dimensions of the goings and risers of radial gangways will be dictated by the
gradient of the seating rows, and they should not result in a gradient steeper than 35 degrees,
as required by Approved Document K of the Building Regulations.
Taking this into account, the following design criteria should be considered:
a. The goings of steps in radial gangways should not be less than 280mm, and should
be uniform.
b. The risers of steps in radial gangways should ideally be between 150–170mm to allow
for their use by ambulant disabled spectators, and should not in any circumstances
measure more than 190mm.
Concerning the uniformity of riser heights, as stated in Section 8.6, it is recognised that
in order to provide adequate sightlines in larger tiers of stands it is often necessary for
seating rows, or series of seating rows (sometimes called facets), to be constructed with
riser heights which increase incrementally from the front to the rear of the tier. Accordingly
in such situations, the riser heights of steps in radial gangways may also increase
incrementally.
This is acceptable practice, with one proviso. If the resultant radial gangway steps do not
comply with the specified minimum or maximum dimensions, compensatory measures
should be considered in order to ensure safe passage. Examples of compensatory
measures may include handholds, grab rails or intermittent central handrails.
These handholds, grab rails or handrails should be robust, securely fixed, and their fixings
designed to be fit for the purpose. Such compensatory features will also be of benefit to
ambulant disabled people and more elderly spectators.
c. In order to minimise the discomfort of spectators, it may be preferable to shorten the

length of excessively long radial gangways on steeply angled upper tiers by diverting
the flow along lateral gangways.
d. The nosings of steps in radial gangways should be clearly identified by the use of
non-slip paint in a contrasting colour, or a proprietary strip (which should not in itself
constitute a trip hazard).
e. Radial gangways in seated areas should not contain winders (that is, tapered treads).
f. Any barrier (including walls, fences or gates) at the foot of radial gangways in seated
areas should be 1.1m high and have the design load shown in Figure 14 (that is, 3.0
ACCOMMODATION
kN/m length). However, where there is no significant difference in level, subject to a

SPECTATOR
risk assessment it is possible that such barriers may not require a crowd loading or a
minimum height restriction.
Contents
g. Where radial gangways lead down to pitch perimeter barriers, the provisions outlined
in Section 10.17 will need to be met.
h. Any stepped side gangway (that is, with viewing accommodation on one side only)
should be provided either with a barrier which meets the requirements of Figure 14, or,
if a barrier is not necessary (see Section 8.9), a handrail which meets the requirements
detailed in Section 8.10.
i. As stated in Section 8.6, a radial gangway with a gradient that exceeds 25 degrees should
i. consist of no more than 40 seat rows
ii. be provided either with handholds or grab rails, placed on either side of the gangway,
or a central handrail with gaps that permit spectator crossover.
12.11 The importance of dimensions

As stated in Section 12.3, the provision of adequate and appropriate sightlines requires a
complex calculation which, as illustrated in Figure 22, involves a number of different factors
relating to the dimensions of seating rows.
In addition, the safety, comfort and amenity of spectators will be determined by the amount
of space provided for each individual seat.
Existing construction: although it may be difficult to improve upon the sightlines or

dimensions in existing constructions, wherever practicable management should consider
upgrading areas where the provision is clearly inadequate. If reconstruction of the particular
area is impracticable, consideration might be given to the installation of more appropriate
seat types, or to the adjustment or adaptation of the existing seats. In all cases, management
should seek guidance from competent persons.
New construction
It is the responsibility of management to ensure that sightlines and seating row dimensions
are of the highest standard that can be reasonably achieved, and that these factors are
incorporated into the design by competent persons of the appropriate skill and experience.
12.12 Seating row depths and seat dimensions

Recommendations for seating row depths and seat dimensions are laid out in BS EN
13200–1: Spectator Facilities: General characteristics for spectator viewing area, and in
Figure 25, and can be summarised as follows. (Note, letters in brackets refer to the keys
used in Figures 22 and 25)
a. Seating row depths and seat widths
The minimum space allotted to each seated person should be:
Seat width (W): 460mm measured between seat centres
Seating row depth (T): 610mm where bench seating in place

ACCOMMODATION
660mm for all other types of seating

SPECTATOR
Contents
It is emphasised however that the figure of 610mm (derived from early editions of the
Guide) is unacceptable for seating with backs. Furthermore, it is questionable whether
seating with a row depth of less than 660mm can be regarded as acceptable. Where such
seating exists, the ground management should demonstrate that it does not encourage
spectators to stand.
New construction
The minimum space allotted to each seated person should be as follows:
Seat width (W): 500mm measured between seats centres
Seating row depth (T): 700mm (however 800mm is preferred)
The preferred dimension above applies particularly in the following circumstances:
i. where spectators require, and/or the management hopes to facilitate, easy movement
to and from seats during an event (for example, to purchase refreshments)
ii. where the event being staged is of a lengthy and continuous nature
iii. where it is the custom of spectators to place refreshments, bags or hampers on the
seating row tread
iv. at sports grounds where it is intended to stage events such as concerts, for which a
greater level of accessibility and comfort may be desirable
It should also be recognised that designing new areas of seating to the recommended
dimensions will make it easier to upgrade the facilities in the future; for example, by installing
more advanced seat types or seats incorporating barriers.
b. Seat heights
The height of a seat (H), measured from the seating tread to the upper surface of the seat,
should be a minimum of 400mm, and a recommended height of 450mm.
It is recognised that in certain parts of some sports grounds other forms of seating that
do not conform to these height recommendations – such as seats of bar stool height
– may be acceptable. Before such seats are made available to spectators, however,
their design and installation should be subject to a site-specific risk assessment, and
their subsequent use carefully managed and monitored.
c. Seat depths
Seat depths (SD), including the thickness of the seat back, should be a minimum depth of
350mm and a recommended depth of 400mm.
12.13 Clearways
As illustrated in Figure 25, the ‘clearway’ (CW), also known as the ‘seatway’, is that part of
the seating row depth between the foremost projection of one seat and the back of the seat
in front of it. The size of the clearway determines how safely and freely spectators and other
personnel (such as stewards or first aiders) can move along rows of seats.
Existing construction: the minimum clearway should be 305mm.
The following points should also be considered:
a. Where tip-up seats are fitted (see Glossary), the clearway is measured with the seat in its
tipped up position.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
b. A tip-up seat will provide a greater clearway than a fixed seat
Contents
c. If fixed seats are fitted, in order to achieve the minimum recommended clearway
measurement a deeper seating row depth will be required.
d. Where fitted, armrests must not project into the clearway to such an extent that they
reduce the clearway to below the specified minimum.
New construction
The minimum clearway should be 400mm. This may be reduced to 305mm where there are not
more than seven seats in a row served by a gangway on one side, or not more than 14 seats in
a row served by gangways on both sides.
12.14 Useful seat depths

Another dimension which needs careful consideration is the useful seat depth (USD). The
useful seat depth is the horizontal distance between the back of the seat, measured at seat
height, and the rear of the seat in front. As such, it is an important factor in providing greater
ease of access and comfort for spectators.
The useful seat depth will also be partly determined by the tipped dimension (TD) of the seat.
Clearly, a more narrow tipped dimension will result in a larger useful seat depth.
12.15 Number of seats in rows

It is recommended that the number of seats in a row should not exceed:
a. 14 where there is a gangway at one end only
b. 28 where there is a gangway at both ends.
Deviations from this guidance should be permitted only if a risk assessment demonstrates
the acceptability of the proposals, taking into account the maximum egress time under
normal conditions from the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to the start of a free flowing exit
system (in Zone 3), of eight minutes (see Section 10.11 and Figure 13).
12.16 Seat design

When selecting and installing seats, the following requirements should be met:
a. Fixing
All seats should be securely fixed in position. The fixings should not present any trip
hazards on the treads. They should be vandal proof and contain no sharp projections
or edges.
b. Flame retardancy
All seats, irrespective of the material used, and whether upholstered or not, should
satisfy the ignition source requirements specified in the relevant British Standards.
c. Physical injury
All seats should be designed not to cause injury to the user.
d. Colour contrast
The colour of the seats should contrast with their surroundings.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Reference may also be made to the European Standard BS EN 13200–4: Spectator Facilities:
Seats – Product Characteristics.
Contents
Figure 25 Seating row depths and seat dimensions
CW
T N
Key:
CW = clearway
H = seat height N = riser height
O = seat back overhang T = seating row depth
SD = seat depth W = seat width (measured between seat centres)
TD = tipped dimension
ACCOMMODATION
USD = useful seat depth see also Figure 22 for sightline calculations
SPECTATOR
Contents
12.17 Design and location of wheelchair user spaces

A wheelchair user space should meet the following requirements:
a. Wheelchair users should be able to manoeuvre easily to a space that allows them a clear
view of the event (see Section 12.4).
b. Wheelchair users should be provided with a choice of sitting next to either a disabled or a
non-disabled companion.
c. Some seats should be located so that an assistance/guide dog can accompany its owner
and rest in front of, or under, the seat.
An individual wheelchair user space should measure at least 900mm in width and at least
1400mm in depth. However, to allow room for one companion per wheelchair user to sit
alongside, in a fixed or removable seat, this space should be increased to 1400mm in width.
It is further recommended that management considers carefully the location of wheelchair

user spaces in relation to other areas of viewing accommodation. For example, by locating
spaces for wheelchair users immediately behind a family section this will enable additional
companions to be closer to hand. Equally it allows any unused seats for companions to be
occupied by family members.
12.18 Amenity (or easy access) seats

Amenity, or easy access seats, are seats provided for spectators who may require more space
and/or who have limited mobility. Such seats should meet the following requirements.
a. They should be located:
i. in easily accessible locations and require the use of only one or two steps
ii. at the end of rows and close to exits
iii. ideally in stands no steeper than 20 degrees
iv. within 40m of accessible toilets
v. under cover.
b. They should also:
i. have backrests (that is, benches or bucket seats are unacceptable)
ii. if provided with armrests, these should ideally be removable.
c. Radial gangways leading to amenity seats should be fitted with suitable means of support,
such as handholds, grab rails or central handrails.
d. As spectators with limited mobility may be unable to bend their knees or may need more
room to access their seat, for example using a walking aid or crutches, amenity seats
should conform to the minimum recommended seat width of 500mm, and seat row depth
of 800mm (see Section 12.12).
e. As spectators with limited mobility may be unable to stand easily, or stand for long
periods, or easily change position, amenity seats should offer adequate sightlines and be
ACCOMMODATION
located in areas where spectators in front, or to the side, are less likely to stand up and
SPECTATOR
where other personnel passing in front will not block their views
f. Where required, space should be available to accommodate an assistance dog.
Contents
g. Where appropriate, spectators requiring amenity seats should be able to sit with
supporters of their own team in a range of viewing areas and ticket categories, including
hospitality, VIP and directors’ boxes
h. Where required, management should make provision for the safe storage of mobility
scooters for those spectators who wish to transfer to seats
12.19 Seats with independent barriers

As stated in Section 12.1, where legislation and competition rules allow, management may
wish to mitigate the risks arising from persistent standing by installing either independent
barriers in front of conventional tip-up seats, or by installing seats incorporating barriers
As illustrated in Figure 26, independent barriers can be placed in front of tip-up seats
providing that the following requirements are met:
a. The clearway measures a minimum of 305mm after the barrier has been fitted. Note that
if any part of the barrier is angled towards the seat behind, the clearway should be
measured between the narrowest points.
b. The seat should be designed in such a way that no arm rests or other elements protrude
into the clearway when the seat is in the upright position.
c. Barriers installed in front of seats in this configuration should be a minimum height of

800mm and a preferred height of 900mm, measured from the datum, and should be able
to resist safely a load of 1.5 kN/m.
d. The top rail of such barriers should be designed to meet the requirement set out in
Section 12.21.h. Also, it should not be possible to use the rail as a shelf for items
such as hot drinks.
Figure 26 Seats with independent barriers
As stated in Section 12.19,

where independent barriers
are placed in front of seats a max
minimum clearway of 305mm 900mm
should be retained between
the narrowest points, after the
barriers have been fitted. min
800mm
min
The barriers should
305
measure a minimum
mm
of 800mm in height,
but preferably 900mm,
and be able to resist
a load of 1.5kN/m
(as stated in Table 14 see also Figure 18
for Type 11 barriers) for guidance on barriers
placed both in front of the
front rows of seats and behind
ACCOMMODATION
the rear rows of seats

SPECTATOR
Contents
12.20 Seats incorporating barriers

In areas of seated accommodation where spectators persistently stand, an alternative
to independent barriers in front of seats (as illustrated in Figure 26) is to install seats
incorporating barriers.
It is stressed that such installations should only be considered where prevailing legislation
and competition rules allow. Moreover, unless stated otherwise, their design should meet
the recommendations outlined in this chapter and other chapters in respect of sightlines,
viewing restrictions, seating row dimensions, gangways, the number of seats between radial
gangways and in all matters relating to circulation.
For the purpose of the Guide, seats incorporating barriers are seats specifically designed with
a barrier forming part of its fixings (a type sometimes known as a ‘rail seat’) – that barrier
being for the use of the spectator in the row behind (see Figure 27).
The design will typically feature:
a. a tip-up seat which is unlocked, or
b. a tip-up seat which, when legislation and competition rules allow, can be locked by the
management (not by a spectator) into the upright position, so that spectators in that area
must remain standing throughout an event, or
c. a seat which, by virtue of its elevated height, allows spectators the choice of whether to sit
or stand during an event.
The design must also ensure that no arm rests or other elements protrude into the clearway
when the seat is in the upright position.
It is emphasised that the choice of these design solutions is not, in itself, a guarantee of safe
conditions for spectators. In particular, designers and management will need to demonstrate
that viewing standards and sightlines for spectators, as outlined in Sections 12.2 – 12.4 and
Figure 22, are not compromised, and that the viewing standards and sightlines of spectators
in adjoining areas are also not compromised.
Furthermore, any section of a ground in which any of these design solutions are adopted
will need to accommodate spectators with disabilities, including ambulant disabled people.
For further guidance, reference should be made to the publications Accessible Stadia and
Supplementary Guidance, both available from the SGSA.
Whether for retrofitting existing structures or for new construction, the designs should also
meet the standards set out in BS EN 13200–1: Spectator Facilities: General characteristics for
spectator viewing area, and BS EN 13200–4: Spectator Facilities: Seats. Product Characteristics.
It is therefore recommended that, in all matters relating to the installation of independent

barriers or seats incorporating barriers, management seeks professional advice from
competent persons of the appropriate skill and experience.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
Figure 27 Seats incorporating barriers
Barriers incorporated into seats,

as described in Section 12.21,
should be designed to a minimum
height of 800mm and a preferred
min
height of 900mm, measured from
800mm
the datum, and should resist
max
safely a minimum horizontal
900mm
imposed load of 2.0 kN/m length.
min
350
mm
max The seats should be tip-ups,
450 measuring at least 350mm in
mm
depth (see Figure 25) and no more
than 450mm in height above the
tread, and should be designed in
such a way that the no armrests
or other elements protrude into
the clearway.
Seats incorporating barriers that

are not used as seats during an
event may be designed so that,
where legislation and competition
rules allow, prior to the event
they can be locked in an upright
position (by the management, not
by spectators).
Note: seats incorporating barriers

that differ from these illustrated
examples – for example as
described in 12.20.c – may be
acceptable, subject to satisfying
all the requirements laid out in
Sections 12.20 – 12.23.
As emphasised in Section 12.21.e, barriers incorporated into seats should be designed to align
with each other, so that there are no gaps or changes of height in any one row of seats between
radial gangways.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
12.21 Seats incorporating barriers – design

Seats incorporating barriers should meet all the requirements outlined in Sections
12.11 – 12.16, but the following are of particular concern:
a. Restricted viewing
Designers should take care to ensure that any seats incorporating barriers do not restrict
views of the pitch or area of activity from other areas of viewing accommodation.
b. Seat widths
As stated in Section 12.12, the recommended minimum seat widths (measured between
seat centres) are 460mm for existing construction and 500mm for new construction.
c. Seat depths
Seats incorporating barriers should be a minimum depth of 350mm. (See Section 12.12.c
and Figure 27).
d. Seat heights
As stated in BS EN 13200–1 and Section 12.12.b, the recommended height of a seat,
measured from the seating tread to the upper surface of the seat, is 400mm, with the
maximum recommended height being 450mm. However, it is recognised that some
seats incorporating barriers may be taller, in which case their use must be subject to a
site specific risk assessment to ensure that they present no danger to spectators, do not
compromise viewing standards or sightlines, and do not restrict views of the pitch or area
of activity.
e. Barrier design
The barriers of seats that incorporate barriers should be designed to align with each other
so that there are no gaps or changes of height in any one row of barriers between radial
gangways.
f. Barrier height
In order to avoid restricting the views of seated spectators, the barriers of seats that
incorporate barriers should not be higher than 900mm, measured from the datum, and
should measure a minimum of 800mm. However, as illustrated in Figure 18, barriers that
back onto a lateral gangway should be a minimum height of 1.1m above the datum. Such
barriers may either be incorporated into the seat’s structure, or be independent.
g. Barrier loadings
The barriers of seats that incorporate barriers should be designed to resist safely a
minimum horizontal imposed load of 2 kN/m length (see Figure 14). Note also that, as
stated in Section 11.2, regardless of the height of the barriers, the horizontal imposed load
should be considered to act at a height of 1.1m above the datum.
As also stated in Section 11.2, in all matters relating to barriers at sports grounds, a
competent person should use his or her professional judgement to ensure that the
loadings are sufficient for the barrier’s intended purpose.
h. Barrier construction
Seats that incorporate barriers, and independent barriers placed in front of seats (as
illustrated in Figure 26), should be constructed to meet the requirements set out in
Sections 11.11–11.12, with the following exception. Because the potential for crushing
is much reduced in an area of seated accommodation, instead of the top rail being flat
facing with a vertical depth of 100mm, a tubular rail with a minimum diameter of 50mm is
ACCOMMODATION
acceptable.
SPECTATOR
Contents
i. Provision for disabled spectators

Disabled spectators are entitled to gain access to all areas in existing or new sports
grounds. Therefore the recommendations and guidance in respect of spaces for
wheelchair users and for ambulant disabled spectators are the same for areas where
seats incorporating barriers are installed as they are for all other areas of seated
accommodation (see Section 12.18).
j. Design of seating rows

In order to safely accommodate spectators in areas where barriers are placed in front of
seats, or where seats incorporating barriers are installed, additional care must be taken to
ensure that the surface of each tread is slip-resistant, uniform and designed so that rain or
water does not accumulate.
12.22 Seats incorporating barriers – capacity calculations

When calculating the capacity of an area fitted with seats incorporating barriers, it is
strongly recommended that, as for any other area of seated accommodation in which the
(P) and (S) factors are 1.0, the capacity should be calculated on the basis of one spectator
per seat.
At the same time it should be recognised that a standing spectator will tend to occupy more
lateral space than a seated spectator, on average occupying a width of 550–600mm; that is,
wider than the minimum seat width of 460mm or the recommended seat width of 500mm.
Therefore in order to maintain a capacity of one person per seat it will be necessary to provide
clearways and seats of sufficient depths and widths to allow spectators to occupy the area
without spilling into the radial gangways (see Section 8.7).
The only exception to this basic principle of one spectator per seat should be in those
locations where, subject to legislation and competition rules, the seats are designed in
such a way that the seats can be locked in an upright position throughout the event (see
Section 12.20.b and Figure 27). In those locations it may be possible to allow more than one
spectator per seat, provided that all the following conditions are met.
a. Tickets are issued for each individual place, with a specific row and place number, and that
each numbered place is clearly identifiable.
b. There are sufficient turnstiles to admit the additional spectators to that section of the
ground within the specified ingress time (see Section 7.5).
c. There is sufficient depth for lateral movement along each seating row to allow ingress and
egress to spectators throughout the event.
d. That the appropriate density for areas behind the barriers does not exceed 47 persons per
10 square metres, as specified in Section 2.9.
e. Under each seat there is an intermediate step on which a spectator can stand behind
the spectator in front – this step to be designed to the recommended tread and riser
dimensions set out in Section 13.10, and to meet the sightline requirements detailed in
Section 13.12.
f. There is sufficient concourse space, and a sufficient number of toilets and amenities to
accommodate the additional spectators.
g. There are sufficient exit points with adequate widths to allow for the additional spectators
ACCOMMODATION
to exit without compromising normal egress or emergency egress times.

SPECTATOR
Contents
h. Any proposal to admit more than one spectator per seat is subject to a rigorous risk
assessment and, where applicable, the agreement of the licensing authorities.
i. The additional management issues listed in Section 12.23 have been addressed and
implemented in full.
It should also be noted that if (P) or (S) factors lower than 1.0 are in force in any area
where seats incorporating barriers are installed, it is possible that, as in any other area of
conventional seating, a capacity of lower than one spectator per seat will be imposed.
12.23 Seats incorporating barriers – management

Areas fitted with seats incorporating barriers are subject to the same safety management
requirements as areas of conventional seating. However, additional consideration should also
be given to the following:
a. Tickets should be allocated to specific seats or, if allowing more than one spectator per
seat, as stated in Section 12.22a, one spectator per place.
b. The Stewarding Plan should take into account issues specific to the management of the
area, for example:
i. the need to check that ticket holders occupy their allocated seat or place
ii. the need to prevent overcrowding on any one seating row, whether caused by
migration from neighbouring sections of the ground, or by a lack of ticketing control or
any other cause
iii. the need to keep radial gangways clear
iv. the segregation of spectators (see Sections 12.25.i and 13.18)
v. varying patterns of crowd movement at different types of event.
c. The possibility that different (S) factors might need to be applied according to whether
spectators are sitting or standing.
d. The need to draw up specific event plans and event risk assessments for both seating
and standing modes.
12.24 Assessment of (P) factors for seated areas

As stated throughout the Guide (and in particular in Sections 2.4 and 12.1) the safe capacity
of all areas of seated accommodation will be based partly on an assessment of their physical
condition, namely the (P) factor.
It should be noted, however, that the (P) factor can only be applied after the number of usable
seats has been established – that is, the actual number of seats, less those affected by
seriously restricted views and those found to be inadequate or damaged (see Section 2.6).
The (P) factor is then used to calculate the holding capacity of the area, which in turn forms
part of the calculation of the final capacity of the area (see Figure 1).
The following are some of the main requirements that will need to be met if the (P) factor is
not to be reduced. It is stressed that this list is neither comprehensive nor applicable in all
ACCOMMODATION
situations. Nor is it presented in order of importance.

SPECTATOR
Contents
a. Physical condition
It is not sufficient simply to leave damaged seats in place, particularly if, for example,
a failed tip-up mechanism results in the clearway being reduced, or if the damaged
component could lead to injury. In all such instances the damaged sections should be
fixed, replaced or removed.
If not repaired or removed, that seat should be excluded from the capacity calculation. It is,
furthermore, the responsibility of the management to ensure that tickets for the affected
seats are not put on sale.
However the physical condition of the seats is not the only concern. An assessment of the
(P) factor for seated areas should also take into account the condition of all gangways,
seating row treads, barriers and handrails.
b. Structures
Management should ensure that any structures or parts of structures with which seated
spectators could come in contact are made safe and secure. Where necessary, protective
measures should be taken to avoid potential injury; for example, from low roof beams at
the back of seated areas or from sharp edges of seat fixings.
c. Sightlines
If the sightlines are inadequate, thus encouraging spectators to stand, an assessment
should be made of the risks to safety and, if necessary, the (P) factor reduced accordingly.
Wherever doubts arise as to the physical condition of a seated area, consideration should
be given to a reduction in the (P) factor.
12.25 Assessment of (S) factors for seated areas

In addition to (P) factors, the calculation of a safe capacity for all areas of seated
accommodation will be based partly on an assessment of their safety management,
or the (S) factor.
The (S) factor is used to calculate the holding capacity of the area, which in turn forms
part of the calculation of the final capacity of the area.
The following are some of the main requirements that need to be met if the (S) factor is
not to be reduced. It is stressed that this list is neither comprehensive nor applicable in
all situations. Nor is it presented in order of importance. (Further general guidance on (S)
factors is also provided in Section 2.5.)
a. Ticketing
As stated in earlier sections, management should ensure that:
i. the information on tickets corresponds exactly with the correct number and row
ii. tickets are issued only for usable seats
iii. tickets for seats with partially restricted views and either partial or no cover, are
marked accordingly and the purchaser warned in advance.
Reference should also be made to the recommendations in Section 7.10 concerning the
sale of unreserved tickets.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
b. Seat and row identification

It is the responsibility of management to ensure that:
i. each individual seat and seat row is clearly, neatly and accurately identified,
in a contrasting colour, for the legibility of both spectators and stewards
ii. where tip-up seats are installed, to avoid congestion and confusion, and for ease of
reading, seat identification marks should be located on the front of the back rest,
rather than on the underside of the seat
iii. seat and row identification marks are fixed so as to make their removal difficult
iv. where seat and/or seat row identification marks are missing or inadequate, there is a
reduction of the seating capacity in accordance with Section 7.10.d.
c. Good housekeeping
Clean and tidy seated areas are not only safer, but they also assist in promoting good
behaviour and a more favourable attitude among spectators towards the facilities
provided.
Each seat should therefore be cleaned before spectators are admitted. This is particularly
important in exposed situations where seats may collect moisture, dust or bird excrement.
Where seats are exposed to rain, staff should be provided with suitable means for wiping
each seat before it is occupied, so that spectators are not encouraged to stand in order to
avoid coming into contact with a wet surface.
A useful practice for rain affected seats is for management to provide facilities for
spectators to obtain disposable capes.
d. Stewarding
Stewards should be familiar with the layout of all areas of seated accommodation,
the location of specific rows and seats, and the location of exits, emergency exits and
amenities.
If reserved seats are sold, stewards should be trained and briefed to ensure that
spectators sit in their designated seats. If unreserved seats are sold, they should be able
to encourage spectators to sit in concentrated groups, so as to make it easier to direct
latecomers to unoccupied seats.
Stewards should also be aware of any policies or contingency plans concerning the
removal of disorderly spectators from seated areas.
e. Persistent standing in seated areas with no barriers

While allowing for the natural tendency of spectators to stand up at key moments during
an event, stewards should also be trained and briefed to deal effectively with spectators
who persistently stand up.
As stated in Sections 12.1 and Figure 23, persistent standing in seated areas raises
significant safety, crowd management and customer care issues which are usually
interrelated. Where these are likely to arise, management should conduct a risk
assessment and prepare contingency plans to address the issue (see Section 3.15).
Further guidance on persistent standing in seating areas is available on the SGSA website.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
Where a safety certificate is in force, local authorities should take persistent standing
in seated areas into account when agreeing the appropriate (S) factor for the viewing
accommodation and/or event concerned.
Management may also wish to consider, where legislation and competition rules allow,
the installation of barriers in front of seats (see Section 12.19 and Figure 26) or seats
incorporating barriers (see Sections 12.20 – 12.23 and Figure 27).
f. Keeping gangways and vomitories clear

It is essential that gangways, both lateral and radial, and vomitories, are kept clear,
especially in areas where the passage of spectators and other personnel obstructs the
views of seated spectators, including wheelchair users.
In addition to the efforts of stewards, spectators should be informed of this requirement by

signs and other means; for example, by announcements in event programmes and via the
public address system.
g. Migration – viewing distances

As stated in Section 12.2, one of the factors determining viewing standards is the viewing
distance. This is the distance between the spectator and the pitch or area of activity.
Viewing distances are not, in themselves, a safety matter. However, the distance
may influence spectators’ behaviour at key moments during an event. For example,
management may need to ensure that spectators in areas closest to the pitch or area of
activity are not encouraged to leave their seats and surge forward, particularly in response
to the actions of players or participants in the event.
This can be achieved by the use of high-profile stewarding, clear signs and public address
announcements.
As recommended in Section 12.5, apart from certain sports (such as hockey) where there
is a need to protect spectators near the front from the activity taking place, pitch perimeter
fences should not be erected in front of areas of seated accommodation.
Nor should any other measure taken by the management to contain spectators restrict
their views.
If observation indicates that forward migration is a persistent problem, a reduction in the

(S) factor may be necessary.
Where the viewing distances are long, management should ensure that spectators in the
rearmost rows are also not encouraged to migrate forwards at key moments of an event in
order to obtain a closer view.
Guidance on optimum viewing distances for various sports can be found in the
publication Stadia: A Design and Development Guide and in BS EN 13200–1: Spectator
Facilities: General characteristics for spectator viewing area.
h. Migration – partial cover

Management should ensure that the migration of spectators as a result of partial cover
does not lead to congestion or to a breakdown of safety management procedures.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
i. Segregation methods
If it is necessary to segregate blocks or tiers of seats into sections for different groups
of spectators, care should be taken to ensure that the dividing methods used do not restrict
views.
In all cases it is recommended that the methods used should be flexible, so that differing
numbers of spectators can be segregated according to the needs of the event. Such
methods may include the use of stewards and/or a line of tape or suitable, fire-resistant
material draped over the width of several seats from the front to the back of the block or
tier of seating.
Care should be taken to ensure that the positioning of any temporary means of segregation
does not result in more than 14 seats in a row with a gangway at one
end only (see Section 12.15).
For further guidance on the segregation of seated spectators, see Section 3.26.
Note that, as stated in Section 2.5, it is the responsibility of ground management to ensure that
(P) and (S) factors are assessed by competent persons with knowledge and understanding of
the ground concerned, its operation and the general principles of safety.
Where a safety certificate is in force, the assessments should be ratified by the local authority,
and written records of the assessments held with the safety certificate.
Written records of the (P) and (S) assessments should also form part of the management’s
Operations Manual (see Section 3.4).
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 13.0 Spectator accommodation – standing
13.0 Spectator
accommodation –
standing
13.1 The provision of standing accommodation

Standing accommodation is to be found at a variety of sports grounds and in different forms.
This chapter provides guidance on how to approach the distinct challenges of designing and
managing such accommodation, and how to improve levels of safety, amenity and service for
standing spectators.
Wherever standing accommodation is provided – be it in the form of terraces, viewing slopes,

level areas or spectator galleries – it should be designed and managed to be safe. The
comfort of spectators and their access to amenities should also be considered in as much
detail as would be the case for seated areas.
Account should also be taken of how patterns of crowd movement in areas of standing
accommodation vary at different types of event; for example, at horse racing compared
to football.
It is therefore recommended that in all matters relating to the design of standing

accommodation, management seeks professional advice from competent persons of the
appropriate skill and experience.
Newly constructed standing accommodation should conform to any applicable Building

Regulations, and should be designed in accordance with recommendations contained
elsewhere in the Guide, particularly those in Chapter 11, concerning the provision of barriers.
It is further recommended that when planning new areas of standing accommodation

consideration is given to the possibility of converting it to seating at a later date
(see Section 13.25 and Figure 29).
13.2 The importance of good design

Owing to the complex patterns of crowd circulation and movement to which standing
areas are subject, their design cannot be considered simply in terms of their individual
elements. Instead, they should be regarded as a finely balanced network of inter-related
elements, including entry systems, gangways, terrace steps, crush barriers, exit systems
and emergency exit routes. Design faults or deterioration in any one of those elements shifts
additional pressures onto the others, which, as experience shows, has often led to accidents,
occasionally with fatal consequences.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
To provide reasonable safety, standing areas and the circulation routes which serve them
should therefore be designed taking the following conditions into consideration:
a. Spectators should be able to gain access to their desired standing position from the point
of entry to the ground via a properly designed and constructed route.
b. Spectators should be able to leave their viewing position by a clearly defined and properly
designed and constructed route at any time during the event, to gain access to toilets and
other amenities. They should also, within reason, be able to return to their viewing position
at any time during the event.
c. Spectators should be able to leave the viewing area and exit from the sports ground at any
time during, or at the end of the event, via a properly constructed, defined and signposted
exit route.
13.3 Viewing standards and conditions

The provision of adequate viewing standards for standing spectators depends on criteria
similar to those described in Section 12.2.
Once spectators are in position, the design and management of the standing area should
ensure that they are able to view all elements of the event in such a way that they are not
subjected to:
a. excessive pressure from crowd surges
b. excessive pressure from a high density of spectators
c. forces that cause spectators to lose control of their own movement, so that they step
forward in an uncontrolled manner
d. physical stresses caused by poorly constructed terracing, such as sloping treads, uneven
surfaces or broken or damaged terracing
e. restricted viewing, necessitating frequent changes of position or excessive movement,

which might affect other spectators.
The assessment of (P) and (S) factors for all existing standing areas should start by
considering whether, by design and management, the conditions listed above and in
Section 13.2 are being met.
Further guidance on the assessment of (P) and (S) factors for standing areas is provided
in Chapter 2 and Sections 13.23 and 13.24.
13.4 Provision for wheelchair users

Disabled spectators should have the same opportunity to view an event from a standing
terrace, if that is their preference. This applies particularly at sports grounds where visiting
supporters are allocated areas of standing accommodation only, and where, as a result, those
visiting supporters who use wheelchairs are expected to spectate from areas reserved for
home supporters.
Each space for a wheelchair user on a standing terrace should be designed:
a. to accommodate a minimum of one helper standing alongside

ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
b. to accommodate a range of wheelchair designs, including powered wheelchairs

and mobility scooters
c. to allow for its use by able bodied spectators if not required by a wheelchair user
d. to provide sightlines for wheelchair users that meet the minimum requirements set out in
Section 12.4.
Further guidance is available in the publications Accessible Stadia and Supplementary

Guidance, both available from the SGSA.
13.5 Gangways in standing areas – general requirements

As in seated areas, radial and lateral gangways should provide the means for spectators to
proceed in a flowing, unimpeded manner into, around and out of standing areas. However,
because spectators often have more freedom of movement in standing areas, the provision
of designated gangways – that is, gangways that are appropriately designed and clearly
marked – is a vital part of achieving safe standing conditions.
Note also that when calculating the exit capacity of an area of standing accommodation,
only designated gangways should be taken into account. Notional gangways between
staggered crush barriers must not form part of the calculation.
In general, the design of gangways in standing areas should meet the following requirements.
a. As for all areas of viewing accommodation, gangways in standing areas should be a

minimum of 1.1m wide (or 1.2m for new construction).
b. Gangways should be configured so that all spectators in standing areas are within 12m
of a gangway or exit, as measured along a line of unobstructed travel from the viewing
position. It should be further noted that the maximum Zone 2 travel time for all areas
of viewing accommodation under normal conditions, whether for standing or seated
spectators, is eight minutes (see Section 10.11).
c. Gangways should be even and free from trip hazards, and their surfaces should be
slip resistant. At grounds with standing areas that are partially or wholly uncovered,
management should be further aware of the potential slip hazards caused by rainwater or
other sources of contamination. Further guidance on the management of slip hazards can
be found on the SGSA website.
d. Gangways in standing areas, lateral and radial, should be clearly delineated by the
application of a non-slip paint in a conspicuous colour, or a proprietary strip. This not only
makes them easier for spectators to identify in congested situations, but also aids those
who are responsible for keeping the gangways clear.
e. Any stepped side gangway (that is, with viewing accommodation on one side only) should
be provided either with a barrier which meets the requirements of Figure 14, or, if a barrier
is not required, a handrail which meets the requirements detailed in Section 8.8.
Further guidance on circulation can be found in Chapters 6–10, and on circulation in standing
areas specifically in the following sections.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
13.6 Lateral gangways in standing areas

Spectators should not be allowed to stand in lateral gangways because this disrupts the
circulation of spectators and may restrict the views of those standing on the steps behind,
causing them to stretch or strain in order to see the event.
In order to assist management in achieving this, the following design requirements should
be considered:
a. The surfaces should be sunk approximately 150mm below the viewing area.
b. Wherever possible, the front steps of standing areas behind mid-level lateral gangways
should start at a level higher than the section in front so that views from the rear areas are
not restricted.
c. Crush barriers should be provided behind the lateral gangway, but not immediately in front.
d. As stated in Section 11.16, and illustrated in Figure 19, in order to assist circulation,
wherever practicable a lateral gangway should be provided between the front row of crush
barriers and the pitch perimeter barrier.
13.7 Radial gangways in standing areas

The design and management of radial gangways is of particular importance in standing areas,
for two reasons; firstly, owing to the tendency of spectators to stand in them for viewing,
and secondly, because of the potential for crowd surges down the gangway. It is therefore
essential that radial gangways are monitored throughout an event.
This responsibility will be easier to discharge where continuous crush barriers are provided
between radial gangways (see Sections 11.9 and 13.8 and Figure 19).
Wherever reasonably practicable, the following requirements should apply to all radial
gangways in standing areas:
a. Whatever the crush barrier configuration, all areas of standing accommodation should have
clearly marked, designated radial gangways.
b. As stated in Section 13.5.b, all spectators should be within 12m of a gangway or exit. The
spacing of radial gangways should also take into account the possibility that the standing
area might be converted to accommodate seats in the future (see Section 13.25).
c. Where the gangway is stepped, the goings should be uniform and the step dimensions
compatible with those for the terrace which they serve (see Section 13.10).
d. To minimise the risk of crowd surges, it may be preferable to shorten excessively long radial
gangways by diverting the flow along lateral gangways.
e. The nosings of steps in radial gangways should be clearly identified for the benefit of
spectators (see Section 13.5.d).
f. Radial gangways should not contain winders (that is, tapered treads).
g. Any wall, barrier, fence or gate at the foot of radial gangways in standing areas should be
the same height as crush barriers (1.1m) and have the maximum horizontal imposed load
for crush barriers (that is, 5.0 kN/m length, as shown in Figure 14).
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
13.8 Crush barriers

Crush barriers are vital elements in the design and management of standing areas.
As stated in Section 11.9, crush barriers should be provided along the full width of a standing
area, with gaps only at the radial gangways. These barriers should be designed and spaced
according to the recommendations given in Chapter 11. An example of continuous crush
barrier configuration is illustrated in Figure 19.
If the provision of crush barriers conforms to this recommendation, many of the other
elements required for the design and management of standing areas should be simpler to
provide as part of an integrated and smoothly functioning network. In addition, there is a
greater likelihood that the capacity calculation can be based upon the maximum appropriate
density of 4.7 persons per square metre (see Chapter 2).
a. Standing areas with crush barriers

If all other elements of the standing accommodation are in good condition and the
safety management is effective, non-continuous crush barrier configurations may still
be regarded as acceptable. However, as stated in Section 2.8, the capacity will have to be
significantly reduced.
Wherever possible, and in particular where the management wishes to achieve the highest
permissible capacity levels for a standing area, the standing area should be redesigned to
incorporate continuous crush barriers between radial gangways.
New construction
To achieve the highest permissible capacity levels for an area of standing accommodation,
a continuous crush barrier configuration must be provided. However it is acknowledged
that at sports grounds where the spectators are ambulatory, for example horse racing, front
loading terraces may load and empty quicker if there are staggered barriers. Such a layout
will, however, result in a lower capacity and must be supported by a risk assessment and by
effective monitoring, to ensure that the safe capacities are not exceeded.
b. Standing areas without crush barriers

Standing areas without crush barriers cannot be considered as safe unless the capacity
is set at such a level that the risks are minimised. For guidance on how to calculate the
capacity in such situations, see Section 2.8.
Section 13.21 also shows how to calculate capacities in situations such as are common
at racecourses, where adjoining standing areas both with and without crush barriers may
form part of a larger enclosure.
13.9 Design of terrace steps

When designing terraces or assessing the (P) factor of terraces, it should be noted that:
a. the angle of the gradient, and therefore the dimensions of the terrace steps, have a direct
correlation with the spacing of crush barriers, as detailed in Figure 15.
b. Gradients in excess of 25 degrees are potentially hazardous and should be avoided.

Where they exist, consideration should be given to a reduction in the (P) factor
ACCOMMODATION
or the provision of additional crush barriers.

SPECTATOR
Contents
c. Excessive variations in the gradient of a terrace are potentially hazardous and should be
avoided.
d. The surface of terrace steps should be slip-resistant.
e. The surface of each tread should be uniform, and designed so that rain or water does not
accumulate, thereby leading to deterioration. This can be achieved by creating a slight fall
on each tread.
f. An excessive fall on terrace treads will reduce the comfort of spectators and possibly lead
them to step forward in an uncontrolled manner.
Further guidance on the assessment of (P) factors for standing areas is provided in Chapter 2
and Section 13.23.
13.10 Dimensions of terrace steps

The dimensions of terrace steps for existing terraces should be as follows:
a. Tread depth: minimum 280mm maximum 400mm
b. Riser height: minimum 75mm maximum 180mm
If any riser height is greater than 180mm, a crush barrier should be provided at the top
of the riser.
Note that where terrace steps meet only the minimum depth of 280mm it may be
necessary to calculate the capacity on the basis of fewer than 47 persons per 10 square
metres (see Section 2.9).
New construction
The dimensions of terrace steps for a newly constructed standing area should be:
a. Tread depth: minimum 350mm maximum 400mm
Designing to these dimensions will also enable the terrace, if required, to be converted
to seating more easily at a later date (see Section 13.25)
b. Riser height: minimum 75mm maximum 170mm
It should be noted that when designing new standing areas, the dimensions of riser
heights are not pre-determined. Rather, they depend on the calculation for sightlines.
13.11 Viewing standards

As stated in Section 13.3, the provision of adequate viewing standards is a key factor in
achieving safe standing conditions. Viewing standards are explained more fully in Sections
12.2 and 12.3, and in relation to standing accommodation, are illustrated in Figure 28.
As for seated spectators, viewing standards for standing spectators depend on three inter-
related factors:
a. the quality of sightlines (see Section 13.12, and Figures 22 and 28)
ACCOMMODATION
b. the existence of any restrictions (see Section 13.13)

SPECTATOR
c. the viewing distance (see Section 13.24.e).
Contents
13.12 Sightlines
The provision of adequate sightlines is an important part of achieving safe conditions for
standing spectators (see Figure 28). The better the sightlines, the more likely that standing
spectators will not have to stretch or strain in order to view the event. If the sightlines are
poor, resulting in excessive crowd movement and pressure, the (P) factor for the area should
be reduced. This in turn will lead to a reduction of the appropriate density and may result in a
reduction of the capacity (see Chapter 2, Section 13.23 and Figure 2).
As stated in Section 12.3, the quality of a sightline is often expressed as a ‘C’ value. ‘C’ values
for seated spectators are calculated for every row. However, as illustrated in Figure 28, for
standing spectators they may be calculated for every second tread. This is because standing
spectators have more freedom to re-adjust their position, and the variation of eye level is
greater than for seated spectators.
Advice on the calculation of sightlines for different sports is included in BS EN 13200-1:

Spectator facilities. General characteristics for spectator viewing area.
When calculating sightlines it should be noted that the maximum recommended gradient for
standing accommodation is 25 degrees, compared with 35 degrees for seating.
Figure 28 Sightlines for standing spectators

When designing
areas of standing
accommodation,
‘C’ values for standing
spectators need be
calculated only for
every second tread
(see Section 13.12)
To calculate sightlines
apply the formula set
out in Figure 22
‘C’ values for standing areas should, in most situations, range between 90–120 mm.
Where values outside this range are proposed, the designer will need to demonstrate
that the viewing standards of spectators have not been compromised.
Note also that by using the dimensions required to ensure good sightlines for standing
spectators, this should ensure that if those areas are converted to seating, the resulting
ACCOMMODATION
sightlines for seated spectators will also be of the required standard (see Figure 29).
SPECTATOR
Contents
13.13 Restricted viewing

All standing spectators should have a clear, unrestricted view of the whole of the pitch or area
of activity. Although there are exceptions to this requirement (for example at events such as
horse racing or motor racing), the causes of potential restrictions are likely to be the same as
those listed in Section 12.5.
Management is responsible for assessing the effects of restricted viewing from every part
of the standing area to which spectators have access, and for taking appropriate action (see
Section 13.14). This assessment should take into account any restrictions, such as fences or
advertising material, between the spectators and the pitch or area of activity.
In carrying out the assessment, the following criteria should be taken into consideration:
a. Partial restriction
This applies to areas from which partial restrictions force standing spectators to stretch or
strain in order to gain an improved view, but without significantly changing their position
or affecting other spectators.
b. Serious restriction
This applies to areas from which standing spectators have seriously restricted, or even
completely obstructed views of part of the pitch or area of activity, necessitating significant
changes of position or excessive movement, thereby risking the possibility of crowd surging.
13.14 Management strategies towards restricted viewing

Where views are partially restricted and the restrictions cannot be removed, an assessment
of the potential risk of crowd movement should be made, and if considered necessary, the
affected area should be discounted from the available viewing area (see Chapter 2).
Where views are seriously restricted and the restrictions cannot be removed, the affected
areas should be discounted from the available viewing area for the purpose of calculation,
and consideration given to them being prohibited for the purposes of viewing. These areas
may either be sealed off, or their boundaries marked clearly on the actual terrace surface and
stewarded accordingly.
If, despite carrying out the measures recommended above, it is observed that areas with
seriously restricted views continue to be occupied by standing spectators, and this results
in excessive crowd movement, there should be a reduction in the (S) factor, thus leading to
the possibility of a further reduction of the final capacity of the standing area (see Chapter 2,
Section 13.24 and Figure 2).
New construction
Newly constructed standing accommodation should be designed so that it has no areas with
viewing restrictions.
As is the case for seated areas, it is, furthermore, the responsibility of both the management
and designers to ensure that the viewing standards provided are adequate and appropriate for
the sports or events to be staged. Management may therefore wish to request that designers
provide written assurance to that effect.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
13.15 Provision of cover

Although it is recommended that at certain sports grounds all standing accommodation
should be covered, it is recognised that, as stated in Section 12.7, full protection from the
elements is hard to achieve in all situations and weather conditions.
Where the protection provided is only partial, or there is no cover at all, the following
strategies should be considered:
a. Partial cover
Experience shows that where partial cover is provided, in poor weather conditions standing
spectators will, whenever possible, migrate to covered areas. In certain circumstances
this can result in unacceptable local concentrations of spectators, particularly where
the covered area is unable to safely accommodate the total capacity. Additional safety
concerns arise when conditions in the covered area are inferior to those in the rest of the
standing area. In such situations management might consider the following options:
i. to extend the existing roof or provide a new roof covering the whole area, including
spaces for wheelchair users
ii. to install appropriate barriers, to prevent or control migration
iii. to adopt appropriate stewarding strategies to manage or control the migration,

preferably with the assistance of CCTV monitoring.
If none of the above options is acted upon, or if options ii. or iii. are implemented but the
problems of migration and overcrowding continue, consideration should be given to the
following:
iv. to limit the final capacity of the whole section by restricting the available viewing area
to the area under cover
v. to limit the final capacity of the whole section by a reduction of the (S) factor.
Management and, where a safety certificate is in force, the local authority, will need
to judge carefully all the circumstances before deciding which of the above options
to pursue.
b. No cover
At sports grounds where uncovered standing areas are provided, management should
ensure that spectators seeking shelter do not overcrowd other areas of the ground (such
as covered stands and concourses).
c. Admission
As a general principle, and where appropriate, spectators should be informed in advance
if the standing area to which they are seeking admission is not covered. Where a safety
certificate is in force, this course of action may also be required by the local authority.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
13.16 Management of large areas of standing accommodation

In order to control migration and avoid areas of overcrowding, large areas of standing
accommodation should be divided into sections.
If such areas are not divided, or if the divisions are not adequately arranged or managed
as recommended below, a reduction of the capacity or capacities should be enforced by
reductions of the (P) and/or (S) factors (see also Sections 13.23 and 13.24). This reduction
should also apply when assessing the effect of migration in standing areas with only partial
cover (see Section 13.15).
In situations where the free movement of spectators between divisions is desirable,

see Section 13.17.
It is strongly recommended that any division of standing accommodation complies with the
following requirements:
a. Each division must have its capacity assessed separately.
b. Entry to each division must be controlled either by its own designated turnstiles, or by
other entry arrangements which allow management to keep an accurate count of the
number of spectators admitted, including spectators in wheelchairs.
c. As with any other separate area of viewing accommodation, in order to alert staff and
stewards at the entry points when a division is nearing capacity, and then when it is full, it
should be possible to monitor the numbers of spectators in each division from the control
point, by counting systems, and by stewarding and/or CCTV.
d. Once the capacity of the division has been reached, further entry should be denied and
spectators re-directed to other available areas.
e. When dividing areas of standing accommodation, the siting of dividing barriers, walls or
fences should be such that each division functions safely as a separate unit, in terms of
its crush barrier configuration, gangways, and its means of ingress, egress and emergency
egress (including pitch perimeter gates or openings).
f. Each division should also be self-contained in terms of its toilet and refreshment facilities.
An accessible toilet should be located within 40m of the wheelchair user viewing areas.
g. Consideration should be given to providing additional access from one division to another
for use in an evacuation. However, such access will not normally be taken into account in
any exit capacity calculation.
h. If required to withstand crowd pressures, all barriers (including walls or fences) used
to divide one section from another, should be designed, constructed and maintained to
withstand those pressures safely (see Figure 14).
In situations where dividing structures might be vulnerable to crowd pressures, the use of
brick, blockwork or other solid structures is not recommended. Where they are used, they
should be subject to regular appraisal by competent persons.
i. Where the separation is achieved by means of radial divisions, gangways should be

provided on either side to discourage lateral movement and prevent spectators pressing
up against the dividing structures. These gangways should be suitably stewarded and kept
clear at all times.
ACCOMMODATION
j. Dividing structures should be designed or sited in such a way that they do not restrict the
SPECTATOR
views of spectators. If they do, the affected areas should be discounted from the available
viewing area (see Chapter 2).
Contents
13.17 Allowing free movement of spectators between divisions

At certain sports grounds – for example those staging horse or greyhound racing
– it is customary to allow spectators to move freely between various areas of spectator
accommodation.
However, if free movement of spectators is to be allowed between standing areas and any
other areas of spectator accommodation (including circulation areas), management should
ensure that appropriate measures are taken to control and monitor the situation at all times,
to ensure that the capacity of each area is not exceeded (for example, in adverse weather
conditions). As stated in Section 13.16.c this should be achieved by the control of entry points
between each section, by effective stewarding, and by monitoring from the control point (by
CCTV if appropriate).
Even if all these measures are implemented, where free movement of spectators is allowed,
a careful assessment should be made of the (P) and (S) factors for each individual division or
separate area of spectator accommodation.
13.18 Segregation of standing accommodation

Where areas of standing accommodation are divided in order to segregate, or separate
different groups of spectators, the requirements for the design and management of divided
areas, as listed in Section 13.16 should be met in full.
It is emphasised that whichever form of dividing (or segregation) structure is used, the
structure should not restrict the views of spectators.
Flexible means of segregation, such as are recommended for seated areas (see Section
12.25.i), can also be used in standing areas, provided that the stewarding arrangements,
barrier configurations and gangway layouts are suitable.
However, all segregation methods should be the subject of consultation between the ground
management, the local authority and the police.
13.19 Viewing slopes

A viewing slope is defined as a non-stepped sloping area providing standing accommodation
for spectators. Wherever possible their use should be avoided at grounds staging sports
where spectators maintain an essentially fixed position for the duration of the event (such as
football or rugby).
Where they are provided, in order to be considered suitable for standing spectators viewing
slopes should comply with the following requirements:
a. The surface should be properly drained and such that spectators do not lose their footing
or balance.
b. The gradient should ideally be no greater than approximately 10 degrees (compared with
the maximum recommended gradient for terraced areas of 25 degrees).
c. If the gradient is greater than 10 degrees, continuous crush barriers should be provided
between radial gangways.
d. The spacing of crush barriers should be the same as for those on terraced areas
ACCOMMODATION
(see Figure 15).

SPECTATOR
Contents
13.20 Level standing accommodation

As stated in Section 2.8.g, when calculating the capacity of a level standing area it is
recommended that, whatever the loading of any front barrier, the available viewing area
allowed should be no greater than 1.5m. This is the equivalent of approximately four persons
deep. Beyond this depth viewing is too seriously restricted to be considered as part of the
It is further recommended that level areas for standing do not normally form part of the
viewing accommodation for new construction.
However at certain sports grounds – for example those staging horse racing – it is
customary to allow spectators to view the event from level or near level standing areas,
commonly known as lawns.
It is further acknowledged that sightline requirements at racecourses can differ from

those at other sports grounds. The nearest point of focus is likely to be calculated a point
above ground level, thus reducing the amount of stretching and straining necessary to view
the event. In addition, media screens are often provided to compensate for any restrictions
to the view.
Similar considerations apply where the pitch or area of activity is temporarily converted
for use as level standing viewing accommodation during concerts. Further advice on the
management of level standing areas and appropriate occupancy densities for concerts
and other similar events can be found in the publication, Alternative Uses of Sports Grounds,
published by the SGSA.
13.21 Combined standing and circulation areas

At some sports grounds such as racecourses there are level expanses or slopes used for
spectating, for circulation, and by other personnel, for example, bookmakers and vendors.
Such areas often allow a free movement of spectators between other areas of spectator
accommodation.
Within such areas consideration should be made for the provision of hardstanding footpaths
for wheelchair users.
Although spectators may freely move from such a mixed use area into a stand or terrace,
the holding capacity of the stand or terrace should still be calculated separately. As stated
in Section 13.16, management should also ensure that the capacity of each area is not
exceeded.
As is the case for any section of a sports ground where free movement of spectators is
common, a reduction in the (P) factor will be necessary in order to facilitate safe movement.
This reduction may be severe where there is not only free movement but where viewing
areas are used also for circulation. In this respect it should be noted that research indicates
that spectators can only circulate freely when crowds are no denser than approximately 1.5
persons per square metre. Above this density, circulation becomes more restricted.
When assessing the (P) and (S) factors for combined standing and circulation areas, apart
from all the usual factors it will therefore be necessary to take into account the following
additional factors:
ACCOMMODATION
a. When calculating the available viewing area a reasonable assessment should be made
SPECTATOR
of those parts of the area in which viewing, rather than circulation, actually takes place.
Contents
b. Areas clearly used only for circulation should not form part of the available viewing area.
c. Areas occupied by bookmakers, vendors and other personnel should not form part of the
calculation of the available viewing area.
d. Those areas from which viewing does take place should be assessed as to the underfoot
conditions, the quality of sightlines, the existence of any restrictions and any other relevant
physical characteristics which may affect the safety of standing spectators.
e. The ability of stewards to prevent congestion or overcrowding.
The above list is not comprehensive nor intended to apply in all circumstances or in all
weather conditions.
Regular monitoring may also be required to ensure that a safe capacity limit is set,
appropriate to the viewing area’s particular characteristics.
13.22 Spectator galleries

Galleries in which spectators stand are usually accessed from hospitality areas, whose
capacities are already limited by their size and design. These capacity limits should be strictly
applied. However, spectator galleries should still be subject to an assessment of (P) and (S)
factors, and all barriers should comply with Figure 16.
13.23 Assessment of (P) factors for standing areas

As stated throughout the Guide, the calculation of capacities for all areas of standing
accommodation will be partly based on an assessment of their physical condition,
or the (P) factor.
The following are some of the main requirements that will need to be met if the (P) factor is
not to be reduced. It is stressed that this list is neither comprehensive nor applicable in all
situations. Nor is it presented in order of importance.
a. Physical condition of standing areas

Management should ensure that all surfaces, treads, risers and nosings, and all gangway
markings are maintained in good condition. Particular concerns are:
i. the crumbling of any surfaces due to age or poor maintenance
ii. unevenness of the terrace due to poor construction, settlement or repair work
iii. irregular terrace tread depths or riser heights
iv. poor drainage, leading to standing water and/or icing.
Furthermore, any alterations or repairs to surfaces should avoid creating additional trip
hazards (due to unevenness), and all gangway markings should be reinstated.
All barriers and crush barriers, and their fixings, should be maintained, inspected and
tested as recommended in Chapter 11.
b. Structures
Management should ensure that any structures or parts of structures with which standing
spectators could come in contact, are safe, secure and, where appropriate, non-climbable.
ACCOMMODATION
Where necessary, protective measures should be taken to avoid potential injury, for
SPECTATOR
example, from low roof beams.
Contents
Any structure located in a standing area, be it permanent or temporary – for example

floodlight pylons or television camera platforms – should be protected from potential
crowd pressures by the provision of appropriately designed barriers (see Figure 14).
c. Sightlines
If the sightlines are poor, thus encouraging spectators to stretch or strain, an assessment
should be made of the effects upon spectator movement. If this movement is likely to be
excessive, or leads to any of the pressures detailed in Section 13.3, a reduced (P) factor
will in turn reduce the numbers allowed to occupy the area.
d. Lighting
Where standing areas are to be used during non-daylight hours, they must be sufficiently
lit to allow for safe circulation and to identify hazards (see Section 17.10).
e. Slip hazards
Management should be aware of the potential slip hazards caused by rainwater and
other sources of contamination arising from the provision of partial cover, or from having
no cover. Further guidance on the management of slip hazards can be found on the
SGSA website.
Wherever doubts arise as to the physical condition of a standing area, consideration

should be given to a reduction in the (P) factor.
13.24 Assessment of (S) factors for standing areas

In addition to (P) factors, the calculation of capacities for standing areas will be partly based
on an assessment of their safety management, or the (S) factor (see Section 2.5). The
following are some of the main requirements that need to be met if the (S) factor is not to be
reduced. It is stressed that this list is not comprehensive or applicable in all situations. Nor is
it presented in order of importance.
a. Admission
Management should ensure that the number of people admitted to standing areas, or
divisions of standing areas, is counted and strictly controlled, according to the capacities
set for those areas.
b. Stewarding
Stewards should be familiar with the layout of all areas of standing accommodation and
the location of exits, emergency exits and amenities. They should be trained and briefed to
ensure that spectators do not stand in gangways, do not climb on barriers, fences or other
structures, and do not behave in such a way as to endanger other spectators.
It may be necessary to develop contingency plans for the removal of spectators from
standing areas by stewards or police.
c. Keeping gangways clear

As stated above, it is essential that gangways, both lateral and radial, are kept clear. In
addition to the efforts of stewards, spectators should be informed of this requirement by
signs and other means; for example, by means of announcements in the event programme
and via the public address system.
d. Distribution of spectators
Using suitably trained, qualified and briefed stewards and, where appropriate, CCTV,
management should ensure that spectators are evenly distributed. This is particularly
ACCOMMODATION
important in popular standing areas – for example, behind the goals at football grounds or
SPECTATOR
close to the finishing post at racecourses – where higher densities of spectators are likely
to occur.
Contents
Monitoring and controlling the distribution of spectators is also particularly important if

non-continuous crush barriers are provided, owing to the greater risk of crowd surges in
the gaps between crush barriers, or if there are no crush barriers at all.
e. Migration – viewing distances

As stated in Section 13.11, one of the factors determining viewing standards is the
viewing distance. This is the distance between the spectator and the pitch or area of
activity. Viewing distances are not, in themselves, a safety matter. However, the distance
may influence spectators’ behaviour at key moments during an event. Management
should therefore ensure that spectators in areas closest to the pitch or area of activity
are not encouraged to surge forward, particularly in response to the actions of players
or participants in the event.
Similarly, where standing spectators are a long distance from the playing area or area
of activity, management should ensure that they are not encouraged to migrate forwards
at key moments of an event in order to obtain a closer view.
f. Migration – partial cover

For guidance on safety management of standing areas offering only partial cover,
see Section 13.15.
g. Potential restrictions
Before and during an event, management should ensure that wherever possible potential
restrictions to viewing are managed. Such restrictions are listed in Section 12.5. In
addition, provision should be made for the accommodation of any stewards or members
of staff who may not be on duty during an event. Such personnel should not be allowed
to stand in vomitories or in areas where they might restrict views or obstruct gangways
or exits.
h. Provision for children and adults at risk

The presence of young children on standing areas raises particular concerns, because,
in common with smaller adults and elderly spectators, they may have neither the stature
nor strength to deal with crowd movements. They may also be vulnerable when pressed
up against standard 1.1m height crush barriers.
It has traditionally been common for children to migrate to the front of terraces in order
to obtain a better viewing position. Where non-continuous barriers are provided, this
can create additional safety concerns, because at the front, children are clearly more
vulnerable to maximum pressure.
Ground management should recognise these potential dangers and develop a strategy
to ensure the safety of children and any adults at risk in such situations.
This strategy should also take into account the safety issues raised at those events
where large numbers of children are likely to occupy standing areas. Most importantly,
it is generally accepted that allowing children to stand apart from their parents or carers
can lead to a significant hazard in an emergency situation, because parents or carers will
inevitably seek out their children and might, in the process, try to go against the crowd
flow. This possibility should be considered when drawing up an evacuation plan.
To deal with these potential hazards in standing areas, the most appropriate strategy is to
create a well-managed and appropriately designed children’s or family enclosure in which
children can remain free from crowd pressures and movement, and obtain a clear view
of the pitch or area of activity, but in close proximity to their parents or carers. Wherever
ACCOMMODATION
possible, these areas should have their own entry and exit points, to avoid children having
SPECTATOR
to pass through other areas of terracing.
Contents
i. Signs
The provision of clear, informative and suitably elevated signs, illuminated where necessary,
is particularly important in standing areas.
Where specific exit routes are provided for wheelchair users these should also be clearly
signposted.
j. Crowd behaviour
Where the crowd behaviour in a particular area of standing accommodation raises concerns
for safety on a regular basis, and the management proves unable to ease those concerns,
consideration should be given to a reduction in the (S) factor.
Note that, as stated in Section 2.,5, it is the responsibility of ground management to ensure that
(P) and (S) factors are assessed by competent persons with knowledge and understanding of
the ground concerned, its operation and the general principles of safety.
Where a safety certificate is in force, the assessments should be ratified by the local authority,
and written records of the assessments held with the safety certificate.
Written records of the (P) and (S) assessments should also form part of the management’s
Operations Manual (see Section 3.4).
13.25 Conversion of terraces to seating

Although primarily a matter of design, when planning the construction of new standing areas
or the refurbishment of existing ones, the ground management should take into account the
possibility of converting those areas to seated accommodation in the future.
If all the recommendations listed in this chapter for new constructions are followed, the
conversion should be relatively simple.
However, as is the case for all matters relating to the design of standing or seated
accommodation, it is recommended that management seeks professional advice from
competent persons with the appropriate skills and experience.
The following is a summary of the main considerations.
a. If the future conversion of the terrace to seating is achieved by the usual method of creating
one seating row from every two terrace treads (see Figure 29) designers should work out
the sightlines for:
i. standing spectators, and
ii. seated spectators, in advance of the terrace being constructed
By doing this the sightlines will be adequate and appropriate both for standing spectators
and, after conversion, for seated spectators.
b. By designing new terracing to the appropriate dimensions recommended in Section 13.10,

future conversion to seating will be simpler.
c. If radial gangways provided for standing areas are to be appropriately sited for future use in
a seated area, to avoid additional costs they should be spaced 13–14m apart, rather than
24m as would be the case for standing areas.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
d. If a roof is already in place, advanced calculations of sightlines will be necessary to ensure

that, once converted to seating, the roof will not require replacement or remodelling in
order to avoid restricted views.
e. Consideration should be given to the number of wheelchair spaces that will be required
should the terrace be converted to seating, and access routes from those spaces
to amenities.
Figure 29 Conversion of terracing to seated accommodation
By designing a new standing area

to the appropriate dimensions
(see Section 13.10), its future
conversion to seating will be
much simpler.
As illustrated, this can be achieved
by creating one seating row for
every two terrace treads.
If this approach is to be taken, as
stated in Section 13.25, in advance
of the terrace being constructed
the designer should calculate the
sightlines for standing spectators,
and for seated spectators.
By doing this the sightlines will be
adequate and appropriate both for
the standing spectators and, after
conversion, for seated spectators.
For details of how to calculate

sightlines using the dimensions N
(for riser height) and T (for seating
row depth) see Figure 22.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 14.0 Spectator accommodation – demountable structures
14.0 Spectator
accommodation –
demountable structures
14.1 Demountable structures – definition and types

A demountable structure is a structure, usually consisting of lightweight components,
that is designed specifically to be erected and dismantled on many occasions.
It is emphasised that demountable structures should never be subject to margins of safety

lower than those required for permanent structures.
It should also be noted that although the term ‘temporary’ is often applied to demountable
structures, the length of time that such a structure is in place at a sports ground is
immaterial. Whether it is in place for a single event, or for an extended period, or as part
of an overlay, the structure will still need to comply with requirements of the Guide.
Demountable structures erected at sports grounds typically fall into the following categories:
a. fixed stands or viewing platforms (for seating or standing)
b. telescopic or retractable stands or viewing platforms
c. hospitality units
d. canopies, shelters, tents and marquees
e. media facilities, including camera gantries
f. floodlights
g. public address or sound systems
h. screens
i. barriers
j. stages, platforms and performance areas.

ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
14.2 Responsibility for safety

As stated in Section 1.4, responsibility for the safety of all people present at the ground lies at
all times with the ground management. The management will normally be either the owner or
lessee of the ground, who may not necessarily be the promoter of the event.
This responsibility extends to any demountable structure erected at the sports ground.
Management cannot delegate the responsibility to the event promoter, to the designers of
the structure, or to the contractors responsible for assembling the structure.
Ground management should therefore put in place procedures for ensuring the safe design,
assembly and usage of any such structures. If the management does not itself possess
sufficient expertise in specific matters relating to demountable structures, it should require
the event promoter or contractor to produce certificates from competent persons of the
appropriate qualification and experience.
Even when not formally required to do so under the terms of a safety certificate, management
considering the use of demountable structures should consult the relevant authorities
regarding enforcement responsibility, and any special local regulations, certificates, licences
or permissions that might apply.
Consultation should also take place with the fire authority concerning access for fire
fighting purposes.
14.3 Demountable structures – regulations

Management should be aware of the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
2015 (CDM). These apply to demountable structures in all situations, including sports grounds.
The regulations set out the respective roles and responsibilities of Client, Principal Designer
and Principal Contractor. They also take into account the wider requirements under Health
and Safety legislation.
14.4 Demountable structures – need to meet standards

As stated in Section 14.1, demountable structures should never be subject to margins of
safety lower than those for permanent structures. Therefore all the principles of the Guide,
including those relating to capacity calculations, entry and exit systems, seated and standing
accommodation, barriers and fire safety, apply also to demountable structures.
It is recognised that at any given time a considerable amount of proprietary stock (that
is structural elements and accessories) will be in use. When used at sports grounds this
stock should at least meet the standards of the Guide, and should satisfy all relevant British
Standards.
However, wherever possible, the design and assembly of demountable structures should
meet the standards for new construction, as specified in the Guide.
The following documents should also be consulted:
Temporary demountable structures – Guidance on procurement, design and use, published

by the Institution of Structural Engineers.
British and European Standard BS EN 13200–5: Spectator Facilities: Telescopic stands.

ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
British and European Standard BS EN 13200–6: Spectator Facilities: Demountable

(temporary) stands.
Contents
14.5 Design checks and inspections

a. Independent design check
Prior to erection, the design of the demountable structure should be subject to an
independent check by a suitably qualified engineer of the appropriate skills and experience.
This individual may be appointed by the supplier of the demountable structure.
All demountable structures should be erected and used in strict accordance with their
approved design criteria. Any changes in layout, dimensions or loading will necessitate a
new, independent design check. This includes proprietary systems to which modifications
have been made, or proposed; for example if the proprietary structure is to be supported
by scaffolding.
b. Certifying authority check

Where an event requires certification, the enforcing authority should be satisfied in
advance that the design drawings, risk assessments and calculations for any demountable
structure have been undertaken by a competent person. The design documentation
and technical information should be provided to the certifying authority at least 14 days
before erection starts and the authority should then respond in writing at least seven
days before erection.
A checklist of technical information to be provided can be found in the online Annex D.
c. Management inspection
Ground management is responsible for ensuring that an inspection of the demountable
structure is carried out after its erection – and after any subsequent re-erections –
before spectators are admitted to the ground or permitted to occupy the structure. As
most demountable structures are erected and dismantled on a regular basis, it may be
necessary to inspect component parts for mechanical damage.
These inspections should be undertaken by a competent person, who may be an employee

of the supplier of the structure, or a person nominated by the supplier. Where such
inspections are carried out by a member of the erection team, evidence of that person’s
competence should be made available.
The results of inspections should be recorded on a form (known as the ‘completion

certificate’) provided by the contractor.
A demountable structure that remains in place for longer than 28 days may be subject to
Building Regulations and should be subject to both frequent and periodic inspections, as
recommended by the ISE.
i. Frequent inspections:
Frequent inspections – that is, carried out on a pre-event basis – are visual
inspections of the structure carried out by a member of the ground’s safety
management team. A record should be kept to confirm that an inspection has
taken place and any faults rectified before spectators are admitted.
ii. Periodic inspections:

Periodic inspections of the structure and all its structural components should be
carried out by a competent person, and records kept of each such inspection. These
periodic inspections should be carried out every three months, or as specified by the
manufacturer’s own periodic inspection procedures.
ACCOMMODATION
If a structural component shows significant visible damage or is suspected of containing

SPECTATOR
a damaged element, whether visible or not, it should be removed from service and marked
accordingly.
Contents
14.6 Design performance and suitability

Demountable structures should be designed to be robust and stable, and to support design
loadings for the required period with an adequate margin of safety.
Calculations to be undertaken should include static, dynamic, vertical and horizontal loadings.
The structure should also be designed to resist applied loads, including, for example, wind,
snow, rain and any associated rigging.
It is important that ground management understands the critical importance of correct

calculations and when they should be provided, and, moreover, who is qualified to provide
and review them.
A comprehensive list of design considerations for demountable structures can be found in the
aforementioned ISE publication Temporary Demountable Structures – Guidance on Procurement,
Design and Use.
For reference however, the following points should be noted.
a. Accidental damage
By virtue of their lightweight construction and use, demountable structures are often
exposed to a greater risk of accidental damage, such as by vehicles, unauthorised
removals and alterations. This potential vulnerability should be carefully considered when
assessing the construction, stability and management of such structures.
b. Dynamic loading
Dynamic loading is a complex technical issue on which it is always desirable to seek
specialist advice. For example, spectator movements on demountable stands or viewing
platforms can lead to excessive vibration, while rhythmic movements (such as the
stamping of feet) can lead to potentially destabilising resonance.
Guidance on these critical issues can be found in the ISE publication Dynamic Performance
Requirements for Permanent Grandstands Subject to Crowd Action.
c. Foundations
Before considering the placement of a demountable structure it will be necessary to
assess the ground conditions.
To assess the allowable bearing pressure of the site, reference should be made to
BS EN 1997: Geotechnical Design. Although the British Standard does not relate specifically
to demountable structures, it does provide recommendations for ‘the normal range of
building and civil engineering structures’.
Some large demountable structures, such as multi-storey hospitality boxes, generate

high stanchion loads. In such cases a grillage of suitable spreaders (for example railway
sleepers) may be necessary to spread the load.
In locations where the same demountable structures are likely to be erected on a regular
basis, it may be worthwhile to provide permanent concrete pads, fitted with holding-down
bolts housed within covered manholes.
If a site slopes or is uneven, either the ground should be levelled or the structure should be
capable of being modified to deal with the uneven ground conditions. Where the ground is
not level or near level and the foundation bases for the demountable structure cannot be
set at an angle, a level base should be provided.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
d. Anchors and kentledges

Where ground anchors or kentledges are used, proof testing of anchors should be carried
out, together with an assessment of the kentledges’ frictional resistance, taking into
account the ground conditions.
e. Wind
Wind presents a major risk to the structural stability of certain demountable structures.
In such instances, a Wind Management Plan will form an essential component of the
structure’s safety documentation. Moreover, no banners, sheeting or advertising hoardings
should be affixed to the structure unless these additions have been specifically allowed for
in the calculations drawn up as part of the structure’s design.
f. Protection
Demountable structures should be designed to ensure that no-one is able to climb up
or underneath any part of the structure, for example by the provision of close mesh
netting or boarding.
The need for lightning protection should also be noted (see Section 17.9).
g. Flooring
Where timber is used as flooring, the material should meet the strength requirements
set out in BS EN 338: Structural timber. Strength classes. Where applicable, the glue used
for plywood should meet the requirements set out in BS EN 301: Adhesives, phenolic
and aminoplastic, for load-bearing timber structures.
Where other materials are used for flooring, the contractor should provide evidence of
their suitability in terms of resistance and durability.
14.7 Hospitality units

At some sports grounds and events it is common for demountable hospitality units to be
erected. Often these units consist of multi-storey framed structures using PVC panelling.
In such instances it is vital that, in addition to all the routine calculations made for the
structure’s loadings, stability and so on, risk assessments are carried out in respect of
evacuation (see Chapter 15).
Management should also draw up specific operational plans to take into account the safe
management of such structures.
14.8 Tents and marquees

The safe management of tents, marquees and all fabric structures at sports grounds, whether
supported by poles, beams, ropes, cables or air pressure, also requires the drawing up of
specific risk assessments and operational plans. This is particularly the case when such
structures are to accommodate high risk activities such as the use of naked flames.
Management should therefore be aware of BS EN 13782: Temporary structures. Tents. Safety;

and of the document Codes of Practice for Marquee Hirers issued by the Made Up Textiles
Association.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
14.9 Demountable structures – management

The special characteristics of demountable structures require that management adopt
specific strategies to ensure the safety of spectators. Such measures include the following:
a. Stewards should be briefed to pay close attention to the circulation and behaviour of all
people in and around any demountable structure, so as to ensure that no-one is allowed
to climb up or underneath any part of the structure, or behave in such a way that any
elements or components might be damaged or removed.
Such vigilance is additionally important in and around demountable structures in which

cooking with a naked flame is taking place, and in situations where individuals might
smoke in proximity to fabric structures.
b. The occurrence of high winds immediately prior to or during an event may require
management to consider prohibiting spectators from occupying the demountable
structure, or, if necessary, cancelling the event.
c. As noted in Section 14.6.b, demountable stands or viewing platforms can be susceptible to

vibration or resonance. At events where there is the possibility of synchronised spectator
movements, stewards, assisted by public address announcements, should ensure that
spectators are suitably informed and monitored.
If potentially hazardous movements do occur (such as the stamping of feet), the safety
management team should ensure that the movement is halted and, if necessary, that the
stimulus for that movement (for example the relaying of rhythmic music) is curtailed.
14.10 Further guidance

For further guidance on the use of demountable structures for media provision,
see Chapter 19.
For a suggested checklist of technical information required for the approval of demountable
structures by the appropriate authority, see the online Annex D.
ACCOMMODATION
SPECTATOR
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 15.0 Fire safety
15.0 Fire safety
15.1 Achieving safety from fire

The primary objective of fire safety is to prevent the outbreak of fire, by taking steps to reduce
the risk of fire and by providing and maintaining the appropriate means of both active and
passive fire protection (see Glossary).
The other objectives of fire safety are, in the event of a fire:
a. by detecting it at an early stage, to mitigate its direct and consequential damage, and
b. by means of structural containment and by firefighting, to reduce its spread, and
c. to alert the sports ground’s safety management team and event officials so that
investigation procedures and potential evacuation can be implemented immediately, and
d. to provide escape routes for all people present at the ground to a place of reasonable
safety, or a place of safety, as part of a planned evacuation procedure that does not require
the assistance of the fire and rescue service.
In all matters relating to fire safety, it is stressed that management should seek the advice of
competent persons.
Some sports grounds include complex, multi-storey buildings with underground service areas
(such as car parks), servicing the needs of large numbers of people and a wide range of uses.
In such instances specialist input from a fire engineer is recommended.
Fire engineering solutions can also add value where changes or alterations are planned in
existing sports grounds.
It should also be noted that, compared with previous editions of the Guide, the
recommendations in this chapter encourage management to adopt a flexible approach to fire
safety, based on the specific characteristics of the sports ground, its buildings and structures,
its layout and its capacity, and on the nature of the sports and other events that take place
there, taking into consideration the legal obligation of the management to the health and
FIRE SAFETY
safety of all people present at the ground.
15.2 Scope
As explained in Chapter 2, one of the key factors in calculating the safe capacity of a sports
ground, or section of a ground, is the determination of an emergency egress time. In order
to determine the length of an emergency egress time it is necessary for the management to
undertake a fire risk assessment, and then to categorise the level of fire risk.
Contents
The various steps that form this process are set out as follows.
For new construction, as explained in Section 15.5, it is necessary to formulate a fire

strategy. This will then form the basis of the Fire Safety Plan, as detailed in Section 15.6.
For existing construction the starting point is the Fire Safety Plan.
Part of this plan is to set out the procedures and schedules for carrying out fire risk
assessments. These are explained further in Section 15.7 and Figure 30.
Sections 15.8–15.12 explain how to establish various levels of fire risk.
Sections 15.13–15.15 consider how fire risk can be minimised, by the actions of
management and staff.
Sections 15.16–15.19 detail the various forms of active and passive fire safety protection
likely to be appropriate for use in a sports ground.
Sections 15.20–15.22 set out the means by which the management and staff, and then
the spectators at the ground, may be alerted to the outbreak of a fire.
Sections 15.23–15.25 focus on fire-fighting systems and procedures.
Sections 15.26–15.27 concern places of safety and reasonable safety in an evacuation.
It should be noted that while the Guide is concerned primarily with the safety of all people at
the ground on event days, the advice in this chapter extends also to fire safety on non-event
days; for example when hospitality lounges host business meetings or social gatherings, or
when concourses are used as temporary exhibition spaces or as part of stadium tours.
It is further emphasised that the fire safety recommendations contained in the Guide concern
the protection of life. For the safety or preservation of buildings, structures and installations,
as required, for example, by clients and insurers, advice beyond the Guide should be sought.
15.3 Fire safety legislation

Fire safety at sports grounds is subject to a range of statutory controls.
In England and Wales, at grounds certified under the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975,
terms and conditions relating to fire safety form an integral part of the certification process.
In addition, at non-certified grounds, covered stands with a capacity of 500 or more are
subject to the Fire Safety and Safety of Places of Sport Act 1987.
Sports grounds in England and Wales also come under the jurisdiction of The Regulatory
Reform (Fire Safety) Order 2005 (Fire RRO). According to the terms of this Order the
‘enforcing authority’ is the local authority responsible for issuing the safety certificate under
Section 1 of the 1975 Act , or under the 1987 Act.
At all other sports grounds the enforcing authority will be the fire authority.
FIRE SAFETY
The 2005 RRO requires a responsible person (see Section 15.4) to plan, organise, control,
monitor and review all necessary fire preventative and protective measures, including fire risk
assessments, and to record these arrangements in writing. For the purpose of the Guide, this
process is called the Fire Safety Plan (see Section 15.6)
In Scotland, The Fire (Scotland) Act 2005, as amended, and the Fire Safety (Scotland)
Regulations 2006, and in Northern Ireland, the Fire Safety Regulations (Northern Ireland)
2010, set out broadly the same requirements, but with certain differences in respect of their
application and the terminology used.
Contents
Newly constructed grounds in England and Wales, whether certified or not, must meet the fire
safety requirements set out in the current, relevant Building Regulations.
Among these requirements, Approved Document B recommends that for sports grounds
designated under the 1975 Act, the advice contained within this Guide should also be
followed.
15.4 Management responsibility for fire safety

The legislation outlined in Section 15.3 requires the ground management to identify a person
whose responsibility it is to oversee fire safety management. This person should be part of
the ground’s safety management team. In Scotland he or she will be the duty holder.
It is the responsibility of this individual to oversee any existing fire strategy (Section 15.5),
to draw up and oversee the implementation of the Fire Safety Plan (see Section 15.6) and
to be familiar with any bespoke fire engineering solutions in place.
This individual should also be responsible for the training and deployment of stewards
with special responsibility for fire safety. Guidance on the appropriate number of fire
safety stewards to be deployed can be found in BS EN 13200–8: Spectator facilities.
Safety Management.
15.5 Fire strategy

Designers of new sports grounds and stands, or of major alterations at existing grounds,
should commission a fire strategy, to focus on the following issues:
a. emergency exit routes
b. fire detection and warning systems
c. the fire rating of walls, doors, floors and structures
d. the potential for external fire spread
e. fire service access
f. details of any fire engineering used, such as smoke modelling, structural fire engineering
or evacuation modelling.
The fire strategy should include a description of the assumptions and philosophies that led
to the fire safety design, including those assumptions regarding the future management and
maintenance of the building. Upon completion of the construction work, the fire strategy will
come under the jurisdiction of the person responsible for fire safety at the sports ground.
Where a fire strategy is in place, it should form the basis of the Fire Safety Plan
(see Section 15.6).
Should construction take place while other parts of the ground or the building remain in use,
FIRE SAFETY
the fire strategy should outline how standards of fire safety are to be maintained throughout
all stages of the construction.
The fire strategy should be subject to an annual audit, as is also the case for the Fire Safety
Plan and all fire risk assessments (see Section 15.7).
Contents
15.6 Fire Safety Plan

The aim of a Fire Safety Plan is to ensure that an appropriate level of fire safety is in place
for all people present at the ground on both event days and non-event days.
The Fire Safety Plan should cover the following.
a. Procedures for the evacuation of all people present at the ground, without the assistance
of the fire and rescue service.
b. Details of the means and resources by which the management will provide both
active and passive fire protection measures appropriate to the layout of the sports ground,
the capacity of the ground, and the sports and other activities that take place there.
c. The identify of the person whose responsibility it is to oversee fire safety management
(see Section 15.4).
d. The identify of the competent person or persons to be present at all times that the ground
is occupied, with responsibility for:
i. ensuring that all fire prevention measures are maintained
ii. initiating the evacuation procedure
iii. contacting the emergency services
iv. providing information and assistance to the fire service, and
v. liaising with the emergency services on their arrival.
e. Details of the lines of responsibility for fire safety management at the ground on both
event days and non-event days, including the allocation of responsibilities for first aid
firefighting.
f. Details of the procedures and schedules for carrying out fire risk assessments (see
Section 15.7).
g. Details of emergency exit routes for all occupied areas of the sports ground (see Sections
15.26–15.28). These routes, together with any fire engineering solutions in place, should
be set out in detailed drawings to be contained within the Fire Safety Plan.
h. Details of the location and availability of all places of reasonable safety, and places of
safety, including refuges (see Sections 15.26 and 10.15.b, and Glossary).
i. Details of the location of, and maintenance and testing of fire detection and alarm systems
(see Sections 15.20–15.22).
j. Details of the location of, and maintenance and testing of fire fighting measures, such as
extinguishers and hydrants (see Section 15.24).
k. Details of staff training in fire safety and the use of firefighting equipment (see Section
FIRE SAFETY
15.15 and 15.24).
l. Identification of those people most likely to be at risk in the event of an evacuation. These
might include:
i. children, disabled spectators and adults at risk who might need help to escape, and
may have difficulties in using escape routes, particularly stairs (see Section 10.15)
ii. staff or stewards who may have to assist others.
Contents
m. Details of all relevant contingency plans (see Section 3.15–3.16)
n. Details of all relevant internal and external communications (see Chapter 16).
o. Where appropriate, fire safety procedures for specific buildings or parts of the ground.
p. Details of all periodic checks of fire safety measures and the monitoring of fire safety
standards against any fire risk assessment.
q. Details of schedule of works to maintain, test and improve the fire safety measures.
r. Details of any alterations to the fire strategy, taking into account any subsequent fire risk
assessments.
In presenting and laying out the Fire Safety Plan management should consider avoiding
the use of colour combinations or backgrounds that may lead to any of its contents being
misunderstood by people who are colour blind (see online Annex C).
15.7 Conducting a fire risk assessment

As required by legislation (see Section 15.3), ground management must ensure that the
responsible person (see Section 15.4) conducts or commissions a fire risk assessment. The
purpose of such an assessment is to determine the levels of fire risk at the ground on both
event days and on non-event days.
The assessment should cover all structures and installations at the ground, including all areas
of spectator accommodation, taking into account their form of construction and usage, their
location and facilities, and their management.
The assessment should consider all personnel working within the sports ground, and should
be conducted at least once a year.
A fire risk assessment should comprise the five steps outlined in Figure 30.
Once Steps 1-4 have been carried out and, potentially, the level of fire risk has been reduced,
it is then possible to determine the emergency egress time for each area of spectator
accommodation (see Sections 15.8–15.11).
These times will then form part of the capacity calculation, as explained in Chapter 2.
Further guidance on conducting fire risk assessments can be found in the British Standards
Institute publication PAS79: Fire Risk Assessment. Guidance and a Recommended Methodology.
For England and Wales, guidance is also available in the DCLG publication Fire Safety Risk
Assessment – Large Places of Assembly.
In Scotland, reference should be made to the Scottish Government publication Practical Fire
Safety Guidance for Places of Entertainment and Assembly.
FIRE SAFETY
New construction
For new construction a fire risk assessment, as described above, will not be possible until
after the structure or area in question has been occupied for an event. For new construction
it is therefore necessary to develop a fire strategy throughout the design and construction
process in order to achieve the lowest possible level of fire risk from the outset.
Contents
Figure 30 Fire Risk Assessment – the five steps
STEP ONE: IDENTIFY AND RECORD FIRE HAZARDS
zz by identifying and recording the location and nature of all combustible,

flammable or explosive materials and any potential sources of ignition
zz by identifying and recording any other buildings or installations within the
vicinity of the sports ground which might themselves carry a risk of fire
STEP TWO: IDENTIFY PEOPLE AT RISK
zz taking into consideration the nature of the event and the spectator profile
STEP THREE: TAKE APPROPRIATE MEASURES
zz by drawing up contingency plans

zz b
y identifying and implementing preventative and protective measures
to minimise the fire risk, and/or reduce the rate of early fire growth and
fire spread, including evaluation of the risk of a fire occurring, the risk
to people from fire, and by reducing or removing fire hazards
zz by providing training
zz b
y evaluating and improving such protective measures as detection and
warning systems / fire fighting equipment / emergency exit routes emergency
lighting / signage / maintenance procedures
STEP FOUR: RECORD AND PLAN
zz by recording significant findings and action taken in Steps 1–3

zz by categorising the risk in each structure or area of the ground and hence
determining appropriate emergency egress times
zz by preparing a Fire Safety Plan
zz by informing, instructing and co-ordinating with the relevant parties
FIRE SAFETY
STEP FIVE: REVIEW AND REVISE
zz each fire risk assessment, after any changes to management procedures

or structural alterations, and at least within one year
Contents
15.8 Levels of risk

At existing grounds the fire risk assessment will enable the responsible person to categorise
the appropriate level of fire risk for each structure or area of spectator accommodation; that
is, whether they should be considered ‘low risk’, ‘medium risk’ or ‘high risk’. As stated earlier,
the level of fire risk will determine the emergency egress time, which in turn will form part of
the calculation of the final capacity of the ground or of sections of the ground (see Chapter 2
and Section 10.12). Details of each level of fire risk follow in Sections 15.9–15.12.
It is stressed that the characteristics listed are for general guidance only. Any fire risk
assessment must take into account all relevant local circumstances. Note also that the
conditions within a particular ground may call for interpolation between the emergency
egress times referred to in the following sections.
In all cases, advice should be sought from the authority responsible for enforcing fire safety.
15.9 Categorisation of low fire risk

A low risk structure or area within a sports ground is likely to be one where:
a. the risk of a fire occurring is low
b. in the unlikely event of a fire, the potential for the fire, heat or smoke generated by it,
to spread, is low
c. there is a low risk to life.
Such structures might include stands constructed of materials of limited combustibility and
with catering outlets that are fully fire protected (as set out in Section 9.7), and uncovered
areas of spectator accommodation.
Where all structures or areas forming part of the emergency exit system are low risk, for the
purposes of calculation, as detailed in Section 10.11, the time it should take for spectators
to proceed from their seat or place within the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) and reach
the start of the exit route in Zone 3, which will normally be a place of reasonable safety,
should be no longer than eight minutes. The emergency egress time – that is, from the
start of Zone 3 to a place of safety – will then be determined by the fire resistance of the
building and/or the fire engineering solutions in place throughout the exit (see Example B
in Figure 13 and Section 15.26).
15.10 Categorisation of medium fire risk

A medium risk structure or area within a sports ground is likely to be one where:
a. the risk of a fire spreading is low
b. should a fire occur, it is likely to be confined to a room or its place of origin

FIRE SAFETY
c. there is in place an effective fire suppression or containment system.
Where any structures or areas forming part of the emergency exit system are medium risk,
for the purpose of calculation, as detailed in Section 10.12, under emergency conditions
the time it should take for spectators to proceed from their seat or place within the viewing
accommodation (Zone 2) and reach a place of reasonable safety, or a place of safety – that
is, the emergency egress time – should be no more than six minutes (see Example C in
Figure 13 and Section 15.26).
Contents
15.11 Categorisation of high fire risk

A high fire risk structure or area within a sports ground is likely to be one where one or more
of the following characteristics apply:
a. Combustible structural elements are present.
b. There are structural elements that could promote the spread of fire, heat and smoke.
c. There are voids under seating decks, floors or terraces where waste or litter may
accumulate.
d. There are several storeys, with exiting systems from the upper levels routed through
hospitality areas.
e. The concourse areas have inadequate fire separation between retail and/or catering
facilities and the emergency exit routes.
f. Highly flammable or explosive materials are present.
g. People in the area are at risk from an incident occurring in an adjacent area.
Where any structures or areas forming part of the emergency exit system are high risk, for
the purpose of calculation, as detailed in Section 10.12, under emergency conditions the
time it should take for spectators to proceed from their seat or place within the viewing
accommodation (Zone 2) and reach a place of reasonable safety, or a place of safety –
that is, the emergency egress time – should be no more than two and a half minutes (see
Example C in Figure 13 and Section 15.26).
15.12 Categorisation of mixed risk areas

It should be noted that there may be parts of the ground where emergency exit routes pass
through areas that are categorised as having different levels of fire risk; for example where
spectators in a low risk seating area must evacuate through a medium or high risk hospitality
area.
In such instances the shorter emergency egress time for the medium or high risk area
should apply to the entire route to a place of safety, unless there is place of reasonable
safety (such as a protected stairway) along that route, or if measures to mitigate the
fire risk are introduced to those areas of medium or high risk, such as sprinklers and/or
compartmentation.
15.13 Managing fire risk

The following measures and practices should be considered when managing fire risk:
a. Sources of ignition
As stated in Section 15.7, the fire risk assessment should identify all potential sources of
FIRE SAFETY
ignition at the ground. Where possible, those sources should be removed or replaced with
safer forms. Where this cannot be achieved, the ignition source should be kept well away
from combustible materials, be adequately guarded or made the subject of management
controls. Ignition sources may include:
i. cooking appliances and food warmers
ii. central heating boilers
iii. room heaters
Contents
iv. light fittings
v. certain electrical apparatus, especially if not maintained
vi. smoking materials
vii. pyrotechnic devices
b. Smoking
Where legislation prohibits smoking in certain areas, management should ensure that if
smoking is permitted in other areas – covered or uncovered – it does not increase the risk
of fire; for example if waste bins are in the area. Management should therefore adopt and
enforce a clear policy on smoking for all people present at the ground. The policy should
be supported by suitable signs, information in the event programme, and by use of the
public address announcements to inform spectators.
In areas which are constructed of, or contain, combustible or flammable items or

materials, smoking should be discouraged or prohibited.
Stewards and safety personnel should not smoke during an event.
Management should also consider whether there is a need to restrict the use of electronic
smoking devices.
c. Pyrotechnics, flares and smoke canisters

Management should adopt and enforce a clear policy prohibiting spectators from bringing
into the sports ground any form of pyrotechnic device, flare or smoke canister.
Furthermore, the management should adopt a clear strategy for dealing with incidents
arising from the use of such devices within the ground.
Any officially sanctioned displays taking place in the ground which include the use of
pyrotechnics – including those taking place before or after events – must be included in
the fire risk assessment.
d. Voids
Voids under seating decks or terraces, or under flooring, are often used for the
unauthorised storage of combustible materials. Waste or litter may also accumulate in
them. To counter this, all voids should either be sealed off or be kept entirely open to allow
easy access for inspection and for the removal of the combustible materials.
It may be necessary to consider ventilation of some large voids where the possibility of
flammable or explosive atmospheres may arise.
Voids which are unusable – for example, where the viewing deck is built over a slope –
should, if practicable, be filled with a non-combustible material.
All accessible voids should be subject to a pre-event inspection, and this inspection should
be recorded in the management’s event day records.
Further guidance on voids is available in Section 15.17.

FIRE SAFETY
e. Waste and litter

The accumulation of waste and litter (such as discarded event programmes, food and drink
packaging, and paper towels) should be avoided. All parts of the ground should therefore be
inspected before, during and after each event. Any accumulation of waste or litter should
be removed without delay or kept in a fire-resistant container or room, pending removal.
Sufficient waste and litter bins should be provided and arrangements made for their
frequent emptying during an event.
Contents
f. Furnishings, upholstered seating and cushions

The use of furnishings, upholstered seating or cushions that are easily ignited or
have rapid spread of flame characteristics, should be avoided. If present, they
should conform to the relevant British Standards and should be taken into account
when determining the suitability of escape routes.
In particular, seats in general spectator areas should comply with BS 5852: 1990
Section 5: Assessment of the ignitability of upholstered seating by smouldering
and flaming ignition sources.
When stored in bulk, certain types of cushioning (such as those distributed for hire
during events), and foam mats (such as those used at athletics events), pose a risk of
a rapid fire growth and should therefore be stored in a fire-resistant container or room.
g. Flags, banners and netting

All flags and banners, including those brought in by spectators, and all netting used for
segregation purposes, should be made from, or treated with, fire-retardant material, and
a fire certificate produced as evidence.
h. High risk fire areas

High fire risk areas should be separated from any other parts of spectator accommodation
by a construction having a fire resistance which meets Building Regulations or any fire
engineering solutions in place. In no case should this fire resistance be less than 30
minutes. Such areas may include:
i. kitchens
ii. catering outlets
iii. hospitality areas
iv. boiler rooms, oil fuel stores
v. media studios and equipment rooms
vi. any areas or buildings constructed with combustible materials
vii. any areas or buildings housing combustible materials, such as fertilisers, gas bottles
and ground maintenance equipment powered by petrol
viii. ‘soft play’ areas
ix. storage areas – see (i) below
x. enclosed or underground car parks –see (j) below.
i. Storage
Rooms or buildings used for the storage of waste, litter, upholstered seating or hazardous
materials should:
i. be accessible directly from the open air

FIRE SAFETY
ii. ideally, be at such a distance from public areas that fire spread is unlikely
iii. if forming part of a stand or structure, be separated from any other part of the building
by a construction having a fire resistance which meets Building Regulations or any
fire engineering solutions in place. In no case should this fire resistance be less than 60
minutes.
Contents
iv. if measuring 6m or more in depth, be provided with an alternative means of escape
v. be kept closed and locked when not in use.
j. Underground service areas

Underground areas, such as car parks, tunnels and service routes, can constitute a
high fire risk and as such may be subject to higher fire safety measures (such as the
installation of sprinklers, water mist and smoke extraction systems).
Where such areas exist, specialist input from a fire engineer is strongly recommended.
k. Concessionary outlets and catering facilities

Wherever possible, all concessionary outlets and catering facilities should be located in
fire protected structures and provided with adequate ventilation. Any temporary or mobile
catering facility must be included in the fire risk assessment.
Flues should have a degree of separation as they pass through the structure, and
terminate at a point where the emissions disperse in the open air.
Concession operators using liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) cylinders should be in

possession of a current gas safety certificate.
For further guidance on catering facilities see the Guide to Control over Concessionaire
Facilities and Other Services at Sports Grounds, published by the District Surveyors
Association.
l. Fuel or power supply

All power cables throughout the sports ground should be low smoke and fume rated,
and have reduced flame propagation characteristics, proven by test to the relevant part
of BS EN 60332–3: Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
Special care should be taken to ensure that any fuel or power supply used for cooking
or heating, in particular LPG cylinders, is safely stored, and used, in accordance with the
advice of the authority responsible for enforcement. Any assessment of a potential LPG
installation should include reference to the relevant British Standard.
Further guidance on the storage and use of LPG cylinders, including in mobile catering
units, is available from the Health and Safety Executive, the Nationwide Caterers
Association and United Kingdom Liquefied Petroleum Gas.
m. Hazardous materials
Hazardous materials such as fuels (whether in containers or within fuel tanks
and machinery), fertilisers, weed killers, paints or gas cylinders used for medical
purposes, should, if held within or near to spectator facilities, be stored in a secure,
fire resistant room.
n. Temporary structures and ancillary activities

Any temporary structure or facility must be included within the fire risk assessment.
Furthermore, any ancillary activity not included in the fire risk assessment must be subject
FIRE SAFETY
to a site specific risk assessment; for example concerts often require a significant number
of packing cases containing production equipment. Storage space for such equipment
should be made available so that the equipment or its containers do not constitute a fire
risk in themselves, and do not interfere with emergency exit routes.
Contents
15.14 Recording, monitoring and reviewing the fire risk assessment

As stated in Section 15.7, the fire risk assessment must be regularly monitored to ensure
that the fire safety arrangements remain suitable and sufficient at all times, and should in all
instances be reviewed in the following circumstances:
a. where there is a significant change of staff
b. where there is a change to the safety management arrangements
c. when new construction, refurbishments or alterations are planned or in progress

(see Section 15.30)
d. where there is a significant increase of combustible materials, or sources of heat

in the ground
e. where there is any other reason to believe that the fire risk assessment is no longer valid.
Note also that the fire risk assessment may impact upon the area’s holding capacity,
for example if the assessment identifies a higher level of risk.
As emphasised throughout this chapter, however, having completed a fire risk assessment,
the next stage should always be to reduce those risks, wherever possible.
15.15 Staff awareness and training

As stated in Section 15.4, the person responsible for fire safety at the sports ground should
ensure that appropriate numbers of stewards who have been trained in fire safety are
deployed at each event.
These stewards, and all members of staff, need to be alert at all times to the risk of fire,
including the possibility of arson. They should be trained in how to respond to any incident.
In particular, they should understand what action to take on discovering a fire; that is:
a. to raise the alarm and await further instructions
b. to tackle any fire before the arrival of the fire service without placing themselves
in any danger
c. to assist in the evacuation (the coded warnings for which they should recognise).
15.16 Restricting fire growth and spread

It is vital to ensure that, in the event of a fire, the rate of fire growth is restricted in its early
stages. This is in order to:
a. reduce the danger to people in the vicinity of the building
b. minimise the risk to occupants

FIRE SAFETY
c. reduce the risk to fire fighters who may be engaged on search and rescue operations.
The following sections outline the principle means by which fire growth and spread
can be restricted.
Contents
15.17 Measures for fire resistance, protection, separation and suppression

Fire resistance measures are rated in terms of the integrity, stability and insulation of the
structure, and therefore how long they resist the spread of fire. The most common periods of
fire resistance are 30 minutes and 60 minutes.
Although the fire resistance of existing stands and other areas of spectator accommodation
will vary considerably according to the age, condition and the materials used in their
construction, nevertheless, wherever risks are identified, every effort should be made to
improve the fire resistance of a structure, even if it requires substantial alterations.
The following measures for fire resistance, protection, separation and suppression should be
in place.
(Note that where reference is made below to a period of fire resistance, this figure may vary
according to Building Regulations and/or any fire engineering solutions in place.)
a. All areas of viewing accommodation should be separated from adjacent areas or voids
by a construction which has a fire resistance of at least 30 minutes. This is so that
any fire underneath or in an adjacent area cannot easily break through into the viewing
accommodation.
Where stands incorporate hospitality facilities, the design of any additional separation,
such as glazing, must take into account the level of fire risk.
b. In addition to the above, the load bearing elements of all structures likely to be occupied
by spectators or staff should be designed to incorporate a minimum standard of fire
resistance as specified by the relevant Building Regulations. For example, the load bearing
elements of a structure that is not fitted with a sprinkler system should be designed to
have a fire resistance of 60 minutes, as required by BS 476: Fire Safety.
c. Where a stairway, vomitory, passage or any other part of an emergency exit route passes
up, down or through a stand or other structure used by spectators, unless it is in the open
air it should have a fire resistance of not less than 30 minutes. For further guidance on
vomitories and concourses, see Chapter 9.
d. Walls and ceiling linings within spectator accommodation, together with ceiling linings
beneath the floor of that accommodation, should have a flame spread classification of
not less than Class 1 when tested in accordance with the relevant British Standard within
BS 476: Fire Safety.
Walls and ceiling linings in emergency exit routes and circulation areas should have a
flame spread classification of Class O.
All surface finishes must also comply with BS EN 13501–1: Fire classification of
construction products and building elements. Classification using test data from reaction
to fire tests.
e. Doors forming part of the enclosure to an escape route should be self-closing and have
FIRE SAFETY
a fire resistance of not less than 30 minutes.
f. Where the roof contains flammable materials it should be replaced by non-combustible

materials. Where this is not practicable, the roof should be fully compartmentalised,
for example by separating with non-combustible board.
Contents
g. For some roof configurations, venting systems may offer a means of reducing the spread
of fire (including the movement of flames under the roof) and the spread of smoke and
toxic gases. The science of fire and smoke venting is, however, complex and advice from a
competent person should be sought on whether smoke control/venting systems would be
advantageous in a particular case.
h. Although not necessarily load bearing, stand roofs may bear ancillary items of equipment,
such as lighting rigs, screens and cameras. In such instances a fire risk assessment
should be carried out to determine whether fire resistance measures are required.
i. Where the roofs of buildings are close together or connected to each other, smoke or
flame can easily spread. This risk may need to be mitigated by fire prevention measures, or
by adequate fire separation.
j. Designers should assess whether the use of cladding containing combustible insulation is
appropriate to the level of fire risk. If such insulation is in place a risk assessment should
be carried out, and either acceptable fire stopping and cavity barriers should be installed,
thereby ensuring fire cannot spread uncontrollably or unobserved, or the cladding should
be removed.
k. To ensure that all fire separating elements are effective, every joint or imperfection of fit,
or opening to allow services to pass through the element, should be sealed or fire stopped
so that the fire resistance of the element is not impaired.
Vertical service risers are to be fire stopped at each compartment floor level.
l. All fire and smoke dampers should be tested to BS EN 1366–2: Fire resistance tests for
service installations. Fire dampers, and be classified to BS 13501–3: Fire classification
of construction products and building elements. The dampers should have the same fire
resistance as the wall or floor they penetrate (subject to a minimum fire resistance of
60 minutes).
Dampers should not be fitted within ductwork serving any kitchen as a buildup of grease
within the duct may adversely affect the dampers.
m. Concealed voids and cavities – particularly in the voids above and below walls, floors,
ceilings and roofs – provide a conduit for the spread of smoke and flames. Where such
voids exist, fire resistant cavity barriers should be inserted.
n. Shops, or catering outlets containing deep fat fryers or hot food cooking facilities should
be separated from other internal areas and/or areas of spectator accommodation by a
construction which has a fire resistance of at least 30 minutes.
Where roller shutters are used these should be capable of operating both manually and by
fusible link. Where a fire detection or fire alarm system has been installed, the roller shutter
should be designed to close on the activation of the system. Consideration should also be
given to the provision of localised suppression systems for all cooking appliances, such as
deep fat fryers and ovens.
FIRE SAFETY
BS 8489–1: Fixed fire protection systems. Industrial and commercial watermist systems.
Code of practice for design and installation provides guidance on the design, installation,
maintenance and testing of water mist fire protection systems, while BS 9999: Fire safety
in the design, management and use of buildings. Code of practice, also offers advice on water
mist systems.
However, any system utilising water mist must be ‘type approved’ and fully appropriate for
its intended use, risk and location.
Contents
o. In relation to fire compartmentation, including fire stopping and cavity barriers, the
designer or fire engineer should specify the fire compartmentation and fire separation
requirements and ensure that they are detailed in the relevant fire compartmentation
drawings, copies of which should be made available to the sports ground management.
New or substantially altered structures should comply with the appropriate Building
Regulations or relevant British Standards which may require higher levels of fire protection
than those outlined above.
15.18 Compensatory measures for existing structures

Where it is not possible to introduce additional means of fire resistance, protection or
separation, alternative compensatory measures will need to be considered. These might
include:
a. the provision of an extensive early fire warning system
b. improvements to the exit and emergency exit systems
c. the installation of a suitable fire suppression system
d. a reduction in the emergency egress time.
In instances where it is not possible to implement these compensatory measures, it may be

necessary to reduce the final capacity.
15.19 Limiting external fire spread

New construction
Designers of new constructions should be aware of the requirements of Approved
Document B of the Building Regulations, and Schedule 1 of the Building Regulations,
concerning the potential for fire to spread from one building to another.
More specifically for designers of sports grounds, reference should also be made to
BR 187: External fire spread: building separation and boundary distances, published by the
Building Research Establishment. This document sets out the recommended boundary
distances or notional boundaries.
15.20 Fire detection and alarm systems – general

It is recommended that all sports grounds should have in place both fire detection and
fire alarm systems. In most grounds both these functions will be combined within one
automated system. In such instances the classification of this system should be identified
in the fire strategy or the Fire Safety Plan.
Fire detection and fire alarm systems in a sports ground should consist of the following:
FIRE SAFETY
a. Manual call points (MCP) whose design and location meets British Standards, and/or
b. Automatic fire detection (AFD) systems in all areas of high fire risk, and in any unoccupied
areas that contain a medium fire risk.
These systems should meet the following requirements:
c. They should be designed to enable the evacuation plan to commence.
Contents
d. They should be fully addressable; that is, provide a master panel with an automatic
indication of the fire warning and its location. If this panel is located in a part of the ground
other than the control point (for example, in the ground’s main reception area or security
office), there should ideally be a repeater panel sited in the control point.
The repeater panel should run silently, or have a mute facility, so that if it goes off a
prominent flashing light will alert personnel. This is so that there will be no extra noise to
disrupt communications within the control room.
If the repeater panel is located elsewhere, it will require a designated individual to monitor
it constantly during events.
e. They should be designed, installed, commissioned, maintained and tested by competent

persons in accordance with the advice given in the relevant British Standard.
f. They should be zoned so that, if appropriate, only one or more sections of the ground need
be evacuated at a time – for example, under a phased evacuation strategy – without the
need to evacuate the whole ground at once.
g. Where the public address system is part of the fire warning system it should be connected
to an auxiliary power source, to ensure the continued use of the system in the event of fire
or another emergency
h. They should ideally be designed to operate under two different modes:
for event days
i. to be monitored from a control panel in the ground’s control room
ii. to operate on a two-stage, or ‘double knock’ basis whereby firstly, when an alarm is
sounded and relayed to the control room, stewards can, within an agreed time period
of no more than six minutes, investigate whether or not the cause of the alarm is
genuine, and secondly, if a fire has started, a general alarm can be sounded, the fire
services informed, and evacuation procedures commenced
or non-event days
i. to be monitored from a control panel in the ground’s main reception area
ii. to operate as normal, with fire safety procedures being enacted as soon as an
alarm is sounded.
It is emphasised that whichever fire detection and alarm systems are in place, the fire service
should always be called immediately once the outbreak of fire has been confirmed.
Furthermore, the procedures adopted to notify the fire service should also form part of the
management’s contingency plans and of staff training.
15.21 Fire detection and alarm systems – spectator areas

FIRE SAFETY
Where the management’s fire strategy requires manual call points (MCPs) to be sited in
areas where spectators gather, such as concourses, provision should be made, if appropriate,
to mitigate against malicious or accidental activation, as follows:
a. if there is a high risk of malicious activation, MCPs should be sited in positions accessible
only to staff, such as inside kiosks or behind bar counters, provided that these positions
are staffed throughout an event, and/or
b. to act as a safeguard, the MCPs should be fitted with hinged covers.
Contents
Where there is a risk of pyrotechnics being let off in spectator areas, and therefore for false
alarms to be triggered by the release of smoke, the management also need to have in place
procedures to prevent the initiation of an unwarranted evacuation.
15.22 Fire warning systems

Fire warning systems may take the form of an evacuation signal, an announcement
over the public address system, and/or visual instructions relayed on electronic scoreboards
or screens.
It should be noted that:
a. Certain sound signals may make spoken communications difficult.
b. Certain levels or frequencies of sound signals can cause discomfort both to people
with normal hearing and those who are deaf or hard of hearing.
c. Certain frequencies of flashing or stroboscopic lights may cause confusion,

disorientation and, in some cases, photosensitive seizures.
d. Warning sounders should not obliterate the other sounds, echoes or reflections
which people who are blind or partially sighted may use to orientate themselves
and avoid hazards.
It should further be stressed that people with deaf or hard of hearing are not necessarily
insensitive to sound. Many have enough perception of conventional audible alarm signals
to require no special provision. For this reason, BS 9999 makes the judgement that,
in most situations, it would be reasonable for the deaf or hard of hearing to rely on others
for warning.
It is nevertheless possible to provide alternative forms of alarm signals, such as paging

systems, vibrating devices or sound signals broadcast within carefully selected frequency
bands. Further advice on this may be obtained from the organisation Action on Hearing Loss.
For more information on emergency sound systems in general, see BS 7827: Code of practice
for Designing, Specifying, Maintaining and Operating Emergency Sound Systems at Sports Venues,
or contact the Institute of Sound and Communications Engineers.
15.23 Automatic fire extinguishing systems

As stated in Section 15.18, consideration should be given to the provision of automatic
fire extinguishing systems, particularly in high risk fire areas, such as large storerooms
and enclosed or underground car parks situated under or adjacent to spectator
accommodation.
Such systems should:
a. be designed, installed, commissioned, maintained and tested by competent persons

FIRE SAFETY
in accordance with the advice given in the relevant British Standards
b. provide for the activation of the system to be automatically communicated to the

control point.
In all cases, advice should be sought from the authority responsible for enforcing fire
safety legislation.
Contents
15.24 Fire fighting facilities and equipment

All sports grounds should be provided with appropriate fire fighting equipment. As stated
in Section 15.4, responsibility for this provision lies with the management. It is also the
responsibility of management to check that all fire fighting equipment is in the correct
position and in satisfactory order, before each event.
For the majority of grounds, portable fire fighting equipment – that is, fire extinguishers,
fire blankets and hose reels – will be sufficient. However, at some larger grounds it may be
necessary to provide a suitable water supply for fire fighting, in the form of hydrants, rising
mains and/or sprinkler systems.
Advice on the type, the level of provision and the siting of fire fighting equipment should
be sought from the authority responsible for enforcing fire legislation.
When providing such equipment, the following should be considered:
a. Hose reels, where appropriate, should be sufficient to provide adequate protection

to the whole floor area, and should be installed in a suitable position by entrances,
exits and stairways.
b. Where hose reels are not provided, sufficient portable fire extinguishers should be installed
to give adequate cover. The number and type will depend upon the size, layout, fire
separation and risk in each structure.
c. Fire blankets and appropriate fire extinguishers should be provided in all catering facilities
and outlets.
d. Portable fire fighting equipment should be located so that it cannot be vandalised but is
readily accessible to staff in the event of fire.
e. All portable fire fighting equipment should be designed, installed, maintained and tested
in accordance with the advice given in the relevant British Standards.
f. All signs and instructions relating to the use of fire fighting equipment should avoid colour
combinations or backgrounds that may present difficulties for people who are colour blind
15.25 Fire service access

Approved Document B Volume 2 of the Building Regulations requires that all buildings should
be designed and constructed so as to provide reasonable access and facilities to assist fire
fighters in the protection of life. These requirements include:
a. the provision of fire mains and hydrants
b. the provision of suitable vehicle access
c. the provision of access to all buildings for fire fighting personnel.

FIRE SAFETY
The location of these facilities and access points, and all access routes to and from them,
should be identified clearly in the ground’s contingency plans and its emergency plan, and
should not be compromised by any event-specific overlays (for example by the positioning
of outside broadcast units or temporary outlets).
Guidance on other aspects of the design and construction of fire mains, should be obtained
from BS 9999: Fire safety in the design, management and use of buildings. Code of practice.
Contents
15.26 Evacuation and places of safety

This section and the following section should be considered in conjunction with Chapter 10
(Circulation – egress).
It is emphasised that, as stated in Section 15.1.d, the management’s Fire Safety Plan should
be prepared on the basis that, in an emergency, the occupants of any part of the building
should be able to escape safely without assistance from the fire and rescue service.
As stated in Section 15.6, the management’s Fire Safety Plan should also set out to provide
and protect emergency exit routes for all occupied areas of the sports ground, and should
identify the location and availability of all places of safety, or of reasonable safety from fire.
a. A place of safety
A place of safety is defined as a place where a person is no longer in danger from the
effects of fire or other threats. Such a place may be a road, walkway or open space
adjacent to, or even within, the boundaries of the sports ground.
b. A place of reasonable safety

Within large sports grounds there may also be a need to designate a place or places of
reasonable, or relative, safety, where, for a limited period of time, people will have some
protection from the effects of fire and smoke or other threats, before continuing their
escape to a place of safety.
A place of reasonable safety will normally be:
i. An exit route that is protected by a construction having a fire resistance which meets
Building Regulations or any fire engineering solutions in place, and which in no
instance should be less than 30 minutes.
ii. A stairway that is in the open air and protected from fire breaking out onto or below it.
iii. The pitch or area of activity. As stated in Section 10.16, however, this should be
considered as a place of reasonable safety only in certain circumstances and only
after consultation with the authority responsible for enforcing fire safety legislation.
It should also be noted that if the fire risk assessment indicates that an emergency exit could
be affected by fire, that exit may have to be discounted when calculating the capacity of the
emergency exit system (see Section 10.18).
15.27 Evacuation – concourses

At sports grounds with large or multi-tiered stands with levels that have no direct access to a
final exit (for example via external stairs or ramps), it may be necessary for concourse areas
within those stands to serve as part of the evacuation routes.
On a concourse where the level of fire risk is low – where, as recommended in Section 9.7,
catering and other normal or high risk facilities are enclosed in a fire resisting construction –
the potential for fire to block an exit is usually low. Also it is assumed that all exits would be
FIRE SAFETY
available for use in the event of an evacuation.
However, on a concourse with a higher fire loading – for example one servicing an executive
area and containing an increased level of combustible fixtures and fittings – it may be
appropriate to discount a storey exit when planning evacuation procedures. In such
situations, the exit to be discounted should be the widest exit, or group of exits if they are
close to one another, serving the concourse. Clearly this will impact upon any calculation of
the safe capacity of that area.
Contents
Ground level concourses, on the other hand, may serve viewing areas from which access onto
the pitch or area of activity is possible. However, while in practice, in an emergency, some
spectators may evacuate via the pitch or area of activity, the use of the pitch or are of activity
should not form part of the assessment of the safe capacity (see Section 10.12).
From an upper tier of a stand, where the final exit passes through an enclosed concourse,
and where access to the pitch or area of activity may be unavailable, consideration should be
given to the following measures:
a. The concourse may be sub-divided, so that in an evacuation people can be re-directed

across an area of viewing accommodation to an alternative, fire separated exit route.
This form of evacuation, it is emphasised, falls within the definition of exceptional egress,
as set out in Section 10.2.
Note also that evacuation from the upper tier of one stand to the upper tier of an adjoining
area may not always be practical, even in an apparently seamless stadium bowl. In such
cases a procedure should be developed to demonstrate that safe evacuation can be
achieved safely.
b. Where catering outlets are open to the concourse, the installation of fire suppression
systems appropriate to the type of cooking appliances present, and roller shutters, may
be appropriate, so that if the roller shutter fails, the suppression system should control
the fire. Conversely, if the suppression system fails, the roller shutter will limit smoke
movement onto the concourse.
c. Other types of active or passive systems are installed in the concourse (see Glossary).
15.28 Evacuation – disabled spectators

For further guidance on all aspects of the evacuation of disabled spectators in the event of a
fire or any other form of threat, see Section 10.15.
15.29 Signage
Fire escape signs are to be provided to guide spectators and staff from any point in the sports
ground to a place of safety. Exit and directional signage should be provided in accordance
with the requirements of BS 5499: Safety Signs, including Fire Safety Signs.
Care should be taken to ensure that fire escape signs are not placed against backgrounds
that may lead to confusion for people with colour vision deficiency, or colour blindness (see
online Annex C).
Note also that appropriate directional signage to refuges will be required if the escape route
for wheelchair users differs from that of non-disabled people.
FIRE SAFETY
Contents
15.30 New or refurbished stands, or structural alterations

As stated in Section 15.5, as part of the design process the designer should draw up
a fire strategy for the building in question.
The design of all new stands or structures, plus that of all alterations to any existing
stands or structures, must also take into account the overall fire safety arrangements
in the sports ground.
Management should ensure that before any new or refurbished structure is brought into
use for an event, the responsible person carries out a fire risk assessment for that structure.
Such a pre-opening risk assessment will, of necessity, have to make assumptions about
the conditions likely to be in place during an event. This assessment should therefore be
reviewed shortly after that event, and amended if necessary.
15.31 Other fire safety considerations

When considering fire safety in the overall context of the design and management
of sports grounds, reference should also to be made to the following sections:
Section 6.9 (planning for emergency vehicles)
Chapter 10 (Circulation – egress)
Section 17.11 concerning emergency lighting and 17.13 on the use of passenger lifts
and escalators for evacuation and fire fighting.
FIRE SAFETY
Contents
FIRE SAFETY
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 16.0 Communications and control
16.0 Communications
and control
16.1 Communications plan

Clear, efficient and reliable communications are an integral part of any safety management
operation. This applies regardless of the type of sports ground or the nature of the event.
It is stressed that the provision of modern equipment and sophisticated systems is not, in
itself, sufficient to guarantee good communications. The skills, awareness, efficiency and
teamwork of those individuals who use the equipment are of equal importance.
As stated in Section 3.4, the management should draw up a Communications Plan for
inclusion within the Operations Manual. This should set out the management’s plans to meet
the following responsibilities:
a. to provide, operate and maintain all appropriate means of communication

(see Section 16.3)
b. to ensure that all safety personnel and stewards are competent and suitably trained
in the practice of good communications, with or without equipment (see Section 16.4)
c. to provide, equip, maintain and manage the operation of a control point

(see Sections 16.5–16.13)
d. to keep open and maintain all necessary lines of communication, in both normal
and emergency conditions (see Section 16.13).
16.2 Lines of communication

COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
Whatever the type of sports ground or the means of communication utilised (see Section
16.3), during an event members of the safety management team – and in particular the
Safety Officer – should be able to communicate, either directly or indirectly, with the
following parties:
a. all stewards and other safety personnel
b. all other members of staff
c. all points of entry (including those points where counting systems are monitored)
d. all exit points
e. all spectators, both inside and outside the ground
Contents
f. the police and other emergency services
g. event officials
h. first aid providers/medical room
i. officials from the highway authorities and public transport companies, where necessary
j. representatives of live broadcasters, if present.
16.3 Means of communication

Clearly, communication requirements will vary according to the type of ground, the nature
of the sport and event, and the number of spectators in attendance. Professional advice and
expertise should therefore be sought from competent persons with the appropriate skills
and experience.
In general, the provision of all communication systems should also be determined after
consultation with the emergency services, and, where a safety certificate is in force, the local
authority. Communication systems should also conform to the relevant British Standards or
Codes of Practice.
The principal means of communication referred to in this chapter are as follows:
a. inter-personal communications
b. radio communications
c. digital paging systems
d. telephone communications (internal/external/landline/mobile)
e. public address (PA) systems
f. closed circuit television (CCTV) systems
g. scoreboards, information boards and screens
h. signs
i. ground plans
j. written communications (such as printed materials and tickets) COMMUNICATIONS
k. digital communications (using social media, apps, push notifications, the venue website
AND CONTROL
and the internet generally).
16.4 Inter-personal communications and training

As stressed in Section 16.1, good communications are not only dependent on the provision
of modern equipment or advanced systems. Inter-personal communications, whether verbal
or non-verbal, face to face or via radios, pagers, telephones, messaging or other means, need
also to be clear and concise at all times.
As part of the training and briefings that members of the safety management team receive,
therefore, it should be emphasised that individuals should communicate in a manner that is
readily understood, that follows agreed protocols, and that there should be no confusion as to
the use of specific terms, or to the meaning of instructions or directions.
Contents
This is particularly important when using the varying forms of social media – some of which
offer limited scope for content – to inform and direct people attending an event.
It should also be remembered that for many spectators the only direct contact they have with
representatives of management may be with staff or stewards. It is therefore crucial that
any information imparted to spectators by those individuals is clearly given, accurate, and in
accord with the policies of the safety management team.
False or confusing information, rudeness or unhelpfulness are all examples of poor

communication, and are thus a weak link in the safety chain.
For more information on the training of stewards, see Chapter 4.
16.5 Control point – provision

Regardless of the type or size of a ground, a control point should be provided and equipped
to meet the reasonable requirements of the ground and the event. Such a facility should form
the hub of the safety management’s communications network.
At larger sports grounds the control point is often described either as the ‘stadium control
room’ or ‘ground operations centre.’ But whatever the term employed, it is emphasised that
the provision and equipment of the control point is the responsibility of management.
If the police and other emergency services are required to be present at the ground, all
decisions relating to the location, design and equipment of the control point must be made in
consultation with representatives of those services. This is in order to ensure that the control
point will also meet their needs in both normal and emergency conditions. Where a safety
certificate is in force, consultation concerning the control point should also take place with
the local authority.
Note that extended guidance on all issues relating to control points, as outlined in the
following sections, may be found in the publication Control Rooms, available from the SGSA.
Although written primarily for stadia, the publication contains general advice applicable to all
sports grounds. General guidance on control points is also available from the Centre for the
Protection of National Infrastructure.
16.6 Control point – functions

As stated in Section 16.5, the control point should form the hub of the safety management’s
communications network. Its personnel and equipment should be able to fulfil the following
COMMUNICATIONS
main functions:
AND CONTROL
a. to monitor the safety of all people present inside the ground and its immediate vicinity
b. to monitor spectator numbers during ingress (see Section 16.11)
c. to co-ordinate responses to specific incidents and emergencies
d. to provide, if required, a monitoring facility for the emergency services
e. to monitor anti-social behaviour and crowd disorder
f. to assist the management in the staging of events
g. to record and log all radio communications
h. to record all decisions made and instructions issued during the event
Contents
i. to monitor the ground’s fire detection and alarm system via a master panel, as detailed in
Section 15.20.
(Note that if a master panel is not provided in the control point there should ideally be a
repeater panel instead, and that in order to avoid excessive noise within the control room,
the master, or repeater, panel should either have a mute facility or should run silently, so
that if it goes off a prominent red or flashing light will illuminate.)
j. to monitor and operate any electronic securing systems or automated exit gate release
systems, as detailed in Section 10.20.
(Note the person designated to take on this role should be stationed within the control
point and should have no other duties.)
k. to monitor any social media activity that may have safety implications.
Note also that it is strongly recommended that the ground’s public address announcer should
not be stationed within the control room, owing to the risk of background noise affecting the
intelligibility of announcements (see Sections 16.18 and 16.19).
16.7 Control point – location

The location of the control point should, as far as possible, meet the following requirements:
a. It should command a good, unrestricted view of the whole ground; that is, the whole
pitch or area of activity, and as much of the viewing accommodation as possible. It is
recognised, however, that this may not be possible at certain grounds, for example those
with multi-tiered stands, or those staging horse or motor racing, or which have multiple
areas of activity.
b. It should be conveniently accessible for all authorised personnel in normal and emergency
conditions, without depending on circulation routes or emergency exit routes used by large
numbers of spectators.
c. It should be capable of being readily evacuated in an emergency.
d. Its presence should not restrict the views of spectators. Nor should it have its own views
restricted by spectators.
e. Its location should take into account any long term plans for the ground, to ensure that,
wherever possible, construction work and new structures will not disrupt its operation. COMMUNICATIONS
f. It should not be located adjacent to an area of high fire risk that might compromise its
AND CONTROL
function during an emergency.
16.8 Control point – design

For both new construction and existing grounds, as stated in Section 16.5, it is important to
match the size, facilities and equipment of the control point with the reasonable requirements
of the ground. Once these requirements have been ascertained, the following design issues
(all detailed in the publication Control Rooms, cited above), should be addressed:
a. Layout
i. Can the space accommodate the required number of work stations, accounting also
for the need for certain individuals to work alongside each other?
Contents
ii. Would the facility benefit from raised working areas at the rear, or from the provision of
ancillary rooms (for break out meetings or rest periods)?
iii. Can screens and monitors be positioned in such a way as to avoid glare or bright
reflections?
iv. Is there a practical or operational need for any screens or monitors to face the pitch or
area of activity, or should they face internal walls?
v. Is the form of glazing appropriate for the control point’s location and orientation; for
example, should it be angled to reduce reflections or glare, is it sufficiently robust, and
can it be easily cleaned?
vi. Can all equipment and cabling be easily accessed for maintenance or renewal?
vii. Do sounds from the crowd, entertainments or the PA system interfere with
communications inside the control room?
viii. Are there any hard surfaces that require acoustic treatment?
ix. Is there sufficient wall space for display and deployment boards?
x. Is there sufficient provision for documentation, clothing and any other storage needs?
b. Working conditions
As the control point is a place of work that is often occupied for long periods, due regard
should be made to the health, safety and welfare needs of all personnel working within
it, not only in order to fulfil the management’s legal responsibilities but also to enable
those individuals to work safely, efficiently, effectively and comfortably. Issues to consider
include heating, lighting, ventilation, accessibility, ergonomics and the provision and/or
proximity of basic amenities.
c. Security and access control

The structure of the control point, including its doors and windows, should ensure that it
is able to withstand unwanted intrusion or forced entry, and that no unauthorised persons
can enter the control point itself, or any adjoining facilities such as that of the public
address announcer.
Access control can be further tightened by providing a lobby area, or corridor, and by using
glazed panels, so that individuals inside the control point can identify those seeking entry.
d. Power supply
In order to ensure the continuous operation of all essential control point functions,
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
especially life-safety systems, it is necessary to provide an Uninterrupted Power Supply

(UPS) or other forms of auxiliary power supply, such as a generator (see Sections 16.34
and 17.12).
16.9 Control point – command structure

Effective and efficient management of all personnel and communications within a control
point is essential.
In normal conditions, command of the control point and its communication systems should
be the responsibility of a representative of the ground management, who will usually be the
Safety Officer (see Section 3.8).
Contents
If the police are on duty in the control point, there should be a clear, unequivocal
understanding of the division of responsibilities between their personnel and the ground’s
own safety management team. This understanding should be recorded as part of the written
Statement of Intent (see Section 3.24).
The Safety Officer (or another appointed person of suitable status and competency) should
also ensure that all people working in the control point, including those representing outside
agencies, adhere to defined protocols. These protocols should govern the following matters:
a. access to the control point (that is, who may or may not enter during an event)
b. procedures and etiquette for two way radio communications
c. the use of radio headsets/earpieces for quiet running
d. the use of titles, terms, names (including names for sections of the ground) and, if
appropriate, language
e. the organisation of cover for members of the safety management team who may be
temporarily absent during an event
f. the reporting of any issues or defects within the control point.
It should also be recognised that the management of staff working in a control point,
and the organisation of their designated tasks, must take into consideration their wellbeing
in what might be a confined space, while at the same time, reflecting the safety culture of
the management and the need to maintain high levels of teamwork and concentration
throughout an event.
16.10 Control point – displayed information

Depending on the size and layout of the ground, a certain amount of information will need
to be displayed inside the control point. This is best achieved by the use of display and
deployment boards. Such boards might display the following:
a. a plan of the ground and its immediate approaches
b. a plan showing the location of fire alarm points and fire fighting equipment
c. a list of key point telephone extensions (see Section 16.15)
d. a wipe board for the deployment of stewards COMMUNICATIONS
e. a wipe board for the deployment of police officers

AND CONTROL
f. a wipe board showing the location of the ambulance service, voluntary agency
and Event Doctor
g. where no computerised or mechanical read-outs are available (see Section 16.11),

a wipe board to display the number of spectators passing through the turnstiles.
In order to avoid possible misunderstandings by individuals who are colour blind, the use
of colour coding or coloured text on any form of displayed information should be carefully
monitored (see online Annex C).
Contents
16.11 Control point – monitoring spectator numbers

As stated in Section 7.1, all spectators entering all sections of the ground, including VIP and
lounge areas, should be accurately counted at their time of entry, and their number controlled
in order to ensure that overcrowding does not occur.
Whether manual, mechanical or computerised, the counting system used should be designed
to ensure that personnel in the control point are informed immediately when a predetermined
number of spectators has been admitted through each point of entry, or turnstile, serving
each section of the ground (see Section 7.3).
In addition, the following points should be considered:
a. Where a computerised counting system is installed, the display monitor should be sited
in the control point, where it can be viewed by the Safety Officer and, if present, the police
commander.
b. In the absence of computerised screen displays or read-outs, an efficient system of

communication must be established between the points of entry or turnstiles and the
control point, using runners, landlines or radios, with clear, written records updated at
regular intervals, using wipe boards and/or pro-formas.
c. All read-outs or written records should indicate:
i. the section of the ground
ii. the number of spectators occupying that section and
iii. the time of the count.
d. All read-outs or written records need to be immediately available to the Safety Officer and,
if present, the police ground commander.
e. Contingency plans should cover the failure of the software and equipment used for the
computerised counting system.
16.12 Control point – documentation

As an aid to communications within the control point, storage space should be provided
for documentation that might be required for instant reference.
Such documentation is likely to include:

COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
a. a copy of the management’s contingency plans (see Sections 3.15 and 3.16)
b. relevant details of the emergency plan (see Section 3.20)
c. where there is one in force, a copy of the safety certificate, and any other records required
as a condition of the safety certificate
d. where possible, copies of detailed scale drawings of each section of the ground
(see Section 5.15)
Contents
16.13 Control point – secondary provision

As part of its contingency planning (see Section 3.15), management should consider how
its safety management operation would continue to operate if the control point were to be
rendered unusable, owing to a fire or any other emergency.
First and foremost, the contingency plans should provide for the designation of another
place within the sports ground to function as a secondary, or backup control point. Ideally,
the location of this secondary control point should be in a sector of the ground different to
that of the primary control point.
Potential locations for a secondary control point could be a security room, a hospitality box
or an office within the ground. But whichever location is chosen, it is important that systems
are put in place to ensure that the safety management team is able to continue to operate
the control point functions as effectively as possible.
Management should therefore address within its contingency plans the following issues:
a. How those who are based in the primary control point will be evacuated in the event
of an emergency.
b. How they will reach the secondary control point.
c. How information will flow from the control point to the secondary control point.
It is also critical that these contingency plans be tested annually.
16.14 Radio communications

As stated earlier, it is important to match the equipment of the control point with the
reasonable requirements of the sports ground. Certain means of communication included
in the following sections may therefore not apply to all grounds.
However at most grounds, regardless of their scale, radio will form the main means of
communication between the control point and all stewards (or stewards’ supervisors) and
all medical and first aid personnel.
If telephone links are not provided (see Section 16.15), radio might also be used for
communication with other personnel such as the event doctor, turnstile operators, members
of the emergency services and car park or traffic stewards.
Note also that, in order to complement radio communications consideration should be given
COMMUNICATIONS
to the use of digital paging systems as a means of expediting the dispatch of personnel and
AND CONTROL
stewards.
When considering radio communications, the following points should be taken into account:
a. It is recommended that a licensed frequency should be used for all radio communications.
This is because unassigned frequencies can be interrupted by external radio traffic
and important safety messages might be compromised. Advice on the use of licensed
frequencies is available from the Office of Communications (Ofcom).
b. The provision of a separate command channel between the control point and key safety
personnel (such as the Chief Steward, supervisors, medical operatives or first aiders)
should also be considered.
Contents
c. If possible there should also be a backup radio channel within the system.
d. It is the responsibility of the management to designate one individual in the control point
to act as the main radio operator. This individual’s role should also include the logging of
radio communications, as recommended in Section 16.6.
e. For larger, more complex, grounds it is recommended that the radio operator is provided
with a base station, located in the control point (whereas in smaller, less complex grounds,
it may be sufficient for the operator to use a handheld radio only).
f. Where radio base stations are in use, the provision of foot pedals can assist with real time
logging.
g. In order for those who operate radios, including those stationed within the control point, to
make themselves heard, and to avoid the need for voices to be raised, the radio equipment
should be of the highest possible quality, including the provision of appropriate headsets
and microphones.
h. Any police radio facilities available for police use within the ground should augment, and
not be regarded as a substitute for, the ground’s own communications system.
i. The police will advise on the extent of their own radio requirements, which may be more
extensive than the system needed for the ground’s own safety needs. The police system
may also require extra space to be provided in the control point; for example, for more
than one police radio operator, and for the provision of a voice recording facility.
j. Space should also be made available for the radio equipment of any ambulance or
voluntary aid society, whether it is sited within the control point or in another room (see
Section 18.15).
k. The location allocated for any aerials or transponders, including those used by the
emergency services, should be sufficient in size, and should take account of the possibility
of radio interference.
16.15 Telephone communications – internal

Ideally, but particularly at larger grounds, two distinct and independent telephone systems
should be designated for internal and external communications.
The internal system – which may be in addition to, or in certain cases take the place of radio
communications – should take the form of a telephone link from the control room to key or
strategic points around the ground.
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
Where possible, the internal telephone system should meet the following requirements:
a. It should be independent of any other internal telephone system operating at the ground.
b. It should be possible for the operator in the control point to select which line to talk to
without being blocked by other calls.
c. Telephone lines provided for emergency use should meet the relevant British Standard;
that is, no person who has need of the system should have to travel more than 30 metres
to reach an emergency telephone.
Contents
d. Each key point telephone unit should be equipped with a flashing light that gives a visual
warning when the phone is called from the control room; this light to be positioned in such
a way that it can be easily seen by stewards and safety personnel working in its vicinity.
e. Key points of the ground linked to the control point by telephone might include:
i. entry points or turnstiles (or banks of turnstiles)
ii. all steward control points
iii. the PA system operator
iv. senior ground management
v. event officials
vi. lighting control points
vii. security office
viii. first aid/medical room
ix. police room
x. ticket office
xi. rendezvous points within the boundary of the ground (Zones 1-5)
xii. disabled refuges, where the call point system should comply with BS 5839–9: Fire
detection and fire alarm systems for buildings. Code of practice for the design, installation,
commissioning and maintenance of emergency voice communication systems.
16.16 Telephone communications – external

In addition to, and independent of, the internal system, telephone lines should also be
available for direct and immediate telephone communication between the control point and
the fire service and/or other emergency services, and between the first aid room and external
telephone lines. This is to ensure that if the switchboard or the power supply fail, this external
telephone line will still operate.
External telephone lines designated for emergency purposes should not be used for any
other purposes. COMMUNICATIONS
16.17 Telephone communications – mobile

AND CONTROL
Whilst mobile telephones can be useful for general operational communications,

dependency on them in an emergency should be strongly discouraged. This is because:
a. during an emergency their use may not be possible owing to the network becoming
overloaded
b. the handsets are easier to lose or mislay, and may be harder to operate in an emergency
c. the safety management operation cannot depend on the batteries or reliability of individual
mobile phones.
Contents
16.18 Public address system – guidance and specifications

Other than direct personal contact with staff and stewards, or through the circulation
of written material (see Section 16.33), the main form of communication between the
management and spectators will be the public address (PA) system.
It is stressed that the design and specifications of this system should be geared primarily
towards its required operational capacity when used in an emergency, and not for its use
solely as a means of relaying entertainment to areas of viewing accommodation.
Whilst there are a number of British Standards that apply to public address systems at sports
grounds, the principal standards with which they should comply are BS 7827: Code of practice
for designing, specifying, maintaining and operating emergency sound systems at sports venues,
and BS 5839–8: Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings. Code of practice for the
design, installation, commissioning and maintenance of voice alarm systems.
The latter standard recognises that sports grounds are often quite different to other buildings
in terms of how they function during emergencies, and that the evacuation of large crowds,
sometimes from large and complex structures, requires PA systems that offer higher
performance levels. It is, therefore, essential that the assessment, planning and installation of
such systems at sports grounds should be undertaken by a competent person who can apply
the recommendations and guidance of the British Standard.
In general, the PA system should meet the following requirements:
a. Intelligibility
The system should allow for broadcast messages to be heard under reasonable conditions
(including emergencies), by all persons of normal hearing in any part of the ground to
which the public has access.
In this respect it should be noted that PA announcements at some sports grounds might
be unintelligible because the announcer is operating from a room or booth which itself is
subject to background noise from adjacent crowds. Another reason is that the announcer
turns up the volume unnecessarily in an attempt to give the message added impact.
Experience shows that one means of improving intelligibility is to use, whenever

appropriate, pre-recorded announcements.
b. Zoning
At larger grounds, PA systems should ideally be designed so that announcements can
be broadcast to individual zones, both inside and outside the ground, to groups of zones,
and to the whole ground. The system should also be capable of broadcasting to the
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
pitch or area of activity (Zone 1), if that forms part of the management’s evacuation
procedure.
In deciding which zones are to be addressed in any given situation, management should
take into account its own contingency planning, to ensure that announcements are
made only to those zones affected. It is also important that the PA system is set up and
monitored to prevent zoned announcements from being heard in other zones, thereby
risking confusion amongst both stewards and spectators.
For this reason, even at smaller grounds that have zoned PA systems, it may be preferable
to broadcast certain important announcements to the whole ground, making it clear in the
wording of the message that the announcement is directed at specific areas only.
Management should therefore adopt a clear policy on when zoned announcements are
appropriate, and when further announcements offering clarification need to be made.
Contents
c. Override facility
As explained in Section 16.6, it is recommended that the public address system should not
be operated from the control point. However, the PA system’s design should allow for an
operator – representing either the management or the police, as agreed in the contingency
plans – to override the system in order to broadcast emergency messages, either to the
whole ground or to specific zones.
The PA system should also be able to override the sound output of any televisions or
music systems in concourses or hospitality areas. Similarly, if there are areas of the
ground which have the facility for turning down the output from the PA system – such as
in hospitality boxes or lounges – the system should be designed to override these volume
controls automatically when emergency messages are broadcast.
d. Fire warning
The use of the public address system, including voice alarm (VA) as part of the fire
warning system, requires full compliance with the relevant parts of BS 7827: Code of
practice for designing, specifying, maintaining and operating emergency sound systems at
sports venues (see Sections 15.20 and 15.21), and BS 5839–1: Fire detection and fire alarm
systems for buildings.
e. Backup power supply

The backup power supply to the public address system should be such to enable it to
continue to function at full load in an emergency, such as a fire or a failure of the mains
supply, for up to three hours (see Sections 16.34 and 17.12).
f. Backup loud hailers

In the event of a failure of the public address system, loud hailers should be available for
the use of stewards and police in all parts of the ground, including the control point, for
directing or instructing spectators. It is vital that all personnel are trained in their use, and
that the batteries are kept fully charged.
g. Inspections and tests

Once a PA system has been installed, tested and approved, a commissioning certificate
should be issued annually, confirming that it meets all the current, relevant standards.
In addition to regular pre-event checks, it should also be inspected and tested bi-annually,
and an inspection certificate obtained that is accompanied by a report with findings.
Where a safety certificate is in force, the inspection certificate should be available for
inspection by the local authority.
The bi-annual inspections and tests should include:

COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
i. the performance of the system in the event of a power failure
ii. the performance of the system using auxiliary power
iii. the performance of the speakers
iv. loudspeaker circuit fault monitoring
v. the testing of any high level speaker fixings and/or secondary fixings
h. Spectators who are deaf or hard of hearing

Although people who are deaf or hard of hearing may experience difficulty in hearing
messages on a PA system, they may still be sensitive to sound and to conventional alarm
signals. It is also reasonable to expect spectators around them to warn those who are
deaf or hard of hearing in the event of an emergency (see also Section 15.22).
Contents
Where a hearing enhancement system is installed to provide match commentaries, it

should also be used for relaying important safety information.
Wherever possible management should also relay safety information on screens.
16.19 Public address system – operation

As emphasised throughout this chapter, good communications are not solely dependent
on the provision of advanced equipment. This is particularly true of public address systems.
The operation of the system, and the skills of the operators, are equally important.
The following considerations should be taken into account:
a. Provision of a separate booth

As stated in Section 16.6. it is recommended that the ground’s public address announcer
and the system’s control panel should not be stationed within the control point, but should
be allocated a separate room or booth.
It is further recommended that this room or booth be positioned immediately adjacent to

the control point and should command a good view of the playing area or area of activity.
In order to enable easy and immediate contact between the PA booth and the control point
the two facilities should be linked, either:
i. via a landline telephone, ideally fitted with a clearly visible flashing light, so that the
PA announcer can see instantly when someone in the control point is trying to make
contact, or
ii. via a sound proof sliding glass window or a hatch, to enable the exchange of
messages or information.
Wherever the PA booth is located, as stated in Section 16.18.c, it should be possible for
personnel in the control point to override the PA system in the event of an emergency.
Moreover, it is vital that all PA announcements can be heard clearly in the control point.
b. Ambient noise
As ambient noise may adversely affect the audibility of the public address system, it is
important to ensure that the system’s sound levels are adjusted as required during an
event.
This can be achieved either manually, by the PA announcer, or automatically by the

COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
installation of an ambient noise sensing system.
Where such a system is installed it is important that in the event of a system failure the
sound level reverts to maximum, with the option of a reduced level if the system fails when
the ground is only partly filled.
c. Agreement on emergency announcement procedures

In addition to the provision of an override facility, there should be an agreed operational
policy stating whether announcements in the event of an emergency are broadcast by a
representative of the management’s safety team or by a representative of the police. This
agreement should be recorded in the management’s contingency plans.
Contents
d. Pre-announcement signal
Important announcements relating to crowd safety should be preceded by a loud,
distinct signal to catch the attention of spectators, whatever the level of noise in the
ground at the time.
The following recommendations should be considered:
i. Experience has shown that a three-event, two-tone chime (for example, ‘bing bong
bing’) is most effective. This signal should be different to, and distinct from, any other
signals which may be in general use on the public address system.
ii. While the pre-announcement signal is being relayed, it is essential that the PA system’s
control panel clearly indicates that the microphone is temporarily muted. Ideally there
should be two coloured and labelled indicators; one for ‘wait’ and the other ‘speak now’.
iii. All ground officials, stewards, police, fire, ambulance and any other emergency
personnel should be made aware of the pre-announcement signal.
iv. The signal should be tested before the start of each event.
v. The signal should be sounded shortly before the start of the event as part of a
general announcement on safety procedures, to reach the maximum possible
number of spectators.
vi. The signal should be explained in every event programme.
e. Tone and content of announcements

In the event of an emergency it is essential that clear, accurate information is given to
spectators at the earliest possible opportunity. Messages should be positive, leaving those
to whom they are addressed in no doubt as to what is required of them. The messages
should be scripted in advance with the agreement of the police, fire authority and, where a
safety certificate is in force, the local authority.
It may also be appropriate to pre-record certain standard messages for use in

emergencies.
In all cases it is recommended that the announcer practices using the public address
system, while assessors comment on the audibility, tone and effectiveness of their
delivery. It is also important that the announcer is familiar with the layout of the sports
ground and the agreed evacuation procedures.
Management should ensure that for certain international events, announcers able to
speak the appropriate language are in post at the ground, and are briefed on the use of the
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
system and the content of any safety announcements.
16.20 CCTV – provision

Closed circuit television systems (CCTV) are an essential component of the safe
management of sports grounds, and should be installed wherever possible for three
fundamental purposes:
a. A CCTV system offers management an effective means of monitoring crowds and any
instances of overcrowding, crowd movement, crowd disorder, anti-social behaviour and
threats to security.
b. CCTV allows personnel in the control point to identify incidents – either by viewing the
monitor directly or after receiving reports – and then, by use of the system, to make a
more detailed appraisal.
Contents
c. In the event of crowd disorder, anti-social behaviour, an accident or a threat to security,

CCTV systems enable the management to use recordings for evidential purposes.
It is stressed nevertheless that a CCTV system, however wide ranging or sophisticated,

should never be considered as a substitute for good stewarding or other forms of safety
management.
Further reference can be made to the following publications: CCTV Operational Requirements
Manual, issued by the Home Office, and Digital Imaging Procedure, published by the Home
Office Scientific Development Branch, and to BS 8418: Installation and remote monitoring of
detector-activated CCTV systems. Code of Practice.
16.21 CCTV – assessment of need

When considering the installation of a CCTV system, or the upgrading of an existing system,
management should undertake a detailed assessment of the needs of the ground as a whole
and in particular those areas that need to be closely monitored, in order to assess the likely
benefits of having such a system.
The zones to be assessed will include those immediately outside the ground, plus all turnstile
areas, entry routes, concourses, areas of viewing accommodation, and exit routes. Ideally
the system will cover all these areas. The assessment should also take into account when
specific areas need to be monitored; that is before, during and/or at the end of an event.
If it is decided to install a new CCTV system, or upgrade an existing one, a detailed

specification should be drawn up to meet the operational requirements of the management,
before contractual negotiations and procurement commence.
As outlined in the following sections, there are essentially three stages in the drawing up
of a specification for CCTV systems:
a. conducting a risk assessment (see Section 16.22)
b. drawing up a statement of operational requirement (see Section 16.23)
c. issuing a tender document (see Section 16.23).
16.22 CCTV – risk assessment

In order to establish which zones, internal and external, need to be covered by CCTV, a
detailed risk assessment of every part of the ground is required. This assessment should
COMMUNICATIONS
identify the level of risk in each zone. For example, a turnstile area at the end of a confined
AND CONTROL
space may be assessed as ‘high risk’, and a hospitality lounge ‘low risk’.
The assessment should also take into account the nature of the risk, the likelihood of an
incident occurring and the potential consequences.
Such an assessment will help management to establish whether alternative methods can be
adopted to monitor areas of risk, or, if CCTV coverage is considered necessary, the level of
coverage required.
The risk assessment should be recorded in the form of a plan of the ground, identifying the
following points for each zone:
a. the type of risk; for example, overcrowding, crushing, the existence of a steep slope or
escalator, anti-social behaviour or a security threat
Contents
b. the level of risk
c. whether CCTV is required
d. the image required for monitoring purposes in the control point; for example, a general
view, long shot, or closer view showing head and shoulders (see Figure 31)
e. the number of images that might need to be viewed in detail and simultaneously,
in the event of an incident or incidents (this may determine the number of cameras
in a specific area)
f. whether the image, if monochrome, is sufficient for monitoring purposes
g. the levels and types of lighting in specific areas, in both normal and emergency conditions.
Where there are significant changes to the operation of a sports ground, for example the
relocation of visiting supporters, or the use of the pitch or activity area for a concert, a risk
assessment should be carried out to determine whether any changes to the CCTV system
are necessary.
Generally, the risk assessment requires no technical knowledge of CCTV. Only in respect
of parts (f) and (g) is there a need for some technical expertise, as outlined further in
Section 16.23. It is, however, recommended that the risk assessment is undertaken with
the assistance of the relevant authorities and, where a safety certificate is in force,
the local authority.
16.23 CCTV – operational requirements and tendering

The findings of the risk assessment, together with the annotated ground plan and any
associated paperwork, should be combined to provide a clear statement of the CCTV
system’s operational requirements.
This statement should form the basis of any tender documents and must be supported by
additional technical specifications, detailing aspects of the expected use and performance
of the installation.
Basic operational requirements to be considered are as follows:
a. The images provided should be sufficiently clear and distinct to enable personnel in the
control point to carry out all the functions required of the CCTV system, as detailed in
Section 16.20. COMMUNICATIONS
b. The system should make provision for the recording of all CCTV coverage (including for
AND CONTROL
the gathering of evidence) for at least two events and for an appropriate retention period.
c. The specification of CCTV cameras will depend on what coverage is required and how
the management intends to use the CCTV system. For example, fixed cameras might be
sufficient in some locations, while in others it might be necessary to use cameras that
offer panning, tilting and zooming (PTZ).
d. The type of CCTV cameras installed should be able to perform in the range of light levels
most prevalent during events at the ground.
If the cameras are not able to perform as required, they should either be replaced or the
levels of illumination in the affected areas should be increased.
Contents
e. CCTV cameras for use in certain locations at sports grounds should be designed for
outdoor use in a range of weather conditions and temperatures, be able to cope with the
effects of vibration and, where appropriate, be vandal resistant.
f. At some grounds it may be necessary for the CCTV cameras not only to routinely monitor
crowds but also to identify individuals within the crowd. In such instances it will be
necessary to specify cameras with a higher resolution. Figure 31 sets out the minimum
requirements for such purposes.
g. Where appropriate, management may wish to consider the deployment of stewards

wearing personal micro cameras, or body worn video cameras.
h. Whilst at some sports grounds it may be desirable to monitor the CCTV system from other
locations – for example, a security office – it is essential that total control of the system is
maintained by personnel in the control point.
i. An auxiliary power supply should be provided to ensure continued operation of the CCTV
system in the event of a power failure (see Section 16.34).
j. Where a CCTV system is to be used for other purposes – for example, for 24 hour site
security – management should draw up a schedule of maintenance based upon the MTBF
(Mean Time Between Failure) of each element of the CCTV system; that is, the number
of hours that each device will operate before it is likely to malfunction and will require
maintenance.
Further reference should be made to BS EN 62676: Video surveillance systems for use in
security applications.
16.24 CCTV – data storage and documentation

It is the responsibility of management to ensure that the recording and storing of CCTV
images is in compliance with all relevant government data protection regulations and codes
of practice currently in place.
For example, current Home Office guidelines state that there is no set time for the holding of
recorded CCTV images, and no set limit as to the length of recordings stored.
In the context of sports grounds, however, as stated in Section 16.23.b, this Guide
recommends that the CCTV system should have a sufficient data capacity to store recordings
from at least two event days at any one time. These recordings should be saved in a format
that allows them to be reviewed – for example in the event of an incident or accident – by the
COMMUNICATIONS
relevant authorities.
AND CONTROL
It may also be necessary in certain circumstances for the management to have available
documentation which certifies that the CCTV system and its operation are in compliance with
existing regulations. This documentation should be available in the control point.
Further guidance on these issues may be found in the publication Storage of Recorded
CCTV Images – a guidance document, issued by the Centre for the Protection of National
Infrastructure and from the Home Office.
Contents
Figure 31 CCTV resolution levels

At some sports grounds, as stated in Section 16.23.f, it may be necessary to use
CCTV cameras not only to routinely monitor crowds but also to identify individuals
within the crowd. In such instances it will be necessary to specify cameras with a
higher resolution.
To illustrate how resolution levels relate to operational needs, current guidance
for CCTV systems in general use sets out different thresholds, as seen here.
face identification
(100% of screen height)
recognition
detection
monitoring
zz for the routine monitoring of crowds and locations, individual people should
represent not less than 5 per cent of the height of screen on which the CCTV
image is viewed (that is approximately 80mm or more per pixel*)
zz for the detection of a person, in a crowd or in a location, the image of that
person should represent not less than 10 per cent of the height of the screen
(approximately 40mm or more per pixel*)
zz for the recognition of a person – for example, to determine whether they are
COMMUNICATIONS
male or female, or whether they are wearing any distinctive clothing – the image
AND CONTROL
of that person should represent not less than 50 per cent of the height of the
screen (approximately 8mm or more per pixel*)
zz for the identification of an individual person – that is to be able to view their face
clearly (for example in instances of anti-social behaviour or terrorism) – the image
of that person should represent not less than 100 per cent of the height of the
screen (approximately 4mm or more per pixel*)
zz note that if the screen display resolution is not equal to that
of the camera resolution, or vice versa, the displayed scene may not show the
expected level of detail
* the sizes shown here are based on the use of standard definition PAL (576i) – for
other video modes or resolutions, BS EN 62676-4 offers a conversion table to find the
equivalent percentages
Contents
Figure 32 Table showing CCTV testing and maintenance schedules
24 HOURS SIX ANNUAL POST

PRE-EVENT MONTHLY (SERVICE MAINTENANCE
TASK (IN HOUSE) (SERVICE CONTRACT) (SERVICE
CONTRACT) CONTRACT)
camera function /
pan tilt and zoom (PTZ)    
camera alignment   
lighting function    
wash/wipe function   
picture quality   
recording capacity   
camera housing  
cabling  
mechanical fixing  
16.25 CCTV – maintenance

In order to ensure that the CCTV system continues to meet the agreed specifications and
the management’s operational requirements, it is important that maintenance schedules and
repairs form part of the service contract. Figure 32 sets out the recommended schedule for
the testing and maintenance of CCTV systems.
16.26 CCTV – human factors

In addition to focusing on the technical specifications of CCTV systems, it is equally
important to consider the personnel who will be operating and monitoring the system
COMMUNICATIONS
throughout an event, and how their rights and needs will influence both the choice of
AND CONTROL
equipment and the design of the control point.
Individuals designated for the operation and monitoring of CCTV coverage should be suitably
trained and, where appropriate, qualified in the operation of CCTV systems. Furthermore, they
should be skilled in the interpretation, use and storage of the data provided.
Consideration should be given to any factors that might affect their performance, health and
wellbeing. For example, while someone monitoring several CCTV screens for long periods
might experience stress, another individual with less responsibility might become distracted.
In both extremes mistakes can be made.
Environmental factors inside the control point, such as room temperature, light levels, noise
levels and ventilation, will also have a bearing on the performance of CCTV operators and
monitors, as will ergonomic factors such as the design of keyboards, joysticks, trackballs,
seats, desks and screens.
Contents
Further guidance on these issues may be found in the publication Human Factors in CCTV
Control Rooms: a best practice guide and other documents issued by the Centre for the
Protection of National Infrastructure.
16.27 Scoreboards and screens

Scoreboards or screens should not be operated from the control point but from another
location within the ground, such as the room or booth used by the public address announcer.
In consultation with the police and the emergency services, management should pre-arrange
and script the contents and graphics of all safety-related and emergency messages to be
displayed on scoreboards and screens. These messages should, furthermore, be displayed in
co-ordination with the broadcast of pre-prepared and preferably pre-recorded public address
announcements.
Their content should take into account the fact that people who are deaf or hard of hearing
may rely entirely upon the visual information on scoreboards and screens.
Consideration should also be given to the avoidance of colours and/or colour combinations
that might be difficult for people with colour vision deficiency (or colour blindness) to read or
interpret (see online Annex C).
16.28 Signs and ground plans – adopting a strategy

A vital part of any sports ground’s communications network is the provision of appropriately
sized, clear, legible and suitably positioned signs and ground plans.
This will require the management to draw up a comprehensive strategy for the whole
ground and its immediate environs, encompassing safety-related and informational signs
(including directional signs), backed up by well positioned and clearly presented ground plans
(or area maps). The aim of this strategy should be to encourage crowds to distribute evenly
throughout the approaches to the ground, and inside the ground, and to avoid congestion
in key areas.
Consideration should also be given to the installation of prominent, event-specific signs

and/or intelligent signs, particularly when the attendance is likely to include large numbers
of people who are unfamiliar with the ground, and who are therefore more prone to follow
crowds and/or use main thoroughfares.
Similarly, spectators who are unfamiliar with the ground are more likely to be unaware of the
COMMUNICATIONS
location of emergency exits, and are therefore more likely to choose the exit by which they
AND CONTROL
entered, rather than the one signposted for use in an emergency.
The management’s signage strategy should also take into account the fact that spectators
who are familiar with the ground may in many instances ignore directional signs and follow
their own favoured routes or short cuts.
Particular care should be taken to ensure that all signage and directional instructions, and
ground plans, tally exactly with information provided on tickets, in event programmes, or on
websites or social media, in terms of their wording, intentions and colour coding.
Contents
16.29 Signs – forms and categories

There are essentially three forms of signs, as follows:
a. Safety signs
Safety signs appear in five different categories, and should meet the shape and colour
requirements specified:
i. Prohibition signs: for example ‘No Smoking’ – circular shape, with a black pictogram
on a white background, red edging and a red diagonal line through the pictogram.
ii. Warning signs: for example ‘Low Headroom’ or ‘Uneven Steps’ – triangular shape,
with a black pictogram on a yellow background, with black edging.
iii. Mandatory signs: for example ‘Spectators must not cross this line’ – circular shape,
with white pictogram on a blue background.
iv. Emergency escape or first aid signs: rectangular or square shape, with a white
pictogram on a green background.
v. Fire-fighting equipment signs: rectangular or square shape, with a white pictogram

on a red background.
All signs in these categories should be easily seen and understood. If located in areas of
poor natural light it may be necessary to provide either artificial illumination and/or to use
reflective materials.
It is emphasised that safety signs are not a substitute for other means of controlling risk.
They are to warn of any risk that may remain after all other controls and safety systems
have been put in place.
Note also that the provision of signs that communicate a hazard warning or safety related
message may, in certain situations, be mandatory under the Health and Safety at Work etc.
Act 1974, and in such cases should conform to the guidance provided within the Health
and Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations 1996.
Further guidance on these regulations and on safety signs in general is available from the
Health and Safety Executive.
b. Information signs
These are signs communicating information relative to the ground, the event, or to specific
restrictions. Such signs include: COMMUNICATIONS
i. Ground plans: it is recommended that simplified ground plans, are displayed

AND CONTROL
at suitable locations, such as by ticket offices and main entrances, and, where
appropriate, in places where they might benefit supporters of visiting teams. The
ground plans should include ‘You Are Here’ pointers, and replicate accurately any
colour coded information relating to ticketing and entry requirements.
Any information conveyed in colour should be accompanied by text or symbols to

ensure that it can be understood by people with colour blindness (see online Annex C).
ii. Ground regulations: including information on prohibited items.
iii. Directional signs: both outside and inside the ground.
iv. Seat and row indicators
Contents
Signs in this category should not use predominant colouring which could lead to
them being confused with safety signs. They should also be mounted on a strongly
contrasting background, and placed in such a way that they do not obscure or
dominate any safety signs.
c. Commercial signs and hoardings

Care should be taken that signs and hoardings in this category are located in such a way
that they do not obscure or detract from safety or information signs; for example, by being
too close, by blocking the line of vision, or by the over-use of predominant colours utilised
in the safety or information signs.
16.30 Signs – design issues

As is true of all buildings, well designed sports grounds, with logical layouts and efficient
circulation routes, should not depend on signage alone to assist visitors in wayfinding.
Instead, visitors should be able to navigate their way round as intuitively as possible, with only
minimal need for signage. In this respect, the signage should serve as a complement to good
design, not as a compensation for poor design.
The following design issues for signage should be considered:
a. Circulation routes should be identified by clear signs, illuminated where necessary.
b. Symbols should conform to ISO 7001: Graphical symbols. Public information symbols.
c. Emergency exit signs should take the form of a pictogram and be supplemented by text
bearing the words ‘exit’ or fire exit’.
d. Emergency exit signs should generally follow the recommendations in BS 5499–4: Safety
signs. Code of practice for escape route signing – however it may be preferable to deviate
from those BS recommendations by omitting directional arrows on signs pointing towards
emergency exits and exit routes in certain parts of sports grounds where those arrows
might lead to confusion, for example where otherwise there might be a down arrow at the
head of a vomitory, followed by an up arrow over the final exit door.
e. Primacy should always be given to signs leading to exits or emergency exit routes.
f. Signs leading to the entrances of the sports ground should be easily identifiable from all
directions of approach.
g. Signs should create clearly defined routes to entry points or turnstiles.

COMMUNICATIONS
h. Facilities such as car parks, information centres, first aid rooms, lifts, toilets and
AND CONTROL
emergency exit routes should be signposted, with particular consideration as to the height
and placement of each signpost.
i. For ease of recognition, all signs should share the same graphic approach and,
if appropriate, any corporate branding.
j. However, signs incorporating varying colours may be used to identify different areas
of the ground, provided that any information conveyed by colour is accompanied by text
or symbols, to ensure it can be understood by people with colour blindness (see online
Annex C)
k. Information that might otherwise be conveyed on signs or signposts can instead appear
as part of wall surfaces, on street furniture or as part of lighting systems.
Contents
l. Signs should not be surrounded by any visual clutter that might lead to them being ignored
or missed, and should contrast strongly with the surface on which they are mounted (or
have a strongly contrasting border).
m. An over provision of signs can lead to confusion.
16.31 Signs – inclusion issues

When drawing up a signage strategy it is vital to incorporate inclusive design principles
so that the ground will be accessible to as wide a range of visitors as possible. In order to
achieve this it is important to note that:
a. People who are deaf or hard of hearing, or are blind or partially sighted, tend to have a
greater reliance on easy wayfinding and clear signage.
b. Only a minority of the general population has perfect vision.
c. A significant proportion of the population is affected by colour blindness and therefore

experiences difficulty in reading or interpreting signs with certain colour combinations (see
online Annex C).
d. When positioning signs in crowded areas, such as concourses, consideration should be

given as to whether they will be visible to children, wheelchair users or people of shorter
stature, and whether additional signs may be needed at a higher level.
e. Signs supplemented with tactile text and/or Braille will only be of assistance if provided at
the appropriate height, but are not generally appropriate for directional signs in large open
spaces.
f. Inclusive signage design principles should be applied not only in areas occupied by the
public but also in all other areas of the ground where staff and others might gather or
work.
Further advice on inclusive design is available from BS 8501: Graphical Symbols and Signs.
Public Information Symbols and from the Sign Design Guide – A Guide to Inclusive Signage,
published jointly by the Sign Design Society and the Royal National Institute of Blind People.
Other relevant publications are Accessible Sports Facilities, published by Sport England, and
Accessible Stadia and Supplementary Guidance, both available from the SGSA.
16.32 Signs – general provision and maintenance COMMUNICATIONS
Signs at sports grounds should also meet the following general requirements:
AND CONTROL
a. All signs should be securely fixed, including temporary signs used on an event basis.
b. Signs should not be fixed in such a way that they restrict spectator viewing or impede
the circulation of spectators.
c. All signs should be kept clean.
d. Handwritten signs should be avoided.
e. It might be necessary to confirm with the appropriate authority that signs do not
contravene the fire resistance or fire loading requirements of particular areas of a ground,
such as emergency exit routes or concourses.
Contents
f. Signs along access routes should be of an appropriate size, preferably illuminated, non-
reflective, located in expected positions and be repeated along the route, to reassure
people that they are moving in the right direction.
16.33 Tickets and programmes

Wherever possible, printed material provided for spectators should be used as a means of
communicating safety-related information.
As stated in Section 3.30, a clear plan of the ground should be provided on the rear of the
ticket. Also, that part of the ticket retained by the spectator after passing through a ticket
control point or turnstile should clearly identify the location of the accommodation for which
it has been issued.
Colour coding of tickets, corresponding to different sections of the grounds, should be

considered. However, to assist people who are unable to distinguish between certain colours,
tickets must convey information by means other than colours, such as by text or symbols
As stated in Section 7.9, the design of the ticket should also ensure that the key information
printed – such as turnstile, block, seat and row number or, in the case of racecourses,
enclosure – is clear and easy to read for the spectator, turnstile operators and stewards.
Management should ensure that the same information is provided to those using an
electronic card entry system.
Clear and concise information about the ground’s layout and safety procedures should also
be printed in the event programme.
Management may also wish to issue printed material that provides further information of
interest and relevance to spectators; for example, concerning changes of routine procedures,
changes in road layouts or transport options, or to warn of future changes. Such material may
be issued with tickets.
16.34 Auxiliary power

As stated in Section 16.8.d, it is vital that power is maintained to provide the continuous
operation of all control point functions and essential communications systems in the event
of a power failure, fire or other emergency.
Auxiliary power should therefore be provided, sufficient at the very least to enable emergency
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
lighting, the public address system, CCTV and all other safety-related installations to function
for a minimum of three hours after the failure of the normal supply.
If the auxiliary power in place is capable of supplying the entire load for the ground for a
minimum of three hours, it may be possible to continue the event, provided it is scheduled
to finish and the ground be cleared of spectators within this period, and no other emergency
exists. In such cases, the auxiliary power supply must itself be provided with additional
backup power.
Tests should be conducted to ensure that essential communications systems continue to

function normally once the auxiliary power takes over.
Contents
As stated in Sections 3.15 and 3.16, management should also prepare contingency plans to
cover the possibility of a power failure. These should include, as stated in Section 16.18.f, the
provision of loud hailers.
Further information can be found in BS 8519: Selection and installation of fire-resistant power
and control cable systems for life safety and fire-fighting applications. Code of practice.
16.35 Digital infrastructure and resilience

In view of the fact that most sports grounds depend on digital systems to provide a
range of communications, it is vital that management puts into place robust operating
procedures to prevent:
a. the failure, partial or otherwise, of its digital infrastructure
b. the potential for a cyber attack upon its digital infrastructure
Furthermore, it is the responsibility of management to draw up contingency plans to deal with

any such failures or attacks, and to test these plans on a regular basis.
The management should also ensure, as with all aspects of its operation, that all data relating
to communications with the emergency services, plus all radio and event day logs, CCTV
recordings and copies of structural and service plans of the ground, are adequately backed
up, protected against unauthorised intrusion, and stored in a secure place.
It should further ensure that on an event day, senior members of the safety management
team have direct access to technical support for all its communications systems.
Further guidance is available from the National Cyber Security Centre.
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
Contents
COMMUNICATIONS
AND CONTROL
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 17.0 Mechanical and electrical installations
17.0 Mechanical and

electrical installations
17.1 Introduction
All sports grounds have in place a number of permanent or temporary mechanical and
electrical installations, many of which are safety-related or have their own safety implications.
In addition to the recommendations in this chapter, further references to such services in
the Guide may be found as follows:
a. turnstile monitoring systems (see Chapter 7)
b. fire warning and other fire safety systems, and catering installations (see Chapter 15)
c. public address, CCTV and emergency telephone systems (see Chapter 16)
d. media installations (see Section 19.3).
Reference may also be made to the Guide to Electrical and Mechanical Services in Sports
Grounds, published by the London District Surveyors Association.
17.2 The importance of maintenance
INSTALLATIONS
All mechanical and electrical installations at a sports ground are liable to gradual
deterioration, particularly those situated in outdoor or exposed environments. It is therefore
M&E
vital that management ensures that such installations are properly maintained by competent
persons with the appropriate qualifications, skills and experience.
It is imperative, furthermore, that maintenance procedures for both new and existing
installations are properly understood. Accordingly, management should prepare a detailed
planned preventative maintenance schedule covering the testing, inspection, commissioning
and servicing of all such installations in accordance with:
a. the instructions and schedules provided by the manufacturer or trade body
b. the operator’s manual provided by the installer
c. where appropriate, the relevant British Standards
d. the maintenance schedules set out within the management’s Operations Manual, as
required by a risk based safety certificate, or, where a prescriptive safety certificate is in
force, the requirements of the local authority.
It should be noted that the existence of a planned preventative maintenance schedule

demonstrates that the management is taking its responsibilities seriously, and may be a
factor in the overall assessment of (S) factors at the ground (see Chapter 2).
Contents
17.3 Inspections and tests

Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturers’ written instructions or any other
relevant documentation, all mechanical and electrical installations should be inspected
and tested at least annually by competent qualified persons, and an inspection certificate
supplied to ground management. This annual inspection and test will be in addition to the
regular pre-event tests (see Section 5.9). The results of all inspections and tests should
be recorded in writing.
Note that any temporary mechanical or electrical installations should also have been subject
to testing by a competent qualified person.
17.4 Event day staffing

Management should ensure that there is a competent person or persons either on site
or readily available on an event day to deal with any problems which might arise in relation
to the mechanical or electrical installations at the ground. Contact details for this person or
persons should be included in the management’s contingency plans (see Section 3.15).
17.5 Anti-vandalism
Mechanical and electrical installations associated with safety systems, including auxiliary
power units, may be vulnerable to vandalism or other outside influences. These should be
taken into consideration when locating, fixing and securing such installations.
17.6 Electrical installations

All electrical installations should comply with BS 7671: Requirements for Electrical Installations.
IET Wiring Regulations and other relevant regulations.
All temporary electrical installations, including those installed as part of an overlay, a

temporary or demountable structure, or at a temporary sports ground, should comply with
BS 7909: Code of practice for temporary electrical systems for entertainment and related purposes.
INSTALLATIONS
For each installation, permanent or temporary, an Electrical Installation Completion
M&E
Certificate, as prescribed by the IET Wiring Regulations, should be obtained, and retained by
the management, accompanied where applicable by a current Periodic Inspection Report. A
separate Completion Certificate will also be required for any new part added to an electrical
installation.
Further guidance is available from The Institution of Engineering and Technology.
17.7 Electrical plans and circuit diagrams

It is the responsibility of management to ensure that copies of all electrical plans and
circuit diagrams are retained, updated as necessary, and stored in a location where
they are protected from defacement or damage, and are easily accessible to technical
staff at all times.
a. Electrical plans should detail, wherever applicable:
i. the mains power supply
ii. the electrical power distribution
Contents
iii. earthing
iv. equipment and cable tray layouts
v. lighting systems (indoor and outdoor)
vi. fire alarm systems
vii. the internet protocol (IP) network
viii. communications (for example PA and CCTV systems)
ix. lightning protection with earthing
x. television and broadcast installations
xi. advertising and/or mobile information display systems
b. Circuit diagrams should be provided, clearly labelled to indicate:
i. all main switches, circuit breakers and fuseways in distribution boards and the
circuits which they control
ii. the location of all switch rooms and distribution boards.
17.8 Protection of cables

All cables should be sited so that they are, as far as practicable, inaccessible to the public.
All power, control and communication cables should meet the standards laid down in BS EN
50575: Power, control and communication cables. Cables for general applications in construction
works subject to reaction to fire requirements and/or BS EN 50525: Electric cables. Low voltage
energy cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V (U0/U). General requirements.
For digital networks, both inside and outside the ground, cables should meet the standards
set out in ISO/IEC 11801–1: Information technology. Generic cabling for customer premises.
General requirements, and ISO/IEC 11801–3: Information technology. Generic cabling for
INSTALLATIONS
customer premises. Industrial premises.
M&E
Where necessary, cables should also be enclosed throughout their length in a protective
covering of material which has sufficient strength to resist mechanical damage, and is
ramped on both sides to avoid it becoming a trip hazard or impediment to wheelchair users.
Temporary electrical power cabling should meet the standards laid down in BS 7671:
Requirements for Electrical Installations. IET Wiring Regulations, and BS 7909: Code of practice
for temporary electrical systems for entertainment and related purposes.
Notwithstanding the above, alternative wiring systems may be acceptable; for example,
insulated cables in rigid PVC conduit which complies with the relevant British Standard.
However, PVC conduit or PVC served cables should not be used in confined areas (such as
catering outlets or emergency exit routes), because of their potential as a smoke hazard.
The use of PVC conduit should also be discouraged in exposed areas, because of its
susceptibility to vandalism.
Where wiring systems do not meet the above requirements, consideration should be given to
a phased programme of upgrading.
Contents
17.9 Lightning protection

Lightning protection for structures, both permanent and temporary, should be provided in
accordance with BS EN 62305: Protection against lightning. Risk management. The lightning
protection should be tested annually by competent persons, and a certificate supplied to
the ground management. Floodlighting towers should be bonded to earth in accordance
with BS EN 50575: Power, control and communication cables. Cables for general applications in
construction works subject to reaction to fire requirements.
17.10 Lighting
At all times when the natural light in any section of a ground that is accessible to spectators
and/or other people is insufficient, or if the ground is to be used in non-daylight hours,
adequate artificial lighting should be provided. This lighting should be sufficient to enable all
spectators to circulate around the ground in safety, particularly at entry and exit points and on
stairways. It should also be sufficient to illuminate all signs.
For the visual comfort of spectators, including those who are blind or partially sighted the
lighting level in spectator areas during non-daylight hours should be at least 20 lux.
Consideration should also be given to the level of lighting required for CCTV coverage to be
monitored satisfactorily (see Sections 16.20–16.26).
Further guidance is available from the series of Lighting Guides issued by the Chartered
Institute of Building Services Engineers.
For more information on emergency lighting, see Section 17.11, and BS EN 12193: Light and
Lighting. Sports Lighting, and BS EN 1838: Lighting Applications. Emergency Lighting.
17.11 Emergency lighting

Emergency lighting at a sports ground is provided first and foremost to ensure that, in the
event of a power failure, emergency egress, if necessary, can take place safely.
INSTALLATIONS
At sports grounds used to stage events in non-daylight hours, emergency lighting for use in
the event of a failure of the general lighting should be provided in all parts of the ground to
M&E
which spectators and staff have access, including along all exit and emergency egress routes,
with exit signs clearly illuminated.
The emergency lighting system should operate automatically on the failure of the normal
lighting system, and should be entirely separate and independent of the normal lighting
system, to ensure that a fault affecting one system does not affect the other.
Guidance on minimum levels of illumination required can be found in the document

Emergency Lighting Design Guide, issued by the Chartered Institute of Building Services
Engineers, and in BS 5266–1: Emergency lighting. Code of Practice for the Emergency Lighting of
Premises, and BS EN 1838: Lighting Applications. Emergency Lighting.
However, experience has shown that higher minimum levels are recommended in sports
grounds, as follows:
a. The emergency lighting should achieve a minimum of 5 lux at one metre above the floor
along all exit routes.
b. If the ground stages events that take place after sunset or last beyond sunset, all areas
of viewing accommodation should be fitted with emergency lighting to a level of at least
10 lux.
Contents
c. The system should enable the emergency lighting, along both exit routes and in areas of
spectator accommodation, to continue for a period of three hours from the time of failure
of the normal supply. This period of three hours is recommended because it allows the
management sufficient time to investigate the cause of the failure, to decide whether or
not it can be fixed and, if necessary, to organise an evacuation.
Emergency lighting at sports grounds should also meet the following requirements:
d. Unless, exceptionally, two entirely independent supplies can be obtained from outside
sources, the emergency circuit should be connected to a source of auxiliary power located
on the premises.
e. If a generator is used as the source of auxiliary power, it should be able to operate the full
emergency lighting load within not more than five seconds of start-up.
f. As an alternative form of emergency lighting, self-contained lamps that can function for at
least three hours are acceptable.
g. Consideration should be given to the emergency light levels required for CCTV systems to
operate satisfactorily (see Sections 16.20–16.26).
h. The emergency lighting system should be tested in accordance with BS 5266.
i. Monitoring systems should be in place, and annual tests and inspections carried out to
ensure that the operational standards required for the emergency lighting are satisfied.
j. Where emergency lighting systems are not separate from the normal lighting system,
a risk assessment should be carried out to determine the adequacy of the chosen system
in emergency conditions.
17.12 Auxiliary power

As stated in Sections 3.15 and 3.16, management should prepare contingency plans to cover
the possibility of a power failure. This should include provision for the supply of auxiliary
power, first and foremost to meet the safety needs of all those present at the ground, rather
INSTALLATIONS
than to provide the power needed to continue the event.
M&E
In addition, the supply of auxiliary power should be:
a. Installed, maintained and tested in accordance with the manufacturers’ written

instructions and relevant British Standards.
b. Located in a secure room or building to which the public does not have access, and which
is of a construction having a fire resistance which meets Building Regulations or any fire
engineering solutions in place, which In no case should be less than 30 minutes.
c. Sufficient to enable the ground’s emergency lighting, plus, where applicable, the public
address system, CCTV and all other safety-related electrical installations, to function for at
least three hours after the failure of the normal supply.
d. Independent of other wiring systems and should comply with BS 8519: Selection and
installation of fire-resistant power and control cable systems for life safety and fire-fighting
applications.
e. Capable of operating on the failure of a single phase.
f. Inspected and tested 24 hours before each event (see Section 5.9 and Figure 5).
For guidance on auxiliary power in the context of communications, see Section 16.34.
Contents
17.13 Passenger lifts and escalators

Passenger lifts and escalators should be maintained and tested in accordance with the
manufacturers’ written instructions and schedules and the relevant British Standards.
Ground management should be familiar with the Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment
Regulations 1998.
The following general requirements should be considered:
a. Lift alarms should be audible under event conditions.
b. For new lift installations, consideration should be given to providing a duplicate alarm in
the ground’s control point.
c. As stated in Section 10.15.d, a lift provided for passenger use in the normal operation of
the ground may only be used for evacuation purposes if it meets the requirements of an
evacuation lift as specified in the relevant British Standard, including that it should be able
to operate in reasonable safety when there is a fire in the building.
d. Where provided, a fire fighting lift may also be used for evacuation (see Section 10.15.e).
e. Among the recommendations for the protection of evacuation lifts, as required by the
relevant British Standard, the following points should be noted:
i. an evacuation lift should be situated within a protected enclosure consisting of the lift
shaft itself and a protected lobby at each storey served by the lift
ii. the protected enclosure should also contain an escape stair
iii. except for lifts serving two storeys only, evacuation lifts should be provided with a
switch which brings the lift to the final exit storey (usually ground level), isolates the
landing call buttons and enables an authorised person to take control
iv. the primary electrical supply should be obtained from a sub-main circuit exclusive to
the lift and should there should be a secondary supply from an independent main or
emergency generator, with an automatic switch to change over from one to the other
INSTALLATIONS
v. any electrical sub-station, distribution board or generator supplying the lift should be
M&E
protected from the action of fire for a period which meets Building Regulations or any
fire engineering solutions in place, and in no case should be less than 30 minutes.
17.14 Gas fired installations

All natural gas and LPG installations (see also Section 15.13.k), including heating and
cooking appliances, pipework and meters, should comply with current gas safety legislation,
as follows:
a. The Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998 – these cover matters relating
to meters, appliances, the pipework connecting appliances to meters, and allow only Gas
Safe registered installers to carry out work on these parts of gas installations.
b. The Pipelines Safety Regulations 1996 – these cover matters relating to service pipework
connecting meters to gas distribution mains.
Contents
17.15 Boilers and other heating devices

As stated in Section 15.13, rooms containing boilers may be considered as high risk fire
areas. For this reason, boilers (and other heating devices) should meet the following
requirements:
a. Boilers should be installed by a competent qualified person in accordance with the relevant
British Standard.
b. They should be housed in an enclosure having a fire resistance which meets Building
Regulations or any fire engineering solutions in place and which in no case should be less
than 60 minutes.
c. To prevent over-heating, boilers, generators, air heaters and other similar appliances
should be fitted with a fusible link or similar device that will automatically cut off
energy supplies.
d. Boiler or generator rooms should have adequate air supply for the safe operation
of the appliances, and be ventilated, in accordance with recommendations of
BS 6644: Specification for the installation and maintenance of gas-fired hot water boilers of
rated inputs between 70 kW (net) and 1.8 MW (net) (2nd and 3rd family gases).
e. The location of both combustion air intakes and ducts, and flue pipes and exhaust
systems for boilers and generators, should not prejudice the means of escape, and should
not cause a risk by emission into spectator accommodation.
f. Where it is necessary for ducts and pipes to pass through occupied areas, they should be
of the same fire resistance as the room to which they are connected.
17.16 Oil storage and supply

Oil storage and oil supply systems should comply with the relevant British Standard.
To reduce the risks on event days, the amount of oil stored within the boiler or generator
room should be limited to essential requirements.
INSTALLATIONS
17.17 Ventilation, air conditioning and smoke control systems
M&E
The installation of any mechanical ventilation, air conditioning or smoke control systems
should be subject to detailed design and installation by competent persons with the
appropriate qualifications and experience.
These systems should be included within the ground’s maintenance programme.
The provision of such systems will form an important part of any fire safety risk assessment
(see Section 15.7).
Where provided to help facilitate safe evacuation (for example, smoke extraction in a
concourse), they should be linked to an auxiliary power supply.
As stated in Section 17.12, this auxiliary power system should be independent of any other
wiring systems.
Contents
17.18 Water systems

Some sports grounds are fitted with water systems which, under certain circumstances,
have the potential to expose people to droplets of water that carry legionella bacteria.
These systems include hot and cold showers, spa pools and also hosepipes, sprinklers and
irrigation systems which, if fed by storage tanks or used in warm weather, can result in water
temperatures rising to levels which will encourage the growth of bacteria.
Management should therefore conduct a risk assessment to establish whether any of the
ground’s water supply or its system of distribution might carry any risk, and if so, what
preventative and controlling measures will be necessary.
Once undertaken, all such measures should be monitored and inspected as part of regular
maintenance schedule, for which records should be kept.
Detailed guidance and practical advice on how to manage this health risk can be found in
Approved Code of Practice (ACOP) L8 and Technical Guidance (HSG274), published by the
INSTALLATIONS
M&E
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 18.0 Medical and first aid provision
18.0 Medical and first

aid provision

The measures described in this Guide should, if followed, help to prevent a serious incident.
However, in order to discharge fully its safety responsibilities, ground management should
ensure that during events there is in place an appropriate level of medical care for all persons
present at the sports ground.
The level of this provision should firstly be determined by a Medical Needs Assessment, also
known as Medical Risk Assessment (see Sections 18.3 and 18.4), and should then be set
out in a Medical Plan, detailing the levels of medical and first aid provision appropriate to the
ground, its events and spectator profile (see Sections 18.5 and 18.6).
It is stressed that the recommendations in this chapter relate to the needs of all spectators,
staff and personnel at an event, and not to those of athletes, players or event officials, for
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
whom other medical arrangements should be in place, as determined by the relevant sports
governing body.
18.2 Medical Co-ordinator

Subject to the findings of the Medical Needs Assessment, it may be advisable for ground
management to assign to an individual the role of Medical Co-ordinator (also known as
Medical Manager). Reporting directly to the ground management, this individual should be:
a. a registered health care professional (HCP) with experience of leading a multi-disciplinary

team in a pre-hospital environment, such as a medical practitioner with unconditional GMC
registration, or
b. a registered nurse with unconditional Nursing and Midwifery Council (NMC) registration, or
c. a paramedic with unconditional Health and Care Professionals Council (HCPC) registration,
or
d. a healthcare manager/member of the Institute of Healthcare Management with the

relevant competency.
In order to implement the Medical Plan, ground management and the Medical
Co-ordinator should then either appoint the necessary healthcare professionals directly, or
commission medical services from one or more healthcare providers.
As part of this process, management will need to consider appointing or identifying one or
more additional individuals to serve in the role of Event Doctor, also known as the Crowd
Doctor (see Section 18.7).
Contents
At larger or more complex sports grounds, the Medical Co-ordinator will lead on operational
matters and oversee clinical standards, whilst the Event Doctor oversees the delivery of
medical care during events.
18.3 Medical Needs Assessment – consultation

As stated above, in order to determine the appropriate level of provision it is necessary for
the management to commission a Medical Needs Assessment. This should be carried out
by a competent person or medical provider, or, if already in post, by the Medical Co-ordinator
and/or Event Doctor. The assessment should be carried out in consultation with:
a. medical and first aid providers
b. the statutory ambulance service NHS trust or other NHS authority
c. ambulance providers registered with the Care Quality Commission (in England), or its
equivalent (for example the Care Inspectorate Wales, the Care Inspectorate in Scotland
or The Regulation and Quality Improvement Authority in Northern Ireland).
Where a safety certificate is in force this consultation should be made known to the
local authority.
18.4 Medical Needs Assessment – factors to consider

Clearly the medical and first aid provision of a sports ground will vary according to its
capacity, layout and complexity, and to the nature of the event or events taking place, the
profile of spectators and the current level of national security threat. As such, the Medical
Needs Assessment should take account of, but not be limited to, the following factors:
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
a. Physical factors:
i. the physical layout of the sports ground and its surroundings (including roads,
car parks and other features such as waterways and railway lines)
ii. the design of the ground
iii. the presence of upper tiers or extensive areas of spectator accommodation, the
access and egress routes serving these areas, and consequently, the potential need
to provide satellite first aid rooms or mobile first aid units and/or roving first aiders
iv. the presence of areas of standing accommodation or temporary demountable stands
v. the location of the ground control/ambulance control point, first aid posts,
and other key locations identified in the management’s contingency plans and
emergency procedures
vi. the type, operation and range of radio and other communication systems
(see Chapter 16).
b. Safety management factors:

i. the safety management structure and lines of communication
ii. the management’s contingency plans and emergency procedures
iii. the training and competency of medical personnel
Contents
iv. hazards or risks posed to spectators by the nature of the event being staged
v. historical data of treatments for injuries and medical conditions, including those
of similar events elsewhere.
c. Event specific factors:

i. the type and nature of the event
ii. the likely attendance and levels of crowd density
iii. the anticipated spectator profile (age, gender, spectators with disabilities)
iv. the anticipated crowd behaviour (including the possible effects of long queuing times,
and alcohol or drug use)
v. the timing and duration of the event
vi. the use of special effects
vii. the requirements of the sport’s governing body
viii. the likelihood of a player, athlete or event official needing treatment from medical
personnel commissioned by the ground management
ix. any event overlay
x. likely weather conditions.
18.5 Medical Plan – scope and personnel

As stated in Section 18.1, following the Medical Needs Assessment, management is
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
responsible for ensuring that a Medical Plan is drawn up. Depending on the capacity
and layout of the sports ground, this may be a single document or a series of documents.
Where necessary, the plan should be amended or supplemented to take into account
event specific needs.
When drawing up a Medical Plan, experience shows that it is increasingly necessary, especially
at large grounds, to respond to a wide range of medical needs during an event, from routine
first aid, minor illnesses and exacerbations of long term or pre-existing conditions to acute
illness or trauma related emergencies.
In order to provide such a range of cover the Medical Co-ordinator will need to oversee a
multi-disciplinary team, typically consisting of:
a. an agreed number of Event Doctors registered with the General Medical Council (see
Section 18.6)
b. an agreed number of paramedics registered with the Health and Care Professionals
Council (HCPC), including, where appropriate, Specialist Practitioners
c. an agreed number of registered nurses; that is, registered with the Nursing and Midwifery
Council (NMC) in a branch of registration appropriate for the likely spectator profile,
including, where appropriate, Specialist Practitioners
d. an agreed number of first aiders (see Section 18.12)
e. an agreed number of other healthcare professionals, if appropriate to the event.
Contents
All registered healthcare professionals fulfilling any of the above roles should be able
to demonstrate by experience and qualification the ability to operate in a sports ground
environment; for example they have undergone post registration training and hold
qualifications and have experience in pre-hospital care or event medicine.
It is the responsibility of the management, through the Medical Co-ordinator or Event Doctor,
to ensure that all members of the medical team receive training to familiarise them with the
layout of the sports ground and its medical and first aid facilities, taking into consideration
such factors as how to deal with incidents in crowded areas and how to extricate individuals
from all levels of stands or from large expanses of a seated bowl.
Where lifts are in place, this should include assessing their suitability for transporting injured
individuals on stretchers.
For further information on event-related medical provision see Bibliography.
18.6 Medical Plan – details

The Medical Plan should include details of the following:
a. the numbers, duties and location of all members of the medical team, taking into
consideration all relevant event specific factors (see Section 18.4.c)
b. the size, location and number of permanent or temporary first aid rooms and facilities
c. where appropriate, the deployment of mobile first aid units and/or of roving first aiders
d. the type, number and location of ambulances and their crew competencies
e. procedures for the pre-event inspection of medical facilities and equipment
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
f. the agreed safety management procedures for responding to, and managing incidents
which require a medical response
g. the command structure, lines of responsibility and decision making protocol within the
medical team (particularly where medical teams consist of multiple providers), including:
i. the establishment of clear lines of command and accountability
ii. call categorisation in response to incidents
iii. the allocation of resources in response to incidents
iv. the procedures for responding to, and assisting with a major incident
v. the triage and care of patients
vi. the identification of locations for casualty clearing stations, with flexibility to create a
different location in response to an incident
vii. the procedure for dealing with fatalities
h. the co-ordination and means of communication:
i. between members of the medical team
ii. between members of the medical team and the ground’s safety management team
iii. with medical providers outside the ground
Contents
i. the clear identification of all medical personnel, for example by the use of uniforms,
high visibility jackets or tabards
j. the recording of all medical equipment and materials required for the first aid room,
for any satellite first aid facilities, and for use in response kits carried by mobile or roving
medical and first aid teams (including portable major incident kits)
k. procedures for the procurement, replacement and safe disposal of such materials
and equipment
l. procedures for transferring individuals from specific areas of the ground, for example
from the upper tiers of large stands, or from camera gantries
m. procedures for the transport of patients to NHS services or other providers; including
travel times, turn around times and distances to local emergency departments, NHS Minor
Injuries Units and Walk-in Centres, and to the nearest specialist centres, such as major
trauma centres, stroke units, heart attack and paediatric centres
n. arrangements for the evacuation of disabled spectators, when medical assistance

is required
o. the provision of welfare facilities for medical service personnel
p. the identification of an appropriate rendezvous point for ambulances, and where

appropriate, a landing/rendezvous point for an air ambulance.
Although, as stated in Section 18.1, separate provision should be made for the medical needs
of spectators and staff on one hand, and of athletes, players and event officials on the other, it
may be acceptable for both sets of medical needs to be met within the same medical facility,
provided that there exists a clear statement in the Medical Plan setting out the operational
MEDICAL &
responsibilities of medical staff and the allocation of equipment and resources.
FIRST AID
In addition, ground management should have contingency plans in place whereby, in
response to extreme or major incidents, all available medical resources at the sports ground
and all responses are integrated.
The Medical Plan should be reviewed annually, and where there has been a serious
incident or a near miss event, the relevant sections of the Medical Plan should be reviewed and
updated prior to the annual review. The Medical Plan should also be reviewed should there be
any changes in medical providers or circumstances (for example an expansion
of the ground’s capacity).
At a sports ground where a safety certificate is in place, it is stressed that if the levels of
medical and first aid provision fall below those set out in the Medical Plan, the (S) factor
should be reduced accordingly.
18.7 Provision of Event Doctors and/or Event Practitioners

The requirement for an Event Doctor (also known as a Crowd Doctor) will depend on
the capacity of the ground, the likely attendance at the event, the spectator profile, and
on any other relevant factors identified by the medical needs assessment and set out
in the Medical Plan.
At events where the attendance is 2,000 or lower it is acceptable for there to be no Event
Doctor in place. However there should still be present a first aider (see Section 18.11) or an
Event Practitioner (as defined below).
Contents
For events where the attendance ranges between 2,000 and 10,000, it may be acceptable
to have in place either an Event Doctor or an event practitioner, if such a provision can be
substantiated within the Medical Plan.
At events where the attendance is expected to exceed 10,000, at least one Event Doctor and,
where appropriate, a sufficient number of event practitioners (as set out in the Medical Plan)
should be in place.
In respect of qualifications and training, the Event Doctor must:
a. be a Registered Medical Practitioner, with a current licence to practice, and have proof that
his or her pre-hospital work is reviewed annually via a mandatory appraisal process and
five-yearly revalidation process
b. hold the appropriate professional indemnity
c. have participated in one of the approved pre-hospital training courses and one of the
approved major incident courses
d. have participated in Major Incident Training and be trained to undertake major incident
triage of patients in line with ambulance service clinical guidelines
e. have proof of clearance from the relevant disclosure and barring service (DBS), Primary
Care Trust or equivalent organisation
f. have taken part in the testing of the management’s contingency plans.
On event days the Event Doctor should:
g. be in attendance prior to spectators being admitted and remain in position until all
spectators have left and he or she has been stood down by the Safety Officer
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
h. be aware of the location and staffing arrangements of the medical and first aid facilities,
and details of the ambulance cover
i. be aware of the local emergency plans for dealing with declared major incidents and how
these relate to contingency plans for the ground (see Sections 3.15 and 3.16)
j. wear a clear form of identification, such as a high visibility jacket or tabard
k. be primarily responsible for the medical care of spectators and staff (rather than
athletes, players or event officials, for whom other medical arrangements should be
in place, as determined by the relevant sports governing body).
During an event the whereabouts of the Event Doctor should be known to all members of the
medical team and to non-medical personnel in the ground’s control point, who should be able
to make immediate contact with him or her.
At events where an Event Practitioner is in attendance rather than an Event Doctor, that
practitioner should meet the requirements set out in paragraphs (b) to (e) above, and be
able to meet the responsibilities set out in paragraphs (g) to (k). Furthermore, this individual
should not have any other roles during the event, for example staffing an ambulance or
serving in the role of statutory ambulance officer (see Figure 33).
An Event Practitioner may be drawn from the pool of qualified, trained and certified
individuals who are registered with their licensing body (for example as an HCPC
paramedic or NMC registered nurse) and hold positions such as Specialist Paramedic,
Clinical Nursing Specialist, Emergency Care Practitioner, Specialist Practitioner Urgent
Care or Emergency Nurse Practitioner.
Contents
18.8 First aid room

Unless alternative arrangements for first aid have been made as a result of the medical
needs assessment, it is the responsibility of management to provide a room, or rooms,
for the provision of first aid and meeting the requirements set down in the Medical Plan.
This room – known also as the medical room – should be signposted and identified, and
should not be used for any other purpose (for example as a storeroom or staff room).
It should be equipped in consultation with the Medical Co-ordinator or Event Doctor(s),

the local ambulance service NHS trust and representatives of the relevant first aid provider.
Where a safety certificate is in force the local authority should be consulted.
a. Size
First aid rooms should meet the following requirements:
i. For grounds with a capacity of up to 15,000:
the floor area should be not less than 15 square metres and of usable proportions
(that is, not narrow or containing awkward corners, angles or support pillars)
the room should be large enough for an examination couch with privacy
screening, space to walk around, and an area for treating sitting casualties
ii. For grounds with a capacity of 15,000 or more:
the floor area should be not less than 25 square metres and of usable proportions
the room should contain two examination/medical couches with privacy screening,
space for people to walk around, and an area for treating sitting casualties
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
the room should be large enough to provide secure storage space for the
appropriate equipment and materials
b. Fittings and facilities

The first aid room should be fitted with:
i. heating, lighting, emergency lighting, ventilation and, if appropriate, air conditioning
ii. an auxiliary power supply to maintain lighting and equipment
iii. a stainless steel sink plus facilities for hand washing
iv. a supply of hot and cold water, plus drinking water with disposable cups
v. nearby, designated toilet facilities, which should be accessible to wheelchair users
vi. a worktop with a non porous, easy clean surface
vii. an examination/medical couch or couches (as detailed in Section 18.8.a above) fitted
with side restraints and ideally power operated
viii. a telephone line allowing internal and external communication
ix. where necessary, a robust, lockable cabinet for prescription only medicines,
and a store for additional first aid materials
x. foot-operated refuse containers, lined with disposable, clinical waste bags or

a container suitable for the safe disposal of clinical waste, plus foot-operated
containers for domestic waste
Contents
c. Location and design

The first aid room’s location and design should:
i. be easily accessible to both spectators and the emergency services and be positioned
as near as possible to a point of access for transport to hospital
ii. be clearly signposted throughout the ground, clearly identified by white lettering
or symbols on a green background, mounted against a strongly contrasting surface,
and its location known to all stewards and other members of staff
iii. be designed in such a way as to facilitate easy maintenance in a clinically clean

and hygienic condition, free from dust and with washable surfaces
iv. have clear approach routes and door(s) of a sufficient width to allow a stretcher,
ambulance trolley or wheelchair to enter or leave, with sufficient space for a
turning circle
v. include an area in close proximity where patients, relatives and friends can be
seated while waiting
vi. include a staff area for storing clothing and personal effects.
In sports grounds with, for example, large upper tiers or extensive areas of spectator
accommodation, consideration should be given to the provision of satellite first aid rooms,
unless provision has been made for mobile or roving first aid provision.
A suitable site should be identified as a backup first aid post in the event of the primary first
aid post becoming non-operational for any reason.
If there is any sharing or co-location of first aid or medical facilities with athletes, players
or event officials, the Medical Plan should set out how this sharing will work in practice
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
and, where a safety certificate is in place, these arrangements should be approved by the
appropriate authority.
For further guidance on the provision of first aid and treatment rooms see Bibliography.
18.9 Medical equipment and storage

As stated in Section 18.6, the Medical Plan will set out the procedures for the procurement,
replacement and safe disposal of materials and equipment required for the first aid room, for
any satellite first aid facilities, and for use by mobile or roving medical and first aid teams.
Management must ensure that all first aid, medical and technical equipment is supplied, in
date, serviced and re-certified in accordance with best practice and/or the manufacturers’
guidelines, and evidence of this displayed where it can be seen and checked by members of
the medical team.
Ground management should further ensure that automatic (AED) or semi-automatic

defibrillators, including those with monitoring and manual override capability as deemed
necessary, are provided at all events in accordance with the requirements of the Medical
Needs Assessment. If the management itself does not have defibrillators permanently on site,
it should ensure that they are supplied by the medical and/or first aid provider.
A more detailed checklist of the equipment and supplies recommended for first aid rooms
can be found in the online Annex E, available from the SGSA website.
Contents
18.10 First aid room – upkeep and inspection

Ground management is responsible for the upkeep and cleanliness of the first aid room
and should ensure that the room is cleaned prior to each use, and undergo further periodic
deep cleaning, according to the instructions of the Medical Co-ordinator or the Event Doctor.
A record of the cleaning schedule should be on display in the first aid room.
The medical provider should agree with the Medical Co-ordinator an inspection schedule
to ensure that the contents and equipment of all first aid rooms, and, where deployed,
any portable major incident kits, are checked and, if necessary, restocked prior to an event.
Care should also be taken to ensure that stock is replaced and safely disposed of once it
has reached its expiry date.
Arrangements should also be put in place for the safe disposal of clinical waste (including
sharp items) and non-clinical waste.
Management should also ensure that the first aid room, equipment and materials are
inspected before an event, in accordance with the Medical Plan.
All first aid facilities should also be available at any time for inspection by the ground
management and, where a safety certificate is in force, by the local authority.
18.11 First aiders – qualifications and competency

A first aider is a person who holds a current certificate in first aid competency, issued by
an organisation that meets the HSE guidelines on first aid training.
It is stressed however that such a qualification may not, in itself, be sufficient to prepare
an individual for the requirement of providing first aid in the kind of conditions likely to
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
exist at a sports ground.
It is therefore the responsibility of the management to ensure that first aiders can
demonstrate:
a. the maturity, character and temperament to carry out the duties required, including
the ability to cope with stressful and physically demanding emergency procedures
b. the ability to recognise and manage common conditions, as set out in the
First Aid Manual.
c. competency in basic life support as set out in the Resuscitation Council Guidelines
including the use of Automated External Defibrillators (AED)
d. competency in the manual handling or extrication of patients in a sports ground

environment (note that the number of first aiders required to be competent in this
regard should be established by the medical needs assessment)
e. evidence of training in the safeguarding of children and adults at risk
f. an ability to understand and communicate verbal and written instructions in English.
Management should also check that the first aider holds a certificate from the Disclosure
and Barring Service (DBS) or from an accredited umbrella organisation, in accordance with
government requirements.
Contents
18.12 First aiders – numbers

The number of first aiders required, and the locations in which they are stationed, will be
determined by the Medical Needs Assessment and/or the event specific risk assessment,
and set out in the Medical Plan. They should be sufficient in number and suitably distributed to
enable first aid to be administered without delay.
The following are minimum requirements.
a. No event should have fewer than two first aiders.
b. At grounds with seated accommodation only, when the anticipated attendance is between
3,000 and 10,000 (including staff), the ratio should be one extra first aider per additional
1,000 persons in attendance (that is, there should be 10 first aiders for 10,000 people).
Above an anticipated attendance of 10,000 (including staff), one extra first aider should be
provided per 2,000 (that is, there should be 15 first aiders for 20,000 people in total).
Where a large number of spectators persistently stand in seated areas, consideration

should be given to an increase in the number of first aiders in the area concerned following
a risk assessment, in accordance with (c) below.
c. At grounds with both seated and standing accommodation when the anticipated
attendance is between 3,000 and 20,000 (including staff), the ratio should be one extra
first aider per additional 1,000 persons in attendance (that is, there should be 20 first
aiders for 20,000 people). Above an anticipated attendance of 20,000 (including staff), one
extra first aider should be provided per 2,000 (that is, there should be 25 first aiders for
30,000 people in total).
d. Event specific factors other than event numbers (for example, weather conditions and the
type of event) should also be considered (see Section 18.4.c).
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
As is the case with all medical provision, the number of first aiders in place may differ from
the recommendations above only if the provision – for example based on alternative HCP
cover, or on patient data – can be substantiated by the medical needs assessment and is
recorded in the Medical Plan.
18.13 First aiders – role

First aiders should:
a. be in post at the ground prior to the commencement of the event (as defined in the
Glossary), unless the Medical Plan allows for the deployment of first aiders to be scheduled
to reflect the arrival of event staff and spectators during the event
b. be briefed prior to deployment as to their roles and responsibilities, including during any
emergency and evacuation procedures
c. be familiar with the ground’s medical/first aid room(s), and with key features of the ground,
such as stand names, ingress and egress routes
d. be able to respond immediately and rapidly to an emergency
e. remain in the location to which they have been allocated unless directed otherwise
f. not take on any other duties or responsibilities
g. remain in position until stood down by the Safety Officer
Contents
18.14 Ambulance provision

While the requirements for every event should be examined on an individual basis,
Figure 33 provides a general guide for the provision of ambulances. Ambulances should
be fully equipped and staffed to HCPC registered paramedic level and must be registered
with the Care Quality Commission (CQC) (in England), or its equivalent (for example the
Care Inspectorate Wales, the Care Inspectorate in Scotland or The Regulation and Quality
Improvement Authority in Northern Ireland).
However alternative arrangements may be deemed acceptable as explained in the notes

to Figure 33.
In all cases, the role of each ambulance present during an event should be clearly defined in
the Medical Plan, and where appropriate, in any event specific Medical Plan. For example, at
grounds where the medical provision is overseen from a multi-agency control point equipped
with the appropriate communications (see Section 18.15), it will not be necessary to provide
an ambulance for command and co-ordination purposes. However, where a paramedic level
ambulance serves as the base for command and co-ordination duties, it will be necessary to
provide an additional ambulance for the transport of patients.
The ambulances required by the Medical Plan may be supplied by:
a. the statutory ambulance service, or
b. a competent private medical provider, or
c. a competent voluntary sector organisation.
Note also that each ambulance should be at the sports ground at an agreed time prior to
the commencement of the event (as defined in the Glossary), unless the Medical Plan allows
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
for an alternative schedule. Similarly each ambulance should continue to be deployed until
informed by the Safety Officer.
Note that the levels of ambulance provision referred to in Figure 33 is in addition to that
required for athletes, players or event officials by the sport’s governing body.
18.15 Communications
Reliable radio communication should be provided on one or more channels between
the control point and all members of the medical services (see Section 16.14).
The Medical Plan should provide for one or more of the following to have access to
the control point:
a. a representative of the local ambulance service NHS Trust, if required

(see Section 18.14), and
b. a representative of the medical provider.
These individuals should be provided with working facilities and appropriate means of
communication, to include direct access to the Safety Officer. The Medical Co-ordinator
should also have access to the control point if this becomes necessary during the event.
As stated in Section 16.15.e, a key point telephone should be provided in the first aid room,
allowing direct communication with the control point. This telephone, or a second telephone,
should also allow for direct communications with external telephone lines, and should not
have to be routed via a switchboard.
Contents
Figure 33 Table showing ambulance provision according to

anticipated attendance
anticipated minimum number minimum number officer provided

attendance of HCPC paramedic of support vehicles by the statutory
level ambulances 1 provided by statutory ambulance authority 4
ambulance authority
5,000 – 10,000 one 2 – one
10,000 – 25,000 one – one
25,000 – 45,000 one one major incident one

response vehicle
+
one control unit 3
45,000 + two one major incident one

response vehicle
+
one control unit 3
Notes to Table
1. In addition to the minimum ambulance provision, non HCPC paramedic ambulances may
be provided for the purposes of transferring to hospital patients who do not require the
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
presence of a healthcare professional.
2. For anticipated attendances of 5–10,000 it might not be necessary for a HCPC paramedic
level ambulance to be in attendance, if alternative provision can be substantiated within the
Medical Plan (for example, in respect to the level of HCP cover, medical facilities, equipment
and treatment capability, or if a medical provider is able to station a paramedic level
ambulance within an agreed distance of the ground).
3. For anticipated attendances of over 25,000 it may not be necessary for a major incident
response vehicle and control unit to be present, if it can be demonstrated and agreed in the
Medical Plan that a combination of the ground’s own medical facilities and equipment, and
those of the NHS Ambulance Service in the vicinity, are sufficient to respond to a major
incident at the ground.
4. For anticipated attendances of over 5,000 a statutory ambulance officer – who should
be suitably trained and experienced – must be in place unless an alternative arrangement
is agreed and provided for in the Medical Plan. Before considering any such alternative
arrangement, however, ground management should take into account the operational
role and functions of a statutory ambulance officer. For example, in the event of a serious
incident a statutory ambulance officer will have the capability and command structure
to build rapidly on existing resources in order to ensure the protection, treatment, care
and medical evacuation of any casualties. Furthermore, in the event of a major incident
being declared, access to NHS resources may be delayed if no statutory ambulance
officer is present.
For more guidance on ambulance provision see Section 18.14.
Contents
18.16 Planning for emergencies and major incidents

As stated in Chapter Three, contingency plans and the Medical Plan drawn up by the
management must be integrated with any emergency plans or major incident plans
prepared by the local emergency services (see Sections 3.16 and 3.20).
In addition, in respect to emergency planning these contingency plans and the Medical
Plan should reflect the current public health emergency response plans or civil contingency
plans in place at a national level. These plans should be reviewed annually and reflect any
current threats.
Consultation should therefore take place between ground management, the police, fire
and ambulance services, and the local authority, in order to produce an agreed plan of
action for all foreseeable incidents. For example, within the emergency plan there should
be identified areas for dealing with multiple casualties, plus access and egress routes
and a rendezvous point for emergency service vehicles.
Copies of the emergency plan for the sports ground should be available in the control point
and in the medical/first aid room(s) at the ground.
All medical and first aid personnel should also be aware of their roles within the plan, as well
as the roles that will be undertaken by the statutory ambulance service on arrival.
In the event of a declared major incident, all medical, ambulance and first aid staff will come
under the command of the senior ambulance service NHS trust officer.
Therefore where the medical provider at the ground is from the private or voluntary sector,
there should, in the event of a declared major incident, be a clear protocol governing the
handover process to the statutory ambulance service NHS trust.
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
All parties to the medical provision at the ground should be involved in the testing of
any relevant contingency plans.
18.17 Inspections and records

a. Before the start of the event
Management should ensure that:
i. all medical staff as set out in the Medical Plan are present, and at their posts
ii. they are properly briefed as to the specific nature and requirements of the event
iii. they are familiarised with their location in the ground, and provided with a ground plan
iv. they are familiarised with the radio equipment and protocols in place for radio
communication, and have tested the radios prior to the public being admitted
to the ground
v. all medical/first aid equipment and materials are in place, and where appropriate,
in working order, as required by the Medical Plan
vi. the agreed ambulance provision is in place.
Contents
b. During and after the event

Management should ensure that:
i. first aiders remain in position until stood down by the Safety Officer
ii. the Medical Co-ordinator and/or Event Doctor, first aiders and ambulance officers
should participate in a de-briefing, with their comments and any follow-up actions
being communicated to the management
iii. a record is kept of the numbers and posts of all first aiders, ambulance personnel
and HCPs in attendance at the event, plus the names of the Medical Co-ordinator
and Event Doctor in attendance
iv. a record is kept of all first aid treatments and medical diagnoses provided during the
event (while preserving medical confidentiality), showing the onward destination of
casualties; that is, whether they remained at the event, returned home, went to hospital
or to their own family doctor
v. these records should include:
the type of injury sustained or medical problem encountered
the location of the person when they sustained their injury or reported
their medical problem
what the person was doing at the time of the incident

(for example, standing in a seated area or standing on a seat)
whether the injury/incident was a result of a pre-existing medical condition
vi. all records kept should made available to the management and kept readily available
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
for inspection, where appropriate, by the relevant authorities (subject to medical
confidentiality, as required by the Caldecott Principles)
vii. in addition to the aforementioned records, management is also responsible for

reporting certain incidents, injuries or illnesses sustained at the ground, under the
Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations (RIDDOR).
18.18 Medical Advisory Group

At many sports grounds, safety management procedures are subject to the regular oversight
of a Safety Advisory Group (SAG). At larger or more complex sports grounds it may also be
advisable to form a Medical Advisory Group (MAG) to oversee medical and first aid provision
and to report to the SAG.
Figure 34 illustrates the relationship between the SAG and MAG and the various
issues that fall within the remit of a MAG; for example logistical and clinical issues, medical
and ambulance provision, liaison with the emergency services, training and annual reviews,
and any other issues that may be relevant locally, or in relation to specific sports or events.
Contents
Figure 34 Role and responsibilities of Medical Advisory Group
SAFETY ADVISORY GROUP
zz local and certifying authority
zz ground management / Safety Officer
zz emergency services / other relevant parties
MEDICAL ADVISORY GROUP
zz Medical Co-ordinator
zz Event Doctor(s)
zz Safety Officer
zz medical and first aid providers
zz local NHS Ambulance Service
zz stewards’ representative
MEDICAL PLAN AND CONTINGENCY PLANS
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
zz medical and first aid facilities major incident plan
zz table top exercises commissioning contract monitoring
PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS AND EDUCATION
zz monitoring of services training professional indemnity
zz appraisal / revalidation simulation training during events
zz the recording of all qualifications, training courses and

Continuing Professional Development held or undertaken
by all members of the medical team
ACCIDENT MANAGEMENT
zz reporting and recording of accidents
zz subsequent investigations
zz accident / treatment trend analysis
Contents
MEDICAL &
FIRST AID
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds 19.0 Media provision
19.0 Media provision

As stated in Section 1.4, the ground management is responsible for ensuring the safety and
security of all people present at the ground during an event. This includes press reporters,
commentators, presenters, camera operators, photographers and all production personnel
working for media companies within the ground.
Management is also responsible for ensuring that the activities of these media personnel do
MEDIA
not interfere with, nor negate the normal safety operation of the ground, nor put at risk the
safety, security, comfort or viewing standards of spectators.
At the same time, media providers are responsible for the health and safety of their own staff
and sub-contractors during an event.
For this reason, the ground management, media providers and, where appropriate, the event
organisers, should liaise before events to ensure that, even when no direct contractual
agreement exists between the parties, the appropriate risk assessments are developed,
and the health and safety duties and responsibilities of each party are clearly defined,
documented and communicated to each other.
Guidance on the safety implications of broadcasting sports events is available from the
19.2 Pre-event planning and briefing

Management should ensure that all arrangements for media installations and coverage –
sometimes referred to as the Media Plan or Media Overlay – are agreed with all the relevant
parties in good time before the event, and that the ground’s Safety Officer is able to prepare
pre-event briefings accordingly.
Where appropriate, plans for media overlay may also need to be discussed and, where
a safety certificate is in force, agreed with the local authority, at a pre-determined period
before the event.
Media companies must provide management, in advance, with:
a. a risk assessment
b. a method statement, outlining the construction processes to be followed for each

temporary media installation
Contents
c. design calculations for each temporary media installation
d. a Media Plan, setting out the location of each temporary media installation.
In addition, ground management should ensure that all media provision, whether
permanent or temporary, is included within its own site specific, or event specific risk
assessment (see Sections 3.3.d, 15.7 and 18.3).
Also in advance, the management should inform all media companies of the radio
frequencies intended for use during an event by the management and other users
of radios, in order to avoid interference with ground communication systems.
Pre-event planning and briefing should include arrangements for any pre-event, mid-event
or post-event entertainments. Details of these arrangements should be recorded.
If appropriate, management should assign one member of the ground’s safety team to liaise
with media personnel, and for monitoring media activities during the event.
If any media provision results in restricted views in any areas of viewing accommodation,
tickets for those areas should be sold in line with management’s policies relating to restricted
views (see Section 12.6).
As part of the management’s pre-event briefing, any media personnel not familiar with the
ground’s evacuation procedures, or the relevant requirements and conditions of any safety
certificate, should be briefed by the Safety Officer or their nominee.
MEDIA
19.3 Media installations – design and management
Media installations at sports grounds may include outside broadcast vehicles, studios,
stages, display screens, loudspeaker systems and cabling, and also gantries or platforms
for cameras and commentators (see Section 19.4).
When planning and inspecting media installations before an event, management should
consider the following:
a. An on-site traffic and parking plan should be developed to ensure that media-related
vehicles and installations do not obstruct ingress or egress routes used by spectators
or emergency vehicles.
b. Cables should not run along or across gangways, or passageways, or otherwise obstruct
the movement of spectators or create a trip hazard. Where laid in front of pitch perimeter
exits or any gates accessing the area of activity, cables should be buried or installed in a
cable ramp or duct which should be robust, have adequate drainage and not prevent the
opening of the gate. The use of loose laid rubber matting should be avoided.
It is also preferable for cables to be flown using catenary wires or similar devices.
c. Before the event, and particularly when temporary media installations are to be erected (as
detailed in Section 5.9), management should inspect all such installations to ensure that
they are constructed and located as proposed in the documentation outlined in Section
19.1, and do not block or restrict views in any areas for which tickets have been sold.
It is also emphasised that, as stated in Section 14.2, management is responsible for

any demountable structure erected at the sports ground. Management cannot delegate
the responsibility to the event promoter or to the media providers, the designers of the
structure, or to the contractors responsible for assembling the structure.
Contents
d. If a public address system is imported for a specific media presentation, both the
management and the media provider should ensure that its output does not interfere
with the ground’s own public address system or with the radios used by stewards
and the emergency services.
Provision should also be made – normally in the ground’s safety control point –
for an override switch, so that the imported PA system can be interrupted if necessary.
e. Media screens should follow the recommendations of the Standing Committee on

Structural Safety (SCoSS), set out in Topic Paper SC/08/008: Risk Issues Associated
with Large TV/Video Screens at Public Events.
New construction
It is recommended that the designs of new sports grounds or areas of spectator
accommodation take into full consideration the requirements of media providers; for example,
for the concealed routing of cabling, and for the avoidance of viewing restrictions when
planning camera positions, and any temporary installations.
All new power, control and communication cables need to meet BS EN 50575: Power, control
and communication cables. Cables for general applications in construction works subject to
reaction to fire requirements.
MEDIA
19.4 Gantries and platforms for cameras and media personnel
Owing to their positioning, often above or overlooking areas of viewing accommodation,
gantries and platforms provided for cameras and media personnel require special
consideration. It should further be noted that the safety of personnel working on them
is a legal requirement under the Working at Height Regulations 2005 (as amended),
under the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974.
Comprehensive guidance and advice on working at heights and safety in broadcasting can be
found on the HSE website. However, in the context of sports grounds, the following additional
issues are of note concerning gantries and platforms for cameras and media personnel:
a. They should be designed and positioned so as
i. not to obscure the views of spectators
i. not to obstruct ingress or egress routes.
b. They should be designed and constructed to be robust and secure, with no loose
elements (such as boards or rails), and should meet the requirements set out in the
Working at Height Regulations 2005 (as amended), under the Health and Safety at
Work etc. Act 1974.
c. If constructed using scaffolding, they should meet the recommendations made by the
Institution of Structural Engineers (see Section 14.5).
d. Any ladders used for accessing gantries or platforms should be fit for purpose, and access
to them be protected from spectators.
e. Gantries and camera platforms should be fitted with toe boards that measure a minimum
of 150 mm in height and are sufficiently illuminated, under normal and emergency
conditions.
Contents
f. In order to prevent objects falling onto spectators they should be fitted with appropriate
protective measures, such as netting and cables, to secure camera equipment.
g. Personnel working on gantries or platforms should undergo training to ensure that

whatever other safety measures are in place – such as netting, guard rails and toe boards
– they minimise the risk of objects falling, such as tools, camera lenses and clipboards.
h. In certain circumstances and following a risk assessment, it may be appropriate to provide

safety harnesses for personnel working in gantries, and for those personnel to be trained
in the use of such harnesses.
i. The management’s evacuation plan should take into account the potential need for media
personnel to escape from gantries or platforms.
19.5 Overhead suspended cameras and UAVs

It is increasingly common for broadcast providers to use overhead suspended cameras,
and unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), also known as drones, for their coverage of events at
sports grounds. In such instances, it is the responsibility of the media company to provide the
ground management with a site-specific risk assessment and to ensure compliance with the
relevant requirements of health and safety and those of the Civil Aviation Authority.
At the same time, it is the responsibility of the ground management to ensure that the use of
MEDIA
such devices does not interfere with, nor negate the normal safety operation of the ground,
nor compromises the safety or security of all those present at the ground.
In addition, management should include within its contingency planning consideration of the
potential safety and security hazards arising from the loss of control, failure or disintegration
of such devices, particularly over areas of viewing accommodation.
19.6 Roving media personnel

Management should make provision for the positioning of photographers, camera operators
and any other roving media personnel, so as to ensure that the sightlines of spectators are
not restricted more than momentarily.
Stewards should be instructed to move any media personnel whose activities create
obstructions to either spectators’ views or to the safety management operation.
19.7 Identification
All media personnel should be provided with specific event day security passes showing
those areas which they are permitted to access.
In addition, all roving media personnel should be clearly identified, for example by colour
coded tabards bearing the appropriate wording (such as ‘media’, ‘photographer’ or ‘broadcast
unit’), in such a way that their clothing cannot be confused with that of the stewards or other
safety personnel.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Summary of new guidance
Summary of new guidance
This section summarises the key areas in which this, the sixth edition of the Guide to Safety
at Sports Grounds, differs from the fifth edition, published in 2008.
Note that this summary is not comprehensive and in all cases reference should be made to the
full text of the Guide.
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
General issues (summarised further in Section 1.9)
Management responsibility is extended throughout the Guide from ‘all spectators’ to ‘all people
present’ at the ground (including sports ground staff, sub-contracted staff, media personnel, medical
providers and so on). It also includes the safety of players, athletes and event officials in all respects
other than injuries sustained as a result of the sporting activity. This wider concern includes factoring
in staff and other personnel when calculating the capacity of emergency exit routes.
New guidance is offered for the co-ordination of circulation and movement in the area immediately
beyond the outer perimeter of the sports ground, an area described as Zone Ex.
This edition takes fuller account of the need to understand, monitor and control crowd
densities on circulation routes and on concourses, and acknowledges the increasing use
of crowd simulation modelling.
This edition provides additional guidance on counter terrorism and, in addition to normal and
emergency egress, introduces the category of exceptional egress, a category that includes such
contingencies as lockdown, partial lockdown, partial evacuation and invacuation.
The Guide takes into account the greater use of fire engineering in the design process.
The Guide recognises the increased use of, and dependence on, digital technology.
More emphasis is placed on the risk of potential slip hazards caused by rainwater and other sources
of contamination arising from the provision of partial cover, or from having no cover.
All Annexes and Worked Examples are now located on the SGSA website (see Contents page).
Recognition is made of the need to present visual information (such as signage, tickets, maps, display
boards and safety-related documentation), in a form that should not be misunderstood by people with
colour vision deficiency, or colour blindness. A new online Annex C (available via the SGSA website)
offers further guidance.
All references to British Standards, Building Regulations and other advisory documents have been
updated, and in the digital edition provided with hyperlinks.
Contents
1.0 How to use this Guide

1.2 Definition of event
A new definition of the term ‘event’ has been introduced (see Glossary).
A sports ground with a roof that opens and closes is considered to fall within the
jurisdiction of the Safety of Sports Ground Act 1975, even when some of the events
it hosts are staged under a closed roof.
1.3 Objectives
The objectives of the Guide now encompass the Council of Europe Convention on how
to apply good practice in respect of safety, security and service levels in the design and
management of new grounds or of newly constructed sections of grounds.
The definition of safety is extended to include a concern for security.
1.5 Reasonable aims and flexibility
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
Increased emphasis is placed on the need to take into account the type, function and
layout of the sports ground and the nature of the event itself. This is in recognition
that the requirements of spectators at horse or greyhound racing tracks, for example,
are in many instances fundamentally different from those attending grounds used for
football or rugby.
1.6 Recommendation to read all sections
Users of the Guide are encouraged to familiarise themselves with all sections of the
document, not only those in which they have a particular interest.
1.7 Definition of ‘new construction’
A revised definition of what is meant by ‘new construction’ is provided.
2.0 Calculating the safe capacity of a sports ground

2.3 Calculation of emergency exit capacity
In addition to spectators this figure should now include all other people present.
2.9 Standing accommodation – appropriate density
Although a density of 47 persons per 10 square metres remains the upper limit,
lower densities in the range of 40-47, or even lower, should be considered, taking
into account prevailing conditions and other event specific factors.
2.13 Exit widths
These should now factor in the numbers not only of spectators but of all
people present.
3.0 Management – responsibility and planning for safety

3.2 Board responsibility
The issue of safety at the ground should form a standing item on the agenda of every
board or management meeting.
3.4 Operations Manual
Guidance is provided on the drawing up of an Operations Manual.
Contents
3.18 Counter terrorism and security overlay

Sections 3.18 and 3.19 offer more detailed guidance on contingency and emergency
planning, and on the requirement for security overlays not to compromise spectator
safety.
3.21 Training and exercises
Greater emphasis is provided on the need for regular training and exercises.
3.22 Safety audit
This section now provides greater detail on what an audit should cover.
3.27 Crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour
It is recommended that management draw up a Crowd Disorder and
Anti-Social Behaviour Plan, setting out clearly defined procedures for reducing,
responding to and dealing with incidents.
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
3.28 Safeguarding
Management is required to have in place a Safeguarding Plan to provide for the needs
of certain categories of spectators, such as children, young persons and adults at risk,
who may be unaccompanied or attending in large numbers. Staff working with such
spectators, and individuals providing medical care, should undergo checks by the
relevant disclosure and barring service.
3.30 Ticketing strategy
A series of indicative questions are provided to assist management in drawing up
and operating an effective and transparent Ticketing Strategy. These include the
need for strategies towards concessionary tickets and the admission of children
(accompanied and unaccompanied).
3.35 Test events
Additional guidance is provided on the staging of test events for new grounds,
or new sections of grounds.
3.36 Event management plan
As part of the Operations Manual, management is advised to draw up an Event
Management Plan template for use as the basis of event specific documents,
setting out in detail the operational procedures required for the safe management
of the event.
3.37 Awareness of legislation
In addition to health and safety legislation, it is recommended that management
also maintains an awareness of its obligations under legislation concerning fire
safety and equalities.
3.41 Safety management and the (S) factor
Management is reminded that its own performance in safety related matters will
have a direct effect on the calculation of the sports ground’s capacity.
Contents
4.0 Management – stewarding

4.10 Stewards’ training
More detailed and updated guidance (summarised in a flow chart in Figure 4)
is provided, including a requirement for stewards to have attended four events at
a sports ground, partnered by a qualified and experienced steward, before being
deployed unaccompanied. Also now recommended is training in safeguarding,
equality and diversity, customer service, communication techniques, disability
awareness and security/counter terrorism awareness.
4.11 Stewards’ supervisors
It is recognised that supervisors should be trained to a higher level, including training
in the delivery of cascaded safety briefings.
4.12 Stewarding plan
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
Management is now responsible for drawing up a Stewarding Plan for each event
and ensuring that not only are sufficient stewards deployed, but also that certain
roles are filled by suitably trained and experienced individuals.
4.21 Security personnel
New guidance is provided on legislation relating to stewards or other personnel,
such as CCTV operators who undertake licensable conduct.
5.0 Management – structures, installations and components

5.2 Maintenance and the (P) factor
Management is reminded that any deviations from the written instructions provided by
the designer or manufacturer of any structures, installations or components should be
recorded in a List of Deviations, and that this list should form part of the management’s
annual review of the ground’s (P) factor.
5.4 Structures
In addition to all existing safeguards, the designers of new structures should be able
to provide evidence of their competency, while the principal designer, as defined in the
Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015, should be identified and
agreed with the sports ground management.
5.9 Inspections and tests – 48 hours pre event and event day
Guidance on pre-event inspection and tests has been updated (for example to take
into account potential security alerts), and extended to a period of 48 hours (up from
24 hours). A new checklist is provided in Figure 5.
5.12 Annual inspections
These have been extended to include backup systems, water storage and air
conditioning systems.
5.15 Plans and specifications
It is recommended that for security purposes, careful consideration should be given
to how plans are stored and recorded, and how their distribution, or access to them,
might be controlled.
Contents
6.0 Circulation – general

6.1 Planning and management of circulation
The more widespread use of technological aids, such as CCTV and PA systems,
and of crowd simulation modelling, is acknowledged.
Greater emphasis is placed on the need to consider spectators’ arrival and departure
patterns, and the impact of external constraints.
6.2 Creating a balanced system
Recognition is given to the differing patterns of circulation that occur during different
periods of an event, and of the need for monitoring and managing. Greater emphasis
is placed on the need to provide a free flowing exit system.
6.6 Flow rates and crowd densities
New guidance is offered on the need for management to observe, monitor and
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
understand the impact of differing flow rates and crowd densities in different parts
of the ground and at different times during an event, according to the type of event,
prevailing conditions and the spectator profile.
6.7 Crowd simulation modelling
Recognition is given to the use of crowd simulation modelling but also to how it may
result in data that differs from static calculations.
6.8 Circulation routes and accessibility
New guidance is provided on the accommodation of disabled spectators, taking into
consideration new codes of practice, advisory documents and British Standards.
6.10 Zone Ex co-ordination and staffing
Sections 6.10 and 6.11 offer new guidance on the need for management to
co-ordinate with the relevant agencies and authorities when managing crowds
and circulation in the area beyond the boundaries of the sports ground,
described as Zone Ex (also known as ‘the last mile’).
6.13 Circulation and overlay
New guidance is provided for the planning and management of event-related
temporary installations (such as ‘fan zones’, tents or pedestrian bridges) and other
temporary or permanent changes to circulation routes and approach roads.
7.0 Circulation – Ingress

7.2 The need to count
New guidance is provided on counting spectators who pass through entry points other
than metered turnstiles.
7.3 Monitoring systems and record keeping
Additional guidance is provided on the monitoring of entry systems, and on
communications between entry points and the control point, and on record keeping.
Contents
7.8 Design and management of entry points and ingress routes

Where a free flowing circulation area leads to a bank of entry points, consideration
should now be given to the division of the approaches into channels (or queue
pre-selection routes) using moveable barriers.
7.12 Searching and security screening
Illustrative statistics are provided in Figure 7 showing the rates at which spectators
may be screened for security purposes, and how this might affect rates of entry.
8.0 Circulation – vertical

8.3 Stairways – design
For the benefit of people who are blind or partially sighted the use of tactile
paving (also known as corduroy) is recommended on the top and bottom treads
NEW GUIDANCE
of external stairways.
SUMMARY OF
8.6 Radial gangways – design
It is now recommended that a radial gangway which exceeds 25 degrees, should
consist of no more than 40 seat rows and be provided with handholds or grab rails at
the sides or a central handrail with gaps that permit spectator crossover.
8.15 Stairways and escalators – run on and run off space
Consideration should be given to the provision of run off space at the head
and foot of stairways and escalators, and for that space to be in addition to any area
used for circulation.
8.16 Ramps
Where ramps are provided a sufficient number of intermediate, level landings will be
required for wheelchair users and their companions.
9.0 Circulation - concourses and vomitories

This chapter now offers greater detail on the design and management of concourses, and on
the need to monitor and manage circulation routes passing through concourses, especially at
times of peak usage.
9.3 Concourses – design
New sections are offered on wayfinding and signage, on fire safety, and on wall and
barrier loadings.
9.4 Concourses – size, capacity, occupancy and density levels
New advice is provided on how to plan and design concourses in order to be able to
accommodate 50 per cent of the capacity of the spectator area that the concourse
serves. In Figures 10 and 11, diagrams and a table are provided to illustrate varying
density levels.
9.5 Concourses – management
The following topics are covered in new or more detailed sections: stewarding; CCTV
coverage; monitors and screens; servicing, cleaning and litter collection; safety
stations; smoking; the use of external areas as concourses, and pyrotechnics.
Contents
9.6 Concourses – prevention of overcrowding

More detailed advice on the prevention of overcrowding is provided, including
the use of CCTV monitoring and crowd simulation modelling.
9.7 Concourses – fire safety
This expanded section brings together a number of recommendations for the
protection of emergency exit routes, fire resistance levels and smoke extraction.
9.9 Vomitory widths
This new section offers advice on how to calculate the width of a vomitory in order
to safely accommodate the number of spectators likely to use that vomitory for
ingress and egress.
9.10 Vomitory control measures
This section and new Figure 12 describe how design measures can help to control the
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
flow of spectators as they enter the vomitory. For new construction the recommended
minimum height of barriers around and in front of vomitories is set at 1.1m.
10.0 Circulation – egress

10.2 Types of egress
Taking into account the need for a heightened awareness of security, this edition of the
Guide introduces the concept of exceptional egress; a category distinct from normal, or
emergency egress and one which includes such contingencies as phased evacuation,
partial or zonal evacuation, directional evacuation and invacuation.
10.3 Exit routes – a definition
Greater clarity is offered on the definition of an exit route – that is, it does not
commence at any point within the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) but at the
point at which spectators enter a vomitory, concourse or corridor (Zone 3).
A new diagram, Figure 13, illustrates how, under normal conditions, spectators
should need to take no more than eight minutes to travel from their seat or place in
the viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to reach the start of that exit route (in Zone 3).
Figure 13 also illustrates emergency egress times.
10.10 Flow rates – calculations
It is emphasised that basing the design of a circulation route on a flow rate of
fewer than 82 spectators per metre width per minute will achieve more comfortable
circulation, and that flow rates may be affected by changes of direction along the exit
routes, and, in the case of stairways, may be reduced if the movement is upwards.
It is further acknowledged that crowd simulation modelling might offer a more
thorough evaluation of movement patterns.
10.11 Zone 2 travel time – normal
For greater clarity, the time for calculation purposes that it should take under normal
conditions for spectators to proceed from their seat or place within the viewing
accommodation (Zone 2) and enter a free flowing exit route (normally Zone 3) has
been named the ‘Zone 2 travel time’. In previous editions this part of the egress
process was not identified separately and was therefore often confused with the
overall normal egress time, which starts in Zone 3. New Figure 13 illustrates this
distinction.
Contents
10.15 Emergency and exceptional egress – disabled spectators

This section, previously located at Section 15.17, offers more detailed guidance on the
design and management of refuges. Where the evacuation of wheelchair users is via a
lift, the evacuation plan should consider the loading and return times of lifts.
10.20 Electronic securing systems
To safeguard against unauthorised attempts to open gates, new systems should
comply with BS EN 13637.
11.0 Barriers and separating elements

Fig 14 Horizontal imposed loads for barriers
Formerly Table 11.1, this now includes independent barriers placed in front of seats,
and seats incorporating barriers.
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
It is noted that barrier baseplates and fastenings, as well as barrier foundations,
should be designed to resist overturning moments and sliding forces.
Recommended loadings for infill panels are now cited.
Where children are likely to be in attendance, barriers situated next to, or in the middle
of open wells or open spaces should be designed so that there are no openings large
enough for a 100mm sphere to pass through.
Former Tables 11.2 and 11.3 are now Figures 15 and 16 respectively.
11.4 Support from adjacent construction
Designers shall ensure that any construction or structure acting as support for a
barrier is of necessary strength and stability to sustain all loads applied to the barrier.
11.6 Barriers and sightline considerations
Barriers around vomitories should be 1.1m high. Even if they obstruct views, safety
should take priority before considering deviating from this recommendation,
particularly where there is a risk of spectators falling from a height.
11.17 Barriers and separating elements in concourses and exit routes
More detailed guidance is provided on the loadings for barriers and separating
elements that are subject to crowd loading within concourses, corridors, doorways
and exit routes. These are illustrated in a new diagram, Figure 21.
11.18 Other barriers and separating elements
External perimeter barriers should be designed to minimise the risk of individuals
passing objects such as flares, bottles or used tickets into or out of the ground.
If the infill of an external perimeter barrier provides protection from falling,
the uniformly distributed load on the surface of infill should be 2 kN/m2.
12.0 Spectator accommodation – seating

Fig 22 Sightlines for seated spectators (formerly Diagram 12.1)
In most situations ‘C’ values in the range of 90–120mm should now be provided.
12.8 Gangways in seated areas – general requirements
The requirement that no spectator should have to travel more than 30m from their
seat in order to enter an exit system is no longer in force.
Contents
12.10 Radial gangways in seated areas

The maximum gradient of seating rows is raised from 34 degrees to 35 degrees.
A radial gangway which exceeds 25 degrees should consist of no more than 40 seat
rows and be provided with handholds or grab rails on the sides or a central handrail
with gaps that permit spectator crossover.
12.12 Seating row depths and seat dimensions
The preferred seating row depth for new construction has increased from 700mm to
800mm.
A minimum seat height of 400mm is now required, with a recommended height
of 450mm. Taller seats are to be subject to a site-specific risk assessment and
monitoring.
A minimum seat depth of 350mm is now required, with a recommended depth
NEW GUIDANCE
of 400mm.
SUMMARY OF
12.18 Amenity or easy access seats
New guidance is provided on seating for people who require more space or who
have limited mobility.
12.19 Seats with independent barriers, or incorporating barriers
Sections 12.19 – 12.23 offer new guidance on the provision, design and management
of seats with independent barriers, and of seats incorporating barriers, further
illustrated in Figures 26 and 27.
13.0 Spectator accommodation – standing

13.4 Provision for wheelchair users
This new section recommends the provision of spaces for wheelchair users and their
companions in areas of standing accommodation, including, where appropriate, in
areas allocated to visiting supporters.
13.24 Provision for children and adults at risk
Attention is drawn to the need to draw up a strategy where large numbers of children
are standing apart from parents or carers.
14.0 Spectator accommodation – demountable structures

The term ‘temporary’ is now superceded in the majority of instances by ’demountable’,
on the basis that the length of time that a structure is in place at a sports ground
is immaterial.
14.3 Regulations concerning demountable structures
Reference is made to the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015.
14.5 Design checks and inspections
More detailed guidance on design checks and inspections is provided.
A checklist for the approval of demountable structures by the appropriate authority
is now provided in online Annex D (available via the SGSA website).
Contents
14.6 Design performance and suitability

This new section considers accidental damage, dynamic loading, foundations,
anchors and kentledges, wind and protection.
14.7 Hospitality units, tents and marquees
New sections 14.7 and 14.8 provide additional guidance.
15.0 Fire safety

New recommendations in this chapter encourage management to adopt a more flexible
approach to fire safety, based on the specific characteristics of the sports ground, its
buildings and structures, its layout and its capacity, and on the nature of the sports and
other events that take place there.
The chapter has been reorganised and amended extensively to reflect new fire safety
NEW GUIDANCE
legislation (Section 15.3), the need for management to draw up a fire strategy (Section 15.5)
SUMMARY OF
and a Fire Safety Plan (Section 15.6), the increasing size and sophistication of some sports
grounds (particularly in terms of hospitality areas), the risk of external fire spread (Section
15.19), the need for fire service access (Section 15.25), issues related to signage (Section
15.29), fire strategy in relation to new or refurbished stands (Section 15.30), and the increased
use of fire engineering in new construction.
15.10 Categorisation of medium fire risk
The category of fire risk previously referred to as ‘normal’ is now referred
to as ‘medium’
15.12 Categorisation of mixed risk areas
It is recognised that emergency egress routes often pass through areas having
different levels of fire risk and that this should be factored into the calculation of
emergency egress times.
15.13 Managing fire risk
Pyrotechnics, smoke canisters, flags, banners and netting used for segregation are
added to the list of items offering potential fire risk. The high fire risks of underground
service areas and car parks are also acknowledged.
15.17 Measure for fire resistance, separation, suppression and protection
This section (previously Section 15.11) has been updated and expanded, for example
to include insulation, cladding, fire separation methods, fire and smoke dampers,
concealed voids, fire compartmentation and the placing of ancillary equipment under
or on stand roofs.
15.20 Fire detection, alarm and warning systems
Sections 15.20 – 15.22 (previously Section 15.13) have been updated and expanded
to reflect new guidance and modern practices.
15.27 Evacuation – concourses
To reflect the growing size and sophistication of concourses, this new section offers
guidance on fire loadings, upper tiers, sub-divisions and fire suppression systems.
15.28 Evacuation – disabled spectators
This section (previously Section 15.17) is now to be found at Section 10.15.
Contents
16.0 Communications and control

16.1 Communications plan
Management should draw up a Communications Plan for inclusion within the
Operations Manual.
16.3 Means of communication
New emphasis is placed on inter-personal communications and digital
communications (including social media and the internet). The use of digital pagers
is also acknowledged.
16.6 Control points – functions
Functions newly listed include the recording and logging of all radio communications,
of all decisions made and instructions issued during the event; the monitoring of the
ground’s fire detection and alarm system, and any electronic securing systems or
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
automated exit gate release systems; and the monitoring of social media activity.
16.8 Control point – design
More detailed guidance is provided on layouts, working conditions, security and
access control and power supplies.
16.9 Control point – command structure
More detailed guidance is provided on the need for personnel to adhere to
defined protocols.
16.11 Control point – monitoring spectator numbers
More detailed guidance is provided on the monitoring, communication and recording
of spectator numbers during ingress.
16.17 Telephone communications – mobile
This new section cautions against dependence on mobile telephones in
emergency situations.
16.18 Public address systems – guidance and specifications
This section has been updated and expanded to include provision for spectators
who are deaf or hard of hearing.
16.20 CCTV
Sections 16.20 – 16.26 take into account changing legislation and advances in
technology, with new guidance on resolution levels for the identification of individuals
(Figure 31); on the storage of CCTV images for at least two events (Section 16.24); on
maintenance schedules (Section 16.25 and Figure 32), and on human factors, such as
training, skills and work conditions (Section 16.26). Where appropriate, management
may wish to consider the deployment of stewards wearing personal micro cameras, or
body worn video cameras.
16.28 Signs and ground plans – adopting a strategy
This new section recommends that management draws up a strategy for the whole
ground and its environs, encompassing safety-related and informational signs, ground
plans and maps, and that these all tally exactly with information provided in other
sources, such as tickets, event programmes, websites and social media, in terms of
their wording, intentions and colour coding.
Contents
16.31 Signs – design and inclusion issues

More detailed guidance is provided on aids to wayfinding.
16.35 Digital infrastructure and resilience
This new section emphasises the need for management to have in place plans to
prevent and respond to the failure of its digital infrastructure and to protect against
cyber attacks.
17.0 Mechanical and electrical installations

17.7 Electrical plans and circuit diagrams
This section has been updated and expanded with a checklist.
17.8 Protection of cables
This section has been updated and expanded with reference to digital networks
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
and temporary power cabling.
17.10 Lighting
A minimum lighting level of 20 lux is now recommended for all areas accessible
to spectators during non-daylight hours.
17.11 Emergency lighting
A minimum emergency lighting level of 5 lux is now recommended at one
metre above the floor along all exit routes, and 10 lux for all areas of viewing
accommodation during non-daylight hours.
17.18 Water systems
This new sections recommends action to be taken to reduce the risk of
legionella bacteria.
18.0 Medical and first aid provision

This chapter has been updated and expanded to reflect new terminology and methods,
standards and philosophies amongst medical practitioners and providers. The Medical
and First Aid Risk Assessment is now referred to as the Medical Needs Assessment.
18.2 Medical Co-ordinator
Depending on the findings of the Medical Needs Assessment it is recommended
that a Medical Co-ordinator be appointed. At larger or more complex sports grounds,
the Medical Co-ordinator will lead on operational matters and oversee clinical
standards, whilst the Event Doctor oversees the delivery of medical care.
18.4 Medical Needs Assessment
In addition to physical factors and safety management factors it is recommended that
event specific factors be considered. It is also emphasised that the number of medical
practitioners needed at an event, such as doctors, paramedics, nurses or first aiders,
should differ from the recommended numbers in this chapter only if an alternative
number – for example based on alternative HCP cover, or on patient data – can be
substantiated by the Medical Needs Assessment and is recorded in the Medical Plan.
Contents
18.5 Medical Plan

New guidance is provided on the range, qualifications and experience of medical
personnel likely to be required (including doctors, paramedics, nurses and first aiders),
particularly at larger grounds. New emphasis is placed on the need for members
of the medical team to receive training to familiarise themselves with the ground
layout, on the command structure and lines of responsibility within the team, on
communications, on identification, on recording and procuring procedures, and on
transporting individuals to local medical service providers, including via air ambulance.
18.7 Provision of Event Doctors and/or Event Practitioners
This section updates the qualifications and training required for the post of Event
Doctor (formerly referred to as ‘Crowd Doctor’), and allows for the alternative or
additional provision of ‘Event Practitioners’, depending on the number of spectators
in attendance.
NEW GUIDANCE
18.8 First aid rooms
SUMMARY OF
Sections 18.8 – 18.10 on first aid rooms, on equipment and storage, and on upkeep
and inspections, have all been updated. A checklist of the equipment and supplies
recommended for first aid rooms can be found in the online Annex E, available from
the SGSA website.
18.11 First aiders
Sections 18.11– 18.13 on first aiders’ qualifications and competency, and on numbers
and roles, have been updated. First aiders should be able to recognise and manage
common conditions, be competent in basic life support and in the manual handling
or extrication of patients in a sports ground environment, and should be trained in
the safeguarding of children and adults at risk. It is recognised that the timing of first
aiders’ deployment can be scheduled to reflect the arrival patterns of event staff and
spectators, rather than all being in post before spectators are admitted.
18.14 Ambulance provision
Both this section and Figure 33 (formerly Table 18.1) have been updated to
reflect current practice and terminology, with clarification provided on alternative
arrangements. For example, for anticipated attendances of between 5–10,000 it
might not be necessary for a HCPC paramedic level ambulance to be in attendance,
if alternative provision can be substantiated within the Medical Plan.
18.15 Communications
New recommendations are made concerning the provision of a key point telephone
in the first aid room.
18.17 Inspections and records
This section has been updated and expanded, with greater emphasis on the need to
meet the provisions set out in the Medical Plan and on adhering to current principles
laid down for the reporting and recording of incidents, injuries and illnesses.
18.18 Medical Advisory Group
It is recommended that for large or more complex sports grounds a Medical Advisory
Group be established. Figure 34 sets out its roles and responsibilities.
Contents
19.0 Media provision

It is emphasised that as management is responsible for the safety and security
of all people present at an event, this includes members of the media (although
media providers retain responsibility for the health and safety of their own staff
and subcontractors during an event).
19.2 Pre-event planning and briefing
Management are required to inform media companies of all radio frequencies intended
for use during an event, to avoid interference with ground communication systems.
Pre-event planning and briefing should include proposed arrangements for any
pre-event, mid-event or post-event entertainments.
If appropriate, management should assign one member of the safety team to liaise
NEW GUIDANCE
SUMMARY OF
with media personnel during the event.
19.3 Media installations – design and management
New guidance is provided on pre-event inspections, the use of public address systems
and media screens.
19.4 Camera gantries and platforms, overhead suspended cameras
New guidance is provided on the health and safety issues relating to camera gantries
and platforms, the potential risks associated with overhead cameras and, in 19.5, with
unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), or drones.
19.7 Identification
All media personnel should be issued with event day security passes. Roving media
personnel should be identifiable by colour coded and labelled tabards.
Annexes and Worked Examples

All Annexes and Worked Examples are now available solely via the SGSA website.
A list of these is to be found on page 3.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Glossary
Glossary
GLOSSARY
Active fire protection: those components of Control point: a designated room or area
a fire detection and prevention system, such within the sports ground from which the
as a manually operated fire extinguisher, or safety management structure is controlled
an automatic sprinkler system, that actively and operated. Also known as an ‘event control’
prevent the spread of fire (see also Passive fire ‘match control’ or ‘stadium control’ room.
protection).
Crowd Doctor: see Event Doctor
Barrier: any element of a sports ground,
permanent or temporary, intended to prevent Crowd simulation modelling: also known as
people from falling, and to retain, stop or guide dynamic modelling, a tool using data analysis and
people. Types of barriers used at sports grounds software to investigate how spectators interact
are further defined in Figure 17. with their physical surrounds, and to investigate
and visualise how their movements might be
Channel: a division within a circulation route, affected by their individual or collective decision
stairway or ramp. making, or by their behaviour.
Circulation: the free movement of people within Crush barrier: a barrier which protects spectators
a sports ground. from crushing, positioned in areas of standing
accommodation.
Combustible: able to burn.
Datum: the finished level of the floor, seat row,
Competent: a person shall be regarded as terrace, ramp, landing, pitch line of stairs, or, in the
competent in an identified role where he or she case of barriers behind seats, the seat level.
has sufficient training and experience to meet
the national occupational standards relevant to Demountable structure: a structure, whether in
the tasks within that role. Competency includes situ temporarily or for an extended period of time,
an awareness of the limits of one’s personal usually consisting of lightweight components,
knowledge, skills or experience. that is designed specifically to be erected and
dismantled on many occasions.
Concourse: a circulation area, covered or
uncovered, that provides direct access to and Entry point: any controlled entrance, such as a
from viewing accommodation, via stairways, turnstile, door or gate, through which spectators
ramps, vomitories, or level passageways, and enter a ground and are counted.
serves as a milling area for spectators for the
purposes of refreshment and entertainment, and/ Emergency egress time: a determination which,
or provides access to toilet facilities, and which together with the flow rate and the widths of
may also form part of the ingress and egress emergency exits, is used to calculate the capacity
systems of the ground. of the emergency exit system leading from the
viewing accommodation (Zone 2) to a place of
Contingency plan: a plan prepared by the reasonable safety (which will normally be Zone 3),
management setting out the action to be taken or to a place of safety (for example Zone 5), in the
in response to incidents occurring at the ground event of an emergency.
that might prejudice public safety or disrupt
normal operations.
Contents
Emergency plan: a plan prepared and owned Horizontal imposed load: the load assumed to
by the emergency services for dealing with a be produced by the intended use (usually of a
major incident at the venue or in the vicinity (for barrier).
example, an explosion or large fire). Also known
as an emergency procedure plan, or major Invacuation: a security measure requiring people
incident plan. within a sports ground to move in response to an
external threat.
Event: any event, whether it relates to sport,
entertainment or any other form of gathering, to Key point telephone system: an independent
which the public is admitted. An ‘event’ (or ‘event emergency telephone system located at strategic
GLOSSARY
day’) commences as soon as the first event staff points around the sports ground.
enter the premises and ends only after the last Landing: a level surface at the head, foot,
event staff have departed. or between flights of stairways, or ramps.
Event Doctor: a Registered Medical Practitioner Lateral gangway: channel for the passage of
who holds a current licence to practice and spectators through viewing accommodation
the appropriate professional indemnity, running parallel with terrace steps or seat rows.
who has participated in one of the approved
pre-hospital training and major incident courses, Local authority: as defined by the Safety of
has participated in Major Incident Training, is Sports Grounds Act 1975.
trained to undertake major incident triage and
has taken part in testing the management’s Lockdown: a security measure requiring those
contingency plans. inside the sports ground or area of a ground to
remain confined within it until the threat has
Exit: a doorway or other suitable opening giving lifted.
access towards a place of safety.
Major incident: an event or situation with a range
Exit route: a circulation route that offers a route of serious consequences which requires special
for spectators from Zone 3 to a place of safety. arrangements to be implemented by one or more
emergency responder agency.
Fire resistance: the ability of a component of
a building to resist fire for a stated period of Management: person or persons in overall
time, when subjected to an appropriate test in control of the premises whilst people are present,
accordance with the current relevant British exercising this responsibility either in their own
Standard. right, for example, as the owner, or by delegation
(of statutory duty).
First aider: a person who holds a current
certificate in first aid competency, issued by an Medical Advisory Group (MAG): a group set up
organisation that meets the HSE guidelines on to oversee medical and first aid provision at larger
first aid training. or more complex grounds, to report to the Safety
Advisory Group and consisting of representatives
Flammable: able to burn with a flame. of the management and medical and first aid
Flow rate: the number of persons per metre width providers.
per minute passing through an element of an Medical Co-ordinator: also known as medical
ingress, egress or circulation route. manager, appointed by the management to lead
Grab rail: see hand hold on operational matters.
Handhold: an element designed for a person to Means of escape: means whereby safe routes
hold onto, for example whilst walking up or down are provided for persons to travel from any point
a radial gangway in a building to a place of reasonable safety or a
place of safety.
Handrail: a rail normally grasped by hand for
guidance or support. Method statement: a document that outlines
the construction processes to be followed for
temporary media installations.
Contents
Milling: the act of standing or gathering within an Radial gangway: a channel for the vertical
area such as a concourse. passage of spectators through viewing
accommodation, between terrace steps or
Network plan: a plan which analyses the various seat rows, the design criteria for which may be
routes spectators may follow in order to exit the different from those pertaining to stairways.
Ramp: an inclined surface linking two areas at
Operations Manual: a manual which sets out different elevations.
the way a sports ground operates on a daily
basis. It should include but not be limited to Rate of passage: see flow rate
GLOSSARY
the Stewarding Plan, Medical Plan, planned
preventative maintenance schedule, fire risk Refuge: a place of reasonable safety where
assessment, communications plan, event a disabled person and others who may need
day procedures, contingency plans, capacity assistance may rest, or wait for assistance,
calculations, site plans and details of safety before proceeding via a fire-resisting escape
equipment. route to a place of safety.
Overlay: the temporary installation of products Reservoir area: an open space, which may
(seating, tents, cabins, bridges, generators, etc.) be a concourse, preceding a narrowing of an
required to stage an event. exit route.
(P) factor: the term used for the assessment Resilience a term to describe how effectively
of the physical condition of any area that staff members are able to carry out the
accommodates spectators. management’s safety plans on an event day.
Paramedic: a person who holds a current state Risk assessment: as defined in Section 3.3.d.
registration by the Health Professional Council Robustness: the capability of a structure to
(HPC). withstand some misuse and to tolerate accidental
Passive fire protection: those components of fire damage without catastrophic consequences.
detection and prevention, such as fire resistant (S) factor: the term used for the assessment
walls or compartments, designed to contain or of the safety management of any area that
slow down the spread of a fire. accommodates spectators.
Pitch perimeter barrier: a barrier which separates Safety Advisory Group (SAG): a multi-agency
spectators from the pitch or area of activity. group formed at local level to ensure that a
Pitch perimeter fence: a barrier higher than 1.1m, sports ground remains compliant with the
which separates spectators from the playing area conditions of its safety certificate and with any
or area of activity. other relevant national or international standards;
typically consisting of representatives of the local
Place of reasonable safety: a place within a authority, the ground management, the police, fire
building or structure, such as an exit route or and ambulance services, the building authority
stairway, where, for a length of time – based on and, where appropriate, supporter organisations.
the fire resistance of the structure protecting the
place, or any fire engineering solutions in place – Safety certificate: a certificate issued by the
people will have some protection from the effects local authority under the Safety of Sports
of fire and smoke or other threats, allowing them Grounds Act 1975, the Safety of Sports Grounds
to continue their evacuation to a place of safety. (Northern Ireland) Order 2006 or the Fire Safety
and Safety of Places of Sport Act 1987, which
Place of safety: a place where a person is no contains such terms and conditions as the local
longer in danger from the effects of fire or other authority considers necessary or expedient to
threats. secure reasonable safety at the sports ground
when it is in use for the specified activity
or activities.
Contents
Seat incorporating barrier: a seat whose Terrace: An area of steps providing standing
fixings incorporate a barrier which may be used accommodation for spectators.
as a crush barrier by a spectator standing in the
row behind (also known as a ‘dual purpose’ or Travel distance: the distance that needs to be
‘rail seat’). travelled by a person from any point within a
sports ground to the nearest place of safety,
Side gangway: a channel for the forward or reasonable safety.
passage of spectators between an end row
of seats and a protective barrier at the edge Viewing accommodation: any area of a ground
of a structure. or structure in the ground provided for spectators,
GLOSSARY
either seated or standing, to view the event, also
Sightline: the ability of a spectator to see a referred to as Zone 2.
predetermined point of focus (such as the
nearest touchline or outside lane of a running Viewing slope: a non-stepped, sloping
track) over the top of the head of the spectators area providing standing accommodation
sitting immediately in front. for spectators.
Spectator accommodation: any area of a ground Viewing standard: the quality of view available
or structure in the ground provided for the use to spectators, consisting of three elements: the
of spectators; including all circulation areas, sightlines, the presence of any restrictions to
concourses and the viewing accommodation. viewing, and the distance between the spectator
and the pitch or area of activity.
Spectator gallery: a gallery, usually attached
to a hospitality area, from which spectators can Vomitory: an access route built into the gradient
view the event. of a stand or terrace which directly links viewing
accommodation to concourses, and/or routes for
Sports ground: any place where sports or other ingress, egress or emergency egress.
competitive activities take place in the open air
and where accommodation has been provided Zone 2 travel time: the time taken by a spectator
for spectators, consisting of artificial structures to leave his or her seat or place in the viewing
or of natural structures artificially modified for accommodation (Zone 2) and, under normal
the purpose. conditions, to enter a free flowing exit system, or,
under emergency conditions, to reach a place of
Stadium: a sports ground where a spectator reasonable safety.
will normally watch the event from a single view
point, for example at football and rugby matches, Zone Ex: the external zone (also known as ‘the
in contrast to those where spectators are likely to last mile’) which lies immediately beyond the
be ambulatory, such as at racecourses and golf outer perimeter of the sports ground, consisting
courses. of a network of routes or areas, often leading
to transport hubs, and whose management is
Stairway: that part of a structure which is not considered key to the safe and secure arrival and
a radial gangway but which comprises of at departure of spectators.
least one flight of steps, including the landings
at the head and foot of steps and any landing
in between flights.
Stand: a structure providing viewing

accommodation for spectators.
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Bibliography and further references
Bibliography and
further references
BIBLIOGRAPHY
General
For online details of legislation: www.legislation.gov.uk
For print copies of legislation: www.tsoshop.co.uk
or write to: The Stationery Office (TSO), PO Box 29, Norwich NR3 1GN
For details of SGSA guidance notes and publications: www.sgsa.org.uk
or write to: Sports Grounds Safety Authority, Fleetbank House, 2-6 Salisbury Square,
London EC4Y 8JX
For details of Building Regulations and Approved Documents:
www.gov.uk/housing-local-and-community/building-regulation
www.gov.uk/government/collections/approved-documents
For details of British and European standards: https://shop.bsigroup.com
For details of Health and Safety Executive publications: http://www.hse.gov.uk/pubns
For details of Institute of Structural Engineers publications:

https://www.istructe.org/publications
3.3.d Safety Management – Sports Grounds and Stadia Guide No 4

3.5 Spectator Safety Policy/Event Safety Policy Statement/SGSA Template

3.28 Working together to safeguard children

Department for Education
3.33 Alternative Uses of Sports Grounds – Sports Grounds and Stadia Guide No 5
3.40 Accessible Stadia – Sports Grounds and Stadia Guide No 1 and Supplementary Guidance
4.10 For details of acceptable training alternatives for stewards: www.sgsa.org.uk
9.1 Concourses – Sports Grounds and Stadia Guide No 3

Contents
11.19 Standing Committee on Structural Safety (SCOSS)
12.25 Stadia: The Populous Design and Development Guide
BIBLIOGRAPHY
by Rod Sheard, Ben Vickery and Geraint John, Routledge (2013)
14.4 Temporary Demountable Structures – Guidance on Procurement, Design and Use

Institution of Structural Engineers
14.6 Dynamic Performance Requirements for Permanent Grandstands Subject to Crowd Action
Institution of Structural Engineers
14.8 Codes of Practice for Marquee Hirers

Made Up Textiles Association
15.3 Fire Safety Risk Assessment – Large Places of Assembly

Department for Communities and Local Government
15.7 Fire Risk Assessment. Guidance and a Recommended Methodology

British Standards Institute publication (PAS 79)
Fire Safety Risk Assessment – Large Places of Assembly

Department for Communities and Local Government
Practical Fire Safety Guidance for Places of Entertainment and Assembly

Scottish Government
15.13 Safety of Sports Grounds No 3 – Guide to Control over Concessionaire Facilities

and Other Services at Sports Grounds
London District Surveyors Association
About Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)

Health and Safety Executive
Guidance for the Installation of LPG and LPG Fired Equipment

Nationwide Caterers Association
Professional Information Sheets (Various)

United Kingdom Liquefied Petroleum Gas (UKLPG)
15.19 External fire spread: building separation and boundary distances

Building Research Establishment (BR 187)
16.5 Control Rooms – Sports Grounds and Stadia Guide No 2

CPNI Control Rooms Guidance

Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure
16.20 CCTV Operational Requirements Manual

Home Office Scientific Development Branch publication (No 28/09)
Digital Imaging Procedure

Home Office Scientific Development Branch publication (No 58/07)
Contents
16.24 Storage of Recorded CCTV Images – a guidance document

BIBLIOGRAPHY
16.26 Human Factors in CCTV Control Rooms: a best practice guide
16.29 Safety Signs and Signals: The Health & Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations 1996
Health and Safety Executive (L64)
16.31 Sign Design Guide – A Guide to Inclusive Signage

Sign Design Society & Royal National Institute of Blind People
Accessible Sports Facilities – Design Guidance Note: Audit Check List

Wayfinding and Signage for Sports Facilities
Sport England
17.10 Lighting Guides

Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
17.11 Emergency Lighting Design Guide

Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
17.18 Legionnaires’ disease: the control of legionella bacteria in water systems

(Approved Code of Practice L8)
Legionnaires’ Disease: Technical Guidance (HSG274)
18.5 A Practical Approach to Events Medicine Provision

BMJ Journals: Emergency Medicine Journal
Crowd medical services in the English Football League: remodelling the team
for the 21st century using a realist approach
BMJ Journals: BMJ Open
18.8 Health Technical Memoranda (HTM)

DH Health Buildings Notes (HBN) including:
Clinical and clinical support spaces (HBN 00-03)
Department of Health and Social Care
18.11 Selecting a first-aid training provider: a guide for employers

First Aid Manual (10th edition 2016)

Dorling Kindersley in association with St John Ambulance,
St Andrew’s First Aid and British Red Cross
18.16 NHS Emergency Planning Guidance

Department of Health
19.1 Safety in broadcasting sports events

19.4 Working at Height Guidance

Contents
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Contents
Guide to Safety at Sports Grounds Index
INDEX
Index
Access Banners 15.13.g Children – see also Spectators

emergency vehicles 3.19, 5.9.g, 6.9, 19.3 Children Acts, various 3.28
to pitch or area of activity 10.2.b, 15.26.b Barriers/separating elements
– see also Crush barriers Circulation
Accessibility camera gantries/platforms 19.4 access (emergency vehicles) 6.9
accessible viewing areas 12.1 concourses 9.3.g, Fig 21, 11.17 accessibility 6.8
amenity/easy access seats 12.18 definitions 11.1 combined with standing areas 13.21
concourses 9.3.c exit routes 11.17 design 6.4
disability awareness Fig 4, 4.11 fixings 11.3 egress Ch. 9
emergency egress 10.15 heights 11.5 emergency egress – see emergency
escalators 8.14.c inspection and tests 5.12.c egress/exit/evacuation
Fire Safety Plan 15.6.l loadings 11.2, Figs 14-17, 11.17 escalators 8.14
pre-event activities 3.34 perimeter/fences 10.17, 11.15, 11.16 flow rates 6.6
RADAR locks 4.12.d risk assessment 11.19 gangways 8.2
refuges 10.15.b seated accommodation Fig 18, 11.5, ingress Ch. 7
seated accommodation 12.7, 12.21.i 12.10.f inspections and tests 5.9.b
signs 16.31 seats incorporating barriers 12.20-12.23, overlay 6.13
standing accommodation 13.4 Fig 27 planning 6.1
toilets 13.16.f seats/independent barriers 12.19, Fig 26 stairways/ramps Ch. 8
sightlines 11.6 Zone Ex 6.10
Admission policies – see also Ticketing spectator galleries 11.14 zoning 6.3, Fig 6
7.10, 13.15.c stairways/ramps 8.8, 8.9, Fig 8, 11.5
standing accommodation 13.7, 13.16.h Civil Contingencies Act 2004 3.20
Alcohol tests 11.20-11.26
Sporting Events (Control of Alcohol etc) vomitories 9.8, Fig 12, 11.6 Cladding 5.12, 15.17.j
Act 1985 3.32
stewards 4.7 Boilers 17.15 Closed circuit television (CCTV)
auxiliary power 16.23.j
Ambulance provision 18.14, Fig 33 Briefing/debriefing cameras 16.23
players, athletes 1.4 concourses 9.5.b
Amenity/easy access seats 12.18 stewards 4.16, 4.17 crowd monitoring 7.8.c, 13.17
data storage 16.24
Appropriate density 2.9, 2.10 Business continuity management 3.3.c.iv general 16.3, 16.20
human factors 16.26
Area of activity/pitch 15.26.b CCTV – see Closed circuit television image quality 16.22, 16.23, Fig 31
light levels 9.5.b, 16.22.g, 17.11.g
Asbestos 5.8 Cables 17.8, 19.3 maintenance 16.25, Fig 32
needs assessment 16.21
Auxiliary power Capacity calculations recording 16.23.b, 16.24, 16.35
closed circuit television (CCTV) 16.23.j appropriate density 2.9 resolution levels Fig 31
communications 16.34 concourses 9.4 risk assessment 16.22
control room 16.8.d emergency egress 2.3.d operators 4.21, 16.26
inspections/tests Fig 5 entry capacity 2.3.a, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6
public address system 15.20.g exits 2.3.c, 10.18 Colour blindness (Colour vision
provision of 17.12 final capacity 2.3.e, 2.11 deficiency) 3.4, 3.30.f, 10.8.c, 15.24.f,
smoke control 17.17 holding 2.3.b, 2.6-2.10 15.29, 16.27, 16.30, 16.31
seated accommodation 2.6
Available viewing area seats incorporating barriers 12.22 Commercial/non-sporting activities
calculation of 2.7, 2.8, 13.21 standing accommodation 2.7-2.10 3.33, 9.6
Contents
INDEX
Communications Control point Demountable structures
auxiliary power 16.34 access control 16.8.c, 16.9.a anchors/kentledges 14.6.d
closed circuit television (CCTV) 16.3, acoustics 16.8.a damage 14.6.a
16.20-16.26 CCTV 16.20-16.26 definition 14.1
Communications Plan 16.1 command structure 16.9 design checks 14.5
control point 16.5-16.13 design 16.8 dynamic loads 5.5, 14.6.b, 14.9.c
digital 16.3, 16.35 display/deployment boards 16.8.a, 16.10 flooring 14.6.g
inter-personal 16.3, 16.4 documentation 16.12 foundations 14.6.c
lines of 16.2 electronic securing systems 16.6.j hospitality units 14.7
means of 16.3 fire detection/alarm systems 16.6.i inspections 14.5
medical personnel 18.15 functions 16.6 management 14.9
PA system 16.3, 16.18-16.19 general 16.5 media installations 19.3.c
radio 16.3, 16.6 location 16.7 performance 14.6
scoreboards, screens 16.3, 16.27 monitoring spectator numbers 16.11 protection 14.6.f
signs/signposting 16.28-16.32 PA system 16.6, 16.18-16.19 regulations 14.3
social media 16.6.k power supply 16.8.d responsibility for safety 14.2
telephones 16.3, 16.15-16.17 radio communications 16.9.b, 16.14 standards 14.4
tickets/programmes 3.30, 7.9, 16.33 secondary provision 16.13 stewarding 14.9.a
security 16.8.c telescopic stands 14.4
Concourses stewarding 4.22 tents/marquees 14.8
barriers 9.3.g, Fig 14, Fig 21 storage 16.8.a wind 14.6.e, 14.9.b
CCTV 9.5.b, 9.6 telephone communications 16.15-16.18
circulation 9.1 working conditions 16.8.b, 16.26 Deviating from Guide – see List of
crowd density 9.4, 9.6, Fig 10, Fig 11 Deviations
design 9.3, 9.4 Council of Europe 3.8.b
emergency egress 15.27 Digital technology 1.9, Fig 3, Fig 5, 16.3,
fire safety 9.7, 15.27 Counter terrorism 1.9, 3.18, Fig 4, 4.11 16.14, 16.35, 17.8
flooring 9.3.f
lighting 9.3.e Counting spectators Disabled spectators – see Accessibility/
litter/waste 9.5.d computerised 7.3, 16.11 Wheelchair users
management 9.5 control room monitoring 16.11
monitors/screens 9.5.c, 9.6.h ingress 7.1, 7.2, 16.6 Disclosure and Barring Service 3.28,
pyrotechnics 9.5.h standing accommodation 13.16, 13.24.a 18.7.e, 18.11
refreshments 9.6
safety (including fire) 9.2, 9.3.d Cover 12.7, 12.25.h, 13.15, 13.25.d Drones (unmanned aerial vehicles) 19.5
safety stations 9.5.e
segregation 6.12, 9.3.h Crowd densities 1.9, 2.9, 4.6.d, 6.6, 9.4, Egress – see Emergency Egress, Exit
size/capacity 9.4 Fig 10, Fig 11, 13.24.d
smoking 9.5.f, 9.5.g Electrical – see Mechanical and
stewarding 9.5.a Crowd disorder and anti-social behaviour Electrical Installations
walls 9.3.g, Fig 14, Fig 21 3.27, 3.28.j, 13.24.j, 16.6, 16.20, 16.22
Emergency egress/exit/evacuation
Construction (Design and Management) Crowd Doctor – see Event Doctor capacity calculation of emergency exit
Regulations 2015 5.4, 14.3 routes 1.9, 2.3.d, 2.11, 2.13
Crowd simulation modelling 1.9, 6.6, 6.7, concourses 9.7, 15.27
Contingency plans 9.4, 9.6, 10.10 definition of 10.2
contract/agency stewards 4.15.e disabled spectators 10.15, 15.28
control room 16.13 Crush barriers emergency egress times
digital infrastructure 16.35 capacity calculations 2.8 10.4.d, 10.12, Fig 13, 15.8 -15.12
emergency egress 10.14.c configuration 11.7, 11.9, 11.10, Fig 19 evacuation lifts 10.15.d
escalators 8.14 construction/strengthening 11.12 lifts 8.13.c, 10.15.d, 10.15.e, 17.13
exercises 3.21 design 11.7 place of reasonable safety 15.26
fire safety 15.6.m, 15.25 failure 11.26 place of safety 15.26
general 1.3, 3.15, 3.16, Fig 3, 16.12.a height/positioning of 11.11, Fig 20 routes, design and management 10.13,
headings 3.16, Fig 3 holding capacity 11.13 10.14, 15.5
ingress 7.3 loadings Fig 15, 11.8 routes, fire resistance 15.17
overcrowding 7.11 risk assessment 2.8.g stairways 10.15.c
power/software failure 16.11, 16.34 standing accommodation 13.8 use of activity area (Zone 1) 10.16
refuges 10.15.b tests 11.20-11.26
staffing 17.4 viewing slopes 13.19
standing accommodation 13.24.b
Contents
INDEX
Emergency plan (major incident plan) Final capacity 2.3.e, 2.11, Figs 1, 2 Fire Safety and Safety of Places of Sport
3.20, 15.25, 16.12.b, 18.7.i Act 1987 1.1, 15.3
Fire safety
Emergency services/responders 3.15, ancillary activities 15.13.n Fire Safety Regulations
3.16, 3.20, 3.21 cladding 15.17.j (Northern Ireland) 2010 3.39, 15.3
concessionary outlets/catering 15.13.k,
Emergency vehicles 3.19, 6.9 15.17.i, 15.27.b, Fire Safety (Scotland) Regulations
concourses 9.2, 9.3.d, 9.7, 15.27 2006 3.39, 15.3
Entry capacity 2.3, 2.11, 7.4-7.6, 7.12, construction sites 5.6
Fig 7 contingency plans Fig 3 Fire (Scotland) Act 3.39, 15.3
disabled spectators 6.8
Entry points/turnstiles escalators 8.14 First aid – see Medical and First Aid
computerised monitoring 7.3 fire compartmentation 15.17.n
counting 7.1, 7.2 fire detection/warning/alarm systems Flags 5.13.g
design/management 7.8, 7.9 15.18, 15.20 - 15.22, 16.6.i
Equalities 3.40 fire engineering 1.9, 15.1, 15.5 Flooring 9.3.f, 9.5.d, 14.6.g
general 3.30.h fire extinguishing 15.23
numbers 7.1, 7.7 fire fighting 15.24 Flow rates (rates of passage)
rate of entry 7.6 fire protection 15.17 calculations 10.10
searching/screening 7.12, Fig 7 fire resistance 15.17 circulation routes 6.6
reversible 10.19.g Fire Safety Plan 15.4, 15.5, 15.6 control measures 10.6
fire separation 15.17 exit routes 10.4.b, 10.9
Equality Act 2010 1.4, 3.40 fire service access 15.25
fire spread 15.19 Fuel supplies 5.13.l
Escalators 8.14, 8.15, 17.13 fire strategy 15.5, 15.30
fire suppression 15.17, 15.18 Gangways
Evacuation – see Emergency egress flags/banners/netting 15.13.g definition of 8.2
flares/fireworks 15.13.c lateral, in seated accommodation 12.9
Event/Event Day fuel/power supply 15.13.l lateral, in standing accommodation 13.6
definition 1.2 hazardous materials 15.13.m management 8.7, 13.24.c
inspections 5.10 high-risk (fire) areas 5.15.f, 10.12, 14.8, radial, design 8.6
15.8, 15.11, 15.12, 15.13.h, 15.13.i, radial, in seated accommodation 12.10,
Event Doctor 18.7, 18.8 15.20.b, 15.23, 15.27, 16.7, 17.15, 12.18.c
Fig 13 radial, in standing accommodation 13.7,
Event management plan 3.36 ignition, sources 15.13.a 13.25.c
inspections/tests Fig 5 seated accommodation, general 12.8,
Event programme 16.33 insulation 15.17.j 12.25.f
legislation 1.1, 3.39, 15.3 standing accommodation, general 13.5,
Event Safety Policy – see Spectator lifts 8.14 13.16.i
Safety Policy litter/waste 15.13.e
low risk (fire) areas 9.3.d, 10.12, 10.18, Gas installations 17.14
Exceptional egress – see Egress 15.8, 15.9, 15.12, 15.27, Fig 13
medium risk (fire) areas 15.8, 15.10, Glazing 15.17.a, 16.8.a
Exercises 3.21 15.12, 15.20, 15.27, Fig 13
minimising risk 15.13 Goings/treads – see also Risers
Exits – see also Emergency place of reasonable safety 15.26 radial gangways 8.6, 12.10, 13.7
egress/exit/evacuation place of safety 15.26 stairways 8.3, 8.4
capacity calculations 2.3.c pyrotechnics 15.13.c terraces 13.9, 13.23, Fig 29
discounting exit route 10.18 restriction of fire growth 15.16
doors/gates 10.19 risk assessment 6.8, 15.7-15.12, 15.14, Ground plans 2.1, 4.8.p, 5.15, 16.3, 16.12,
egress times and routes Fig 13 15.30, Fig 30 16.28
electronic securing systems 10.20, 16.6.j risk, levels of 15.8-15.12
exit routes, barriers 11.17 roofs 15.17.f, 15.17.h, 15.17.o Ground regulations 3.23, 3.28, 4.6, 4.8.f,
exit routes, design and management signage 15.29 4.15, 7.9.g
10.1-10.8, Fig 13, 10.9 smoke control 17.17
normal egress time 10.4.c, 10.11, Fig 13 smoking 15.13.b Handrails 8.8, 8.10, Fig 8
number of exits 10.8.d staff awareness/training 15.15
reservoir areas 10.7 stewards/training 4.12, Fig 4 Headroom 6.4.d, 8.4.e, 10.4.e
signposting 10.8.g upholstered seating/cushions/
furnishings 15.13.f Health and Safety 1.1, 3.5, 3.38, 5.4,
Exit capacity 2.3.c, 2.11 underground service areas 15.13.j 14.3, 16.8.b
voids 5.9.d, 15.11.c, 15.13.d, 15.17.a,
15.17.m
Contents
INDEX
Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974 Lifts Statement of Intent 3.24
1.1, 3.38, 19.4 evacuation 8.13, 10.15.d, 17.13 Stewarding Plan 3.12, 4.12
fire fighting 10.15.e test events 3.35
Health and Safety Executive 3.3.d, 5.6, passenger 8.13, 17.13 ticketing 3.30
5.8, 17.18, 19.4 training and exercises 3.21
Lighting visiting spectators 3.25
Health and Safety (Safety Signs and concourses 9.3.d
Signals) Regulations 1996 10.8.g emergency lighting 17.11 Marquees 14.8
floodlighting Fig 3, 5.1, 12.5, 13.23.b,
Holding capacity 2.3.b, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.10, 14.1 Materials
2.11, 11.13 lighting levels 17.10 hazardous materials 15.13.m
standing accommodation 13.23.d inspection and tests 5.9.d, 5.10.b
Hospitality 2.12, 3.32.b, 9.1, Fig 11, 14.7
List of Deviations 1.8, 5.2 Mechanical and electrical installations
Hostile vehicle mitigation (HVM) 3.19 air-conditioning 17.17
Lockdown 1.9 anti-vandalism 17.5
Housekeeping 5.3, 12.25.c auxiliary power 17.12, 17.17
LPG installations 17.14 boilers/heating 17.15
Identification cables 17.8
Event Doctor 18.7.j Maintenance circuit diagram 17.7
media personnel 19.8 CCTV systems 16.25, Fig 32 electrical installations/plans 17.6, 17.7
Safety Officer 3.8.e (P) factor 5.2 emergency lighting 17.11
stewards 4.14 (S) factor 17.2 escalators 17.13
Structures, installations and components evacuation lifts 17.13
Ingress 5.2, 5.8 floodlighting 17.9
crowd buildup 7.11 gas/LPG installations 17.14
information 7.9 Major incident plan 18.16 inspections/tests 5.12.d, 17.3
monitoring 7.3 lifts 17.13
planning 7.1 Management responsibilities lighting 17.10
rate of entry 7.5-7.7 agreement with police 3.23, 3.24 lightning protection 17.9
searching/security screening 7.12. Fig 7 alcohol, sale of 3.32 maintenance 17.2
turnstiles/entry points 7.7, 7.8 business continuity 3.3.c oil storage/supply 17.16
commercial/non-sporting activities 3.33 smoke control systems 17.17
Inspections/tests communications 16.1 staffing 17.4
annual 5.12 contingency plans 3.15, 3.16, Fig 3 ventilation systems 17.17
barriers 5.12.c, 11.19-11.26 counter terrorism plan 3.3.c, 3.18 water systems 5.12.e, 17.18
components 5.9.e, 14.5.d crowd disorder/anti-social behaviour
demountable structures 14.5 3.27 Media
event (pre, during, post) 5.9, 5.10, 5.11 emergency/major incident plan 3.20 briefing 19.2
legionella 5.12.e event management plan 3.36 camera gantries/platforms 19.4
materials 5.9.d health and safety at work 3.38 cameras, overhead 19.5
mechanical and electrical 5.12.d, 17.3 legislation 3.3.a, 3.38, 3.39 inspections 19.3
media installations 19.3 maintenance 5.2 installations 3.33.b, 19.3
medical and first aid provision 18.17 media provision 19.1 management responsibility 19.1
(P) factors 5.9 medical and first aid 18.1 Media Plan 19.2.d
public address system 16.18.g monitoring and records 3.3.e personnel 12.5.i, 19.7
records keeping 5.8 Operations Manual 3.3 personnel identification 19.8
(S) factors 5.9 planning 3.3.c pre-event planning 19.2
structures 5.8-5.13, Fig 5 policing 3.23, 3.24 restricted viewing 19.2
pre-event activities 3.34 risk assessment 19.2
Insulation 15.17.j record keeping 3.14 screens 9.5.c, 16.27, 19.3.e
refreshments, sale of 3.31 temporary installations 19.3
Invacuation 1.9, 10.2.c risk assessment 3.3.d unmanned aerial vehicles (drones) 19.5
safeguarding 3.28
Lateral gangways – see Gangways safety 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 Medical and first aid
safety audit 3.22 ambulance provision 18.14, Fig 33
Legislation 3.3 safety management structure 3.6 communications 18.15
Safety Officer 3.7-3.9 emergency plan 18.16
Level standing 13.20 security overlay 3.19 Event Doctor 18.7, 18.8
segregation 3.26 Event Practitioner 18.7
Licensing Act 2003 3.3, 3.32 Spectator Safety/Event Safety Policy 3.5 first aid room 18.8, 18.10
staffing 3.3.b, 3.10, 3.11 first aiders 18.7, 18.11-18.13
310 Contents
INDEX
identification 18.7.j (P) factors Record keeping
inspections and records 18.17 general 2.3-2.5, Annex A barrier tests 11.21
major incident/emergency plan 18.16 inspections and tests 5.9 event/incidents 3.3.e, 3.14, 4.16.b, 16.6.h
major incident training 18.7 maintenance 5.2 inspections/tests 5.8.e, 5.9, 5.11.c, 17.3
management responsibility 18.1 seated accommodation 2.6, 12.24 management responsibility 3.14
Medical Advisory Group 18.18, Fig 34 spectator galleries 13.22 medical/first aid provision 18.17
Medical Co-ordinator 18.2, 18.8 standing accommodation 2.7, 2.9, 13.3, (P) & (S) factors 2.5, 4.19
medical equipment 18.9 13.17, 13.21, 13.23 spectator numbers 7.3
Medical Plan 18.2, 18.5-18.7, 18.13 structures/maintenance 5.2 stewarding 4.13, 4.18
medical needs assessment 18.2-18.4 Zone Ex 6.10 stewards briefing 4.16
players/athletes/event officials 18.7.k stewards, contract or agency 4.15
storage, medical equipment 18.9 Party Wall Act 1996 11.18 structural inspections and tests 5.14
National Counter Terrorism Security Perimeter barriers 10.17, 11.15, 11.16, Refreshments
Office (NaCTSO) 3.18, 5.9 12.5 fire risk 15.13.k
general 9.3.c, 13.16.f
National Cyber Security Centre 16.35 Persistent standing Fig 3, 11.5, 12.1, kiosks 5.9.e, 7.8.g, 9.5.d, 9.7
12.6, 12.19, 12.20, 12.25.e sale of 3.31
National Occupational Standards 4,10,
Fig 4 Pipelines Safety Regulations 1996 17.14 Refuges 10.15.b
National Vocational Qualifications 3.8.b Pitch – see Area of activity Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety)
Order 2005 3.39, 15.3
Netting 15.13.g Place of reasonable safety 15.26
Reservoir areas 10.7
New construction Place of safety 2.3.d, 15.26,
circulation route design 6.4 Restricted views 2.8, 12.5, 12.6, 13.13,
concourse capacities 9.4 Police and policing 13.14, 13.24.e, 19.2
crush barriers 13.8 control point 16.5, 16.9-16.11, 16.14,
emergency egress/evacuation 10.12, 16.15, 16.18, 16.19, 16.27 Risers – see also Goings
15.27 general 3.23 radial gangways 12.10
exit routes 10.5 Statement of Intent 3.24 seating rows Fig 22, Fig 25, 12.22.e,
fire safety risk assessment 15.7 visiting spectators 3.25, 3.26 stairways 8.3-8.6, 8.10???
fire spread 15.19 terraces 11.11, 13.10, 13.23, Fig 29
fire strategy 15.30 Pre-event activities 3.34 wheelchair ‘super risers’ 12.4, Fig 24
flow rates 6.6
general 1.7 Private Security Industry Act 2001 4.21
handrails 8.10 Risk assessment
maintenance 5.2 Public address system 3.34, 6.1, 15.20.g, barriers 11.19
media installations 19.3 16.6, 16.8.a, 16.18, 16.19, 19.3.d CCTV 16.21, 16.22
ramps 8.16 concourses 9.5.b, 9.5.c
restricted viewing 12.6, 13.14 Pyrotechnics 1.4, 3.33.d, 9.5.h, 15.13.c crush barriers 2.8.g, 2.8.h
seated accommodation 12.11-12.13 emergency lighting 17.11
stairways 8.3, 8.4 Radial gangways – see Gangways event specific 3.11, 4.12.c
standing accommodation 11.8.a, 11.8.b, fire safety 3.39, 15.14, 15.30
11.9, 11.11, 13.8 Radio communications 16.3, 16.6.g, general 3.3.d, 3.22
terrace steps 13.10 16.9, 16.14, 19.2 health and safety 3.38.b
zoning 6.4, Fig 6 media provision 19.2, 19.4.i
Ramps pre-event activities 3.34
Oil storage/supply 17.16 accessibility 6.8, 10.15.g staffing 3.11
barriers 8.9 structural appraisal 5.13
Operations Manual 2.5, 3.4, 3.21, 6.10, emergency egress 10.15.g
9.5, 13.15.c, 16.1, 17.2 gradients 8.16 Roofing – see Cover
handrails 8.10
Overcrowding headroom 6.4, 8.4 Run on/run off space 8.15
concourses 9.6
general 7.11 Rates of entry – see Entry capacity
Overlay 3.33.a, 6.13 Rates of passage – see Flow rates
Contents
INDEX
(S) factors (P) factors 12.24 Social media 16.3.k, 16.4, 16.6.k, 16.28
general 2.4, 2.5, 3.8.h, 3.22, 3.41, restricted viewing 12.5, 12.6
Annex B rows, numbers of seats in 12.10.i, 12.15 Spectator galleries Fig 16, 11.14, 13.22
ingress 7.1 (S) factor 12.25
inspections and tests 5.9 seat depths 12.12.c, Fig 25 Spectator Safety Policy 3.5
maintenance 17.2 seat design 12.16
partial cover 13.15 seat dimensions 12.11-12.14, Fig 25 Spectators
restricted viewing 12.6 seat/row identification 12.25.b adults at risk 3.28, 13.24.h, 15.6.l
seated accommodation 2.6, 12.9.a, seat rows, depths 12.12, Fig 25 blind/partially sighted 8.3, 8.13,10.15a
12.25 seat heights 12.12.b, Fig 25 children 3.28, 3.30, 4.12.d, 13.24.h,
spectator galleries 13.22 seats incorporating barriers 12.20-12.23, 15.6.l
standing accommodation 2.9, 13.3, Fig 27 counting on entry 7.1, 7.2
13.17, 13.21, 13.24 seat widths 12.12a, Fig 25 deaf/hard of hearing 10.15.a, 15.22,
stewarding 4.19 seats with independent barriers 12.19, 16.18.h, 16.27, 16.31
Zone Ex 6.10 Fig 26 ejection 3.27
sightlines 12.3, 12.4, Figs 22-24 movement, rhythmic 5.5.b, 14.9c
Safeguarding 3.28, 3.30.d, Fig 4 useful seat depths 12.14, Fig 25 safeguarding 3.28
viewing standards 12.2 searching/screening 7.12, Fig 7
Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act wheelchair user spaces 12.17 segregation 3.26, 9.3.h, 12.25.i, 13.18
2006 3.28 standing in seated areas Fig 23
Security – see also Counter Terrorism stewarding 4.6
Safety Advisory Group 3.35, 18.18 1.3, 3.1, 3.17-3.19, 7.1, 7.12, Fig 7 visiting 3.25, 3.26
Safety audit 3.3.e, 3.22 Security personnel 4.21 Staffing 3.3.b, 3.10, 3.11, 3.28.h, 4.3
Safety certification 1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.3.f, Segregation -see spectators Stairways
3.4, 3.19, 3.35, 4.12, 4.21, 5.12, 9.7, barriers 8.8, 8.9, Fig 8
14.5.b, 16.12.c, 19.2 Sightlines channels 8.3.i, 8.4, 8.9, 8.11, Fig 8, Fig 9
seated accommodation 12.3, 12.4, controlling flow at head of 8.11, Fig 9
Safety management structure/chain Fig 22, Fig 23, 12.24.c definition 8.2
of command 3.6 standing accommodation 13.12, Fig 28, design 8.3
13.23.c dimensions 8.4
Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975 wheelchair users 12.4, Fig 24 discharge from 8.12
1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 15.3 emergency routes 10.13, 10.15.c
Signs flights 8.5
Safety of Sports Grounds (Northern commercial signs/hoardings 16.29.c handrails 8.8, 8.10, Fig 8
Ireland) Order 2006 1.1 concourses 9.3.b run on/run off space 8.15
design 16.30
Safety Officer emergency exit signs 16.30 Standing accommodation – see also
ambulance provision 18.14 entry signs 16.30 Crush barriers
control room 16.9 exit routes 10.8.g, 16.30 adults at risk 13.24.h
debriefing 4.17 fire safety 15.29 appropriate density 2.9, 2.10
deputy 3.9 forms/categories 16.29 available viewing area 2.7
general 3.7, 3.8, inclusion issues 16.31 barriers 13.16.e
stewarding 4.6 information signs 16.3, 16.29.b capacity calculation 2.7-2.10, Fig 2
provision and maintenance 16.32 children 13.24.h
Scotland, The Fire (Scotland) Act 2005 safety signs 16.29 circulation areas 13.21
15.3 standing accommodation 13.24.i condition of 13.3
strategy 16.28 conversion to seating 13.25, Fig 29
Screens/scoreboards 9.5.c, 16.27, 19.3.e cover, provision of 13.15
Slip hazards/resistance crowd density 2.9, Fig 11, 13.21, 13.24.d
Seated accommodation general 5.9.b, 6.4.b, 8.3.f, 8.16.b, 9.3.f, design 13.2
amenity/easy access seats 12.18 9.5.d division of 13.16, 13.17
barriers Fig 17, Fig 18, 12.19 seated accommodation 12.7.e, 12.8.c gangways 13.5-13.7, 13.16.i, 13.24.c,
capacity calculation 2.6, Fig 1 standing accommodation 13.5.c 13.25.c
clearways 12.13, Fig 25 gradient Fig 15, 11.8.a, 11.13, 13.9.b,
conversion from standing 13.25, Fig 29 Smoking 13.19,
cover, provision of 12.8, 12.25.h, concourses 9.5.f, 9.5.g holding capacity 2.7, 2.10
gangways 12.8-12.10 fire risk 15.13.b level standing 13.20
holding capacity 2.6 stewards 4.7.d lighting 13.23.d
migration 12.25.g, 12.25.h migration 13.24.e, 13.24.f
Contents
INDEX
monitoring numbers 13.16 Telephones Vomitories
(P) factor 13.3, 13.17, 13.21, 13.23 external 16.16 barriers 9.8, Fig 12
restricted view 13.13, 13.14, 13.24.g internal 16.15 circulation 9.1
(S) factor 13.3, 13.21, 13.24 key point 16.15.e control measures 9.10, Fig 12
segregation 13.18 mobile 4.7, 16.3, 16.17 design/management 9.8, Fig 12
sightlines 13.12, Fig 28, 13.23.c management 12.25.f
spectator galleries 13.22 Temporary structures – see also widths 9.9
stewarding 13.15.a, 13.16.c, 13.16.i, demountable
13.18, 13.21.e, 13.24.b, 13.24.d fire safety 15.13.n Waste/litter management 3.31, 5.10.a,
terrace steps 13.9, 13.10 media installations 19.2, 19.3.c 5.11.b, 9.5.d, 15.13.e
viewing slopes Fig 15, 13.19
viewing standards 13.3, 13.11 Tents 14.8 Water systems
wheelchair user spaces 13.4, 13.25.e Legionella control/ testing 5.12.e, 17.18
Test events 3.35
Statement of intent 3.24 Wheelchair users
Ticketing capacity calculations 2.8.i, 2.10
Stewarding admission policies 7.10 circulation routes 6.8, 7.8.e
appointment 4.4 cash sales 7.10.a cover 12.7.b
benefits 4.5 covered/uncovered seats 12.7.d emergency egress 9.3.c, 10.15
briefing/de-briefing 4.16 electronic/card systems 7.5, 7.6, 7.9.e, lifts 8.13, 10.15.d
check list 4.9 7.10.g ramps 8.16.b, 10.15.g,
code of conduct 4.7 information/design 7.9, 7.10.f, 16.33 refreshment counter design 3.31
concourses 9.5.a seated accommodation 12.25 segregation 3.26
contract/agency 4.15 strategy 3.30 sightlines 12,4, Fig 24
definition 4.3 restricted views 3.30.g, 12.5 toilets 13.16.f
demountable structures 14.9.a (S) factor 12.25 wheelchair user spaces 12.4, Fig 24,
duties/responsibilities 4.2, 4.6, 4.15.a ticket sales 7.10 12.17, 12.21.i, 13.4, 13.25.e
entry points 7.1
identification of 4.14 Toilets 3.26, 3.28, 9.3.c, 13.16.f Wind 5.5.a, 14.6.e, 14.9
numbers 4.12
record keeping 4.18 Traffic plan 3.36, 10.8.e, 19.3.a Worked Examples 2.1, 2.4, 2.9
(S) factor 4.19
safety handbook 4.8 Training Zone Ex 1.9, 6.10, 6.11, Fig 6
seated accommodation 12.25.d exercises 3.21
specialist stewards 4.12.d fire safety 15.15 Zone 2 travel time 10.11, Fig 13
standing accommodation 13.21.e, inter-personal communications 16.4
13.24.b safety audit 3.22.g
status 4.5 Safety Officer 3.8.b
Stewarding Plan 3.12, 4.12 stewards 3.13, 4.10, 4.11
supervisors 4.11, 4.13.a
training/exercises 3.13, 4.10, Fig 4, Turnstiles – see entry points
4.15.b, 4.18
visiting stewards 4.20, 4.21 Unreserved seats 2.3, 3.30.a, 7.10.d
work environment 4.5
Vandalism 5.7, 17.5
Structures
appraisals 5.13 Viewing slopes Fig 15, 11,7, 11.8, 11.9,
dynamics 5.5 13.19
general 5.4
inspections/tests/records 5.8-5.13 Violent Crime Reduction Act 2006 4.21
maintenance/(P) factor 5.2
plans and specifications 5.15 Voids 5.9.d, 5.11.c, 15.13.d, 15.17.a,
record keeping 5.14 15.17.m
standing accommodation 13.23.b
Supporters – see also spectators

segregation 3.26, 9.3.d
visiting 3.25
Contents
Fleetbank House
2-6 Salisbury Square
London EC4Y 8JX
020 7930 6693

www.sgsa.org.uk
info@sgsa.org.uk
1916458307.eps NBW=100 B=85
www.sgsa.org.uk

Green Guide 6th Edition (SM)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Green Guide 6th Edition (SM)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guide to Safety

Prepared exclusively for SAERA MUSHTAQ saera.mushtaq@showsec.co.uk Transaction: SGSA-00004017

Prepared exclusively for SAERA MUSHTAQ saera.mushtaq@showsec.co.uk Transaction: SGSA-00004017

Sixth edition: first published 2018

Sports Grounds Safety Authority

020 7930 6693

Editorial working group:

Editor: Simon Inglis

Design: Thomas & Trotman Design

Prepared exclusively for SAERA MUSHTAQ saera.mushtaq@showsec.co.uk Transaction: SGSA-00004017 2

Prepared exclusively for SAERA MUSHTAQ saera.mushtaq@showsec.co.uk Transaction: SGSA-00004017 3

2.0 Calculating the safe capacity of a sports ground 27

3.0 Management – responsibility and planning for safety 37

3.14 Keeping records for each event 46

4.0 Management – stewarding 63

4.13 Stewarding Plan – balancing experience and inexperience 70

5.0 Management – structures, installations and components 75

6.0 Circulation – general 85

7.0 Circulation – ingress 95

8.0 Circulation – vertical 103

9.0 Circulation – concourses and vomitories 113

10.0 Circulation – egress 127

11.0 Barriers and separating elements 143

11.20 Barrier tests – personnel and equipment 158

12.0 Spectator accommodation – seating 161

13.0 Spectator accommodation – standing 185

13.8 Crush barriers 189

14.0 Spectator accommodation – demountable structures 203

15.0 Fire safety 209

15.12 Categorisation of mixed risk areas 216

16.0 Communications and control 231

16.22 CCTV – risk assessment 245

17.0 Mechanical and electrical installations 257

18.0 Medical and first aid provision 265

18.8 First aid room 271

19.0 Media provision 281

Ken Scott FRICS

1.0 How to use this Guide

1.3 Objectives – spectator numbers, safety, security and service

As such, when considering or implementing any of the safety related recommendations in

They should be committed to the creation of a welcoming environment, and to understand

1.4 Management responsibility

At the same time it is recognised that representatives of management cannot be reasonably

1.5 Reasonable aims and flexibility

b. the number of spectators attending

c. the timing of the event (for example daytime/evening, summer/winter)

g. the prevailing weather conditions.

1.6 Achieving a balance

1.7 New construction

Although it is also recommended that, wherever possible, the refurbishment of existing

1.8 Deviating from the Guide

However, an accumulation of deviations which result in the application of lower standards

1.9 Revisions to the Guide

The following areas of new guidance are, however, of particular importance.

2.0 Calculating the safe

2.1 The importance of calculating a safe capacity

This assessment is the most important step towards the achievement

2.2 Applying the capacity calculation

2.3 Factors to be considered

a. The entry capacity

b. The holding capacity

(P) and (S) factors are explained in Section 2.4.

c. The exit capacity

holding capacity = the number of usable seats

appropriate density = (P) or (S) factor (whichever is lower)

STEP 2 4.7 persons per sq m o r whatever maximum density is determined